JP2024032902A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of enhancing interest in a game.SOLUTION: In a jackpot type "time-shortening A" of a first special pattern and "latent probability variation B", and an effective pattern "A" of respective probability variable areas 73, 74 in a jackpot type "time-shortening C" of a second pattern, a right-side probability variable area 73 is set to be effective and a left-side probability variable area 74 is set to be ineffective in a second round. In the effective pattern "A", the left-side probability variable area 74 is set to be effective in a fifth round and the right-side probability variable area 73 is set to be ineffective. In the effective pattern "A", both the probability variable areas 73, 74 are set to be ineffective in the other rounds (namely, a first round, a third round, a fourth round, a sixth round, a seventh round, and thereafter).SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 12

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko machines.

Conventionally, in game machines such as pachinko machines, game media such as game balls are fired toward a game area provided on a game board, and the game balls are launched into one of a plurality of ball entrances provided in the game area. A lottery is held based on the entry of balls, and if the player wins an advantageous state such as a hit in the lottery, the variable ball entry means, which is normally closed, is opened and the player receives a predetermined gaming value. (For example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2017-148264

However, with the gaming machine described above, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The present invention has been made in view of the circumstances exemplified above, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of gaming.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 includes a firing means for firing a game ball, a ball entering means into which the game ball launched by the firing means can enter, and a game machine that allows the game ball to enter the ball entering means. By using an information acquisition means that acquires predetermined information due to the ball entering the ball, a determination means that determines the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means, and a determination result of the determination means, A game state changing means for changing a game state; a notification means for executing state suggestion notification to suggest the game state to a player when the game state is changed by the game state changing means; and a game ball entering the game state. By using a variable ball entry means that can change between a first state in which it is difficult or impossible for a game ball to enter and a second state in which a game ball can enter, and a determination result by the determination means, the variable ball entry means is an advantageous state means for changing the advantageous state from the first state to the second state, and a unit game for changing the variable ball entry means from the first state to the second state in the first advantageous state. a unit game execution means that is executed a plurality of times, and in the advantageous state of 1, after the execution of the unit game, the variable ball entry means is changed from the second state to the first state, and then changed to the second state again. A standby game execution means for executing a standby game up to a point, a special area through which game balls flowing into the variable ball entry means can pass, and a special area switching means for switching whether or not to enable the special area. , the game state changing means is configured to generate a second advantageous state different from the advantageous state caused by the advantageous state means when a game ball passes through the special area effectively set by the special area switching means. advantageous state means, the unit game execution means, during the predetermined unit game, performs a pseudo standby game in which the variable ball entering means is in the first state for a period equivalent to or approximately the same as the standby game. pseudo-standby execution means for executing, the second advantageous state means generates the second advantageous state when the game ball passes through the special area that is effectively set by the special area switching means. On the other hand, when a game ball passes through the special area that has not been effectively set by the special area switching means, the second advantageous state is not generated, and the notification means is configured to A suggestion notification non-execution means is provided which does not execute the state suggestion notification corresponding to the second advantageous state at the timing when the game ball passes through the validly set special area.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 1, there is provided a firing means for firing a game ball, a ball entering means into which the game ball launched by the firing means can enter, and a game ball enters the ball entering means. an information acquisition means that acquires predetermined information due to this, a determination means that determines the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means, and a determination result of the determination means to change the gaming state. a gaming state changing means; a notifying means for executing state suggestion notification to suggest the gaming state to the player when the gaming state is changed by the gaming state changing means; By using variable ball entry means that can change between a first state and a second state in which a game ball can enter, and a determination result by the determination means, the variable ball entry means is changed from the first state to the second state. an advantageous state means for changing the advantageous state to two states, and a unit for executing a unit game a plurality of times to change the variable ball entry means from the first state to the second state in one of the advantageous states. and a game execution means, in the advantageous state of 1, after executing the unit game, change the variable ball entry means from the second state to the first state, and then execute a standby game until it is brought into the second state again. a special area through which game balls flowing into the variable ball entry means can pass; and a special area switching means for switching whether or not to enable the special area; The means includes second advantageous state means capable of generating a second advantageous state different from the advantageous state caused by the advantageous state means when a game ball passes through the special area effectively set by the special area switching means. The unit game execution means executes a pseudo standby game during the predetermined unit game in which the variable ball entering means is in the first state for a period equivalent to or approximately the same as the standby game. execution means, the second advantageous state means generates the second advantageous state when the game ball passes through the special area effectively set by the special area switching means; The system is configured such that the second advantageous state does not occur when a game ball passes through the special area that has not been effectively set by the switching means, and the notification means is configured such that the second advantageous state does not occur when the game ball passes through the special area that has not been set effectively by the special area switching means. A suggestion notification non-execution means is provided that does not execute the state suggestion notification corresponding to the second advantageous state at the timing when the game ball passes through the special area. This has the effect of increasing the interest of the game.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine in a first embodiment. It is a back view of a pachinko machine. It is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is an enlarged front view schematically showing a front view of the variable prize winning device. (a) is a schematic diagram of the variable winning device for explaining the behavior of a ball that has flowed into the big winning opening when the right probability variable area opening/closing plate is in an open state and the left probability varying area opening/closing plate 74a is in a closed state. It is a sectional view, and (b) is a variable winning prize for explaining the behavior of the ball that has flowed into the big winning opening when the left probability variable area opening/closing plate is in an open state and the right probability variable area opening/closing plate is in a closed state. It is a schematic cross-sectional view of the device, and (c) is a variable winning prize for explaining the behavior of the ball that has flowed into the big winning opening when both the right probability variable area opening/closing plate and the left probability variable area opening/closing plate are in a closed state. FIG. 2 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the device. (a) is a diagram schematically showing area division settings and effective line settings of a display screen, and (b) is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine. It is a diagram schematically showing the configuration of various counters, counter buffers, first held ball storage area, second held ball storage area, held ball execution area, general ball held ball storage area, and general ball held ball execution area. . (a) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a jackpot random number table. (a) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a jackpot type table for special figure 1, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a jackpot type table for special figure 2. FIG. 3 is a diagram schematically showing an example of a variable probability region opening/closing table. FIG. 3 is a diagram schematically showing an example of a probability variable area effective table. The activation timing of the big winning opening solenoid, right probability variable area solenoid, and left probability varying area solenoid in each round of the first special symbol jackpot type "time saving A", and the balls in the big winning opening switch, right probability variable area switch, and left probability variable area switch 12 is a timing chart schematically showing the detection timing of the right probability variation valid flag, the left probability variation effective flag, and the probability variation transition flag. The operation timing of the big winning opening solenoid, right probability variable area solenoid, and left probability variable area solenoid in the 1st and 2nd rounds of the jackpot type "time saving A" of the 1st special symbol, the big winning opening switch, the right probability variable area switch, and the left It is a timing chart schematically showing each time of the detection timing of the ball in the probability variable area switch and the setting timing of the right probability variation valid flag, the left probability variation effective flag, and the probability variation transition flag. The operation timing of the big winning opening solenoid, right probability variable area solenoid, and left probability variable area solenoid in each round of the first special symbol jackpot type "Latent probability variation A", the big winning opening switch, the right probability variable area switch, and the left probability variable area switch 12 is a timing chart schematically showing the detection timing of a ball in , and the setting timing of a right probability change valid flag, a left probability change valid flag, and a probability change transition flag. Operation timing of the big winning opening solenoid, right probability variable area solenoid, and left probability variable area solenoid, big winning opening switch, right probability variable area switch in the 1st to 3rd rounds of the jackpot type "latent probability variation A" of the 1st special symbol and a timing chart schematically showing each time of the ball detection timing in the left probability variable area switch and the setting timing of the right probability variation valid flag, the left probability variation valid flag, and the probability variation transition flag. The operation timing of the big winning opening solenoid, right probability variable area solenoid, and left probability varying area solenoid in each round of the first special symbol jackpot type "Time saving B", and the balls in the big winning opening switch, right probability variable area switch, and left probability variable area switch 12 is a timing chart schematically showing the detection timing of the right probability variation valid flag, the left probability variation effective flag, and the probability variation transition flag. The operation timing of the big winning opening solenoid, right probability variable area solenoid, and left probability variable area solenoid in each round of the first special symbol jackpot type "Latent probability variation B", the big winning opening switch, the right probability variable area switch, and the left probability variable area switch 12 is a timing chart schematically showing the detection timing of a ball in , and the setting timing of a right probability variation valid flag, a left probability variation validity flag, and a probability variation transition flag. The operation timing of the big winning opening solenoid, right probability variable area solenoid, and left probability variable area solenoid in each round of the first special symbol jackpot type "probability variation A", and the operation timing of the big winning opening switch, right probability variable area switch, and left probability variable area switch. It is a timing chart that schematically shows the detection timing of a ball and the setting timing of a right probability change valid flag, a left probability change valid flag, and a probability change transition flag. The operation timing of the big winning opening solenoid, right probability variable area solenoid, and left probability varying area solenoid in each round of the second special symbol jackpot type "time saving C", and the balls in the big winning opening switch, right probability variable area switch, and left probability variable area switch 12 is a timing chart schematically showing the detection timing of the right probability variation valid flag, the left probability variation effective flag, and the probability variation transition flag. The operation timing of the big winning opening solenoid, right probability variable area solenoid, and left probability variable area solenoid in each round of the second special symbol jackpot type "latent probability variation C", and the big winning opening switch, right probability variable area switch, and left probability variable area switch 12 is a timing chart schematically showing the detection timing of a ball in , and the setting timing of a right probability change valid flag, a left probability change valid flag, and a probability change transition flag. 3 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart showing the starting prize winning process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows special figure fluctuation processing performed by MPU in a main control device. 3 is a flowchart showing a variation start process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart showing jackpot processing executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart showing the big prize opening/closing control process executed by the MPU in the main control device. 3 is a flowchart showing an open setting process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the process during release performed by MPU in a main control device. It is a flowchart showing jackpot end processing executed by the MPU in the main control device. 3 is a flowchart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main control device. 3 is a flowchart showing startup processing executed by an MPU in the main control device. 3 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by an MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control device. 3 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. 3 is a flowchart showing command determination processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. It is a typical sectional view in front view of a variable winning device of a 2nd embodiment, and a 2nd variable winning device. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine of a second embodiment. It is a diagram schematically showing an example of the big winning opening opening/closing table of the second embodiment. Operation of the big winning opening solenoid, the second big winning opening solenoid, the right probability variable area solenoid, and the left probability variable area solenoid in the first to third rounds of the jackpot type "latent probability variation C" of the second special symbol of the second embodiment timing, the detection timing of the ball in the big winning opening switch, the second winning opening switch, the right probability variable area switch and the left probability variable area switch, and the setting timing of the right probability variation valid flag, left probability variation valid flag, and probability variation transition flag. It is a timing chart schematically showing time. It is a flowchart showing jackpot processing executed by the MPU in the main control device of the second embodiment. It is a typical sectional view in front view of a variable winning device of a 3rd embodiment, and a 2nd variable winning device. It is a block diagram showing the electrical composition of the pachinko machine of a 3rd embodiment. It is a diagram schematically showing an example of the big winning opening opening/closing table of the third embodiment. It is a flowchart showing jackpot processing executed by the MPU in the main control device of the third embodiment. 12 is a flowchart showing an open setting process executed by the MPU in the main control device according to the third embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process during release performed by MPU in the main control device of 3rd Embodiment. (a) is a schematic sectional view from the front of the variable winning device of the fourth embodiment, and (b) is a state in which the probability variable area opening/closing plate is slid downstream and the right probability variable area is open. FIG. 12(c) is a schematic enlarged sectional view for explaining the behavior of a ball flowing down in the guide passage when the left variable area is closed and the variable area opening/closing plate is on the upstream side. It is a schematic enlarged cross-sectional view for explaining the behavior of the ball flowing down in the guide passage when the left probability variable region is in an open state and the right probability variable region is in a closed state in a slidingly driven state; FIG. 7 is a schematic enlarged cross-sectional view for explaining the behavior of a ball flowing down the guide passage when the variable probability region opening/closing plate is in an initial state and both the right variable region and the left variable region are in a closed state. It is a block diagram showing the electrical composition of the pachinko machine of a 4th embodiment. FIG. 12 is a diagram schematically showing an example of a variable probability region opening/closing table according to the fourth embodiment. 12 is a flowchart showing an open setting process executed by the MPU in the main control device according to the fourth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process during release performed by MPU in the main control device of 4th Embodiment. The operation timing of the big winning opening solenoid, the right probability variable area solenoid, and the left probability variable area solenoid in the first and second rounds of the jackpot type "time saving A" of the first special symbol of the fifth embodiment, and the big winning opening switch, right It is a timing chart schematically showing each time of the detection timing of the ball in the probability variable area switch and the left probability variable area switch, and the setting timing of the right probability variation valid flag, the left probability variation valid flag, and the probability variation transition flag. The operation timing of the big winning opening solenoid, the right probability variable area solenoid, and the left probability variable area solenoid, and the big winning opening switch in the first to third rounds of the jackpot type "latent probability variation A" of the first special symbol of the fifth embodiment , is a timing chart schematically showing each time of the detection timing of a ball in the right probability variable area switch and the left probability variable area switch, and the setting timing of the right probability variation valid flag, the left probability variation valid flag, and the probability variation transition flag. 12 is a flowchart showing an open setting process executed by the MPU in the main control device according to the fifth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process during release performed by MPU in the main control device of 5th Embodiment. The operation timing of the big winning opening solenoid, the right probability variable area solenoid, and the left probability variable area solenoid, and the big winning opening switch in the first to third rounds of the jackpot type "latent probability variation A" of the first special symbol of the sixth embodiment , is a timing chart schematically showing each time of the detection timing of a ball in the right probability variable area switch and the left probability variable area switch, and the setting timing of the right probability variation valid flag, the left probability variation valid flag, and the probability variation transition flag. It is a figure which shows the structure of the variable winning device of 7th Embodiment, (a) is a typical sectional view in front view of the variable winning device of 7th embodiment, (b) is A of (a) -A schematic cross-sectional view (cross-sectional top view) of the variable winning device.

<First embodiment>
Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, a first embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko game machine (hereinafter simply referred to as "pachinko machine") 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 36. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 whose outer shell is formed by wooden frames combined into a substantially rectangular shape, and a pachinko machine 10 which is formed to have substantially the same external shape as the outer frame 11 and has an outer shell formed from wooden frames combined into a substantially rectangular shape. The inner frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two locations, upper and lower on the left side when viewed from the front (see Fig. 1), in order to support the inner frame 12. A frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 3) having a large number of nails, winning holes (ball entrances) 63, 64b, 64c, 65a, etc. is removably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. A pinball game is played by the ball flowing down the front surface of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 includes a ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 7) that fires a ball to the front area of the game board 13, and a ball firing unit 112a that guides the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached. Note that details of the game board 13 will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, there are provided a front frame 14 that covers the upper front side of the inner frame 12, and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side of the front frame 14. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two locations, upper and lower on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the front frame serves as an opening/closing axis on the side where the hinges 19 are provided. 14 and a lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side. Note that the locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively unlocked by inserting a special key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, etc., and is provided with a window 14c having a substantially elliptical opening in its substantially central portion. A glass unit 16 having two sheets of glass is arranged on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front side of the game board 13 can be seen on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

On the front frame 14, an upper tray 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface and protrudes forward, and prize balls, rental balls, etc. are discharged into this upper tray 17. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is formed to be sloped downward to the right side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the inclination guides the balls thrown into the upper tray 17 to the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 7). Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the left side of the upper surface of the upper plate 17 when viewed from the front.

The frame button 22 is a button that is pressed by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the performance displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 3), which will be described later. In addition, the frame button 22 is used to display a variable display of a third symbol (hereinafter referred to as a third symbol) corresponding to the first special symbol used in the first lottery game or corresponding to the second special symbol used in the second lottery game. The variable display is referred to as a "variable effect."

Note that the first lottery game refers to the entry of a ball into the special drawing 1 winning slot 64b (see Fig. 3) provided in the alternate distribution unit 64 (see Fig. 3), which will be described later. This is a lottery game based on winnings (sometimes referred to as "winning"). In addition, the second lottery game is a lottery game resulting from winning in the special drawing 2 winning hole 64c (see FIG. 3) similarly provided in the alternate distribution unit 64 (see FIG. 3) (hereinafter, the first lottery game). (The lottery game and the second lottery game may be collectively referred to as a "lottery game.")

In addition, the variable performance is a performance displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 3), which will be described later. For example, it is executed when a prize is won in the special drawing 1 winning hole 64b or the special drawing 2 winning hole 64c (see FIG. 3, which will be described later), and after the symbol (third symbol, which will be described later) changes for a predetermined period of time, it stops. This is an effect that presents to the player the result of a lottery to be held for the winning prize (whether it is a jackpot or not) based on the combination of displayed symbols. In addition, in the first embodiment, the third symbol display device 81 is configured to be able to execute only one lottery game, and the first special symbol based on the first lottery game and the second special symbol based on the second lottery game are configured to be executable. Based on the first lottery game, the third symbol is used in common with the symbol (hereinafter, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as "special symbol"). It is configured to display either the lottery result or the lottery result based on the second lottery game.

Furthermore, the stage is a performance mode that provides uniformity to various performances displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 3), which will be described later. There are three stages: "Stage" and "Island Stage." Various performances such as the above-mentioned fluctuating performance and the "reach display" performed during the fluctuating performance are designed to be performed in accordance with the theme given to each stage.

In addition, the "reach display" refers to the display one step before the "jackpot display" that indicates that a jackpot will occur in a variable production executed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 3), which will be described later. . Specifically, the third symbols of the left symbol row Z1 and right symbol row Z3 (see FIG. 6), which will be described later, stop at the same symbol, and the middle symbol row Z2 (see FIG. 6) does not stop yet and continues to fluctuate. It refers to the state of being

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the "reach display" can be roughly divided into one unit of element that makes up the "normal reach" performance (hereinafter, one unit of element that makes up the production is referred to as "variable element"), The variable element of "Super Reach" is developed and executed from the variable element of the "Normal Reach", and the variable element of "Super Reach" has a higher jackpot expectation than the variable element of the "Normal Reach", and the variable element of the "Normal Reach" is also developed and executed, There is also a variable element called ``Special Reach'', which has higher jackpot expectations than the variable element of ``Super Reach''.

Changes in the stage may occur during a period when a variable effect is not being performed (i.e., during a demonstration display) or during a variable element of "high-speed variation" in which the third symbol changes rapidly in a variable effect that is invisible to the player. This is performed when the frame button 22 is pressed by the player. Then, each time the frame button 22 is operated, the display is repeatedly changed in the order of "town stage" → "sky stage" → "island stage" → "town stage" → . . . Immediately after the power is turned on, the "city stage" is set as the initial stage.

In addition, when the variable element of "Normal Reach" is started in the variable effect performed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 3), which will be described later, the variable element of "Normal Reach" is changed to the variable element of "Super Reach" or When the variable element of "Special Reach" develops, a selection screen for the variable element of "Super Reach" or the variable element of "Special Reach" is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the variable element of "Normal Reach". It may be configured as follows.

Specifically, on the selection screen, multiple candidates are displayed that can be selected as the variable element of "Super Reach" or the variable element of "Special Reach", and while the selection screen is displayed, the frame button 22 is pressed. The selected candidate is configured to be changed when the player performs a pressing operation. Then, the variable element of “Super Reach” or the variable element of “Special Reach” is determined based on the production candidate that was selected when developing the variable element of “Super Reach” or the variable element of “Special Reach”. According to the determination, the variable element of "Super Reach" and the variable element of "Special Reach" are executed on the third symbol display device 81.

In the first embodiment, the frame button 22 is configured as a button to be pressed, but instead of the frame button 22, the player can press the frame button 22 in a predetermined direction with respect to the pachinko machine 10 (for example, with respect to the pachinko machine 10, It may be configured with an operating lever that can be tilted forward, backward, rightward, and leftward. Based on the direction in which the operating lever is tilted, the selection of the production stage may be changed, or the variable element of "Super Reach" or the variable element of "Special Reach" may be determined.

Furthermore, although the frame button 22 is configured to be placed on the front side of the upper plate 17 in a side view, the frame button 22 may be placed in any position as long as it can be pressed down by the player. For example, it may be arranged on the upper surface side of the upper plate 17, or in the vicinity (on the upper surface or side surface) of the lower plate 50, which will be described later.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, at the corners). These light-emitting means are controlled to change the light-emitting mode by lighting or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when hitting a jackpot or during a predetermined "ready-to-reach display", and serve to enhance the performance effect during the game. Illumination sections 29 to 33 each having a built-in light emitting means such as a light emitting diode (hereinafter abbreviated as "LED") are provided around the periphery of the window section 14c. .

In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as performance lamps such as jackpot lamps, and when there is a jackpot or "reach display", the built-in LED lights up or blinks, causing each of the illumination parts 29 to 33 to lights up or flashes to notify you that you are hitting the jackpot, or that you are in the "reach display" that is one step before hitting the jackpot. Further, in the upper left part of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front, there is provided a display lamp 34 which has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and can display whether a prize ball is being paid out or when an error has occurred.

A small window 35 is formed on the lower side of the right side illumination section 32 by attaching transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be seen, and a small window 35 is formed on the front side of the game board 13 (see FIG. 3). ) can be seen from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, the area around the illumination parts 29 to 33 is made of acrylonitrile butadiene styrene (hereinafter abbreviated as "ABS") which is chromium plated in order to create a more dazzling appearance. .) A resin plating member 36 is attached.

A ball rental operation section 40 is arranged below the window section 14c. The ball rental operation section 40 is provided with a frequency display section 41, a ball rental button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball rental operation section 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. placed in a card unit (ball rental unit, not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball rental unit 40 is operated according to the operation. The loan is made. Specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area where information on the remaining amount of the card or the like is displayed, and a built-in LED lights up to display the remaining amount in numbers as the remaining amount information. The ball rental button 42 is operated to obtain rental balls based on information recorded on a card, etc. (recording medium), and rental balls are supplied to the upper tray 17 as long as there is a balance on the card, etc. be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit.

Note that the ball lending operation section 40 is not necessary in a pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper tray 17 from a ball lending device etc. without going through a card unit, a so-called cash machine. It is also possible to add a decorative sticker or the like to the installation part so that the component configuration is the same. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be used in common.

The lower tray unit 15 located below the upper tray 17 has a substantially box-shaped lower tray 50 with an open top surface formed in the center thereof for storing balls that cannot be stored in the upper tray 17. There is. On the right side of the lower tray 50, there is provided an operating handle 51 that is operated by the player in order to drive a ball to the front of the game board 13. Inside the operating handle 51 is a ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 7). A touch sensor 51a for permitting the drive of the operating handle 51, a push-button stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball while the button is pressed, and a rotation operation amount of the operating handle 51 based on changes in electrical resistance. A variable resistor (not shown) for detection is built-in.

When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. The ball is shot with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor which changes with the movement of the ball, and the ball is thereby hit into the front of the game board 13 with a flight distance corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are off.

A ball removal lever 52 is provided at the front lower part of the lower tray 50 to operate when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. This ball removal lever 52 is always biased to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed on the bottom of the lower plate 50 opens. The ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is ejected. This operation of the ball removal lever 52 is normally performed with a box (generally referred to as a "dollar box") placed below the lower tray 50 for receiving the balls ejected from the lower tray 50. The operating handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower tray 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower tray 50.

Next, as shown in FIG. 2, the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly provided with control board units 90, 91 and a back pack unit 94. The control board unit 90 is formed into a unit by mounting a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp controller 113), and a display control board (display controller 114). The control board unit 91 is formed into a unit by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 is made up of a back pack 92 forming a protective cover portion and a dispensing unit 93. In addition, each control board includes a Micro-Processing Unit (hereinafter abbreviated as "MPU") as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, and a port for various lottery operations. A random number generator used for this purpose, a clock pulse generation circuit used for time counting and synchronization, etc. are installed as necessary.

The main control device 110, the audio lamp control device 113, the display control device 114, the payout control device 111, the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base, and the box base and box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each control device and each board.

Further, the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) have a box base and a box cover connected in an unopenable manner by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). connection). Furthermore, a seal (not shown) is affixed to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover, spanning the box base and the box cover. This seal is made of a brittle material, and if you try to peel off the seal to open the board boxes 100, 102 or forcefully open the board boxes 100, 102, the box base side and box cover It is cut into two sides. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100, 102 have been opened.

The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a tank rail 131 located downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a dispensing device 133 provided at the most downstream part of the case rail 132 and dispensing balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 7). ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the payout device 133 appropriately pays out the required number of balls. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball jam (return to normal state) when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball jam in the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 7), for example. The operating knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to its initial state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 3, the game board 13 has a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, and a large number of nails, windmills, and rails 61, 62 for guiding the ball, and a ball that enters the prize. It has a general winning hole 63 through which a predetermined prize ball can be obtained, a special drawing 1 winning hole 64b for the first lottery game, a special drawing 2 winning hole 64c for the second lottery game, and a normal electric accessory 67a. a variable winning device 65 that is opened when a jackpot occurs in the first lottery game or the second lottery game, a regular symbol gate 67 for driving the regular electric accessory 67a, and a third symbol display. It is constructed by assembling a variable display device unit 80 having a device 81 and the like, and its peripheral portion is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12.

The general winning hole 63, the alternate distribution unit 64, the variable winning device 65, the normal symbol gate 67, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are placed on the front side of the game board 13. It is fixed from the side with wood screws, etc. Further, the front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1). The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below, mainly with reference to FIG.

On the front surface of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is installed, and a band-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62 is installed at the inner side of the outer rail 62. An arcuate inner rail 61 formed by is erected. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and back sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area where games are played is formed by the behavior of the players. The game area is a generally circular area defined by two rails 61 and 62 and an arcuate member 70 on the front side of the game board 13 (a winning opening etc. is provided, and a space where the fired balls are placed). (area flowing downstream).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 7) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (top left in FIG. 3) to prevent balls that have been guided to the top of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right in FIG. 3) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight part of the ball, and when a ball is launched with more than a predetermined force, it hits the return rubber 69 and loses its momentum. (Hereinafter, the act of firing a ball with the force of hitting the return rubber 69 and passing the right side of the variable display unit 80 when viewed from the front will be referred to as "hitting to the right.") , the act of causing the fired ball to pass through the left side of the variable display unit 80 when viewed from the front is referred to as "hitting to the left"). In the first embodiment, in a left-handed game, the ball is configured to be able to enter the ball distribution opening of the alternate distribution unit 64, but it is difficult for the ball to enter the variable winning device 65. Further, in a right-handed game, while a ball can enter the variable prize winning device 65, it is configured so that it is difficult (or impossible) for a ball to enter the distribution ball entry opening of the alternate distribution unit 64. The specific configuration will be described later.

Furthermore, between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62, there is a resin arc member 70 formed with an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface. It is fixed by being driven into the plate 60.

A special symbol display device 37 is provided at the upper right side of the gaming area when viewed from the front (upper right side in FIG. 3), and is provided with a first LED group 37a and a second LED group 37b, which are composed of a plurality of LEDs serving as light emitting means. has been done. The special symbol display device 37 performs variable display of each special symbol (hereinafter, the variable display of the special symbol is referred to as "dynamic display") according to each control performed by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 7), which will be described later. At the same time, the gaming status of the pachinko machine 10 is displayed.

The first LED group 37a indicates the number of reserved balls for which variable display has not yet been performed (reserved balls) among the balls that have won (entered) the special map 1 winning hole 64b or the special map 2 winning hole 64c, which will be described later. The number is indicated by the lighting state. Further, the number of jackpot rounds and error display are also indicated by the lighting state of the first LED group 37a corresponding to the state. The first LED group 37a is configured such that the LEDs emit different colors (for example, red, green, and blue), and the combination of the emitted colors suggests various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. be able to.

In addition, the "round" in a jackpot refers to the period from when the jackpot 65a, which will be described later, is opened to when it is closed in order to determine the number of prize balls for the jackpot, and in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, It is configured such that one "round" is executed when "30 seconds" elapse after the opening of the winning opening 65a starts, or when 10 balls win while the big winning opening 65a is opened.

The second LED group 37b is composed of a total of 16 LEDs, including an upper LED group composed of 8 LEDs and a lower LED group composed of 8 LEDs. In the upper LED group, a first special symbol (hereinafter, the first special symbol may be abbreviated as "special symbol 1") indicating the determination result of the first lottery game is displayed in a fluctuating manner. Further, in the lower LED group, a second special symbol (hereinafter, the second special symbol may be abbreviated as "special symbol 2") indicating the determination result of the second lottery game is variably displayed.

Specifically, the upper LED group displays a variable display until a variable time (dynamic display time) determined based on winnings in the special drawing 1 winning hole 64b provided in the alternate distribution unit 64, which will be described later, has elapsed. After the display (in the first embodiment, the LEDs from the leftmost to the right side of the upper LED group are lit one by one, and the lighting pattern is repeatedly displayed), a pattern indicating the determination result (in the first embodiment) is displayed. , a total of 256 types of stop symbols are displayed by combining the lighting patterns of the 8 LEDs.

In addition, the lower LED group displays a variable display (dynamic display time) until a variable time (dynamic display time) determined based on winnings in the special drawing 2 winning hole 64c provided in the alternate distribution unit 64, which will be described later. In the first embodiment, after lighting up the right LED one by one from the leftmost LED of the lower LED group and repeatedly displaying the lighting pattern, a pattern indicating the determination result (in the first embodiment, eight Depending on the combination of each LED lighting pattern, one of a total of 256 types of stop symbols will be displayed.

In any LED group, if the judgment result is a loss, only the leftmost LED will be lit, and if the judgment result is a jackpot, each LED group will be lit in a lighting pattern corresponding to the jackpot. be done. Details of the stop pattern of each LED group will be described later.

In addition, in this pachinko machine 10, a judgment is made as to whether or not it is a jackpot (jackpot lottery) for a ball that enters the special drawing 1 winning hole 64b or the special drawing 2 winning hole 64c, and when it is determined that it is a jackpot, The type of jackpot is also determined according to the winning openings 64b, 64c.

The jackpot type determined here is "15 round (hereinafter, the round may be simply expressed as "R") probability-variable jackpot" based on the winning in the special drawing 1 winning hole 64b. "Probability variation A", "Latent probability variation A" and "Latent probability variation B" corresponding to "7R latent probability variable jackpot", and "Time saving A" and "Time saving B" corresponding to "7R time saving jackpot" are prepared. (See Figure 10(a)). In addition, based on winnings in the special drawing 2 prize opening 64c, "Probability Variation A" corresponding to "15R Probable Variable Jackpot", "Latent Probability Variation C" corresponding to "15R Potential Probable Variable Jackpot", and "15R Time Shortening" "Time saving C" corresponding to "Jackpot" is prepared (see FIG. 10(b)).

Here, the "15R probability variable jackpot" is a jackpot that shifts to the "probability variable state" after the maximum number of rounds is 15 rounds, and the "15R potential probability variable jackpot" is a jackpot whose maximum number of rounds is 15 rounds. It is a jackpot that shifts to a "probability fluctuation state" after the jackpot, but does not notify that the "probability fluctuation state" is attached.A "15R time-saving jackpot" is a jackpot where the maximum number of rounds is 15. This is a jackpot that shifts to a "time-shortening state" after the jackpot. In addition, "7R latent probability variable jackpot" is a jackpot that shifts to a "probability variable state" after the maximum number of rounds is 7 rounds, but does not notify that the "probability variable state" is attached. Yes, the "7R time-saving jackpot" is a jackpot that shifts to the "time-saving state" after the maximum number of rounds is 7 rounds.

Here, the "normal gaming state" refers to a low probability state that is not a "probability fluctuation state" or "time reduction state", and refers to a state in which the jackpot probability of special symbols and the probability of winning of normal symbols are normal. . That is, in the "normal game state", the probability of winning a special symbol is lower than in the "probability fluctuation state", and the probability of winning a normal symbol is lower than in the "probability fluctuation state" and "time reduction state". Therefore, it is not a gaming state in which it is easy for the ball to enter the special drawing 2 winning hole 64c (hereinafter, a state in which it is easy for the ball to enter the special drawing 2 winning hole 64c is sometimes referred to as a "winning assistance state"), This is the most disadvantageous gaming state for the player.

Next, the "time-saving state" is a state in which the jackpot probability of special symbols is low like the "normal game state", but a so-called "time-saving function" is added that increases the probability of winning the normal symbols. say. That is, in the "time reduction state", a normal electric accessory 67a (described later) provided on the right side of the alternate distribution unit 64 (described later) is likely to be in the open state, and as a result, the special figure in the alternate distribution unit 64 This is a game state in which a ball easily enters the second winning hole 64c, that is, a winning assistance state.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the "time saving state" is predetermined for each jackpot after a jackpot of the jackpot type "time saving A", "time saving B" or "time saving C" (see FIG. 10), which will be described later. This is maintained until the specified number of special symbol variations (in the first embodiment, 50 or 100 times) are performed. After the special symbols have been dynamically displayed the prescribed number of times, the system is configured to shift from the "time reduction state" to the "normal game state".

Next, the "probability fluctuating state" refers to a high probability state in which the jackpot probability of subsequent special symbols increases as an added value after the jackpot ends. That is, the "probability fluctuating state" refers to a time when the probability is changing, or in other words, a gaming state in which it is easy to shift to a special gaming state.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, a special Until the symbol variation effect is executed 50 or 100 times (so-called special time.Hereinafter, the initial letter of "Special Time" may be abbreviated as "ST"). The jackpot probability of the symbol is in a high probability state.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the "probability variable state" includes a "probable variable state with time saving" in which the "time saving function" is provided, and a "probable variable state without time saving" in which the "time saving function" is not provided. ``state'' is provided. That is, in the "time-saving variable probability state", the jackpot probability of the special symbol is high, and the normal electric accessory 67a, which will be described later, is likely to be in the open state, and as a result, the special symbol 2 in the alternate distribution unit 64 A winning assistance state is entered in which it is easy for a ball to enter the winning opening 64c. On the other hand, in the ``no time saving certain variable state'', the special symbol has a high jackpot probability, but because the normal electric accessory 67a is difficult (not easy to become) in the open state, the special symbol is similar to the ``normal game state''. It becomes a non-winning assistance state, which is not a winning assistance state for the second winning opening 64c.

The “probability variable state with time saving” occurs every time the jackpot hits after a jackpot of the jackpot type “probability variation A”, “latent probability variation A”, “latent probability variation B”, or “latent probability variation C” (see Figure 10), which will be described later. This is maintained until the special symbol variation effect is executed a predetermined number of times (in the first embodiment, 50 or 100 times). On the other hand, after the above-mentioned dynamic display of the specified number of special symbols is executed, the "time saving probability variable state" based on the jackpot of the jackpot type "Latent probability variation A" or "Latent probability variation B" (see Figure 10), which will be described later. ”, the state shifts to a “probable variable state with no time saving”, and if it is a “probable variable state with time saving” based on a jackpot of the jackpot type “probability variation A” or “latent probability variation C” (see Figure 10), which will be described later. is configured to shift to a "normal gaming state".

Here, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, as a performance mode of the "probability variation state", there is a "probability variation notification production mode" that notifies the player that the jackpot probability of the special symbol is increased and the player is in a high probability state. There is also a ``hidden probability change presentation mode'' in which the player is not informed that the game is in a high probability state where the jackpot probability is increased.

The "probability change notification performance mode" is such that during the "probability change notification performance mode", the third symbol display device 81, etc., which will be described later, notifies the player that the special symbol is in a high probability state where the jackpot probability is increased. It is composed of In the first embodiment, when a jackpot type "probability variation A" (see FIG. 10), which will be described later, is won, the "probability variation notification performance mode" is executed after the jackpot ends.

On the other hand, during the "latent probability variation performance mode", the third symbol display device 81 etc., which will be described later, notifies the player that the special symbol is in a high probability state where the jackpot probability is increased. It is configured not to. In other words, the "latent probability variation performance mode" performs a production equivalent to the "time saving notification production mode" or "normal notification mode" described later, and tells the player whether the player is in the "probability variation state" or "time reduction". It is configured to make it impossible (difficult) to distinguish whether the game is in a "normal gaming state" or a "normal gaming state", thereby providing a gameplay feature that allows players to predict which gaming state they are staying in.

In the first embodiment, when a jackpot type "Latent Probability Variation A", "Latent Probability Variation B", or "Latent Probability Variation C" (see FIG. 10), which will be described later, is won, after the jackpot ends, "Latent Probability Variation Effect" is applied. ``Aspect'' is executed.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, as a presentation mode of the "time saving state", a "time saving notification presentation mode" is provided that notifies the player that the above-mentioned "time saving function" is provided. . This "time-saving notification presentation mode" is such that during the "time-saving notification presentation mode," the third symbol display device 81, etc., which will be described later, notifies the player that the winning probability of the normal symbol is increased. It is configured. In the first embodiment, when a jackpot type "time saving A", "time saving B", or "time saving C" (see FIG. 10), which will be described later, is won, the "time saving notification performance mode" is executed after the jackpot ends. .

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, a ``normal performance mode'' that is different from the ``time-saving notification performance mode (latent probability variable performance mode)'' and the ``probability variable notification performance mode'' is provided as a performance mode in the ``normal gaming state''. It is being This "normal performance mode" is such that a third symbol display device 81, etc., which will be described later, informs the player that the state has not shifted to a state advantageous to the player during the "normal performance mode". It is composed of In the first embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized, when the "probability variation state" or "time reduction state" ends, or when the jackpot type is "latent probability variation A" or "latent probability variation B" After the end of the jackpot (see FIG. 10), when the special symbol variation performance is completed 50 times, the "normal performance mode" is executed.

That is, the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured such that the "latent probability variation performance mode" executes a performance equivalent to the "time saving notification performance mode" or the "normal performance mode". With this configuration, the player can determine whether the current gaming state is a "probability fluctuation state" or a "time reduction state," or whether it is a "probability fluctuation state" or a "normal gaming state." It is impossible (difficult) to determine which gaming state the player is in. By configuring in this way, while the "latent probability change performance mode" is being executed, a gameplay feature is created in which the player is forced to guess which game state it is in or not, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. .

In addition, after the jackpot of the later-described jackpot type "Latent Probability Variation A" or "Latent Probability Variation B" (see Figure 10) ends, if the special symbol variation performance ends 50 times, the subsequent gaming state will be as follows. Until the special symbol variation performance is executed 50 times, it is internally in a "probability variation state" and is advantageous to the player, but in terms of performance, the "normal production mode" is being executed. . On the other hand, after the jackpot of the jackpot type "Time Saving A" or "Time Saving B" (see Figure 10) ends, if the special symbol variation effect ends 50 times, the subsequent gaming state will be internally changed to "Normal Gaming State". Therefore, the "normal performance mode" is also executed in terms of performance. Therefore, even after the special symbol variation performance after the end of the jackpot of the jackpot type "Time Saving A" or "Time Saving B" has been performed 50 times and the "Time Saving State" has ended, the player will still be able to win the jackpot even after the "Time Saving State" ends. It is not possible to identify whether it is a jackpot based on the type "time saving A" or "time saving B" or a jackpot based on the jackpot type "latent probability variation A" or "latent probability variation B".

With this configuration, the situation where the "normal performance mode" indicating the "normal gaming state" is being executed is prevented by making the player not aware of whether the player is in the "probability fluctuation state" or the "normal gaming state". Even if the game is a game, it is possible to have the player guess the possibility that the game is internally in a "probability fluctuating state" and continue playing the game. Therefore, even after the "time reduction state" ends, it is possible to increase the player's desire to continue playing and to promote the operation of the pachinko machine 10.

Here, the display mode of the second LED group 37b for each jackpot type will be explained. As the stop display (lighting display) of the upper LED group for the first special symbol, there is one type of display pattern corresponding to a loss, 63 types of display patterns corresponding to the jackpot type "Time saving A", and 63 types of display patterns corresponding to the jackpot type "Time saving B". There are 63 types of corresponding display patterns, 64 types of display patterns corresponding to the jackpot type "Latent probability variation A", 64 types of display patterns corresponding to the jackpot type "Latent probability variation B", and 64 types of display patterns corresponding to the jackpot type "Probability variation A". There is one corresponding display pattern, for a total of 256 display patterns. Each display pattern has no specific regularity for each type of jackpot, and random display patterns are associated in advance. Therefore, when the player looks at the display pattern of the upper LED group, the player can recognize the stop display of a loss and the stop display of the jackpot type "probability fluctuation A", while the stop display of the jackpot type "time saver A" and "time saver B" can be recognized. ”, “Latent probability variation A”, or “Latent probability variation B” is difficult to distinguish.

In addition, as the stop display (lighting display) of the lower LED group for the second special symbol, there is 1 type of display pattern corresponding to a loss, 127 types of display patterns corresponding to the jackpot type "Time saving C", and 127 types of display patterns corresponding to the jackpot type "Latent probability There are 127 types of display patterns corresponding to "variation C" and 1 type of display pattern corresponding to the jackpot type "probability variation A", for a total of 256 types of display patterns. And, like the upper LED group, each display pattern does not have a specific regularity for each jackpot type, and random display patterns are associated in advance. Therefore, when the player looks at the display pattern of the lower LED group, he can recognize the stop display of a loss and the stop display of the jackpot type "probability fluctuation A", but he can recognize the stop display of the jackpot type "time saving C" or "latent probability". The structure is such that it is difficult to identify which of the stop displays of "Fluctuation C" is being displayed.

With this configuration, even if each jackpot type is displayed in the stop display of the second LED group 37b of the special symbol display device 37, it is necessary to know all the jackpot types corresponding to each stop display. , it becomes difficult for the player to recognize the type of jackpot won, so a gameplay feature is created that forces the player to guess which game state it is in while the "latent probability variation performance mode" is being executed. , it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Returning to FIG. 3, the explanation will be continued. In the game area of the game board 13, one or more general winning holes 63 are arranged, from which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball wins.

Furthermore, an alternate distribution unit 64 into which balls flowing down the game area can enter is arranged at the lower center of the game area. This alternate distribution unit 64 mainly has a distribution ball entrance into which balls flowing down the game area can enter, and a left side path within the alternate distribution unit 64 for passing the balls that have entered the distribution ball entrance. Alternatively, there is a sorting device 64a that alternately distributes the balls to the right route, a special drawing 1 prize opening 64b into which balls distributed to the left route by the distribution device 64a can enter, and balls that are distributed to the right route by the distribution device 64a. It is comprised of a special figure 2 winning hole 64c into which a ball can enter.

When a ball enters the special drawing 1 winning hole 64b provided in this alternate distribution unit 64, the special drawing 1 winning hole switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the special drawing 1 winning hole switch (not shown) is turned on. When the mouth switch is turned on, the main control device 110 (see FIG. 13) draws a jackpot lottery for the first special symbol (ie, the first lottery game). Then, a dynamic display of the special symbol according to the lottery result is shown by the upper LED group in the second LED group 37b of the special symbol display device 37, and a fluctuating effect of the third symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. executed.

In addition, when a ball enters the special figure 2 winning hole 64c provided in the alternate distribution unit 64, the special figure 2 winning hole switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the special figure 2 winning hole switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on. Due to the turning on of the winning opening switch, the main control device 110 (see FIG. 13) performs a jackpot lottery of the second special symbol (ie, a second lottery game). Then, a dynamic display of the special symbol according to the lottery result is shown by the lower LED group in the second LED group 37b of the special symbol display device 37, and a fluctuating effect of the third symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. executed.

In addition, the special figure 1 winning hole 64b and the special figure 2 winning hole 64c each serve as one of the winning holes from which two balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball wins.

Here, a manner in which balls entering the alternate distribution unit 64 are alternately distributed to the left route or the right route by the distribution device 64a will be described. The balls that enter the alternate distribution unit 64 and flow down from the distribution ball entry port are stored in a space formed by the center plate portion and the right receiving plate of the distribution device 64a. Then, by pushing down the right receiving plate due to the weight of the ball, the distribution device 64a rotates, and the tip side of the right receiving plate comes into contact with the wall below the distribution device 64a of the alternate distribution unit 64, and the right receiving plate is rotated. The entire body is located below the rotating shaft, and the left receiving plate is located above the rotating shaft. Therefore, the sorting device 64a becomes in a state where the ball can flow down to the right path side, and in this state, the ball rolls on the upper surface of the right receiving plate and is guided to the right path. At this time, the force of pushing down the right side receiving plate (rotating the distribution device 64a) due to the weight of the ball is stronger than the repulsive force between the distribution side magnet (not shown) and the unit side magnet (not shown). As a result, the sorting device 64a is rotated against the repulsive force of the magnet. Then, again, due to the repulsive force of the magnet, the state in which the left side receiving plate is above the rotating shaft portion and the right receiving plate is below the rotating shaft portion, that is, the state of the left side guide position is maintained.

Then, the balls that enter the alternate distribution unit 64 and flow down from the distribution ball entry port are stored in the space formed by the center plate portion and the left receiving plate of the distribution device 64a. Then, the distribution device 64a rotates by pushing down the left side receiving plate due to the weight of the ball, and the tip side of the left side receiving plate comes into contact with the wall of the alternate distribution unit 64, and the entire left side receiving plate is moved away from the rotating shaft. It is on the lower side and the right side receiving plate is in a state above the rotating shaft portion. Therefore, the sorting device 64a is in a state where the ball can flow down to the left side, and in this state, the ball rolls on the upper surface of the left receiving plate and is guided to the left side. At this time as well, the force of pushing down the left side receiving plate (rotating the distribution device 64a) due to the weight of the ball is greater than the repulsive force between the distribution side magnet (not shown) and the unit side magnet (not shown). Since the size is larger, the sorting device 64a is rotated against the repulsive force of the magnet. Then, again, due to the repulsive force of the magnet, the state in which the left side receiving plate is below the rotating shaft and the right side receiving plate is above the rotating shaft, that is, the state at the right guiding position is maintained. By repeating these movements alternately, the balls entering the alternate distribution unit 64 are alternately distributed to the left path and the right path.

The left side path of the alternate distribution unit 64 is a path along which the balls guided to the left side of the alternate distribution unit 64 by the distribution device 64a flow down. A left side exit is provided on the lower left side of this left side path, through which the balls flowing down the left side path flow out, and a special figure 1 winning opening 64b is provided below the left side exit. Therefore, the ball guided to the left path is configured to win the special map 1 prize opening 64b after flowing down the left path.

The right path of the alternate distribution unit 64 is a path along which the balls guided to the right side of the alternate distribution unit 64 by the distribution device 64a flow down. A right side exit is provided on the lower right side of this right side path, through which the balls flowing down the right side path flow out, and a special figure 2 winning opening 64c is provided below the right side exit. Therefore, the ball guided to the right path is configured to win into the special map 2 winning opening 64c after flowing down the right path.

A variable winning device 65 is disposed on the right side of the alternate distribution unit 64 when viewed from the front, and a large winning opening 65a having a horizontally long rectangular shape is provided approximately in the center thereof.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol in the main controller 110 (see FIG. 7) results in a jackpot, after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed, A second LED group 37b of a special symbol display device 37 is lit to display a stop symbol of a jackpot, and a stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on a third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of a jackpot. Thereafter, the opening/closing plate 65b (see FIG. 4) provided in the variable winning device 65 is opened, and the game state transitions to a special game state (jackpot) in which the ball easily enters the big winning opening 65a. As this special game state, the grand prize opening 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined period of time (for example, until "30 seconds" elapse or until 10 balls are won).

This big prize opening 65a is closed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closing, the big winning prize mouth 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. This opening/closing operation of the big prize opening 65a can be repeated up to, for example, 15 times (15 rounds). The state in which this opening/closing operation is performed is a form of special gaming state (jackpot state) that is advantageous for the player, and the player is given a larger amount than usual as a reward for gaming value (gaming value). Prize balls will be paid out.

In addition, inside the big winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65, there is a right variable probability area 73 (see FIG. 4) where the ball that has flowed into the big winning opening 65a can flow down, and a left probability variable area 74 (see FIG. 4), A discharge passage 75 (see FIG. 4) is provided. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, in the special game state (jackpot state), the right probability variable area 73 and the left probability variable area 74 are switched and controlled to be valid or invalid, so that the ball that flows into the big winning opening 65a is effectively controlled. By passing through the set right probability variable area 73 or left probability variable area 74, a "probability variable state" is generated after the special game state ends.

Here, details of the variable prize winning device 65 will be explained with reference to FIG. 4. FIG. 4 is an enlarged front view schematically showing the front view of the variable winning device 65. As shown in FIG. 4, the variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening/closing plate 65b that covers the big winning opening 65a, and a mechanism for driving the opening/closing plate 65b forwardly to open and close around the lower side of the opening/closing plate 65b. The big winning hole solenoid 65c (see FIG. 7), the big winning hole switch 71 that detects the ball that has entered the big winning hole 65a, the guide path 72 through which the ball detected by the big winning hole switch 71 flows down, A right probability variable region 73 provided on the downstream side (left side) of the guide passage 72, a left probability variable region 74 provided on the downstream side (left side) of the right probability variable region 73, and a left probability variable region 74 provided on the downstream side (left side) of the left probability variable region 74. ) is provided.

The big winning hole switch 71 is buried in the passage near the big winning hole 65a, and when the big winning hole switch 71 detects a ball, 15 prize balls are paid out. Further, the opening/closing plate 65b is configured to be closed and one round is completed when ten balls are detected by this big prize opening switch 71 after the opening/closing plate 65b is opened.

The guide passage 72 is a passage through which the ball that has entered the big prize opening 65a flows down, and a right probability variation area 73 and a left probability variation area 74, which will be described later, are provided at predetermined positions in the guide passage 72, and the right probability variation area 73 and the left probability variation area 74 are provided at predetermined positions in the guide passage 72. A discharge passage 75, which will be described later, is provided downstream of the region 73 and the left variable probability region 74. Therefore, the ball that flows into the big prize opening 65a and flows down the guide passage 72 passes through the right probability variable area 73, the left probability variable area 74, or the discharge passage 75.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, after the ball that has entered the big winning hole 65a is detected by the big winning hole switch 71, it passes through the guide path 72 and reaches above the right probability variable area 73, which will be described later. .5 seconds, and after the ball that has entered the big winning opening 65a is detected by the big winning opening switch 71, it passes through the guide path 72 and reaches above the left probability variable area 74, which will be described later. The configuration is such that it takes approximately 1.6 seconds to complete. Therefore, the ball detected by the big prize opening switch 71 is configured to be able to flow into the right probability variable area 73 or the left probability variable area 74 within "2 seconds".

The right variable probability region 73 is disposed so that its upper surface is flush with the bottom surface of the guide passage 72 (rolling surface of the ball) in the closed state (protruding state), and changes from the closed state to the open state (recessed state). A right definite variable region opening/closing plate 73a configured to be displaceable, a right definite varying region solenoid 73b (see FIG. 7) capable of driving the right definite varying region opening/closing plate 73a to open and close, and a right definite variable region opening/closing plate 73a provided downstream of the right definite variable region opening/closing plate 73a. The right variable probability area switch 73c is embedded in the passageway of the right variable probability area passage 73c and is capable of detecting a ball passing through the right variable area passage 73c. ing.

The left side variable area 74 is configured such that its upper surface is flush with the bottom surface of the guide passage 72 in the closed state (projected state), and is movable from the closed state to the open state (recessed state). A plate 74a, a left probability variable region solenoid 74b (see FIG. 7) that can be driven to open and close the left probability variable region opening/closing plate 74a, and a left probability variable region passage provided downstream of the left probability variable region opening/closing plate 74a through which the ball can flow. 74c, and a left probability variable area switch 74d which is embedded in the left probability variable area passage 74c and is capable of detecting a ball passing through the left probability variable area passage 74c.

When the ball that has flowed into the big prize opening 65a does not flow into either the right probability variable area 73 or the left probability variable area 74, the discharge passage 75 discharges the ball outside the variable winning device 65 (on the back side of the game board 13). This is a passageway for discharging to.

The right variable probability area opening/closing plate 73a and the left variable probability area opening/closing plate 74a are made of transparent or substantially transparent resin. Therefore, by making it difficult for the player to recognize the position (driving mode) of each probability variable area opening/closing plate 73a, 74a, it is possible to determine whether the probability variable area 73, 74 is open or closed by each variable probability area opening/closing plate 73a, 74a. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine whether the player is present or not. In addition, the right variable probability area opening/closing plate 73a and the left variable probability area opening/closing plate 74a may be made of colored resin.

Here, with reference to FIG. 5, the inflow pattern of the balls that have flowed into the big winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 will be explained. FIG. 5(a) shows that when the right probability variable area opening/closing plate 73a is in an open state (recessed state) and the left probability varying area opening/closing plate 74a is in a closed state (protruding state), FIG. 5B is a schematic cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 65 for explaining the behavior of the ball that has entered. FIG. It is a schematic cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 65 for explaining the behavior of the ball that has flowed into the big winning opening 65a when the area opening/closing plate 73a is in the closed state (protruding state), and FIG. 5(c) is , A schematic diagram of the variable winning device 65 for explaining the behavior of the ball that has flowed into the big winning opening 65a when the right variable probability variable area opening/closing plate 73a and the left variable probability variable area opening/closing plate 74a are both in the closed state (protruding state). FIG.

As shown in FIG. 5(a), when a jackpot is won and a special game state occurs, the opening/closing plate 65b of the variable winning device 65 is opened and balls can flow into the jackpot opening 65a. Then, when the right probability variable area opening/closing plate 73a is in the open state (immersed state) and the left probability variable area opening/closing plate 74a is in the closed state (protruding state), the ball that has flowed into the big prize opening 65a is First, it is detected by the big prize opening switch 71, and then flows down the guide passage 72. Since the right probability variable region opening/closing plate 73a is opened (retracted) by the right probability variable region solenoid 73b (see FIG. 7), the ball flows into the right probability variable region passage 73c. Thereafter, the ball is detected by the right probability variable area switch 73d embedded in the right probability variable area passage 73c. The ball detected by the right probability variable area switch 73d is discharged to the outside of the variable winning device 65 (to the back side of the game board 13) through a discharge path (not shown).

Next, as shown in FIG. 5(b), when the right probability variable area opening/closing plate 73a is in the closed state (protruding state) and the left probability varying area opening/closing plate 74a is in the open state (retracted state), the large The ball that has flowed into the winning hole 65a is first detected by the big winning hole switch 71, and then flows down the guide path 72. Then, it rolls on the upper surface of the right variable area opening/closing plate 73a in the closed state (protruding state), and the left variable area opening/closing plate 74a provided downstream of the right variable area opening/closing plate 73a is activated by the left variable area solenoid 74b (Fig. 7), the ball flows into the left variable probability region passage 74c. Thereafter, the ball is detected by the left probability variable area switch 74d embedded in the left probability variable area passage 74c. The ball detected by the left probability variable area switch 74d is discharged to the outside of the variable winning device 65 (to the back side of the game board 13) through a discharge path (not shown).

Next, as shown in FIG. 5(c), when the right probability variable area opening/closing plate 73a and the left probability variable area opening/closing plate 74a are both in the closed state (protruding state), the ball that flows into the big winning opening 65a first , is detected by the big prize opening switch 71, and then flows down the guide passage 72. Then, it rolls on the upper surface of the right probability variable area opening/closing plate 73a in the closed state (protruding state) and the upper surface of the left probability variable area opening/closing plate 74a, and from the discharge passage 75 provided on the downstream side to the outside of the variable winning device 65 (game It is discharged to the back side of the panel 13).

Note that the special game state is not limited to the form described above. A large opening opening (not shown) that opens and closes separately from the grand winning opening 65a is provided in the gaming area, and when the second LED group 37b corresponding to a jackpot is lit on the special symbol display device 37, the grand winning opening 65a is opened to a predetermined position. When the ball enters the big winning hole 65a while the big winning hole 65a is open for a certain period of time, the big opening hole provided separately from the big winning hole 65a is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined time. The gaming state may be formed as a special gaming state (see the second embodiment and subsequent embodiments).

Returning to FIG. 3, the explanation will be continued. A normal symbol gate 67 is provided above the variable winning device 65 when viewed from the front and on the right side when viewed from the front of a variable display unit 80 which will be described later. This normal symbol gate 67 is provided with a through hole (not shown) in the vertical direction through which a ball passes. When the ball passes through this normal symbol gate 67, a normal symbol switch (not shown) provided in the through hole is turned on, and due to this turning on, a winning lottery for the normal symbol is performed by the main controller 110. Note that this normal symbol gate 67 only serves as a lottery trigger for variable display of normal symbols, and is configured so that no prize balls or the like are paid out even if a ball passes through.

On the downstream side of the variable prize winning device 65 and on the right side of the alternate distribution unit 64, a normal electric accessory 67a is arranged. This ordinary electric accessory 67a is mainly composed of a rotating plate and a rotating solenoid (not shown) that drives the rotating plate to open and close.

The main control device 110 of the first embodiment normally maintains the rotary plate of the normal electric accessory 67a in an upright state and covers the right side of the alternate distribution unit 64. This prevents balls from flowing into the special figure 2 winning opening 64c from the right side of the ball. Then, when a win is won with the variable display of the normal symbol, the rotating solenoid (not shown) is driven for a predetermined period of time, and the rotating plate of the normal electric accessory 67a is rotated for the predetermined period of time. By driving it from an upright state to an open state (tilted state) where it is tilted to the right at a predetermined angle (for example, 45 degrees), it is possible to allow balls to flow from the right side of the alternate distribution unit 64 into the special figure 2 prize opening 64c. The ball flowing down the right side of the alternate distribution unit 64 is configured to be in a state where it is easy to win into the special figure 2 winning opening 64c, that is, a winning assistance state.

Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured such that the probability of winning in the variable display of normal symbols changes depending on the gaming state. Specifically, in the "normal game state" or "variable probability state with no time saving", the winning probability of the normal symbol is set to a low probability state (for example, 1/10), making it difficult to win in the variable display of the normal symbol. The rotary plate of the normal electric accessory 67a is made difficult to open (tilt), so that it is difficult to enter the special drawing 2 winning opening 64c. On the other hand, in the "time saving probability variable state" or "time saving state", the winning probability of the normal symbol is set to a high probability state (for example, 9/10), and by making it easier to win in the variable display of the normal symbol, The rotary plate of the electric accessory 67a is made easy to open (tilt), and it is configured to easily enter the special drawing 2 winning opening 64c.

In addition, instead of changing the winning probability of the normal symbols from the "normal gaming state" or the "variable probability state without time saving" like the "variable state with time saving" or "variable state with time saving", it is changed depending on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. Alternatively, the time during which the rotating plate of the ordinary electric accessory 67a rotates or the number of times the rotating plate of the ordinary electric accessory 67a rotates per one win may be changed. Specifically, in the "variable state with time saving" or "variable time saving state", the time during which the rotating plate of the normal electric accessory 67a rotates is made longer than in the "normal gaming state" or the "variable variable state without time saving". Alternatively, the number of times that the rotating plate of the normal electric accessory 67a rotates in one win may be made larger than in the "normal game state" or the "no time saving probability variable state". In addition, in the "time saving probability variable state" or "time saving state", the probability of winning the normal symbol increases, the rotation time of the rotating plate of the normal electric accessory 67a increases, and the rotation time of the rotating plate of the ordinary electric accessory 67a increases. At least two of the above and the increasing number of rotations of the rotary plate may be performed simultaneously.

A variable display unit 80 is arranged from the center to the right side of the gaming area. The variable display device unit 80 displays the third symbol in synchronization with the dynamic display on the special symbol display device 37, triggered by the ball entering the special symbol 1 winning hole 64b or the special symbol 2 winning hole 64c (starting winning). The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as the "display device") that displays a variable display of the symbol, and an LED that displays the regular symbol variably using the passage of the ball of the regular symbol gate 67 as a trigger. A normal symbol display device 83 is provided. Further, a center frame 86 is disposed in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 17-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by a display control device 114 (see FIG. 7), which will be described later, so that, for example, left, middle, and right Three symbol rows Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 6) are displayed.

Each symbol row Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 6) is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row Z1 to Z3 to display the third symbol on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It is displayed variably. The third symbol display device 81 of the first embodiment is commonly used in the first lottery game with the first special symbol and the second lottery game with the second special symbol, and is used for control of the main controller 110. While the accompanying game state is displayed on the special symbol display device 37, a decorative display corresponding to the display on the special symbol display device 37 is performed using the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81. It is something. Note that instead of the display device, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using reels or the like, for example.

Here, with reference to FIG. 6, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be explained. FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 6(a) is a diagram schematically showing area division settings and effective line settings of the display screen, FIG. 6(b) is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen.

The third symbol is composed of ten types of main symbols numbered from "0" to "9". Each main symbol is composed of numbers from "0" to "9" attached to the rear symbol consisting of a wooden box, among which odd numbers ("1", "3", "5", "7", The main design with the number "9" is a large number added almost completely to the front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main designs with even numbers ("0", "2", "4", "6", "8") have characters such as a plane, a furoshiki, and a helmet almost completely on the front of the wooden box. A simulated attached symbol is added to the lower right side of the attached symbol so that even numbers are small and green and are displayed on the front side of the attached symbol.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the lottery result of any special symbol by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 7), which will be described later, is a jackpot, a variable effect in which the same main symbols are aligned is created. The system is structured so that a jackpot occurs after the fluctuating effects are completed. If you win the jackpot type of "probability variation A" which will be described later, a variation effect is performed in which the main symbols with the number "7" (corresponding to the "probability variation notification symbol") are aligned. On the other hand, jackpot types other than "probability variation A" described later, i.e. "time saving A", "time saving B", "time saving C", "latent probability variation A", "latent probability variation B" or "latent probability variation C" ”, if you win the jackpot type, the main symbol with a number other than the number “7”, that is, the main symbol with the number “1” to “6”, “8” or “9” (“ A fluctuating performance is performed in which all the symbols (equivalent to "non-determinable variation notification patterns") are aligned. With this configuration, the player cannot identify the type of jackpot that occurs just by checking the main symbols that are aligned in the fluctuating effect (excluding the main symbols with the number "7" attached). Can not.

As shown in FIG. 6(a), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into three parts in the vertical direction, and the lower two-thirds is reserved as the main display area Dm where the third symbol is displayed in a variable manner. It consists of a cockpit display area Db that displays the number of pitches, etc., and the other upper one-third is a sub-display area Ds that displays preview effects, characters, etc.

The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3: left, middle, and right, and the left symbol row Z1 is displayed in the display region Dm1, the middle symbol row Z2 is displayed in the display region Dm2, A right symbol row Z3 is displayed in the display area Dm3.

In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the third symbols described above are displayed in a prescribed order. That is, in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the main symbols are arranged in ascending (or descending) numerical order, and a variable effect is performed by periodically scrolling from top to bottom for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. Note that the arrangement of numbers may be configured to be different in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. For example, in the left symbol row Z1, the main symbol numbers may be arranged in descending order, while in the middle symbol row Z2 and right symbol row Z3, the main symbol numbers may be arranged in ascending order.

Further, in the main display area Dm, third symbols are displayed in three rows of upper, middle, and lower rows for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The middle part of this main display area Dm is set as the effective line L1, and in each variable production, the third symbol is placed on the effective line L1 in the order of left symbol row Z1 → right symbol row Z3 → middle symbol row Z2. Stop display. If the combination of jackpot symbols (combination of the same main symbols, hereinafter referred to as "jackpot display") is aligned on the active line L1 when the third symbol is stopped, a jackpot video will be displayed as a jackpot.

On the other hand, while the third symbol display device 81 (special symbol display device 37) is performing a variable performance (dynamic display) of the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the ball is specially When a ball enters the winning hole 64b in FIG. 1, the number of times the ball enters (the number of balls held) is held up to a maximum of four times. The number of reserved balls is shown by the special symbol display device 37, and the special symbol 1 first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db1a to Db1d in the first reserved symbol display area Db1 corresponding to the first special symbol in the cockpit display area Db. It is also shown when The special figure 1 first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db1a to Db1d display one reserved symbol (in the normal display mode, an "○" symbol ( White circle symbols)) are displayed respectively, and the number of reserved balls is displayed according to the number of displayed reserved symbols displayed in the first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db1a to Db1d of special figure 1.

That is, in the special figure 1 first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db1a to Db1d, if one reserved symbol is displayed in the special figure 1 first reserved symbol display area Db1a, the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is is one time, and if a total of two reserved symbols are displayed, one each in the special figure 1 first and second reserved symbol display areas Db1a and Db1b, the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is twice, and if a total of 3 reserved symbols are displayed, one each in the special figure 1 1st to 3rd reserved symbol display areas Db1a to Db1c, the number of reserved balls of the 1st special symbol is 3 times, and if a total of 4 reserved symbols are displayed, one each in the special figure 1 1st to 4th reserved symbol display areas Db1a to Db1d, the number of reserved balls of the 1st special symbol is 4 times. In addition, if no pending symbols are displayed in the special figure 1 1st to 4th pending symbol display areas Db1a to Db1d, the number of reserved balls of the 1st special symbol is 0 and there is a variable performance that is being held. Show that you do not.

Also, while the third symbol display device 81 (special symbol display device 37) is performing a variable performance (dynamic display) of the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the ball is specially When a ball enters the winning hole 64c in FIG. 2, the number of times the ball enters (the number of balls held) is held up to a maximum of four times. The number of reserved balls is shown by the special symbol display device 37, and the special symbol 2 first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db2a to Db2d of the second reserved symbol display area Db2 corresponding to the second special symbol of the cockpit display area Db It is also shown when In the special figure 2 first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db2a to Db2d, one reserved symbol (in the normal display mode, an "○" symbol ( White circle symbols)) are displayed respectively, and the number of reserved balls is displayed according to the number of reserved symbols displayed in the special figure 2 first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db2a to Db2d.

That is, in the special figure 2 first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db2a to Db2d, if one reserved symbol is displayed in the special figure 2 first reserved symbol display area Db2a, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is one time, and if a total of two reserved symbols are displayed, one each in the special figure 2 first and second reserved symbol display areas Db2a and Db2b, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is twice, and if a total of three reserved symbols are displayed, one each in the special figure 2 first to third reserved symbol display areas Db2a to Db2c, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is 3 times, and if a total of 4 reserved symbols are displayed, one each in the special figure 2 1st to 4th reserved symbol display areas Db2a to Db2d, the number of reserved balls of the 2nd special symbol is 4 times. In addition, if no pending symbols are displayed in the special figure 2 1st to 4th pending symbol display areas Db2a to Db2d, the number of reserved balls of the 2nd special symbol is 0 and there is a pending variable effect. Show that you do not.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the first lottery game with the first special symbol and the second lottery game with the second special symbol are not executed at the same time, but only one of the lottery games is executed. It is composed of In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when any of the lottery games in progress is completed and the reserved balls of the first special symbol and the reserved balls of the second special symbol are respectively stored, The second lottery game with the second special symbol is executed preferentially over the first lottery game with the first special symbol (so-called special symbol 2 priority variation). Note that the lottery games may be executed in the order of winning, or the first lottery game with the first special symbol and the second lottery game with the second special symbol may be executed simultaneously.

In the center of the cockpit display area Db, there is provided an execution symbol display area Db0 in which an execution symbol indicating that a variable performance is being executed in the main display area Dm is displayed. This executed symbol display area Db0 is provided in the central part of the cockpit display area Db, that is, on the right side of the special figure 1 first reserved symbol display area Db1a and on the left side of the special figure 2 first reserved symbol display area Db2a, It is configured so that an executed symbol larger than each pending symbol displayed in each pending symbol display area Db1a to Db1d, Db2a to Db2d is displayed. In addition, in this execution symbol display area Db0, the reserved symbols displayed in the special figure 1 first reserved symbol display area Db1a or the special figure 2 first reserved symbol display area Db2a are moved (shifted) and displayed as executed symbols. Ru.

The execution symbol displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0 will be erased when the variable performance ends, and with the deletion of the execution symbol, the displayed pending symbol will be moved to the lower side (the right side if it is the first special symbol, the right side if it is the first special symbol, etc.). 2 If it is a special symbol, it will be moved and displayed as a reserved symbol on the left side). Specifically, for example, in a situation where there are no reserved symbols of the second special symbol and four reserved symbols of the first special symbol, the variation performance of the first special symbol or the second special symbol ends. When the executed symbol displayed in the executed symbol display area Db0 is erased, when the reserved symbol is displayed in the special symbol 1 first reserved symbol display area Db1a, the executed symbol in the executed symbol display area Db0 is deleted. It is displayed by moving (shifting). Further, when a reserved symbol is displayed in the special figure 1 second reserved symbol display area Db1b, it is moved (shifted) and displayed as a reserved symbol in the special figure 1 first reserved symbol display area Db1a. Furthermore, when a reserved symbol is displayed in the special figure 1 third reserved symbol display area Db1c, it is moved (shifted) and displayed as a reserved symbol in the special figure 1 second reserved symbol display area Db1b. Further, when a reserved symbol is displayed in the special figure 1 fourth reserved symbol display area Db1d, it is moved (shifted) and displayed as a reserved symbol in the special figure 1 third reserved symbol display area Db1c.

Also, for example, in a situation where there are four reserved symbols of the second special symbol, the executed symbol displayed in the executed symbol display area Db0 is erased with the end of the variable performance of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. When the reserved symbol is displayed in the special figure 2 first reserved symbol display area Db2a, it is moved (shifted) and displayed as the executed symbol in the executed symbol display area Db0. Further, when a reserved symbol is displayed in the special figure 2 second reserved symbol display area Db2b, it is moved (shifted) and displayed as a reserved symbol in the special figure 2 first reserved symbol display area Db2a. Furthermore, when a reserved symbol is displayed in the special figure 2 third reserved symbol display area Db2c, it is moved (shifted) and displayed as a reserved symbol in the special figure 2 second reserved symbol display area Db2b. Further, when a reserved symbol is displayed in the special figure 2 fourth reserved symbol display area Db2d, it is moved (shifted) and displayed as a reserved symbol in the special figure 2 third reserved symbol display area Db2c.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, while the variable performance is executed in the main display area Dm, the executed symbols continue to be displayed in the executed symbol display area Db0 (during the variable element of "Super Reach" or "Special Reach") (excluding variable factors). On the other hand, when the variable performance ends, or when the variable element of "Super Reach" or the variable element of "Special Reach" is being executed, the executed symbols are configured to be deleted. That is, when the executed symbol is displayed in the executed symbol display area Db0, it indicates that the variable performance is being executed (continued) in the main display area Dm, and the executed symbol is displayed in the executed symbol display area Db0. If not, it indicates that the variable effect is not being executed (not being continued) in the main display area Dm, or that the variable element of "Super Reach" or the variable element of "Special Reach" is being executed.

Further, the cockpit display area Db is configured to be able to execute a "reservation change notice" using the reservation symbols and execution symbols displayed in the cockpit display area Db. This "pending change notice" means changing the display color of the pending symbols and executed symbols in multiple stages from before to during the execution of the variable performance to change the jackpot expectation level of the variable performance executed in the main display area Dm. This is a forewarning.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, as a "pending change notice", the display color of the pending symbols and executed symbols is changed from "white" which is the normal display mode, to "blue" which is the blue display mode, to red. The display mode is configured to be changeable to "red" in the display mode or "rainbow color" in the rainbow color display mode. This pachinko machine 10 is configured so that when a "jackpot display" or a "reach display" occurs in a variable performance, the display color selection ratio of the pending symbol and the executed symbol is different. By changing the display color of this pending symbol and executed symbol from the normal display mode (“white”) to another display mode (for example, “blue”), “ It is possible to suggest to the player the possibility that a "reach display" or "jackpot display" will occur for each display color.

Specifically, in the "pending change notice", if the pending symbol and the executed symbol are displayed in "blue" rather than the normal display format ("white"), the changes indicated by the pending symbol and the executed symbol are The percentage of "reach display" and "jackpot display" in the production is set high. In addition, when the pending symbol and executed symbol are displayed in “red” rather than “blue”, the rate of “reach display” or “jackpot display” is higher in the fluctuating effects indicated by the pending symbol and executed symbol. Set. Furthermore, when the pending symbols and executed symbols are displayed in "rainbow color" rather than "red", the percentage of "reach display" or "jackpot display" is higher in the fluctuating effects indicated by the pending symbols and executed symbols. set high.

In addition, when the display mode of the pending symbol and the executed symbol is "red", the mode of performance (mainly (hereinafter, the "Super Reach" performance mode or the "Special Reach" performance mode may be collectively referred to as the "Super Reach or higher" production mode). ) is set to be executed. Furthermore, when the display mode of the pending symbol and the executed symbol is "rainbow color", the setting is made so that the appearance of the "jackpot display" is confirmed in the fluctuating effect indicated by the "rainbow colored" pending symbol or executed symbol. has been done. Therefore, in this embodiment, the display mode of the pending symbols and executed symbols is changed to "reach display" or "jackpot display" in stages in the order of normal ("white") → "blue" → "red" → "rainbow color". is set so that the expectation level of appearance is high.

It should be noted that the "rainbow color" display mode of the "pending change notice" does not appear in the pending symbols, but is set to be able to appear only in the executed symbols. This means that if the pending symbol is not executed due to some abnormality (for example, a power outage) after the "rainbow color" display mode that confirms the occurrence of a jackpot appears with the pending symbol, the player will receive a profit. This results in dissatisfaction due to not being able to get the jackpot that should have been achieved. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the above-mentioned dissatisfaction from occurring by configuring the pending symbols so that the "rainbow color" display mode, which is sure to cause a jackpot, does not appear in advance.

In addition, with this "reservation change notice", when the display mode of the pending symbol has changed and the pending symbol shifts due to the execution (extinguishment) of the variation effect, the display mode of the changed pending symbol will shift. It is configured to be carried over (inherited) and reflected on the previous pending symbol or executed symbol. That is, when the display mode of the pending symbols changes, even when the changed pending symbols are shifted to other pending symbol display areas Db1 to Db3 or executed symbol display area Db0 due to the execution of a variation effect, the display before the shift The mode is configured to be maintained as it is as the display mode of the pending symbol or the executed symbol after the shift.

Therefore, for example, if the display color of the reserved symbol changes to "red" in the special pattern 1 fourth reserved symbol display area Db1d, the reserved symbol changes from the special symbol 1 third reserved symbol display area Db1c to the special symbol 1 second reserved symbol. When shifting from the symbol display area Db1b to the special figure 1 first reserved symbol display area Db1a to the executed symbol display area Db0, the "red" reserved symbol or executed symbol is configured to continue to be displayed. Ru.

In addition, in the first embodiment, the number of suspended balls in the variable performance based on the ball entering the special figure 1 winning hole 64b or the special figure 2 winning hole 64c is configured to be held up to a maximum of 4 times, respectively. The maximum number of balls held is not limited to four, but may be set to three or less, or five or more (for example, eight). In addition, instead of displaying the reserved symbols in the cockpit display area Db, the number of reserved balls can be displayed numerically on a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four can be displayed in a manner that differs by the number of reserved balls ( For example, it may be displayed in different colors or lighting patterns. Moreover, since the number of reserved balls is shown by the special symbol display device 37, it is not necessary to display the number of reserved balls on the third symbol display device 81. In addition, if information regarding the number of reserved balls (reserved symbols, etc.) is not displayed on the third symbol display device 81, it is not possible to execute a "reserved change notice" based on the reserved symbols, so other character symbols, etc. may be additionally displayed. By making it appear, it may be configured to execute a prefetched notice similar to the "pending change notice."

Further, the variable display unit 80 is provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of held balls, corresponding to the maximum number of held balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and the number of held balls is displayed according to the number of held lamps in the lit state. It may also be used to display a number. In addition, if the configuration is such that the number of balls on hold is displayed using a hold lamp, it is natural that a look-ahead notice similar to the "hold change notice" in the first embodiment can be executed by providing a plurality of display colors for the hold lamp. possible.

The sub-display area Ds is provided in a horizontally elongated manner above the main display area Dm, and is further equally divided into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. The small areas Ds1 to Ds3 are areas for displaying characters and preview effect images, respectively. The images displayed in each of the small areas Ds1 to Ds3 give the player a sense of expectation of winning a jackpot as a result of the variable performance performed in the main display area Dm. The cockpit display area Db is a reserved symbol indicating the number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls) for which fluctuation effects have not been executed among the balls that have entered the special map 1 winning hole 64b or the special map 2 winning hole 64c. This is an area that displays the executed symbols related to the variable performance that is being executed.

On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 6(b), a total of nine main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub-display area Ds, in the left small area Ds1, a moving image such as a preview symbol appearing is displayed, indicating that the fluctuating effect being performed in the main display area Dm is in a state where it is easier to transition to a jackpot than usual. Suggested to the player.

In addition, in the sub-display area Ds, in the central small area Ds2, a predetermined character (a boy wearing a headband in the first embodiment) usually performs a predetermined action, and the variable effect performed in the main display area Dm Based on this, the boy's hair, which is usually black, changes the color of his headband, which is usually white, or a different character appears, etc., to create a preview effect. will be held.

Furthermore, in the sub-display area Ds, a level meter (not shown) appears in the right small area Ds3, which indicates step-by-step whether or not a jackpot will occur in the variable performance performed in the main display area Dm. Is displayed. This level meter increases (adds) each time the expectation of occurrence of "reach display" or the expectation of jackpot in the fluctuating performance increases based on the appearance of preview symbols etc. in the fluctuating performance. It is configured to suggest that a jackpot is confirmed when the display limit (MAX display) of the level meter is reached. Therefore, the sub-display area Ds has a function of indicating the occurrence of "reach display" in the main display area Dm.

Returning to FIG. 3, the explanation will be continued. The normal symbol display device 83 performs a variable display in which an "○" symbol and an "x" symbol are alternately lit as display symbols (normal symbols) each time the ball passes through the regular symbol gate 67. . In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the normal symbol display device 83 stops at a predetermined symbol (the "○" symbol in the first embodiment), the ordinary electric accessory 67a enters the operating state according to the game state. (The rotating plate is rotated).

The number of reserved balls at the normal symbol gate 67 is reserved up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by lighting on the normal symbol retaining lamp 84. Four normal symbol retention lamps 84 are provided, corresponding to the maximum number of symbols reserved, and are arranged above the third symbol display device 81. Then, the number of reservations is displayed based on the number of normal symbol reservation lamps 84 lit.

The variable display of the normal symbols can be performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the normal symbol display device 83 as in the first embodiment, as well as by using the special symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device. 81 may be used for this purpose. Similarly, the normal symbol holding lamp 84 may be lit in a part of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the maximum number of reserved balls that pass through the normal symbol gate 67 is not limited to 4 times, but is 3 times or less, or 5 times, similar to the special pattern 1 winning hole 64b or the special pattern 2 winning hole 64c. It may be set to a higher number of times (for example, 8 times). Further, when the number of reserved balls is indicated by the special symbol display device 37, the normal symbol retention lamp 84 may not be lit.

Pasting spaces K1 and K2 are provided at the left and right corners of the lower side of the game board 13 for pasting certificate stamps, identification labels, etc. It can be visually recognized through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

Furthermore, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. Balls that have not entered any of the winning ports (ball entry ports) 63, 64, and 65a are guided through the out port 66 to a ball discharge path (not shown). A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the balls, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are also arranged.

Next, with reference to FIG. 7, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 7 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a read only memory (hereinafter abbreviated as "ROM") 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a control program stored in the ROM 202. Random Access Memory (hereinafter abbreviated as "RAM") 203, which is a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when executing a program, as well as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, Various circuits such as data transmission and reception circuits are built-in.

In addition, in order to instruct sub-control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the audio lamp control device 113 to operate, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub-control devices by the data transmission/reception circuit. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

The main controller 110 handles the main functions of the pachinko machine 10, such as setting the jackpot lottery, dynamic display and variable effects on the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery results for variable display on the normal symbol display device 83. Execute processing. The RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer 203c that stores various counters for controlling these processes.

Further, the ROM 202 stores at least a jackpot random number table 202a, a jackpot type table 202b, a pending number table 202c, a stop pattern table 202d, a fluctuation pattern table 202e, a probability variable area opening/closing table 202f, and a probability variable area effective table 202g. The main control device 110 executes the above-mentioned main controls using various counters stored in the RAM 203 and various tables stored in the ROM 202.

Here, with reference to FIG. 8, the counter etc. provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be explained. These counters etc. are used for jackpot lottery, dynamic display settings on the special symbol display device 37, variable display settings on the third symbol display device 81, variable display result lottery on the normal symbol display device 83, etc. It is used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform this. Furthermore, in the description of the various counters, various tables stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 will also be described with reference to FIGS. 9 to 12.

The settings for the jackpot lottery, the dynamic display of the special symbol display device 37, and the variable performance settings of the third symbol display device 81 include the jackpot random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery and the stop type of the jackpot symbol. A jackpot type counter C2 used for selection, a stop pattern selection counter C3 used for selecting the production mode of the variation production, a first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and variation pattern selection. A variation type counter CS1 used for this purpose is used.

In addition, a random number counter C4 per regular symbol is used for the lottery on the regular symbol display device 83, and a second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used to set the initial value of the random number counter C4 per regular symbol. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and returns to "0" after reaching the maximum value.

Each counter is updated, for example, at "4 millisecond" intervals, which is the execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see Figure 22), and some counters are updated at irregular intervals during the main processing (see Figure 33). The updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer 203c set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. The details will be described later, but the RAM 203 includes a first holding ball storage area 203d consisting of four holding areas (first holding areas 1 to 4) related to the first special symbol, and a first holding ball storage area 203d that includes four holding areas related to the second special symbol. A second reserved ball storage area 203e consisting of areas (second reserved areas 1 to 4) is provided, and each of these areas has access to the special drawing 1 winning opening 64b or the special drawing 2 winning opening 64c. The values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 are stored in accordance with the timing of ball entry.

Each counter will be explained in detail. The jackpot random number counter C1 is sequentially incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, "0 to 899"), and reaches the maximum value (for example, "899" in the case of a counter that can take a value of "0 to 899"). The configuration is such that it returns to "0" after reaching the value. In particular, when the jackpot random number counter C1 is updated once, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and the jackpot random number counter C1 is updated from that initial value. It will be done.

The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the jackpot random number counter C1. That is, for example, if the jackpot random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of "0 to 899", the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter that can take a value of "0 to 899". The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once every time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 33).

The value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (in the first embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22)). Then, at the timing when the ball enters the special drawing 1 winning hole 64b (starting winning), the ball is placed in the first reserved ball storage area 203d of the RAM 203 provided corresponding to the special drawing 1 winning hole 64b (first special symbol). is stored in the jackpot random number counter storage area 203d1 of any one of the first reservation areas 1 to 4. In addition, at the timing when the ball enters the special drawing 2 winning hole 64c (starting winning), the ball is placed in the second reserved ball storage area 203e of the RAM 203 provided corresponding to the special drawing 2 winning hole 64c (second special symbol). It is stored in the jackpot random number counter storage area 203e1 of any one of the second reservation areas 1st to 4th.

The value of the random number that makes the jackpot random number counter C1 a jackpot is set by the jackpot random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, and the jackpot random number counter C1 is set by the jackpot random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, and the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored in the jackpot random number counter storage areas 203d1 and 203e1 of the reservation area. When the value of the random number counter C1 matches the value of the random number that is a jackpot set by the jackpot random number table 202a, a jackpot is determined.

Here, details of the jackpot random number table 202a will be explained with reference to FIG. FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the jackpot random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202. The jackpot random number table 202a is a low probability state that is used when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a low probability state (a period that is not a "probability fluctuation state") of a special symbol, which is a "normal gaming state" or a "time reduction state". For the probability state, and for the high probability state used when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is the "probability fluctuating state (probability variable)" which is a high probability state with a special symbol that has a higher probability of winning the jackpot than the low probability state. It can be divided into two types. The numbers of random numbers that constitute a jackpot included in each of the low probability state and the high probability state are set to be different. In this way, by varying the number of random numbers that result in a jackpot, the probability of a jackpot is changed between the low probability state and the high probability state.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the number of values of the jackpot random number counter C1 (jackpot random number value) that becomes a jackpot in a low probability state is three, and the value "7,307,582" is the jackpot random number It is stored in table 202a. That is, the jackpot probability of the special symbol in the low probability state (that is, the "normal game state" and the "time reduction state") is set to be 3/900=1/300.

On the other hand, the number of random number values (jackpot random numbers) that result in a jackpot in a high probability state is 9, and the values ``28,122,298,390,486,567,656,750,866'' are It is stored in the jackpot random number table 202a. That is, the jackpot probability of the special symbol in the high probability state (that is, the "probability fluctuation state") is set to be 9/900=1/100.

In addition, in the first embodiment, the jackpot random numbers for the low probability state and the jackpot random numbers for the high probability state stored in the jackpot random number table 202a are set so that they do not overlap. is set. Here, if there is a value that is a jackpot random number value regardless of the situation of the pachinko machine 10, that value will be easily predicted from the outside, so there is a risk that there will be a high possibility that a jackpot will be won illegally. On the other hand, as in the first embodiment, by changing the value of the random number that results in a jackpot depending on the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state or a low probability state), it is possible to win a jackpot. Since the value of the random number can be made difficult to predict, fraud can be suppressed.

Returning to FIG. 8, the explanation will be continued. The jackpot type counter C2 determines the jackpot type in the event of a jackpot, and is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, "0 to 99") until the maximum value (for example, "0 to 99") is added. In the case of a counter that can take a value of ``99'', the counter returns to ``0'' after reaching ``99''. The value of the jackpot type counter C2 is updated, for example, periodically (in the first embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22)). Then, at the timing when the ball enters the special drawing 1 winning hole 64b (starting winning), the ball is placed in the first reserved ball storage area 203d of the RAM 203 provided corresponding to the special drawing 1 winning hole 64b (first special symbol). Among the first reservation first to fourth areas, the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored in the jackpot type counter storage area 203d2 of the same first reservation area as the first reservation area where the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored. In addition, at the timing when the ball enters the special drawing 2 winning hole 64c (starting winning), the ball is placed in the second reserved ball storage area 203e of the RAM 203 provided corresponding to the special drawing 2 winning hole 64c (second special symbol). Among the second reservation first to fourth areas, the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored in the jackpot type counter storage area 203e2 of the same second reservation area as the second reservation area where the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored.

Here, for example, if the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in one holding area in the first holding ball storage area 203d or the second holding ball storage area 203e is not a random number that becomes a jackpot, that is, it is a loss. If it is a random number, the variation pattern in the variation performance and the type of stop symbol (hereinafter referred to as "stop type") will be the one at the time of loss. On the other hand, if the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in one holding area in the first holding ball storage area 203d or the second holding ball storage area 203e is a random number that results in a jackpot, the fluctuation pattern or stop in the fluctuation performance The type will be the one at the time of jackpot. In this case, the fluctuation pattern and stop type at the time of the jackpot are determined in accordance with the jackpot type indicated by the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the same holding area.

The value of the jackpot type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of "0 to 99". The jackpot type is determined based on this jackpot type counter C2 and the jackpot type table 202b stored in the ROM 202. This jackpot type table 202b includes a jackpot type table 202b1 for special figure 1, which is referred to in the first lottery game with the first special symbol, and a jackpot type for special figure 2, which is referred to in the second lottery game with the second special symbol. A table 202b2 is provided.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 10(a) and 10(b), the special figure 1 jackpot type table 202b1 and the special figure 2 jackpot type table 202b2 will be described. FIG. 10(a) is a diagram schematically showing an example of the special symbol 1 jackpot type table 202b1 corresponding to the first special symbol stored in the ROM 202, and FIG. It is a diagram schematically showing an example of a special figure 2 jackpot type table 202b2 corresponding to the second special symbol. As shown in FIGS. 10(a) and 10(b), the jackpot type table 202b associates the type of special symbol, the jackpot type according to the type of the special symbol, and the value of the jackpot type counter C2. It is a table.

As for the jackpot type, as mentioned above, after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15, until the special symbol variation effect is executed 100 times, both the special symbol jackpot probability and the normal symbol probability are high. "Probability variation A" which is a "15R guaranteed variable jackpot" that informs that the state (so-called ST 100 times and time saving 100 times) and is in a "probability variation state" and a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds. Afterwards, until the special symbol variation effect is executed 100 times, both the special symbol's jackpot probability and the normal symbol's probability of winning will be in a high probability state (so-called ST 100 times and time saving 100 times). "Latent probability variation C" which is a "15R latent probability variable jackpot" that does not notify that it is in a "probability variation state" and after the jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds until the special symbol variation effect is executed 100 times. , "Time-saving C" is a "15R time-saving jackpot" that transitions to a "time-saving state" where the probability of hitting the normal symbol is high, but the probability of winning the special symbol is low (so-called time-saving 100 times). ”, after the maximum number of rounds is a jackpot of 7 rounds, until the special symbol variation effect is executed 100 times, the jackpot probability of the special symbol will be in a high probability state (so-called ST 100 times), and the special symbol Until the fluctuation effect is executed 50 times, the winning probability of the normal symbol will be in a high probability state (so-called time saving 50 times), but "7R latent probability strange jackpot" that does not notify that it is in the "probability fluctuation state" ``Latent probability variation A'' and ``Latent probability variation B'', and after the maximum number of rounds is a jackpot of 7 rounds, until the special symbol variation effect is executed 50 times, the probability of winning the normal symbol is high. "Time-saving A" and "Time-saving B" are "7R time-saving jackpots" that are in a probability state, but the special symbol's jackpot probability is low probability state (so-called time-saving 50 times). be.

In the special figure 1 jackpot type table 202b1 and the special figure 2 jackpot type table 202b2, each jackpot type is associated with possible values of the jackpot type counter C2 that determines the jackpot type.

In the example of the jackpot type table 202b1 for special drawing 1 in FIG. 10(a), the value "0 to 19" of the jackpot type counter C2 is associated with "time saving A" which is "7R time saving jackpot", and also " The value "20 to 39" of jackpot type counter C2 is associated with "time saving B" which is "7R time saving jackpot", and jackpot type counter C2 is associated with "latent probability variation A" which is "7R latent probability variable jackpot". The value "40 to 59" of jackpot type counter C2 is associated with "latent probability variation B" which is also "7R potential probability variation jackpot", and the value "60 to 79" of jackpot type counter C2 is associated with "15R probability variation jackpot". ” is associated with the value “80 to 99” of the jackpot type counter C2.

In the first special symbol lottery in the first embodiment, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the jackpot random number counter storage area 203d1 of any of the first holding balls storage areas 203d becomes the jackpot. value, the jackpot type associated with the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the jackpot type counter storage area 203d2 of the same first reservation area is determined from the special figure 1 jackpot type table 202b1.

For example, if the value of jackpot type counter C2 is "15", "time saving A" corresponding to "7R time saving jackpot" is determined as the jackpot type, and if the value of jackpot type counter C2 is "35", jackpot is determined. If "time saving B" corresponding to "7R time saving jackpot" is determined as the type and the value of jackpot type counter C2 is "48", "latent probability fluctuation A" corresponding to "7R latent probability variable jackpot" is determined as the jackpot type. is determined and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is "77", the "latent probability variation B" corresponding to "7R latent probability variable jackpot" is determined as the jackpot type, and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is "95". If so, "probability variation A" corresponding to "15R probability variation jackpot" is determined as the jackpot type.

That is, when a jackpot is won in the first lottery game with the first special symbol (i.e., the lottery based on the ball entering the special symbol 1 winning hole 64b), "Time saver A", "Time saver B", and "Latent probability The jackpot types of "variation A," "latent probability variation B," and "probability variation A" are each selected equally at a rate of 20%.

In addition, in the example of the jackpot type table 202b2 for special drawing 2 in FIG. 10(b), the value "0 to 39" of the jackpot type counter C2 is associated with "time saving C" which is "15R time saving jackpot", The value "40 to 59" of jackpot type counter C2 is associated with "latent probability variation C" which is "15R latent probability variable jackpot", and the jackpot type is associated with "probability variation A" which is "15R probability variable jackpot". The value "60 to 99" of the counter C2 is associated with it.

In the second special symbol winning/failure lottery in the first embodiment, similar to the first special symbol winning/failure lottery, the jackpot random number stored in the jackpot random number counter storage area 203e1 of any of the holding areas of the second holding ball storage area 203e When the value of the counter C1 is a value that becomes a jackpot, the jackpot type corresponding to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the jackpot type counter storage area 203e2 in the same holding area is the jackpot type table for special figure 2. 202b2.

For example, if the value of jackpot type counter C2 is "10", "time saving C" corresponding to "15R time saving jackpot" is determined as the jackpot type, and if the value of jackpot type counter C2 is "55", jackpot is determined. "Latent probability variation C" corresponding to "15R potential probability variable jackpot" is determined as the type, and if the value of jackpot type counter C2 is "80", "probability variation A" corresponding to "15R probability variable jackpot" is determined as the jackpot type. ” is determined.

That is, if a jackpot is won in the second lottery game with the second special symbol (i.e., a lottery based on the ball entering the special symbol 2 winning hole 64c), the jackpot type of "time saving C" will be won at a rate of 40%. The jackpot type of "latent probability variation C" is selected at a rate of 20%, and the jackpot type of "probability variation A" is selected at a rate of 40%.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, since the lottery game using the second special symbol has greater gaming value for the player than the lottery game using the first special symbol, the player does not know how to use the second special symbol. A game feature is created in which the ball is entered into the special pattern 2 winning hole 64c rather than the special pattern 1 winning hole 64b, which creates variation in the game and increases the interest of the game. There is.

Here, the opening pattern and effective pattern of the right probability variable area 73 and the left probability variable area 74 in each jackpot type will be explained. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when a jackpot with a special symbol is won, each round (1st to 7th round, or 1st to 15th round) at the time of the jackpot is determined based on the jackpot type of the jackpot. Similarly, the opening pattern of the right probability variable area 73 or the left probability variable area 74 (driving pattern of the right probability variable area opening/closing plate 73a and the left probability variable area opening/closing plate 74a) is set for each round. The configuration is such that an effective pattern for the left probability variable area 74 is set.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, in a jackpot, the right probability variable area 73 or the left probability variable area 74 (hereinafter, the right probability variable area 73 and the left probability variable area 74 are collectively referred to as the "probability variable area 73") is set effectively. , 74) is configured so that a "probability variable state" is given (occurs) after the jackpot ends when the ball passes through the probability variable regions 73 and 74 which are set to be invalid. It is configured so that a "probability fluctuation state" is not applied (occurred) even if the ball passes through.

Conventionally, a variable probability area through which a ball can pass is provided in the grand prize opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 that is opened when a jackpot is won, and the opening and closing of the variable probability area is controlled by an opening/closing lever or the like, and the ball flowing into the grand prize opening 65a is There is a pachinko machine that generates (provides) a "probability variation state" after the jackpot ends when the probability variation region passes through.

In such pachinko machines, when a jackpot occurs, the jackpot symbol corresponding to the "time reduction state" or the "normal gaming state" is displayed without informing the player whether or not the "probability fluctuation state" will occur. is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, etc., and the player is shown a "probability variation state". '' instead of ``time reduction state'' or ``normal game state'' is performed. Then, during the jackpot, the release lever is controlled to open and close at a predetermined timing based on the jackpot type.

Specifically, for example, in the case of a jackpot type that generates a "probability fluctuation state", the opening/closing lever is controlled to open and close so that the ball that enters the big prize opening 65a passes through the probability fluctuation region, and the corresponding The system is configured to cause a "probability fluctuation state" to occur after the jackpot ends. On the other hand, in the case of a jackpot type that does not cause a "probability variation state", the opening/closing lever is controlled to open and close so that the ball that has entered the big winning hole 65a does not pass through the probability variation area, and after the jackpot is over, the "probability variation state" is The game is configured so that a "time reduction state" or a "normal gaming state" is generated without generating a "fluctuation state".

By configuring it in this way, it is difficult (or impossible) for the player to recognize whether the gaming state after a jackpot is a "probability fluctuation state", a "time reduction state", or a "normal gaming state". , it is possible to improve the interest of the game by creating a gameplay that allows the player to guess in which game state he/she is playing the game. In addition, even if the player is in a "time reduction state" or "normal gaming state," the player is made to guess (internally) that it may be in a "probability fluctuation state" contrary to the production mode, and is forced to continue playing the game. By doing so, the operating rate of the pachinko machine can be improved.

However, in the above-mentioned pachinko machine, even if the "latent probability variable performance mode" is executed, the "probability variable state" is always generated when the ball passes through the probability variable area, so the big prize opening 65a The player continues to pay attention to whether or not the ball passes through the probability variable region within the probability variable region, and at the stage when the player visually confirms that the ball passes through the probability variable region, the game recognizes that a "probability variable state" occurs. The player will recognize the game, and the expected gameplay will be disrupted. In addition, if the player continues to execute the "latent probability variation performance mode" after the occurrence of the "probability variation state" is recognized, the player will not be able to enjoy the game, and will actually lose interest in the game. There is a risk that you will become aroused.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, two probability variable areas (the right probability variable area 73 and the left probability variable area 74) are provided in the big winning opening 65a, and each probability variable area is set for each jackpot round according to the type of jackpot. Drive control is performed to open either one of the opening/closing plates 73a, 74a provided for each area 73, 74, and the setting of the validity/invalidity of each probability variable area 73, 74 is not recognized by the player (internally). control) to switch. Then, during a jackpot, if the ball passes through the effectively set probability variable regions 73, 74, a "probability variation state" is generated after the jackpot ends. On the other hand, even if the ball passes through probability variable regions 73 and 74 that are set to be invalid, the system is configured so that the "probability variable state" does not occur after the jackpot ends.

That is, for example, when the right probability variable area 73 is set to be effective in a state where the right probability variable area opening/closing plate 73a is opened and a ball can flow into the right probability variable area 73, the ball passes through the right probability variable area 73. Sometimes, the system is configured to cause a "probability fluctuation state" to occur after the jackpot ends. On the other hand, if the right variable probability region 73 is set to be invalid in a state where the right variable probability region opening/closing plate 73a is opened and the ball can flow into the right variable probability region 73, even if the ball passes through the right variable probability region 73, , the system is configured so that the "probability fluctuation state" does not occur after the end of the jackpot.

Further, for example, when the left probability variable area 74 is set to be effective in a state where the left probability variable area opening/closing plate 74a is opened and a ball can flow into the left probability variable area 74, the ball passes through the left probability variable area 74. Sometimes, the system is configured to cause a "probability fluctuation state" to occur after the jackpot ends. On the other hand, when the left probability variable area opening/closing plate 74a is opened and the ball can flow into the left probability variable area 74, and the left probability variable area 74 is set to be invalid, even if the ball passes through the left probability variable area 74, , the system is configured so that the "probability fluctuation state" does not occur after the end of the jackpot.

With this configuration, even if the ball passes through each probability variable area 73, 74, if the probability variable area 73, 74 is not set internally as valid, a "probability variable state" will occur after the jackpot ends. Therefore, even if the player visually recognizes the passing of the ball to each probability variable area 73, 74, it is possible to configure such that the occurrence of the "probability variable state" is not determined after the jackpot is completed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to create a gameplay that allows the player to guess in which gaming state the player is playing the game, even when the "latent probability variation performance mode" is being executed. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, as the opening/closing pattern of each probability variable area 73, 74 corresponding to the jackpot type of the first special symbol, the opening/closing pattern is set to be "X1" for "time saving A", and " In "Time saving B", the opening/closing pattern is set to "X2", and in "Latent probability variation A", the opening/closing pattern is set to "X1" as in "Time saving A", and in "Latent probability variation B", the opening/closing pattern is set to "X1". '', the opening/closing pattern is set to be ``X2'', similar to ``time saving B'', and the opening/closing pattern is configured to be ``Y1'' in ``probability fluctuation A'' (see Figure 10(a)). ). In addition, as the opening/closing pattern of each probability variable area 73, 74 corresponding to each jackpot type of the second special symbol, the opening/closing pattern is set to "Y2" in "time saving C", and in "latent probability variation C", Similar to "Time saving C", the opening/closing pattern is set to "Y2", and in "Probability variation A", the opening/closing pattern is configured to be "Y1" (see FIG. 10(b)).

Here, with reference to FIG. 11, the opening and closing patterns of each probability variable area 73, 74 for each type of jackpot will be explained. FIG. 11 is a diagram schematically showing an example of the variable probability region opening/closing table 202f. The probability variable area opening/closing table 202f shown in FIG. 11 shows variable probability areas 73 and 74 that are opened in each round for each jackpot type in each special symbol, and when the right variable probability area 73 is opened in each round. When the left probability variable area 74 is opened, it is expressed as "left". In the first embodiment, when one of the probability variable regions 73, 74 (for example, the right probability variable region 73) is open, the other probability variable region 74, 73 (for example, the left probability variable region 74) is closed. It is configured so that

As shown in FIG. 11, the opening/closing pattern "X1" of each probability variable area 73, 74 corresponding to the jackpot type "time saving A" and "latent probability variation A", which is a jackpot of up to 7 rounds of the first special symbol, is an odd number In rounds (namely, rounds 1, 3, 5, and 7), the right probability variable area opening/closing plate 73a is opened to allow the ball to pass through the right probability variable area 73, and the left probability variable area opening/closing plate 74a is closed. The ball cannot pass through the left probability variable region 74.

Further, in the opening/closing pattern "X1", in even-numbered rounds (i.e., 2nd round, 4th round, and 6th round), the left probability variable area opening/closing plate 74a is opened so that the ball can pass through the left probability variable area 74, and the right probability variable area The opening/closing plate 73a is closed and the ball cannot pass through the right probability variable area 73.

That is, in the opening/closing pattern "X1", the ball can pass through the right probability variable area 73 in the first round of the jackpot, the ball can pass through the left probability variable area 74 in the next round (i.e., the second round), and then the ball can pass through the left probability variable area 74 in the first round of the jackpot. The ball can alternately pass through the right probability variable area 73 or the left probability variable area 74 every round until the end (that is, the end of the seventh round). Therefore, the number of rounds that can be passed to the right variable probability region 73 is "4", and the number of rounds that can be passed to the left probability variable region 74 is "3".

Next, as shown in FIG. 11, the opening/closing pattern "X2" of each probability variable area 73, 74 corresponding to the jackpot type "time saving B" and "latent probability variation B" which is a jackpot of maximum 7 rounds of the first special symbol is , In odd-numbered rounds (i.e., rounds 1, 3, 5, and 7), the left probability variable area opening/closing plate 74a is opened to allow the ball to pass through the left probability variable area 74, and the right probability variable area opening/closing plate 73a is closed. As a result, the ball cannot pass through the right probability variable region 73.

Further, in the opening/closing pattern "X2", in even number rounds (i.e., 2nd round, 4th round, and 6th round), the right probability variable area opening/closing plate 73a is opened to allow the ball to pass through the right probability variable area 73, and the left probability variable area The opening/closing plate 74a is closed and the ball cannot pass through the left probability variable area 74.

That is, in the opening/closing pattern "X2", the ball can pass through the left probability variable area 74 in the first round of the jackpot, the ball can pass through the right probability variable area 73 in the next round (i.e., the second round), and after that, the ball can pass through the right probability variable area 73 in the first round of the jackpot. The ball can alternately pass through the left probability variable area 74 or the right probability variable area 73 every round until the end (that is, the end of the seventh round). Therefore, the number of rounds that can be passed to the left probability variable area 74 is "4", and the number of rounds that can be passed to the right probability variable area 73 is "3".

Next, as shown in FIG. 11, the opening/closing pattern "Y1" of each probability variable area 73, 74 corresponding to the jackpot type "probability fluctuation A" which is a jackpot of maximum 15 rounds of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is as follows. In odd-numbered rounds (i.e., 1st round, 3rd round, 5th round, 7th round, 9th round, 11th round, 13th round, and 15th round), the left probability variable area opening/closing plate 74a is opened and the ball can pass through the left probability variable area 74. At the same time, the right variable probability region opening/closing plate 73a is closed, and the ball cannot pass through the right variable probability region 73.

Further, in the opening/closing pattern "Y1", the right probability variable area opening/closing plate 73a is opened in even number rounds (i.e., 2nd round, 4th round, 6th round, 8th round, 10th round, 12th round, and 14th round), and the right probability variation area 73a is opened. At the same time, the left probability variable area opening/closing plate 74a is closed, and the ball cannot pass through the left probability variable area 74.

That is, in the opening/closing pattern "Y1", the ball can pass through the left probability variable area 74 in the first round of the jackpot, the ball can pass through the right probability variable area 73 in the next round (i.e., the second round), and then the ball can pass through the right probability variable area 73 in the first round of the jackpot. The ball can alternately pass through the left probability variable area 74 or the right probability variable area 73 every round until the end (that is, the end of the 15th round). Therefore, the number of rounds that can be passed to the left probability variable area 74 is "8", and the number of rounds that can be passed to the right probability variable area 73 is "7".

Next, as shown in FIG. 11, the opening/closing pattern "Y2" of each probability variable area 73, 74 corresponding to the jackpot type "time saving C" and "latent probability variation C" which is a jackpot of maximum 15 rounds of the second special symbol is , in odd-numbered rounds (i.e., 1st, 3rd, 5th, 7th, 9th, 11th, 13th, and 15th rounds), the right variable area opening/closing plate 73a is opened, allowing the ball to pass through the right variable area 73. At the same time, the left probability variable area opening/closing plate 74a is closed and the ball cannot pass through the left probability variable area 74.

Further, in the opening/closing pattern "Y2", the left probability variable area opening/closing plate 74a is opened in even number rounds (i.e., 2nd round, 4th round, 6th round, 8th round, 10th round, 12th round, and 14th round), and the left probability variable area 74a is opened. At the same time, the right probability variable area opening/closing plate 73a is closed, and the ball cannot pass through the right probability variable area 73.

That is, in the opening/closing pattern "Y2", the ball can pass through the right probability variable area 73 in the first round of the jackpot, the ball can pass through the left probability variable area 74 in the next round (i.e., the second round), and then the ball can pass through the left probability variable area 74 in the first round of the jackpot. The ball can alternately pass through the right probability variable area 73 or the left probability variable area 74 every round until the end (that is, the end of the 15th round). Therefore, the number of rounds that can be passed to the right variable probability region 73 is "8", and the number of rounds that can be passed to the left probability variable region 74 is "7".

In this way, the jackpot types with the same opening and closing patterns (i.e., jackpot types "time saving A" and "latent probability variation A", jackpot types "time saving B" and "latent probability variation B", and jackpot type "time saving C") ” and “Latent probability variation C”), and by making it impossible to determine the type of jackpot based only on the opening/closing patterns of the variable probability areas 73 and 74, it is possible for the player to recognize which type of jackpot he or she has won. It is possible to improve the interest of the game by making it difficult (impossible) to create a gameplay that makes the player guess in which game state he/she is playing the game.

Returning to FIG. 10, the explanation will be continued. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the effective pattern for each probability variable area 73, 74 corresponding to the jackpot type of the first special symbol is "A" for "time saving A" and "latent probability variation B". The effective pattern is set to be "B" for "time saving B" and "latent probability variation A", and the effective pattern is set to be "C" for "probability variation A". (See FIG. 10(a)).

In addition, as the effective pattern of each probability variable area 73, 74 corresponding to the jackpot type of the second special symbol, the effective pattern is set to "A" in "time saving C", and the effective pattern is set as "A" in "latent probability variation C". is set to be "B", and the effective pattern is set to be "C" for "probability variation A" (see FIG. 10(b)).

Here, with reference to FIG. 12, the effective patterns of each probability variable area 73, 74 for each jackpot type will be explained. FIG. 12 is a diagram schematically showing an example of the probability variable area effective table 202g. The variable probability area effective table 202g shown in FIG. 12 shows variable probability areas 73 and 74 that are set effectively for each round for each jackpot type in each special symbol, and when the right variable probability area 73 is set effectively. is expressed as "right", and when the left probability variable area 74 is set to be valid, it is expressed as "left".

Note that in each round, when neither of the probability variable areas 73 and 74 is set to be valid, that is, when both probability variable areas 73 and 74 are set to be invalid, the corresponding column is expressed with diagonal ruled lines. Furthermore, in the first embodiment, when one of the probability variable regions 73, 74 (for example, the right probability variable region 73) is set to be valid, the other probability variable region 74, 73 (for example, the left probability variable region 74) is set to be invalid. is configured as set to .

As shown in FIG. 12, the effective pattern of each probability variable area 73, 74 in the jackpot type "Time saving A" and "Latent probability variation B" of the first special symbol and the jackpot type "Time saving C" of the second special symbol is " In "A", the right probability variable area 73 is set to be valid and the left probability variable area 74 is set to be invalid in the second round. Further, in the valid pattern "A", in the fifth round, the left probability variable area 74 is set to be valid, and the right probability variable area 73 is set to be invalid. In addition, in the valid pattern "A", both probability variable regions 73 and 74 are set to be invalid in other rounds (namely, the 1st round, the 3rd round, the 4th round, the 6th round, and after the 7th round).

That is, in the case of the effective pattern "A" in each probability variable area 73, 74, the jackpot is achieved when the ball passes through the right probability variable area 73 in the second round or the left probability variable area 74 in the fifth round. "Probability fluctuating state" will be given after completion.

Here, in the opening pattern of the jackpot types "time saving A" and "time saving C", the left probability variable area 74 is opened in the second round, while the right probability variable area 73 is closed. Further, in the fifth round, the right probability variable area 73 is open, while the left probability variable area 74 is closed. Therefore, the ball never passes through the probability variable regions 73 and 74 that are effectively set in any round. Therefore, in the jackpot types "time saving A" and "time saving C", since the ball does not pass through the probability variable regions 73 and 74 that are effectively set during the jackpot, the "probability variable state" does not occur after the jackpot ends. It is configured.

On the other hand, in the opening pattern of the jackpot type "latent probability variation B", the right probability variable area 73 is opened in the second round, while the left probability variable area 74 is closed. Further, in the fifth round, the left probability variable area 74 is open, while the right probability variable area 73 is closed. Therefore, the ball passes through the variable probability regions 73, 74 in a plurality of rounds in which each variable probability region 73, 74 is set effectively. Therefore, in the jackpot type "latent probability variation B", since the ball passes through the probability variation areas 73 and 74 that are effectively set during the jackpot, the system is configured such that the "probability variation state" occurs after the jackpot ends. There is.

Next, as shown in FIG. 12, each probability variation area 73, 74 in the first special symbol jackpot type "time saving B" and "latent probability variation A" and the second special symbol jackpot type "latent probability variation C" In the valid pattern "B", the right probability variable area 73 is set to be valid and the left probability variable area 74 is set to be invalid in the third round. Further, in the valid pattern "B", in the sixth round, the left probability variable area 74 is set to be valid, and the right probability variable area 73 is set to be invalid. In addition, in the valid pattern "B", both probability variable regions 73 and 74 are set to be invalid in other rounds (namely, the 1st round, the 2nd round, the 4th round, the 5th round, and after the 7th round).

That is, in the case of the effective pattern "B" of each probability variable area 73, 74, the jackpot is achieved when the ball passes through the right probability variable area 73 in the third round or the left probability variable area 74 in the sixth round. "Probability fluctuating state" will be given after completion.

Here, in the opening pattern of the jackpot type "time saving B", the left probability variable area 74 is opened in the third round, while the right probability variable area 73 is closed. Further, in the sixth round, the right probability variable area 73 is open, while the left probability variable area 74 is closed. Therefore, the ball never passes through the probability variable regions 73 and 74 that are effectively set in any round. Therefore, in the jackpot type "time saving B", since the ball does not pass through the probability variable regions 73 and 74 which are effectively set during the jackpot, the system is configured so that the "probability variation state" does not occur after the jackpot ends.

On the other hand, in the opening pattern of the jackpot types "Latent probability variation A" and "Latent probability variation C", the right probability variable area 73 is opened in the third round, while the left probability variable area 74 is closed. Further, in the sixth round, the left probability variable area 74 is open, while the right probability variable area 73 is closed. Therefore, the ball passes through the variable probability regions 73, 74 in a plurality of rounds in which each variable probability region 73, 74 is set effectively. Therefore, in the jackpot types "Latent probability variation A" and "Latent probability variation C", since the ball passes through the probability variation areas 73 and 74 that are effectively set during the jackpot, the "probability variation state" changes after the jackpot ends. is configured to occur.

Next, as shown in FIG. 12, the effective pattern "C" of each probability variable area 73, 74 in the jackpot type "probability variation A" of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is such that the right probability variable area 73 is in the fourth round. The left probability variable area 74 is set to be disabled while being set to be valid. Further, in the valid pattern "C", in the ninth round, the left probability variable area 74 is set to be valid, and the right probability variable area 73 is set to be invalid. It should be noted that in the valid pattern "C", the double probability variable regions 73 and 74 are set to be invalid in other rounds (namely, the 1st to 3rd rounds, the 5th to 8th rounds, and the 10th to 15th rounds).

That is, in the case of the effective pattern "C" of each probability variable area 73, 74, the jackpot is achieved when the ball passes through the right probability variable area 73 in the fourth round or the left probability variable area 74 in the ninth round. After the completion, a "probability fluctuation state" will be given.

Here, in the opening pattern of the jackpot type "probability variation A", the right probability variable area 73 is opened in the fourth round, while the left probability variable area 74 is closed. Further, in the ninth round, the left probability variable area 74 is open, while the right probability variable area 73 is closed. Therefore, the ball passes through the variable probability regions 73, 74 in a plurality of rounds in which each variable probability region 73, 74 is set effectively. Therefore, in the jackpot type "probability variation A", since the ball passes through the probability variation areas 73 and 74 that are effectively set during the jackpot, the system is configured such that the "probability variation state" occurs after the jackpot ends. .

In this manner, in each jackpot type, variable probability areas 73, 74 that can be passed through are set for each round, and validity/invalidity of variable probability areas 73, 74 is set corresponding to the round. By making it impossible to determine the type of jackpot based solely on the passage of the ball to each variable probability area 73, 74, it is made difficult (or impossible) for the player to recognize which type of jackpot he or she has won. It is possible to improve the interest of the game by creating a game feature that makes the player guess whether the game is being played in the game state.

In addition, in the first embodiment, when winning a jackpot type that generates a "probability fluctuation state" after the jackpot ends, the ball passes through the validly set probability fluctuation regions 73 and 74 in multiple rounds of the jackpot. It is configured so that it is possible. Therefore, even if the ball cannot pass through the valid variable probability areas 73, 74 in one of the rounds in which the variable probability areas 73, 74 are valid, It becomes possible to cause the ball to pass through the probability variable regions 73 and 74 that are effectively set in the round. Therefore, due to a sudden trouble (for example, a game abnormality such as a firing abnormality, a player's poor physical condition, etc.), it may be difficult for the ball to pass through the probability variable areas 73 and 74 in one of the valid rounds. Even if this occurs, by providing the possibility that the ball will pass through the probability variable areas 73 and 74 that are effectively set in the other round that are effectively set, the player will not be affected by unforeseen circumstances. It is possible to realize a comfortable game without incurring any profit, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, in the first embodiment, when winning a jackpot type that generates a "probability variation state" after the jackpot ends, in multiple rounds of the jackpot, different probability variation regions 73 and 74 are enabled, and the ball passes through the jackpot. configured to be possible. With this configuration, even if an abnormality occurs in one of the probability variable regions 73, 74, when a ball passes through the other probability variable region 74, 73, the "probability variation state" is established. ” can be generated. Therefore, the player can play the game comfortably without suffering any disadvantage due to unforeseen circumstances, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Note that the probability that each jackpot type will be selected in the event of a jackpot is appropriately set depending on the model. Then, in accordance with the set probability, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 associated with each jackpot type is defined in the jackpot type table 202b.

Further, the probability that the jackpot type is selected may be changed depending on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In this case, a jackpot type table 202b corresponding to each gaming state may be prepared, and the number of values of the jackpot type counter C2 associated with each jackpot type may be changed in each jackpot type table 202b.

Returning to FIG. 8, the explanation of the various counters will be continued. The stop pattern selection counter C3 is configured to increment sequentially by 1 within the range of 0 to 99, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99).

In the first embodiment, the rough performance mode of the variable performance at the time of jackpot and loss displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined based on the number of pending variable performances and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3. selected. Specifically, "Non-reach (shortened)" or "Non-reach (Normal)" production mode in which "Reach display" does not occur, and "Normal reach" in which only variable elements of "Normal reach" are executed as "Reach display" The "Normal Reach" production mode, the "Super Reach" production mode that develops from the variable elements of "Normal Reach" and executes the variable elements of "Super Reach", and the "Special Reach" production mode that also develops from the variable elements of "Normal Reach". Five performance modes are selected, including the "Special Reach" performance mode in which the variable element of "" is executed.

Here, each performance mode will be explained in detail. Among the production modes, the "non-reach (shortened)" production mode and the "non-reach (normal)" production mode are defined as the "non-reach (shortened)" production mode and the "non-reach (normal)" production mode in each display area Dm1 to Dm3 (see FIG. 6(a)) of the main display area Dm. This is a performance mode in which the same third symbol does not stop in the left display area Dm1 and right display area Dm3 and does not generate a "reach display" after the variable element of "high speed variation" is performed.

The variable elements of "high-speed variation" are displayed in each symbol row Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 6(a)) in the variation performance performed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 6). This refers to a variable element in which the third symbol is scrolled at high speed downward in the vertical direction of the display screen. In this "high-speed fluctuation", the third symbol is fluctuated so that the display contents of the third symbol cannot be clearly recognized by the player, and the stop results of the previously stopped fluctuating performance are irregularly mixed (shuffled). is executed as

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, after the variable element of "high-speed variation" is performed, the variable element of "low-speed variation" is performed except for a specific performance mode ("non-reach (shortened)" production mode). It is configured to be The variable element of "low-speed variation" is visually visible to the player after the variable element of the above-mentioned "high-speed variation" in the variation performance performed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 6(a)). It refers to a variable element that scrolls the third symbol at a slow speed as possible. In this variable element of "low speed fluctuation", while making the player recognize the display contents of the third symbol, the third symbol row is changed in the order of left symbol row Z1 → right symbol row Z3 → middle symbol row Z2 (see FIG. 6(a)). Stop displaying the symbol. If the same third symbol stops in the left symbol row Z1 and right symbol row Z3, it is assumed that a "reach display" has occurred and develops into a variable element of "normal reach", while in the left symbol row Z1 and right symbol row Z3 When a different third symbol stops, the middle symbol row Z2 is stopped and displayed, and the fluctuating performance is ended (excluding when it develops into a "pseudo series" described later).

Therefore, in the "non-reach (normal)" performance mode, after the "high speed fluctuation" fluctuation element is performed, the "low speed fluctuation" fluctuation element is performed, and each symbol row Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 6(a) ) stop in order, and the first variable performance ends. On the other hand, in the "non-reach (shortened)" production mode, the "low speed fluctuation" variable element is not performed after the "high speed fluctuation" is performed, and after the completion of the "high speed fluctuation" variable element, each symbol row Z1 ~ Z3 stops at the same time, and the fluctuating performance of 1 ends.

Among the presentation modes, the "normal reach" presentation mode refers to the variable presentation of each symbol row Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 6(a)) in the main display area Dm, in which the same pattern is applied to the left symbol row Z1 and the right symbol row Z3. Immediately after the third symbol stops, the variable element of "Normal reach" is executed, and other "reach display", that is, the "reach display" that does not develop into the variable element of "Super reach" or the variable element of "Special reach". This is one of the production modes. In this "normal reach" variable element, as described above, the third symbol that is stopped and displayed in the left symbol row Z1 (left display area Dm1) and right symbol row Z3 (right display area Dm3) of the main display area Dm Displayed larger than usual. Further, the third symbol in the middle symbol row Z2 (the middle display area Dm2) is scrolled downward in the vertical direction of the display screen at a low speed, and the third symbol in the middle display area Dm2 is displayed in a state where it can be visually recognized by the player. . Furthermore, in the variable element of this "normal reach", the sub-display area Ds is erased (not shown) along with the enlarged display of the main display area Dm.

Among the production modes, the "super reach" production mode is one of the production modes of "reach display" in which variable elements of "super reach" are executed, developed from variable elements of "normal reach". In this "Super Reach" performance mode, while the "Super Reach" variable element is being executed, the cockpit display area Db (see FIG. 6(a)) is erased from the display state of the "Normal Reach" variable element, and this " The third symbol, the reach-forming symbol, which was the cause of the "reach display" is displayed in a reduced size at the upper left of the display area of the display screen. Then, the background display in the main display area Dm changes from the variable element of "normal reach", and a plurality of character designs are made to appear to perform "battle performance (for example, kickboxing)" (not shown).

In the first embodiment, the system is configured to suggest whether or not the variable performance is appropriate based on the result (win or loss) of the "battle performance". Specifically, for example, in the above-mentioned "battle effect," if the player's character symbol wins over the enemy's character symbol, the variable effect suggests that it will be a "jackpot display," and the player If the side's character pattern loses to the enemy's character pattern, the fluctuating performance is configured to indicate a "loss display."

Among the production modes, the "special reach" production mode is one of the production modes of "reach display" in which variable elements of "special reach" are executed, which are developed from variable elements of "normal reach". In this "Special Reach" performance mode, while the variable element of "Special Reach" is being executed, the display state of the variable element of "Normal Reach" is changed from the display state of the variable element of "Normal Reach" to the cockpit display area Db (Fig. 6 (see (a)) is erased, and the third symbol, the reach-forming symbol, which was the cause of this "reach display", is displayed in a reduced size at the upper left of the display area of the display screen. Then, the background display in the main display area Dm (see FIG. 6(a)) changes from the variable elements of "Normal Reach", and multiple characters different from the variable elements of "Super Reach" appear, and the "Competitive Effect" (for example, a car race)” (not shown).

The first embodiment is configured to suggest the propriety of the variable performance based on the result (win or loss) of the "competitive performance". Specifically, for example, in the above-mentioned "competitive effect," if the player's character symbol wins over the opponent's character symbol, the player's If the side's character pattern loses to the enemy's character pattern, the fluctuating performance is configured to indicate a "loss display."

The value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (in the first embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22)). Then, at the timing when the ball enters the special drawing 1 winning hole 64b (starting winning), the ball is placed in the first reserved ball storage area 203d of the RAM 203 provided corresponding to the special drawing 1 winning hole 64b (first special symbol). The jackpot random number counter C1 is stored in the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203d3 of the first reservation area in which the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored in the first reservation first to fourth areas. In addition, at the timing when the ball enters the special drawing 2 winning hole 64c (starting winning), the ball is placed in the second reserved ball storage area 203e of the RAM 203 provided corresponding to the special drawing 2 winning hole 64c (second special symbol). The jackpot random number counter C1 is stored in the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203e3 of the second reservation area in which the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored among the second reservation first to fourth areas.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is referred to according to the validity of the variable performance, the current game state, and the number of currently pending variable performances (number of pending balls). The stop pattern table 202d is configured differently. That is, the stop pattern table 202d is provided with a plurality of types, and is configured to be selected depending on the number of variable performances on standby (number of pending balls), etc.

In addition, in the first embodiment, when determining the detailed fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation performance, first, based on the pending number table 202c provided in the ROM 202, the validity of the fluctuation performance, the current gaming state, and the current One of the stop pattern tables 202d corresponding to the number of variable effects (number of reserved balls) is selected. Then, based on the selected stop pattern table 202d and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, a rough performance mode of the variable performance is selected. Thereafter, a detailed variation pattern (variation time) of the variation performance is determined based on the selected performance mode and the value of a variation type counter CS1, which will be described later.

The plurality of types of stop pattern tables 202d are set so that the range of the random number value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 from which the performance mode is selected is different for each stop pattern table 202d. The reason why a plurality of stop pattern tables 202d are prepared is to change the selection ratio of the production mode of the variable production according to the propriety of the variation production, the game state, and the number of reserved balls. That is, (1) a jackpot occurs in the variation performance of the acquired third symbol, or (2) the current gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is "probability variation state", "time reduction state", or "normal gaming state". This is to change the selection ratio of the production mode depending on whether there is one or not, and (3) how many balls are on hold for the variable production that is on hold.

The first reason for this is to change the degree of expectation of a jackpot for each production mode. In other words, the percentage of selection of "Non-reach" presentation mode, "Normal reach" presentation mode, "Super reach" presentation mode, and "Special reach" presentation mode when winning the jackpot lottery and when losing the jackpot lottery. By configuring the system to be different, the degree of expectation of a jackpot is changed for each performance mode. Specifically, for example, if you win the jackpot lottery, you can easily select the "super reach" presentation mode or the "special reach" presentation mode, and if you do not win the jackpot lottery, you can select the "non-reach" presentation mode. To make it easy to select a mode and a "normal reach" performance mode. By configuring this way, the "Super Reach" performance mode and the "Special Reach" performance mode can be made easy to hit the jackpot, while the "Normal Reach" production mode and the "Non-Reach" production mode are difficult to hit the jackpot. It is possible to create a performance or a performance that does not lead to a jackpot, and it is possible to differentiate the degree of expectation of a jackpot for each performance mode. Therefore, when a performance that is easy to hit a jackpot appears in a fluctuating performance, it is suggested to the player that there is a high possibility of a jackpot occurring while the performance that is easy to hit a jackpot is being performed, thereby increasing the interest of the game. There is.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the obtained lottery result is a jackpot, based on the stop pattern table 202d that makes it easy to select a performance that is easy to win a jackpot, and difficult to select a performance that is difficult to hit a jackpot. The present invention is configured to select a presentation mode of a variable presentation. On the other hand, when the acquired lottery result is a loss, the stop pattern table 202d is configured so that it is difficult to select a performance that is likely to lead to a jackpot, and it is easy to select a performance that is difficult to win a jackpot. As a result, when notifying the player of the lottery result of the third symbol in a variable performance, if a performance that is likely to lead to a jackpot is being executed, a jackpot is likely to occur with that variable performance, and a performance that is difficult to hit is executed. By making it difficult for a jackpot to occur in the fluctuating performance when the game is running, and by providing a difference in the expected jackpot value for each performance mode, it is possible to increase the interest of the game during the execution of the fluctuating performance.

In addition, the second reason is that the ball enters the special figure 1 winning hole 64b in a state where the number of times of waiting for the fluctuating performance of the first special symbol has reached the upper limit, or the number of times of waiting for the fluctuating performance of the second special symbol is This is to reduce as much as possible the wasted balls (so-called no lottery due to overflow winnings) based on balls entering the special drawing 2 winning hole 64c in a state where the upper limit has been reached. To explain more specifically, the number of standby times for the fluctuating effects of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is each set at a maximum of 4 times, and since the fluctuating effects are executed for at least a certain period of time, the "probability" In the game state in which balls are likely to enter the special figure 2 winning hole 64c in the "variable state", it is easy to reach the maximum number of reserved balls for the second special symbol. In these game states, if you select a variable performance with a long variable time, the ball will frequently enter the special figure 2 winning hole 64c when the maximum number of reserved balls of the second special symbol has been reached, and the special figure 2 Even though the ball enters the winning hole 64c, the lottery opportunity for the second special symbol cannot be obtained. In addition, even in the "normal game state", if you select a variable performance with a long variation time when the maximum number of balls reserved for the first special symbol has been reached, the first special symbol will be suspended during the execution of the variable performance. Since the number of balls is not consumed, even if a ball enters the special symbol 1 winning hole 64b during that time, a lottery opportunity for the first special symbol cannot be acquired. In such a state, the player determines that no gaming value can be obtained even if the ball enters the special drawing 1 prize opening 64b, and the variable effect is exhausted and the player is able to obtain the number of reserved balls again. The ball stops firing and the game is interrupted until the ball reaches the target. When the game is interrupted, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 decreases, which affects the management of the game parlor.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, a game state in which the maximum number of reserved balls of the third symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) is easily reached, or a state where the maximum number of reserved balls is close to (or matches) Regarding the number of reserved pitches, the performance mode of the variable performance is selected based on the stop pattern table 202d in which a relatively short fluctuation time is likely to be selected. This prevents balls from entering the special pattern 1 winning hole 64b or the special pattern 2 winning hole 64c when the maximum number of reserved balls for the third symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) has been reached. be able to.

Furthermore, the third reason is to maintain the state in which the fluctuating performance is being executed for a long time by setting the execution time long and delaying the end of the fluctuating performance. To explain specifically, when the number of reserved balls in a variable performance is small (non-existent), a new ball is placed in either the special drawing 1 winning hole 64b or the special drawing 2 winning hole 64c within the variable time of the variable effect being executed. Unless the ball enters the ball, the next variable performance cannot be started, and the third symbol display device 81 must display a demo screen or the like. If the player does not perform a variable performance on the third symbol display device 81 even though he or she is playing a game by shooting balls, the player may not be able to obtain the entertainment related to the jackpot lottery that the player is looking for. I get excited about the game. In addition, the player recognizes that the pachinko machine 10 is such that it is difficult for the ball to enter the special drawing 1 winning hole 64b or the special drawing 2 winning hole 64c because the variable performance is not performed on the third symbol display device 81. However, there is a risk that the player may decide that it is a machine with which it is difficult to obtain gaming value and stop playing on that pachinko machine 10.

Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured to select the production mode of the variable production based on the stop pattern table 202d in which a relatively long variation time is likely to be selected when the number of balls on hold for the variable production is small. has been done. Thereby, a situation in which the variable performance is not performed on the third symbol display device 81 is made difficult to occur, and the execution state of the variable performance on the third symbol display device 81 can be maintained for a long time.

The variation type counter CS1 is configured such that, for example, it is sequentially incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 199, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 199). The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once every time a timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22), which will be described later, is executed once, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time in the main process (see FIG. 33). Then, at the timing when the ball enters the special drawing 1 winning hole 64b (starting winning), the ball is placed in the first reserved ball storage area 203d of the RAM 203 provided corresponding to the special drawing 1 winning hole 64b (first special symbol). The jackpot random number counter C1 is stored in the fluctuation type counter storage area 203d4 of the first reservation area in which the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored in the first reservation first to fourth areas. In addition, at the timing when the ball enters the special drawing 2 winning hole 64c (starting winning), the ball is placed in the second reserved ball storage area 203e of the RAM 203 provided corresponding to the special drawing 2 winning hole 64c (second special symbol). It is stored in the fluctuation type counter storage area 203e4 of the second reservation area where the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored among the second reservation first to fourth areas.

The variation type counter CS1 is used to determine a detailed variation pattern of the variation performance. That is, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 uses the value of the variation type counter CS1 and the variation pattern table 202e stored in the ROM 202 to perform detailed processing in the performance mode selected by the stop pattern table 202d and the stop pattern selection counter C3. Determine the fluctuation pattern. Determining the fluctuation pattern is specifically determining the fluctuation time of the fluctuation performance. The audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 change the reach type and detailed pattern of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the variation pattern (variation time) determined by the variation type counter CS1. The variation mode is determined, and whether or not to execute the preview performance and the execution mode of the preview performance are determined.

In this way, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 selects a rough variation pattern of the variation performance and determines only the variation time. With this configuration, there is no need for the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to control detailed advance notice lottery etc. necessary for executing the variable effect, so the processing of the MPU 201 regarding the variable effect can be reduced. can. Further, it is no longer necessary to prepare commands for all the variation patterns of the variation effect in the main control device 110, and the ROM capacity of the main control device 110 can be reduced.

In addition, the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 determine detailed fluctuation patterns in the fluctuation performance based on the fluctuation time (rough fluctuation pattern) determined by the main control device 110, thereby controlling the fluctuation performance. You can increase your freedom of choice. Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 where the gaming state changes from moment to moment, it becomes possible to select or change the production content of the variable production at any time in response to the change, and it is possible to execute an appropriate production according to the gaming state. can.

Here, each variable element making up the variation pattern will be explained. A variable element constitutes a part of one variable effect, and one variable effect is constructed by combining each variable element. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the variable elements include a "high-speed variation" variation element, a "low-speed variation" variation element, a "pseudo-link" variation element, a "normal reach" variation element, and a "super reach" variation element. A variable element, a "special reach" variable element, and a "re-variation" variable element are provided.

The "high-speed variation" variation element is a variation element that scrolls and varies at high speed so that the content of the third symbol cannot be clearly recognized by the player. This variable element of "high-speed fluctuation" is performed for "3 seconds" at the beginning of the variable performance when the "non-reach (shortened)" performance mode is selected, and the variable element other than "non-reach (shortened)" For example, if the performance mode "Non-reach (normal)" is selected, the variable performance is performed for "7 seconds" at the beginning. In addition, when the variable element of this "high-speed variation" ends, the variable element of "low-speed variation" to be described later is started (executed), or the variation effect ends as it is.

The variable element of "low-speed variation" starts after the execution of the variable element of "high-speed variation" of "7 seconds", and determines whether or not to scroll the third symbol to make it visible and generate a "reach display". It is a variable element that can be shown. This variable element of "low speed fluctuation" is not executed when the "non-reach (shortened)" production mode is selected, and is not executed when the "non-reach (shortened)" production mode is selected. )" effect mode) is selected, "3 seconds" is performed after the variation element of "high-speed variation". That is, in the "non-reach (shortened)" performance mode, after the "high-speed fluctuation" variable element is performed, each symbol row Z1 to Z3 in the main display area Dm is displayed without passing through the "low-speed fluctuation" variable element. It is configured to stop rapidly (so-called "bitter stop"). In addition, when the variable element of "low speed fluctuation" ends, the variable element of "pseudo-link" described later will start (execution), or the variable element of "normal reach" described later will start (execute). , or the variable performance is configured to end immediately.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the "non-reach (normal)" performance mode includes the variable element of "high-speed variation" of "7 seconds" and the variable element of "low-speed variation" of "3 seconds". A variable performance is composed of the included variation patterns. In addition, in the "non-reach (shortened)" performance mode, the fluctuation performance is configured with a fluctuation pattern of only the variable element of "high-speed fluctuation" of "3 seconds".

The variable element of "pseudo series" is a variable element in which the start of the variable effect occurs multiple times (the pseudo stop occurs once) in one variable effect. Specifically, in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 of the third symbol display device 81, the variable element of "high speed fluctuation" is started and switched to the variable element of "low speed fluctuation", and then in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. This is a variable element in which a unit effect is performed in which a predetermined stop result (for example, pseudo consecutive chance number "677") is displayed after the variable effect is completed. The variable element of this "pseudo-connection" is that when the above-mentioned predetermined stop result stops after the variable element of "low-speed fluctuation", the variable element of "high-speed fluctuation" starts again from that stop result, as if it were once again. A performance is executed as if a variable performance had started.

In this "pseudo-continuation" variation element, a predetermined stop result (so-called pseudo-continuation chance) appears after the execution of the "low-speed variation" variation element, and the second "high-speed variation" variation element is executed again. , which is a variable element that then develops into a variable element of "normal reach". In other words, for the variable element of "pseudo-connection", a pseudo-variation stop (hereinafter referred to as "pseudo-stop") is performed once in which a pseudo-run chance item is displayed, and after that, a predetermined stop result is achieved in that pseudo-stop. This is a variable element that appears and starts the variable element of "high-speed variation" again. The pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured such that after the "pseudo-reach" variable element ends, it always develops into at least a "normal reach" variable element. This "pseudo-continuation" variation element is performed "10 seconds" after the "low-speed variation" variation element.

In addition, in the first embodiment, the number of pseudo stops is set to one in the variable element of "pseudo series", but the number of pseudo stops is changed to execute the variable element of "pseudo series" in which the number of pseudo stops is performed twice or more. may be configured. Furthermore, it may be configured to perform a variable element (so-called "pseudo false" variable element) that indicates whether or not the pseudo consecutive chance will stop before the occurrence of the "pseudo consecutive" variable element. . In this "pseudo false" variable element, the effect of whether or not a predetermined stop result will appear after the execution of the "low speed change" variable element (for example, the symbol forming the above predetermined stop result is on the active line L1 ( (See Fig. 6 (a)) to perform a reciprocating motion on the top and whether or not to stop. It may be configured so that the variable element of "pseudo-connection" does not develop. By providing a variable element of this "pseudo false", after the variable element of the "pseudo false" ends, it will develop into a variable element of "normal reach", or a "loss display" will appear (for example, "687 '') and the variable performance ends as it is.

The variable elements of "Normal reach" are the variable elements of "Low speed fluctuation" or the variable elements of "Pseudo chain" (hereinafter, the variable elements of "Low speed fluctuation" or the variable elements of "Pseudo chain") are collectively referred to as "Slow speed fluctuation" variable elements or "Pseudo chain" variable elements. A variation that shows whether or not a jackpot will occur depending on the fluctuation result of the middle symbol row Z2 when reach-forming symbols are stopped and displayed in the left symbol row Z1 and right symbol row Z3 in the "variation element of "variation, etc."). is an element. This "normal reach" variation element is performed "10 seconds" after the "low speed variation, etc." variation element.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, after the variable element of "normal reach" is executed, there is a pattern that directly displays a "loss display", a pattern that directly displays a "jackpot display", and a pattern that directly displays a "super reach". There is a pattern that develops into a variable element, a pattern that develops into a variable element of "Special Reach", and a pattern that executes a variable element of "re-variation" after a temporary "loss display" appears. has been done.

The variable element of "Super Reach" is developed and executed when the fluctuation of the middle symbol row Z2 continues without stopping the "loss display" in the variable element of "Normal Reach", and the "Battle" is executed in the main display area Dm. It is a variable element that shows whether or not a jackpot will occur by performing "performance". This "super reach" variable element is performed "10 seconds" after the execution of the "normal reach" variable element.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, after the variable element of "super reach" is executed, a pattern that directly displays a "loss display", a pattern that directly displays a "jackpot display", and a temporary A pattern is prepared in which the variable element of "revariation" is executed after the "loss display" appears.

The variable element of "Special Reach" is developed and executed when the "loss display" does not stop in the variable element of "Normal Reach" and the fluctuation of the middle symbol row Z2 continues, and the "Competitive Reach" variable element is developed and executed in the main display area Dm. It is a variable element that shows whether or not a jackpot will occur by performing "performance". This "special reach" variable element is performed "20 seconds" after the execution of the "normal reach" variable element.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, after the variable element of "Special Reach" is executed, a pattern that directly displays a "loss display", a pattern that directly displays a "jackpot display", and a temporary A pattern is prepared in which the "re-variation" occurs after the "loss display" appears.

Note that the configuration is such that after the execution of the variable element of "Normal Reach", the variable element of "Super Reach" or the variable element of "Special Reach" develops, but instead of this configuration, reach formation is performed after "Slow Variation". When the symbol stops, it may be configured so that it suddenly develops into a "super reach" variable element or a "special reach" variable element without passing through the "normal reach" variable element. Further, the variable element of "Special Reach" may be configured to be executed after the variable element of "Super Reach" is executed.

The variable element of "re-variation" is a variable element that is developed and executed after a "loss display" once appears in any "reach display", and a "jackpot display" appears. The variable element of this "re-variation" is performed for "10 seconds" after any "reach display".

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, a pattern is prepared in which a "jackpot display" appears after the variable element of "re-variation" is executed.

Further, the variable element of this "re-variation" is configured to occur only when a jackpot is won. That is, in the case of "loss indication", the variable element of "re-variation" is configured not to be executed. This is because the variable element of "re-variation" is a variable element that changes the temporarily displayed "losing display" to one of the "jackpot displays", so if the "losing display" does not win the jackpot If you go to that, there will be a discrepancy in the production. Therefore, the variable element of this "re-variation" is selected only in the variation pattern table 202e for jackpots, and is configured not to be selected in the variation pattern table 202e for loses.

The random number counter C4 per common figure is configured as a loop counter that sequentially increments by 1 within the range of, for example, "0 to 99" and returns to "0" after reaching the maximum value (that is, "99"). Further, when the random number counter C4 per ordinary figure completes one revolution, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the random number counter C4 per ordinary figure.

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the random number counter C4 per common map (value = "0 to 99"), and is updated every timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 22). It is updated once and repeatedly within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 33).

The value of the random number counter C4 per ordinary symbol is updated, for example, periodically (in the first embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22)), and when it is detected that the ball has passed through the ordinary symbol gate 67. At the same timing, the ball is stored in any one of the first to fourth areas provided in the ball storage area 203j of the RAM 203. Then, the data is sequentially shifted to the normal pattern held ball execution area 203k in the order stored in the normal pattern held ball storage area 203j, and the value of the random number counter C4 per normal pattern stored in the normal pattern held ball execution area 203k is changed. Make a hit judgment against the target.

The value of the random number that becomes a hit for a normal symbol is set by a random number table for a normal symbol (not shown) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 for each gaming state (for example, "1/10" in a low probability state, 9/10) in the high probability state, and the value of the normal pattern winning counter C4 stored in the normal pattern holding ball execution area 203k is the random number value set by the normal pattern random number table. If it matches, it is determined to be a hit. Then, the normal symbol variation time table (not shown) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 is referred to according to the gaming state, and the variable display time of the normal symbol (for example, "3 seconds" or "0.5 seconds") is referred to. seconds") is set, and after the variable display time has elapsed on the normal symbol display device 83, a symbol "○" is lit and displayed as a stop symbol (normal symbol). Thereafter, the normal electric accessory control table (not shown) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 is referred to according to the game state, and the opening time of the rotating plate of the ordinary electric accessory 67a (for example, "0. 5 seconds" or "5 seconds"), and the rotary plate rotates during the opening time, and the ball is configured to be able to roll on the upper surface of the rotary plate during that time.

On the other hand, if the value of the normal pattern counter C4 stored in the normal pattern holding ball execution area 203k does not match the random number value set by the normal pattern random number table (not shown), It is judged to be a failure. Then, a variable display time (for example, "3 seconds" or "0.5 seconds") is set by referring to the normal symbol variation time table (not shown) according to the gaming state, and the normal symbol display device 83 sets the variable display time. After the variable display time has elapsed, an "x" symbol is lit and displayed as a stop symbol (normal symbol).

The pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured such that variations in the probability of winning or failing the normal symbols, the variable display time of the normal symbols, and the opening time of the rotary plate of the normal electric accessory 67a are different depending on each game state. Ru. Specifically, for example, in the "normal game state" which does not have the "time saving function", the probability of winning or failing the normal symbols is low, the variable display time of the normal symbols is long, and the rotating board is The opening time is set to be short. In addition, in the "probability fluctuation state" or "time reduction state" which has a "time function", the probability of winning or failing the normal symbol is high, the variable display time of the normal symbol is short, and the rotating plate is opened. The time is set to be long.

In this way, the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 is provided with various counters, and the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 is provided with various tables. According to each of the tables 202a to 202g described above, the pachinko machine performs jackpot lottery, dynamic display and variable performance settings on the special symbol display device 37 and third symbol display device 81, and display result lottery on the normal symbol display device 83. Ten main operations can be performed.

Returning to FIG. 7, the explanation will be continued. In addition to the counter buffer 203c shown in FIG. 8, the RAM 203 includes a stack area where the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, and various flags, counters, and input/output data. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as output (Input/Output; hereinafter abbreviated as "I/O") are stored. Note that the RAM 203 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by being supplied with backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage or the like, the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of the power cutoff (including when the power cut occurs; the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power-on due to resolution of a power outage; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off, based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 33) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed during the start-up process when the power is turned on (see FIG. 32). Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the non-maskable interrupt (hereinafter abbreviated as "NMI") terminal of the MPU 201 when the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power failure, etc. When the power outage signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201, NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 31) is immediately executed as processing at the time of a power outage.

The RAM 203 further includes a first held ball number counter 203a, a second held ball number counter 203b, a first held ball storage area 203d, a second held ball storage area 203e, a held ball execution area 203f, a right probability variable valid flag 203g, and a left held ball number counter 203a. It has at least a probability variation valid flag 203h and a probability variation transition flag 203i.

The first reserved ball number counter 203a is the number of balls entering the special figure 1 first prize opening 64b ( Hereinafter, the ball entering the special figure 1 winning hole 64b or the special drawing 2 winning hole 64c may be referred to as "starting winning"), the dynamic movement of the first special symbol performed on the special symbol display device 37. This is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of times of standby) of the display (fluctuating performance of the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol performed on the third symbol display device 81) up to four times.

The first reserved ball counter 203a is set to "0" as an initial value by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on (S913 in FIG. 32). Then, each time a starting prize into the special figure 1 winning hole 64b is detected and the number of reserved balls in the dynamic display (fluctuating effect) regarding the first special symbol increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value "4" (Fig. (See S203 of 23). On the other hand, the first reserved ball number counter 203a is decremented by 1 each time the dynamic display (variable effect) of the first special symbol is executed (see S308 in FIG. 24).

The second reserved ball number counter 203b, like the first reserved ball number counter 203a, is a special figure 2 detected during the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22) that is periodically executed every "4 milliseconds". Dynamic display of the second special symbol performed on the special symbol display device 37 (fluctuating display of the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol performed on the third symbol display device 81) based on the starting winning in the winning hole 64c ) is a counter that counts the number of balls held (number of times on standby) up to 4 times.

Like the first reserved pitch number counter 203a, the second reserved pitch number counter 203b is set to "0" as an initial value by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on (S913 in FIG. 32). Then, each time a starting prize into the special figure 2 winning hole 64c is detected and the number of reserved balls in the dynamic display (fluctuating effect) regarding the second special symbol increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value "4" (Fig. (See S207 of 23). On the other hand, the second reserved ball number counter 203b is decremented by 1 every time the dynamic display (variable effect) of the second special symbol is executed (see S305 in FIG. 24).

The value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a (i.e., the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol) or the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b (i.e., the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol) is determined by the number of reserved balls command The audio lamp control device 113 is notified by (see S210 in FIG. 23). The held ball number command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp control device 113 every time a starting prize is detected and the first held ball number counter 203a or the second held ball number counter 203b is incremented by 1. This is a command.

The audio lamp control device 113 can acquire the value of the number of balls held in the dynamic display (fluctuating effect) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol held in the main control device 110 by the number of balls commanded. can. Thereby, in the audio lamp control device 113, it is possible to manage the number of times the dynamic display (fluctuating effect) of each special symbol is held without accessing the main control device 110. In addition, each time a starting prize is detected, a command for the number of reserved balls is sent from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp controller 113, thereby dynamically displaying (variable) each special symbol managed in the audio lamp controller 113. Even if the number of balls on hold for the actual dynamic display (fluctuation effect) deviates from the number of balls on hold for the actual dynamic display (fluctuation effect) held in the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise, etc., the number of balls on hold for the next received ball The deviation can be corrected using the pitch count command.

Note that the audio lamp control device 113 transmits a display held pitch number command for notifying the number of held balls to the display control device 114 every time the number of held balls managed therein changes. The display control device 114 displays a reserved symbol in the cockpit display area Db of the third symbol display device 81 based on the number of reserved balls notified by this display reserved pitch number command.

Further, in the first embodiment, when the main control device 110 transmits a held ball number command to the audio lamp control device 113, in the held ball number command, the first held ball number counter 203a incremented by 1 or the Along with the above-mentioned starting prize that triggered the addition of not only the value of the second reserved pitch number counter 203b but also the first reserved pitch number counter 203a or the second reserved pitch number counter 203b, the counter buffer 203c (see FIG. 8) It also includes the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, stop pattern selection counter C3, and fluctuation type counter CS1 obtained from the above.

That is, when there is a starting prize, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, stop pattern selection counter C3, and fluctuation type counter CS1 acquired from the counter buffer 203c by the main controller 110 are A number of commands are transmitted to the audio lamp controller 113.

In the audio lamp control device 113, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS1, which are transmitted by the number of reserved balls command, are used to execute a fluctuation performance based on the respective values. It reads ahead before executing the variable performance and determines how the variable performance will turn out (whether it will be a jackpot or not, what will be the variable time, etc.) before executing the variable performance. Then, based on the results of the pre-read judgment, it is possible to decide on the execution of various effects, and to determine the effect contents and execution timing of the "pending change notice".

In addition, the number of pending balls command indicating the number of pending balls for the variable performance and the command indicating the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 etc. may be transmitted separately. As a command indicating the value of the jackpot random number counter C1, etc., which is different from the reserved ball number command, a reserved ball number command is generated at the timing of the ball entering the special drawing 1 winning hole 64b or the special drawing 2 winning hole 64c. , a command similar to the variation pattern command and stop type command based on the ball entry (pre-variation pattern command and pre-stop type command) may be generated and transmitted to the audio ramp control device 113. In this case, regarding the program for generating the pre-variation pattern command and the pre-stop type command, by reusing the program of the variation pattern command and the stop type command, it is possible to facilitate the creation of the program.

As described above, the first reserved ball storage area 203d contains the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the stop jackpot random number counter C1, which are acquired from the counter buffer 203c upon detection of a starting winning in any of the special figure 1 winning holes 64b. This is a memory for storing the values of the pattern selection counter C3 and the variation type counter CS1, respectively. During the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22), when the MPU 201 detects that the ball has entered the special drawing 1 winning hole 64b (starting winning), it reads the values of each counter C1 to C3 and CS1 from the counter buffer 203c. is acquired and stored in the first reserved ball storage area 203d. The first reserved ball storage area 203d has four reserved balls so that the data (values of counters C1 to C3, CS1) corresponding to the first special symbol 1 starting winning can be stored (reserved) up to four times. It has areas (first reservation areas 1 to 4) (see FIG. 8).

As described above, the second reserved ball storage area 203e stores the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter acquired from the counter buffer 203c upon detection of a starting winning into the special figure 2 winning hole 64c. C3 and a memory for storing each value of the variation type counter CS1. During the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 22), when the MPU 201 detects that the ball has entered the special drawing 2 winning hole 64c (starting winning), it reads the values of each counter C1 to C3 and CS1 from the counter buffer 203c. is acquired and stored in the second reserved ball storage area 203e. The second reserved ball storage area 203e has four reserved balls so that the data (values of counters C1 to C3, CS1) corresponding to the first winning of the second special symbol can be stored (reserved) up to four times. It has areas (second reservation first to fourth areas) (see FIG. 8).

As described above, the reserved ball execution area 203f is used for the jackpot lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol that starts execution or is being executed, or the operation of the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81. This is a memory for storing data (values of counters C1 to C3 and CS1) to be referred to in processes such as displaying targets and setting variable effects.

When the MPU 201 detects that it is the timing to start executing the variable performance of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the MPU 201 performs the jackpot lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display. In order to execute processes such as dynamic display and variable performance settings of the device 81, data corresponding to each starting prize stored in the first held ball storage area 203d or the second held ball storage area 203e described above ( Among the values of counters C1 to C3, CS1), if data corresponding to a starting prize related to the second special symbol is stored in the second reserved ball storage area 203e, the data corresponding to a starting winning of 1 of the data is stored. The data is shifted to this held ball execution area 203f. On the other hand, the data corresponding to the starting prize regarding the second special symbol is not stored in the second reserved ball storage area 203e, and the data corresponding to the starting winning regarding the first special symbol is stored in the first reserved ball storing area 203d. If so, the data corresponding to one starting prize of the data is shifted to this held ball execution area 203f. That is, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the dynamic display (variable performance) regarding the second special symbol is executed with priority, and the dynamic display (variable performance) regarding the first special symbol is executed with priority. It is configured to be executed on the condition that the dynamic display (fluctuation effect) is not suspended. Note that a shift in the first embodiment refers to moving data stored in one area to another area.

Here, with reference to FIG. 8 again, details of the first held ball storage area 203d, the second held ball storage area 203e, and the held ball execution area 203f will be described. The first reserved ball storage area 203d, the second reserved ball storage area 203e, and the reserved ball execution area 203f are used for the jackpot lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol and the operation of the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81. It is used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform target display and setting of variable effects.

As described above, the jackpot random number counter used for the jackpot lottery is used for the jackpot lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and for the dynamic display and variable effects settings of the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81. C1, a jackpot type counter C2 used to determine the jackpot type, a stop pattern selection counter C3 used to determine the performance mode of the fluctuating performance, and a fluctuation type counter CS1 used to determine the fluctuating pattern. The first reserved ball storage area 203d stores each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired from the counter buffer 203c by the MPU 201 when a ball enters the special map 1 winning hole 64b (starting winning). , the second reserved ball storage area 203e stores each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired from the counter buffer 203c by the MPU 201 when a ball enters the special map 2 winning hole 64c (starting winning). .

The first holding ball storage area 203d is composed of four holding areas (first holding areas 1 to 4). The four holding areas (first holding areas 1 to 4) each include a jackpot random number counter storage area 203d1 that stores the value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and a jackpot type counter storage area that stores the value of the jackpot type counter C2. 203d2, a stop pattern selection counter storage area 203d3 that stores the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, and a fluctuation type counter storage area 203d4 that stores the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

Further, the second holding ball storage area 203e is composed of four holding areas (second holding first to fourth areas), similar to the first holding ball storage area 203d. Each of the four holding areas (second holding first to fourth areas) includes a jackpot random number counter storage area 203e1 that stores the value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and a jackpot type counter C2, similar to the first holding ball storage area 203d. A jackpot type counter storage area 203e2 for storing the value of , a stop pattern selection counter storage area 203e3 for storing the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, and a fluctuation type counter storage area 203e4 for storing the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 are provided. It is being

In the first embodiment, the jackpot random number counter storage areas 203d1, 203e1, the jackpot type counter storage areas 203d2, 203e2, the stop pattern selection counter storage areas 203d3, 203e3, and the fluctuation type counter storage areas 203d4, 203e4 are combined into one. Although these holding ball storage areas 203d and 203e are provided together, a plurality of holding ball storage areas may be provided for each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1.

As described above, the first reserved ball storage area 203d contains data (each value of each counter C1 to C3, CS1) acquired at the timing when a ball enters one of the special drawing 1 winning holes 64b (starting winning). will be stored for up to four times, but in that case, the area with the smallest area number (1st to 4th) among the four vacant areas (1st holding area 1st to 4th area) will be stored. Data is stored in order. In other words, the area with the smaller area number stores the data corresponding to the start winning to the special drawing 1 winning hole 64b which is older in time, and the data corresponding to the start winning to the special drawing 1 winning hole 64b which is the oldest in terms of time is stored in the first reservation first area. Data corresponding to the starting winning to 64b will be stored.

In addition, in the second reserved ball storage area 203e, data (each value of each counter C1 to C3, CS1) acquired at the timing when a ball enters the special map 2 winning hole 64c (starting winning) is stored for up to 4 times. However, in that case, data will be stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (1st to 4th) among the four vacant areas (2nd reservation areas 1st to 4th). be done. In other words, the area with the smaller area number stores the data corresponding to the start winning to the special drawing 2 winning hole 64c which is older in time, and the data corresponding to the start winning to the special drawing 2 winning hole 64c which is the oldest in terms of time is stored in the second reservation first area. Data corresponding to the starting prize winning to 64c will be stored.

On the other hand, the reserved ball execution area 203f consists of only one area. Like the first reserved ball storage area 203d or the second reserved ball storage area 203e, this reserved ball execution area 203f includes a jackpot random number counter storage area 203f1 that stores the value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and a jackpot random number counter storage area 203f1 that stores the value of the jackpot random number counter C2. A jackpot type counter storage area 203f2 for storing the value, a stop pattern selection counter storage area 203f3 for storing the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, and a fluctuation type counter storage area 203f4 for storing the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 are provided. There is.

When the MPU 201 determines that it is time to start executing the variable effect, the data (values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1) are stored in the second holding first area of the second holding ball storage area 203e. In this case, the data stored in the second holding first area is shifted to each area 203f1 to 203f4 of this holding ball execution area 203f. On the other hand, the MPU 201 determines that when it is time to start executing the variable effect, no data is stored in the second holding first area of the second holding ball storage area 203e, and the data is stored in the first holding ball storage area 203d. When data is stored in the first holding area, the data stored in the first holding area is shifted to each area 203f1 to 203f4 of this holding ball execution area 203f.

Then, the data shifted to the reserved ball execution area 203f is referred to in the fluctuation start process (see FIG. 25), and a jackpot lottery is performed based on the reference data and the gaming state, and a fluctuation pattern corresponding to the lottery result is performed. and determine the stop type. In the special symbol display device 37, dynamic display is performed under the control of the main controller 110 based on the determined variation pattern and stop type.

Further, the fluctuation pattern and stop type determined here are notified to the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 by a fluctuation pattern command and a stop type command. Then, under the control of the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the third symbol display device 81 performs a variation effect based on the variation pattern and stop type notified by the variation pattern command and the stop type command.

Details of data shifting will be explained. When the MPU 201 determines that it is time to start executing the variable performance, it determines whether data is stored in the second reservation first area of the second reservation ball storage area 203e. As a result of the judgment, if it is determined that data is stored in the second reservation first area, the random value of the jackpot random number counter storage area 203e1 of the second reservation first area is used as the jackpot random number of the reservation ball execution area 203f. Shift to counter storage area 203f1. Similarly, the random value of the jackpot type counter storage area 203e2 of the second reservation first area is shifted to the jackpot type counter storage area 203f2, and the random value of the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203e3 of the second reservation first area is shifted, It shifts to the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203f3, and shifts the random value in the fluctuation type counter storage area 203e4 of the second pending first area to the fluctuation type counter storage area 203f4.

Then, when the shift of the data to the held ball execution area 203f is completed, the second held first area becomes vacant, so it is stored (held) in each area (second to fourth) of the second held ball storage area 203e. ) is shifted to an area (first to third) with one smaller area number. In the first embodiment, data is shifted only in the second holding areas (first to fourth) where data is stored (held) in the second holding ball storage area 203e.

Here, the data shift performed for each holding area in the second holding ball storage area 203e will be explained. For example, the value of the second held ball counter 203b when the start judgment of the variable effect is made is "4", and the data is stored in all areas (first to fourth) of the second held ball storage area 203e. Suppose that In this state, when the data in the second holding first area is shifted to the holding ball execution area 203f and the second holding first area becomes vacant, the MPU 201 transfers the data in the other areas (second to fourth). are shifted to the areas (first to third) whose area numbers are one smaller. That is, the data in the second reserved second area is shifted to the second reserved first area, the data in the second reserved third area is shifted to the second reserved second area, and the data in the second reserved fourth area is shifted. is shifted to the second holding area and the third area.

Further, for example, if the value of the second pending pitch counter 203b is "2" when the start judgment of the variable production is made, the MPU 201 transfers only the data of the second pending second area to the second pending ball counter 203b. Shift to 1 area and finish shifting the data. As described above, in the first embodiment, data shift processing is not performed for the second holding areas (third to fourth) where no data is stored (held), so the number of data shifts is reduced. The control burden can be reduced.

Incidentally, regardless of the presence or absence of data, each data in the second reservation area (second to fourth) may be configured to be shifted to an area whose area number is one smaller. In that case, it is not necessary to determine whether data is stored (on hold) in the second holding area (second to fourth), making it easier to create a program.

On the other hand, if the MPU 201 determines that no data is stored in the second holding first area of the second holding ball storage area 203e when it is time to start executing the variable effect, then the MPU 201 It is determined whether data is stored in the first reservation first area of the ball storage area 203d. As a result of the judgment, if data is stored in the first reservation first area, the random value of the jackpot random number counter storage area 203d1 of the first reservation first area is stored in the jackpot random number counter storage area 203f1 of the reservation ball execution area 203f. Shift to. Similarly, the random value of the jackpot type counter storage area 203d2 of the first reservation first area is shifted to the jackpot type counter storage area 203f2, and the random value of the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203d3 of the first reservation first area is shifted to the jackpot type counter storage area 203f2. It shifts to the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203f3, and shifts the random value in the fluctuation type counter storage area 203d4 of the first reservation first area to the fluctuation type counter storage area 203f4.

When the shift of the data to the held ball execution area 203f is completed, the first held ball storage area 203f becomes vacant, so it is stored (held) in each area (second to fourth) of the first held ball storage area 203d. ) is shifted to an area (first to third) with one smaller area number. In the first embodiment, data is shifted only in the first holding areas (first to fourth) in which data is stored (held) in the first holding ball storage area 203d.

Here, the data shift performed for each holding area in the first holding ball storage area 203d will be explained. For example, the value of the first held ball counter 203a when the start judgment of the variable production is made is "4", and the data is stored in all areas (first to fourth) of the first held ball storage area 203d. Suppose that In this state, when the data in the first holding first area is shifted to the holding ball execution area 203f and the first holding first area becomes vacant, the MPU 201 transfers the data in the other areas (second to fourth). are shifted to the areas (first to third) whose area numbers are one smaller. That is, the data in the first reserved second area is shifted to the first reserved first area, the data in the first reserved third area is shifted to the first reserved second area, and the data in the first reserved fourth area is shifted. is shifted to the first reservation third area.

Further, for example, if the value of the first pending pitch counter 203a is "2" when the start judgment of the variable performance is made, the MPU 201 transfers only the data of the first pending second area to the first pending pitch number counter 203a. Shift to 1 area and finish shifting the data. As described above, in the first embodiment, data shift processing is not performed for the first holding areas (third to fourth) where no data is stored (held), so the number of data shifts is reduced. The control burden can be reduced.

Incidentally, regardless of the presence or absence of data, each data in the first reservation area (second to fourth) may be configured to be shifted to an area whose area number is one smaller. In that case, it becomes unnecessary to determine whether data is stored (on hold) in the first holding area (second to fourth), making it easier to create a program.

Here, details of the standard ball holding area 203j and the standard ball holding area 203k will be described. The normal symbol holding ball storage area 203j and the normal symbol holding ball execution area 203k are used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform the normal symbol winning lottery, the setting of the variable display of the normal symbol display device 83, etc.

The normal figure holding ball storage area 203j is a memory for storing the normal figure counter C4 acquired from the counter buffer 203c upon detection of passage of a ball to the normal symbol gate 67. When the MPU 201 detects that the ball has passed through the normal symbol gate 67 during the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22), it acquires the value of the normal symbol per-counter C4 from the counter buffer 203c, and displays the normal symbol reserved ball. It is stored in the storage area 203j. The normal figure holding ball storage area 203j has four holding areas (normal figure holding ball storage area 203j) so that the data (value of the counter C4 per normal symbol) corresponding to one held ball of the normal symbol can be stored (reserved) for up to four times. (Refer to FIG. 8).

The normal symbol holding ball execution area 203k is a memory for storing data (the value of the random number counter C4 per common symbol) to be referenced in the normal symbol winning lottery and variable display processing that starts execution or is currently being executed. It is.

When the MPU 201 detects that it is the timing to start executing the variable display of the normal symbol, the MPU 201 displays the above-mentioned normal symbol reserved ball in order to execute processes such as winning lottery of the normal symbol and setting of the variable display of the normal symbol display device 83. Among the data (value of random number counter C4 per normal figure) stored in the storage area 203j, one piece of data is shifted to this normal figure holding ball execution area 203k. Note that a shift in the first embodiment refers to moving data stored in one area to another area.

As described above, the normal symbol random number counter C4 used for the normal symbol winning lottery is used to set the normal symbol winning lottery and the variable display of the normal symbol display device 83. The normal figure holding ball storage area 203j stores the value of the random number counter C4 per normal figure acquired from the counter buffer 203c by the MPU 201 when the ball passes through the normal symbol gate 67.

In addition, as described above, the data (the value of the random number counter C4 per normal symbol) obtained at the timing when the ball passes the normal symbol gate 67 is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203j for up to four times. In that case, data is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth) among the four vacant reservation areas (general figure reservation areas 1 to 4). In other words, the smaller the area number is, the older the data corresponding to the passing of the ball to the normal symbol gate 67 is stored. Data corresponding to the passage of the ball will be stored.

On the other hand, the general ball holding ball execution area 203k consists of only one area. In this normal pattern held ball execution area 203k, similarly to the normal pattern held ball storage area 203j, a random number counter storage area per normal pattern (not shown) that stores the value of the random number counter C4 per normal pattern is provided. .

When the MPU 201 determines that it is time to execute the variable display of the normal symbols, it transfers the data stored in the first area of the normal pattern holding ball storage area 203j to the normal pattern holding ball execution area 203k. shift.

Then, the data shifted to the normal pattern holding ball execution area 203k is referred to in the normal pattern fluctuation process (see S111 in FIG. 22), and a winning lottery is performed based on the reference data and the gaming state, and the variable display Decide on the content. In the normal symbol display device 83, a variable display is performed based on the determined content under the control of the main controller 110.

Details of data shifting will be explained. When the MPU 201 determines that it is time to start executing the variable display of the normal symbols, the MPU 201 sets the random number value in the random number counter storage area (not shown) per normal symbol in the first area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203j. is shifted to a random number counter storage area (not shown) per normal figure in the normal figure held ball execution area 203k.

When the shift of the data to the general ball holding ball execution area 203k is completed, the first general ball holding area becomes vacant, so data is stored in each area (second to fourth) of the general ball holding area 203j. Shift processing is performed to move the (held) data to areas (first to third) where the area number is one smaller. In the first embodiment, data is shifted only for the normal pattern holding areas (first to fourth) in which data is stored (held) in the normal pattern holding ball storage area 203j.

Here, a data shift performed for each holding area in the regular ball holding ball storage area 203j will be explained. For example, when the determination to start the variable display of normal symbols is made, the number of normal symbols reserved is 4, and the data is stored in all areas (1st to 4th) of the ordinary symbol reserved ball storage area 203j. Suppose there is. In this state, the data in the first area for holding the general ball is shifted to the holding ball execution area 203k, and when the first area for holding the general ball becomes vacant, the MPU 201 transfers the data to the other areas (second to fourth). data is shifted to the area (first to third) whose area number is one smaller. In other words, the data in the second area for general reservations is shifted to the first area for general reservations, the data in the third area for general reservations is shifted to the second area for general reservations, and the data in the fourth area for general reservations are shifted to the second area for general reservations. is shifted to the 3rd general reservation area.

Further, for example, if the number of normal symbols reserved when the start judgment of the variable display of ordinary symbols is made is 2, the MPU 201 transfers only the data of the ordinary symbol reservation second area to the ordinary symbol reservation first area. Shift to finish shifting the data. As described above, in the first embodiment, data shift processing is not performed for the general drawing reservation areas (third to fourth) where no data is stored (reserved), so the number of data shifts is reduced. The control burden can be reduced.

Note that, regardless of the presence or absence of data, each data in the general drawing reservation area (second to fourth) may be configured to be shifted to an area with an area number one smaller. In this case, it is not necessary to determine whether data is stored (on hold) in the common drawing holding areas (second to fourth), and therefore it is possible to easily create a program.

Returning to FIG. 7, the explanation will be continued. The right probability variation valid flag 203g provided in the RAM 203 is a flag for indicating that the right probability variation area 73 is set to be valid in an on state. In the first embodiment, when a ball is detected by the right probability variation area switch 73d in a situation where the right probability variation effective flag 203g is set to ON, the probability variation transition flag 203i, which will be described later, is set to ON, and after the jackpot ends. It is configured so that a "probability fluctuating state" occurs.

This right probability change valid flag 203g is set to OFF as an initial value when the power of the Pachinko machine 10 is turned on. Then, when a special symbol jackpot is won, the probability variable area effective table 202g (see FIG. 12) is set based on the jackpot type of the jackpot (see S410 in FIG. 26), and at the start of each round during the jackpot, Based on the probability variation area validity table 202g set for the jackpot, the right probability variation validity flag 203g is set on or off (see S435 in FIG. 28).

Specifically, the right probability change valid flag 203g is set to ON in two rounds of the jackpot type "time saving A", "latent probability variation B" and "time saving C", and when the jackpot type "time saving B" and "latent probability variation It is set on in three rounds of "A" and "Latent probability variation C", it is set on in four rounds of jackpot type "probability variation A", and it is set off in all rounds other than the above-mentioned rounds.

The left probability variation valid flag 203h is a flag for indicating that the left probability variation area 74 is set to be valid in the on state. In the first embodiment, when a ball is detected by the left probability variation area switch 74d in a situation where the left probability variation effective flag 203h is set to ON, the probability variation transition flag 203i, which will be described later, is set to ON, and after the jackpot ends. It is configured so that a "probability fluctuating state" occurs.

This left probability variation valid flag 203h is set to OFF as an initial value when the power of the Pachinko machine 10 is turned on. Then, when a special symbol jackpot is won, the probability variable area effective table 202g (see FIG. 12) is set based on the jackpot type of the jackpot (see S410 in FIG. 26), and at the start of each round during the jackpot, Based on the probability variation area validity table 202g set for the jackpot, the left probability variation validity flag 203h is set on or off (see S435 in FIG. 28).

Specifically, the left probability variation valid flag 203h is set to ON in five rounds of jackpot types "time saving A", "latent probability variation B", and "time saving C", and when the jackpot type "time saving B" and "latent probability variation It is set to ON in the 6th round of "A" and "Latent Probability Variation C", it is set to ON in the 9th round of the jackpot type "Probability Variation A", and it is set to OFF in all rounds other than the above-mentioned rounds.

The probability variation transition flag 203i is a flag for indicating that a "probability variation state" occurs in the on state. This probability change transition flag 203i is set to OFF as an initial value when the power of the Pachinko machine 10 is turned on. Then, during the jackpot, if the right probability variation effective flag 203g is set to ON, the ball is detected by the right probability variation area switch 73d (see S441: Yes → S442: Yes in FIG. 28), or the left probability variation is detected. When the valid flag 203h is set to ON, when a ball is detected by the left variable probability region switch 74d (see S444: Yes → S445: Yes in FIG. 28), the variable probability transition flag 203i in the OFF state is set to ON. (See S443 in FIG. 29). After that, in the jackpot end process (see FIG. 30), when the probability variation transition flag 203i is turned on and the "probability variation state" is set, that is, when the value of the ST counter described later is set to "100". (see S472 in FIG. 30), the probability change shift flag 203i is set to OFF (see S473 in FIG. 30).

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 is provided with a payout control device 111, a sound lamp control device 113, a special symbol display device 37, a normal symbol display device 83, a normal symbol holding lamp 84, and a variable winning device 65. A large winning opening solenoid 65c for driving the opening/closing plate 65b of the winning opening 65a forward to open and close the lower side of the opening/closing plate 65b of the winning opening 65a, and a right probability variable area solenoid 73b for driving the right variable area opening/closing plate 73a of the right variable probability area 73 to open and close. , a left probability variable region solenoid 74b for opening and closing the left probability variable region opening/closing plate 74a of the left probability variable region 74, and another solenoid 209 for driving another drive device (not shown) are connected, and the MPU 201 Various commands and control signals are sent to these via the input/output port 205.

In addition, the input/output port 205 includes a big winning opening switch 71 which is provided in the big winning opening 65a and detects the ball that has won the big winning opening 65a, and a big winning opening switch 71 which is provided in the right probability variable area 73 and which detects the ball that has won the big winning opening 65a. A right probability variable region switch 73d that detects a ball passing through the probability variable region 73, a left probability variable region switch 74d provided in the left probability variable region 74 to detect a ball passing through the left probability variable region 74, and a switch group not shown. A RAM erase switch circuit 253 (to be described later) provided in the power supply 115 is connected to an other switch 208 consisting of a sensor group, etc. Various processes are executed based on the RAM erase signal SG2.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 13 to 21, the detection mode of the ball in each round of each jackpot type and the opening or closing status of each probability variable area 73, 74 (i.e., the right probability variable area opening/closing plate 73a and the left probability variable area opening/closing plate 73a) (opening or closing of the area opening/closing plate 74a, turning on or off of the right variable area solenoid 73b and left variable area solenoid 74b), and the valid or invalid setting status of each variable area 73, 74 (i.e., the right variable variable valid flag 203g) and the left probability variation effective flag 203h on or off) and the state of transition to the "probability variation state" (that is, the probability variation transition flag 203i on or off) will be explained.

First, with reference to FIGS. 13 and 14, the manner in which balls are detected in each round of the jackpot type "time saving A" will be described. FIG. 13 shows the operation timings of the big prize opening solenoid 65c, right probability variable area solenoid 73b, and left probability variable area solenoid 74b, the big winning opening switch 71, and the right probability variable area in each round of the jackpot type "time saving A" of the first special symbol. It is a timing chart schematically showing the detection timing of a ball in the switch 73d and the left probability variable area switch 74d, and the setting timing of the right probability variation effective flag 203g, the left probability variation effective flag 203h, and the probability variation transition flag 203i. In addition, FIG. 14 shows the operation timings of the big winning opening solenoid 65c, right probability variable area solenoid 73b, and left probability varying area solenoid 74b in the first and second rounds of the jackpot type "time saving A", and the big winning opening switch 71, right It is a timing chart schematically showing each time of the detection timing of the ball in the probability variable area switch 73d and the left probability variable area switch 74d, and the setting timing of the right probability variation valid flag 203g, the left probability variation valid flag 203h, and the probability variation transition flag 203i. . Hereinafter, while explaining each timing in FIG. 13, detailed time will be explained with reference to FIG. 14 as appropriate.

As shown in FIG. 13, in the jackpot type "time saving A", a total of seven rounds of the jackpot game are executed, and at the start of each round, the jackpot solenoid 65c is turned on and the opening/closing plate 65b is opened. Then, under a predetermined condition (in the first embodiment, a maximum of 30 seconds has passed since the opening (see Max t1 in FIG. 14). Max t1 < 30000 milliseconds (hereinafter, milliseconds may be abbreviated as "ms"). ), or 10 balls are detected by the big winning hole switch 71), the big winning hole solenoid 65c is turned off, the opening/closing plate 65b is closed, and the first round is completed. ends.

In addition, in the jackpot type "time saving A", the opening/closing pattern of the right probability variable area 73 and the left probability variable area 74 is "X1". Therefore, in the first round, when the first count ball is detected by the big winning opening switch 71, both the right probability variable area solenoid 73b and the left probability variable area solenoid 74b are turned on for "60ms" (see t2 in FIG. 14). t2 = "60ms"), so that it can be recognized whether the right probability variable region solenoid 73b and the left probability variable region solenoid 74b can be driven normally.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, even if the right probability variable area solenoid 73b and the left probability variable area solenoid 74b are turned on for "60ms", the right probability variable area opening/closing plate 73a and the left probability varying area opening/closing plate 74a are The opening time is extremely short, and the ball is configured to hardly flow into the right probability variable area 73 and the left probability variable area 74 (hereinafter, the same applies to the first count ball of each round).

In addition, when the first count ball is detected by the big winning opening switch 71, if it is determined that the right probability variable area opening/closing plate 73a or the left probability variable area opening/closing plate 74a does not operate normally, the right probability variable area 73 or the left side Since the variable probability area 74 may not be opened normally and there is a risk that appropriate gaming value cannot be given to the player, a predetermined error notification (for example, display of an error message such as "variable winning device 65 drive abnormality has occurred") is performed. It is configured as follows. Furthermore, the system is configured to stop the progress of the game while backing up the current game state in response to a predetermined error notification. In this way, by stopping the progress of the game due to an error, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player is disadvantaged, such as not being given the "probability fluctuating state".

Then, when the third count ball is detected by the big prize opening switch 71, only the right probability variable area solenoid 73b is turned on for "2000ms" (see t3 in FIG. 14. t3 = "2000ms"). In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the time required for the ball to reach the right probability variable area 73 after it is detected by the big prize opening switch 71 is within "2 seconds" (in the first embodiment, "1. 5 seconds". See t4 in FIG. 14. t4<"2000ms"). Therefore, the third count ball can flow into the open right probability variable area 73, and is detected by the right probability variable area switch 73d.

At this time, the effective pattern of the probability variable areas 73 and 74 of the jackpot type "time saving A" is "A", and the right probability variable area 73 of the second round and the left probability variable area 74 of the fifth round are set effectively. Ru. Therefore, in the first round, both probability variation areas 73 and 74 are invalid, and the right probability variation valid flag 203g and the left probability variation validity flag 203h are set to OFF. Therefore, in the first round, even if the ball passes through the right probability variable area 73 and is detected by the right probability variable area switch 73d, the right probability variable area 73 is not set to be valid, so the probability change transition flag is 203i remains off without being turned on.

In addition, in the odd-numbered rounds (namely, 3rd round, 5th round, and 7th round) of jackpot type "time saving A", the driving manner of the right probability variable area solenoid 73b and the left probability variable area solenoid 74b is the same as in the first round.

Next, in the second round of the jackpot type "time saving A", when the first count ball is detected by the jackpot switch 71, the right probability variable area solenoid 73b and the left probability variable area solenoid 74b are activated as in the first round. Both are turned on for "60 ms" (see t5 in FIG. 14; t5 = "60 ms"), so that it can be recognized whether or not the right probability variable region solenoid 73b and the left probability variable region solenoid 74b can be driven normally.

Then, when the third count ball is detected by the big prize opening switch 71, only the left probability variable area solenoid 74b is turned on for "2000ms" (see t6 in FIG. 14. t6 = "2000ms"). In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the time required for the ball to reach the left probability variable area 74 after the ball is detected by the big prize opening switch 71 is within "2 seconds" (that is, "1.6 seconds"). See t7 in FIG. 14. t7<"2000ms"). Therefore, the third count ball can flow into the open left probability variable area 74, and is detected by the left probability variable area switch 74d.

At this time, the valid pattern of the probability variable areas 73 and 74 of the jackpot type "time saving A" is "A", and in the second round, only the right probability variable area 73 is valid, and the right probability variable valid flag 203g is set to on. At the same time, the left probability variation valid flag 203h is set to OFF. Therefore, in the second round, even if the ball passes through the left probability variable area 74 and is detected by the left probability variable area switch 74d, the left probability variable area 74 is not set to be valid, so the probability change transition flag is set. 203i remains off without being turned on.

In addition, in the even number rounds (namely, the 4th round and the 6th round) of the jackpot type "time saving A", the driving manner of the right probability variable area solenoid 73b and the left probability variable area solenoid 74b is the same as in the second round.

After the third round of the jackpot type "time saving A", the open probability variable areas 73 and 74 are invalid, and the probability variable valid flags 203g and 203h corresponding to the probability variable area switches 73d and 74d where the ball is detected are is set to off. In particular, in the fifth round of the jackpot type "time saving A", only the left probability variation area 74 is valid, the left probability variation valid flag 203h is set to ON, and the right probability variation validity flag 203g is set to OFF. However, the ball is configured to flow into the right probability variable area 73. Therefore, in the fifth round, even if the ball passes through the right probability variable area 73 and is detected by the right probability variable area switch 73d, the right probability variable area 73 is not set to be valid, so the probability change transition flag is set. 203i remains off without being turned on.

Therefore, in the jackpot type "time saving A", even if the ball passes through the probability variable areas 73, 74 and is detected by the probability variable area switches 73d, 74d, the ball is detected by the probability variable area switches 73d, 74d that have detected the ball. Since the corresponding variable probability regions 73 and 74 are not set effectively, the variable probability shift flag 203i is not turned on and remains off.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 15 and 16, the manner in which balls are detected in each round of the jackpot type "latent probability variation A" will be described. FIG. 15 shows the operation timings of the big winning opening solenoid 65c, right probability variable area solenoid 73b, and left probability variable area solenoid 74b in each round of the jackpot type "latent probability variation A" of the first special symbol, and the big winning opening switch 71, right It is a timing chart schematically showing the detection timing of a ball in the variable probability area switch 73d and the left variable probability area switch 74d, and the setting timing of the right variable probability valid flag 203g, the left variable probability valid flag 203h, and the variable probability transition flag 203i. Further, FIG. 16 shows the operation timings of the big winning opening solenoid 65c, the right probability variable area solenoid 73b, and the left probability variable area solenoid 74b, and the big winning opening switch 71 in the first to third rounds of the jackpot type "latent probability variation A". , a timing chart schematically showing each time of the detection timing of a ball in the right probability variable area switch 73d and the left probability variable area switch 74d, and the setting timing of the right probability variable valid flag 203g, the left probability variable valid flag 203h, and the probability variable transition flag 203i. It is. Hereinafter, while explaining each timing in FIG. 15, detailed time will be explained with reference to FIG. 16 as appropriate.

As shown in FIG. 15, in the jackpot type "latent probability variation A", a total of seven rounds of the jackpot game are executed, and at the start of each round, the jackpot solenoid 65c is turned on and the opening/closing plate 65b is opened. Then, 10 balls are detected under a predetermined condition (in the first embodiment, a maximum of 30 seconds has elapsed since the opening (see Max t1 in FIG. 16. Max t1 < 30000 ms)) or by the big winning opening switch 71. , when either one of the following events is established, the big prize opening solenoid 65c is turned off, the opening/closing plate 65b is closed, and one round ends.

In addition, in the jackpot type "latent probability variation A", the opening/closing pattern of the right probability variable area 73 and the left probability variable area 74 is "X1" as in the jackpot type "time saving A". Therefore, in the first round, when the first count ball is detected by the big winning opening switch 71, both the right probability variable area solenoid 73b and the left probability variable area solenoid 74b are turned on for "60ms" (see t2 in FIG. 16). t2 = "60ms"), so that it can be recognized whether or not the right probability variable region solenoid 73b and the left probability variable region solenoid 74b can be driven normally.

Then, when the third count ball is detected by the big prize opening switch 71, only the right probability variable area solenoid 73b is turned on for "2000ms" (see t3 in FIG. 16. t3 = "2000ms"). In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the time required for the ball to reach the right probability variable area 73 after it is detected by the big prize opening switch 71 is within "2 seconds" (in the first embodiment, "1. 5 seconds". See t4 in FIG. 16. t4<"2000ms"). Therefore, the third count ball can flow into the open right probability variable area 73, and is detected by the right probability variable area switch 73d.

At this time, the effective pattern of the probability variable areas 73 and 74 of the jackpot type "latent probability variation A" is "B", and the right probability variable area 73 of the third round and the left probability variable area 74 of the sixth round are effective. Set. Therefore, in the first round, both probability variation areas 73 and 74 are invalid, and the right probability variation valid flag 203g and the left probability variation validity flag 203h are set to OFF. Therefore, in the first round, even if the ball passes through the right probability variable area 73 and is detected by the right probability variable area switch 73d, the right probability variable area 73 is not set to be valid, so the probability change transition flag is 203i remains off without being turned on.

In addition, in odd-numbered rounds (i.e., 3rd round, 5th round, and 7th round) of the jackpot type "Latent probability variation A", the driving manner of the right probability variable area solenoid 73b and the left probability variable area solenoid 74b is the same as in the first round. .

Next, in the second round of the jackpot type "latent probability variation A", when the first count ball is detected by the jackpot switch 71, the right probability variable area solenoid 73b and the left probability variable area solenoid are activated as in the first round. 74b are both turned on for "60 ms" (see t5 in FIG. 16. t5 = "60 ms"), so that it can be recognized whether or not the right probability variable region solenoid 73b and the left probability variable region solenoid 74b can be driven normally. There is.

Then, when the third count ball is detected by the big prize opening switch 71, only the left probability variable area solenoid 74b is turned on for "2000ms" (see t6 in FIG. 16. t6 = "2000ms"). In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the time required for the ball to reach the left probability variable area 74 after the ball is detected by the big prize opening switch 71 is within "2 seconds" (that is, "1.6 seconds"). See t7 in FIG. 16. t7<"2000ms"). Therefore, the third count ball can flow into the open left probability variable area 74, and is detected by the left probability variable area switch 74d.

At this time, the valid pattern of the probability variable areas 73, 74 of the jackpot type "latent probability variation A" is "B", and both probability variable areas 73, 74 are invalid in the second round, and the right probability variable valid flag 203g and The left probability variation valid flag 203h is set to OFF. Therefore, in the second round, even if the ball passes through the left probability variable area 74 and is detected by the left probability variable area switch 74d, the left probability variable area 74 is not set to be valid, so the probability change transition flag is set. 203i remains off without being turned on.

In addition, in the even-numbered rounds (namely, the 4th round and the 6th round) of the jackpot type "latency probability variation A", the driving manner of the right probability variable area solenoid 73b and the left probability variable area solenoid 74b is the same as in the second round.

Next, in the third round of the jackpot type "latent probability variation A", when the first count ball is detected by the jackpot switch 71, the right probability variation area solenoid 73b and The left probability variable region solenoid 74b is both turned on for "60ms" (see t8 in FIG. 16. t8 = "60ms"), and it is possible to recognize whether the right probability variable region solenoid 73b and the left probability variable region solenoid 74b can be driven normally. It is composed of

Then, in the third round, when the third count ball is detected by the big prize opening switch 71, only the right probability variable area solenoid 73b is turned on for "2000ms" (see t9 in FIG. 16. t9 = "2000ms") ). In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the time required for the ball to reach the right probability variable area 73 after the ball is detected by the big prize opening switch 71 is within "2 seconds" (that is, "1.5 seconds"). See t10 in FIG. 16. t10<"2000ms"). Therefore, the third count ball can flow into the open right probability variable area 73, and is detected by the right probability variable area switch 73d.

At this time, the valid pattern of the probability variable areas 73 and 74 of the jackpot type "latent probability variation A" is "B", and in the third round, only the right probability variable area 73 is valid, and the right probability variable valid flag 203g is turned on. At the same time, the left probability variation valid flag 203h is set to OFF. Therefore, in the third round, when a ball passes through the right probability variable area 73 and is detected by the right probability variable area switch 73d, the right probability variable area 73 is set to be valid, so the probability change transition flag 203i is turned on. is set to

In addition, in the 6th round of the jackpot type "latent probability variation A", only the left probability variation area 74 is valid, and the left probability variation valid flag 203h is set to ON, and the right probability variation validity flag 203g is set to OFF. ing. Therefore, even if the probability change transition flag 203i is not turned on in the third round, the ball passes through the left probability variable region 74 located downstream of the right probability variable region 73 in the sixth round and the left probability variable region switch 74d is activated. When the ball is detected, the probability change transition flag 203i is set to ON.

Therefore, in the jackpot type "latent probability variation A", since the probability variable areas 73 and 74 corresponding to the probability variable area switches 73d and 74d where balls were detected in the 3rd and 6th rounds are set to be valid, the probability variable transition is made. Flag 203i is set on. Then, at the end of the jackpot, a "probability variation state" is set with reference to this probability variation transition flag 203i.

With this configuration, even if the ball passes through each probability variable area 73, 74, if the probability variable area 73, 74 is not set internally as valid, a "probability variable state" will occur after the jackpot ends. Therefore, even if the player visually recognizes the passing of the ball to each probability variable area 73, 74, it is possible to configure such that the occurrence of the "probability variable state" is not determined after the jackpot is completed. Further, the "latent probability variation performance mode" and the "time-saving notification performance mode" or the "normal notification mode" are configured to be equivalent performance. With this configuration, even when the "latent probability variable performance mode" is executed, it is possible to determine whether the game is in the "probability variation state", "time reduction state" or "normal gaming state". It is possible to create a gameplay that makes it difficult for the player to recognize and to make the player guess in which game state he/she is playing the game, thereby improving the interest of the game.

In addition, if a jackpot type that generates a "probability fluctuation state" is won after the jackpot ends, the ball is configured to be able to pass through the effectively set probability fluctuation regions 73 and 74 in multiple rounds of the jackpot. has been done. Therefore, even if the ball cannot pass through the valid variable probability areas 73, 74 in one of the rounds in which the variable probability areas 73, 74 are valid, It becomes possible to cause the ball to pass through the probability variable regions 73 and 74 that are effectively set in the round. Therefore, due to a sudden trouble (for example, a game abnormality such as a firing abnormality, a player's poor physical condition, etc.), it may be difficult for the ball to pass through the probability variable areas 73 and 74 in one of the valid rounds. Even if this occurs, by providing the possibility that the ball will pass through the probability variable areas 73 and 74 that are effectively set in the other round that are effectively set, the player will not be affected by unforeseen circumstances. It is possible to realize a comfortable game without incurring profits.

Furthermore, at the first count of each round, the right probability variable region solenoid 73b and the left probability variable region solenoid 74b are driven to such an extent that the ball does not flow in, and it is determined whether the right probability variable region opening/closing plate 73a and the left probability variable region opening/closing plate 74a can be opened. Therefore, it is possible to quickly grasp a situation in which the variable probability regions 73 and 74 are not opened due to an abnormality or the like.

In addition, when winning a jackpot type that generates a "probability fluctuation state" after the jackpot ends, regarding multiple rounds in which the variable probability areas 73 and 74 are set to be effective, the round after which the variable probability areas 73 and 74 are set to be effective. In this case, the right probability variable area 73 located on the upstream side of the big prize opening 65a is configured to be set effectively. With this configuration, if an abnormality such as a ball jam occurs in the big prize opening 65a, the ball jam etc. will be prevented especially on the downstream side of the right probability variable area 73 and upstream of the left probability variable area 74. Even if an abnormality occurs, the right probability variation region 73 located upstream of the big prize opening 65a can be set effectively first, and the ball can flow into the right probability variation region 73. It is possible to make it easier to grant rights to a player based on the status.

Next, with reference to FIG. 17, the manner in which balls are detected in each round of the jackpot type "Time Saving B" will be described. FIG. 17 shows the operation timings of the big prize opening solenoid 65c, right probability variable area solenoid 73b, and left probability variable area solenoid 74b, the big winning opening switch 71, and the right probability variable area in each round of the jackpot type "time saving B" of the first special symbol. It is a timing chart schematically showing the detection timing of a ball in the switch 73d and the left probability variable area switch 74d, and the setting timing of the right probability variation effective flag 203g, the left probability variation effective flag 203h, and the probability variation transition flag 203i.

As shown in FIG. 17, in the jackpot type "time saving B", a total of seven rounds of the jackpot game are executed, and at the start of each round, the jackpot solenoid 65c is turned on and the opening/closing plate 65b is opened. Then, when a predetermined condition (in the first embodiment, either "30 seconds" has elapsed since opening or 10 balls have been detected by the big winning port switch 71) is satisfied, the big winning port solenoid 65c is turned off, the opening/closing plate 65b is closed, and one round is completed.

In addition, in the jackpot type "Time saving B", the opening/closing pattern of the right probability variable area 73 and the left probability variable area 74 is "X2", so in the first round, the first count ball was detected by the jackpot switch 71. In this case, both the right probability variable region solenoid 73b and the left probability variable region solenoid 74b are turned on for 60 ms, and it is configured to be able to recognize whether or not the right probability variable region solenoid 73b and the left probability variable region solenoid 74b can be driven normally. .

Then, when the third count ball is detected by the big prize opening switch 71, only the left probability variable area solenoid 74b is turned on for "2000ms". In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the time required for the ball to reach the left probability variable area 74 after the ball is detected by the big prize opening switch 71 is within "2 seconds" (in the first embodiment, "1. 6 seconds”). Therefore, the third count ball can flow into the open left probability variable area 74, and is detected by the left probability variable area switch 74d.

At this time, the valid pattern of the probability variable areas 73 and 74 of the jackpot type "time saving B" is "B", and the right probability variable area 73 of the third round and the left probability variable area 74 of the sixth round are set effectively. Ru. Therefore, in the first round, both probability variation areas 73 and 74 are invalid, and the right probability variation valid flag 203g and the left probability variation validity flag 203h are set to OFF. Therefore, in the first round, even if the ball passes through the left probability variable area 74 and is detected by the left probability variable area switch 74d, the left probability variable area 74 is not set to be valid, so the probability change transition flag is 203i remains off without being turned on.

In addition, in the odd-numbered rounds (namely, 3rd round, 5th round, and 7th round) of jackpot type "time saving B", the driving manner of the right probability variable area solenoid 73b and the left probability variable area solenoid 74b is the same as in the first round.

Next, in the second round of the jackpot type "time saving B", when the first count ball is detected by the jackpot switch 71, the right probability variable area solenoid 73b and the left probability variable area solenoid 74b are activated as in the first round. Both are turned on for 60 ms so that it can be recognized whether or not the right probability variable region solenoid 73b and the left probability variable region solenoid 74b can be driven normally.

Then, when the third count ball is detected by the big prize opening switch 71, only the right probability variable area solenoid 73b is turned on for "2000ms". In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the time required for the ball to reach the right probability variable area 73 after it is detected by the big prize opening switch 71 is within "2 seconds" (in the first embodiment, "1. 5 seconds”). Therefore, the third count ball can flow into the open right probability variable area 73, and is detected by the right probability variable area switch 73d.

At this time, the valid pattern of the probability variable areas 73 and 74 of the jackpot type "time saving B" is "B", and in the second round, both probability variable areas 73 and 74 are invalid, and the right probability variation valid flag 203g and the left probability variation The valid flag 203h is set to OFF. Therefore, in the second round, even if the ball passes through the right probability variable area 73 and is detected by the right probability variable area switch 73d, the right probability variable area 73 is not set to be valid, so the probability change transition flag is set. 203i remains off without being turned on.

In addition, in the even number rounds (namely, the 4th round and the 6th round) of the jackpot type "time saving B", the driving manner of the right probability variable area solenoid 73b and the left probability variable area solenoid 74b is the same as in the second round.

Next, in the third round of the jackpot type "time saving B", when the first count ball is detected by the jackpot switch 71, the right probability variation area solenoid 73b and the left probability variation area solenoid 73b are activated as in the first and second rounds. Both area solenoids 74b are turned on for 60 ms, and it is possible to recognize whether or not the right probability variable area solenoid 73b and the left probability variable area solenoid 74b can be driven normally.

Then, when the third count ball is detected by the big prize opening switch 71, only the left probability variable area solenoid 74b is turned on for "2000ms". In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the time required for the ball to reach the left probability variable area 74 after the ball is detected by the big prize opening switch 71 is within "2 seconds" (i.e., "1.6 seconds"). It is. Therefore, the third count ball can flow into the open left probability variable area 74, and is detected by the left probability variable area switch 74d.

At this time, the valid pattern of the probability variable areas 73 and 74 of the jackpot type "time saving B" is "B", and in the third round, only the right probability variable area 73 is valid, and the right probability variable valid flag 203g is set to ON. At the same time, the left probability variation valid flag 203h is set to OFF. Therefore, in the third round, even if the ball passes through the left probability variable area 74 and is detected by the left probability variable area switch 74d, the left probability variable area 74 is not set to be valid, so the probability change transition flag is set. 203i remains off without being turned on.

Then, from the fourth round onward of the jackpot type "time saving B", the open probability variable areas 73 and 74 are invalid, and the probability variable valid flags 203g and 203h corresponding to the probability variable area switches 73d and 74d where the ball is detected are is set to off. In particular, in the 6th round of the jackpot type "time saving B", only the left probability variation area 74 is valid, the left probability variation valid flag 203h is set to ON, and the right probability variation validity flag 203g is set to OFF. However, the ball is configured to flow into the right probability variable area 73. Therefore, in the sixth round, even if the ball passes through the right probability variable area 73 and is detected by the right probability variable area switch 73d, the right probability variable area 73 is not set to be valid, so the probability change transition flag is set. 203i remains off without being turned on.

Therefore, in the jackpot type "time saving B", even if the ball passes through the probability variable areas 73, 74 and is detected by the probability variable area switches 73d, 74d, the ball is detected by the probability variable area switches 73d, 74d that have detected the ball. Since the corresponding probability variable areas 73 and 74 are not set effectively, the probability variable transition flag 203i is not turned on and remains off, similar to the jackpot type "time saving A".

Next, with reference to FIG. 18, the manner in which balls are detected in each round of the jackpot type "latent probability variation B" will be explained. FIG. 18 shows the operation timings of the big winning opening solenoid 65c, right probability variable area solenoid 73b, and left probability variable area solenoid 74b in each round of the jackpot type "latent probability variation B" of the first special symbol, and the big winning opening switch 71, right It is a timing chart schematically showing the detection timing of a ball in the variable probability area switch 73d and the left variable probability area switch 74d, and the setting timing of the right variable probability valid flag 203g, the left variable probability valid flag 203h, and the variable probability transition flag 203i.

As shown in FIG. 18, in the jackpot type "latent probability variation B", a total of seven rounds of the jackpot game are executed, and at the start of each round, the jackpot solenoid 65c is turned on and the opening/closing plate 65b is opened. Then, when a predetermined condition (in the first embodiment, either "30 seconds" has elapsed since opening or 10 balls have been detected by the big winning port switch 71) is satisfied, the big winning port solenoid 65c is turned off, the opening/closing plate 65b is closed, and one round is completed.

In addition, in the jackpot type "Latent probability variation B", the opening/closing pattern of the right probability variable area 73 and the left probability variable area 74 is "X2", so in the 1st round, the 1st count ball is detected by the jackpot switch 71. When the right probability variable region solenoid 73b and the left probability variable region solenoid 74b are both turned on for 60 ms, it is possible to recognize whether or not the right probability variable region solenoid 73b and the left probability variable region solenoid 74b can be driven normally. ing.

Then, when the third count ball is detected by the big prize opening switch 71, only the left probability variable area solenoid 74b is turned on for "2000ms". In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the time required for the ball to reach the left probability variable area 74 after the ball is detected by the big prize opening switch 71 is within "2 seconds" (in the first embodiment, "1. 6 seconds”). Therefore, the third count ball can flow into the open left probability variable area 74, and is detected by the left probability variable area switch 74d.

At this time, the valid pattern of the probability variable areas 73 and 74 of the jackpot type "latent probability variation B" is "A", and the right probability variable area 73 of the second round and the left probability variable area 74 of the fifth round are effective. Set. Therefore, in the first round, both probability variation areas 73 and 74 are invalid, and the right probability variation valid flag 203g and the left probability variation validity flag 203h are set to OFF. Therefore, in the first round, even if the ball passes through the left probability variable area 74 and is detected by the left probability variable area switch 74d, the left probability variable area 74 is not set to be valid, so the probability change transition flag is 203i remains off without being turned on.

In addition, in odd-numbered rounds (i.e., 3rd round, 5th round, and 7th round) of the jackpot type "Latent probability variation B", the driving manner of the right probability variable area solenoid 73b and the left probability variable area solenoid 74b is the same as in the first round. .

Next, in the second round of the jackpot type "latent probability variation B", when the first count ball is detected by the jackpot switch 71, the right probability variable area solenoid 73b and the left probability variable area solenoid are activated as in the first round. 74b are both turned on for 60 ms, so that it can be recognized whether or not the right probability variable region solenoid 73b and the left probability variable region solenoid 74b can be driven normally.

Then, when the third count ball is detected by the big prize opening switch 71, only the right probability variable area solenoid 73b is turned on for "2000ms". In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the time required for the ball to reach the right probability variable area 73 after it is detected by the big prize opening switch 71 is within "2 seconds" (in the first embodiment, "1. 5 seconds”). Therefore, the third count ball can flow into the open right probability variable area 73, and is detected by the right probability variable area switch 73d.

At this time, the valid pattern of the probability variable areas 73 and 74 of the jackpot type "latent probability variation B" is "A", and in the second round, only the right probability variable area 73 is valid, and the right probability variable valid flag 203g is turned on. At the same time, the left probability variation valid flag 203h is set to OFF. Therefore, in the second round, when the ball passes through the right probability variable area 73 and is detected by the right probability variable area switch 73d, the right probability variable area 73 is set to be valid, so the probability change transition flag 203i is turned on. is set to

In addition, in the fifth round of the jackpot type "latent probability variation B", only the left probability variation area 74 is valid, the left probability variation valid flag 203h is set to ON, and the right probability variation validity flag 203g is set to OFF. ing. Therefore, even if the variable probability shift flag 203i is not turned on in the second round, the ball passes through the left probability variable area 74 and is detected by the left probability variable area switch 74d in the fifth round, so that the probability variable transition flag 203i is not turned on. The transition flag 203i is set to on.

Therefore, in the jackpot type "latent probability variation B", if the ball passes through the probability variable areas 73 and 74 and is detected by the probability variable area switches 73d and 74d, the ball is detected in the second and fifth rounds. Since the variable probability areas 73 and 74 corresponding to the variable probability area switches 73d and 74d are set to be valid, the variable probability transition flag 203i is set to ON, similar to the jackpot type "latent probability variation A". Then, at the end of the jackpot, a "probability variation state" is set with reference to this probability variation transition flag 203i.

Next, with reference to FIG. 19, the manner in which balls are detected in each round of the jackpot type "probability variation A" will be described. FIG. 19 shows the operation timings of the big winning hole solenoid 65c, right probability variable area solenoid 73b, and left probability variable area solenoid 74b in each round of the jackpot type "probability variation A" of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and the big winning hole. A timing chart schematically showing the detection timing of a ball in the switch 71, the right probability variable area switch 73d, and the left probability variable area switch 74d, and the setting timing of the right probability variation valid flag 203g, the left probability variation valid flag 203h, and the probability variation transition flag 203i. be.

As shown in FIG. 19, in the jackpot type "probability variation A", a total of 15 rounds of the jackpot game are executed, and at the start of each round, the jackpot solenoid 65c is turned on and the opening/closing plate 65b is opened. Then, when a predetermined condition (in the first embodiment, either "30 seconds" has elapsed since opening or 10 balls have been detected by the big winning port switch 71) is satisfied, the big winning port solenoid 65c is turned off, the opening/closing plate 65b is closed, and one round is completed.

In addition, in the jackpot type "probability variation A", since the opening/closing pattern of the right probability variable area 73 and the left probability variable area 74 is "Y1", the first count ball is detected by the jackpot switch 71 in the first round. In this case, the right probability variable region solenoid 73b and the left probability variable region solenoid 74b are both turned on for 60 ms, and it is configured to be able to recognize whether or not the right probability variable region solenoid 73b and the left probability variable region solenoid 74b can be driven normally. There is.

Then, when the third count ball is detected by the big prize opening switch 71, only the left probability variable area solenoid 74b is turned on for "2000ms". In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the time required for the ball to reach the left probability variable area 74 after the ball is detected by the big prize opening switch 71 is within "2 seconds" (in the first embodiment, "1. 6 seconds”). Therefore, the third count ball can flow into the open left probability variable area 74, and is detected by the left probability variable area switch 74d.

At this time, the valid pattern of the probability variable areas 73 and 74 of the jackpot type "probability variation A" is "C", and the right probability variable area 73 of the 4th round and the left probability variable area 74 of the 9th round are set effectively. be done. Therefore, in the first round, both probability variation areas 73 and 74 are invalid, and the right probability variation valid flag 203g and the left probability variation validity flag 203h are set to OFF. Therefore, in the first round, even if the ball passes through the left probability variable area 74 and is detected by the left probability variable area switch 74d, the left probability variable area 74 is not set to be valid, so the probability change transition flag is 203i remains off without being turned on.

In addition, in odd-numbered rounds of the jackpot type "probability variation A" (i.e., 3rd round, 5th round, 7th round, 9th round, 11th round, 13th round, and 15th round), the right probability variable area solenoid 73b and the left probability variable area solenoid 74b The driving mode is the same as the first round.

Next, in the second round of the jackpot type "probability variation A", when the first count ball is detected by the jackpot switch 71, as in the first round, the right probability variable area solenoid 73b and the left probability variable area solenoid 74b are activated. are both turned on for 60 ms, so that it can be recognized whether or not the right probability variable region solenoid 73b and the left probability variable region solenoid 74b can be driven normally.

Then, when the third count ball is detected by the big prize opening switch 71, only the right probability variable area solenoid 73b is turned on for "2000ms". In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the time required for the ball to reach the right probability variable area 73 after the ball is detected by the big prize opening switch 71 is within "2 seconds" (i.e., "1.5 seconds"). It is. Therefore, the third count ball can flow into the open right probability variable area 73, and is detected by the right probability variable area switch 73d.

At this time, the valid pattern of the probability variable areas 73, 74 of the jackpot type "probability variation A" is "C", and both probability variable areas 73, 74 are invalid in the second round, and the right probability variable valid flag 203g and the left probability variable area 73, 74 are invalid. The probability variation valid flag 203h is set to OFF. Therefore, in the second round, even if the ball passes through the right probability variable area 73 and is detected by the right probability variable area switch 73d, the right probability variable area 73 is not set to be valid, so the probability change transition flag is set. 203i remains off without being turned on.

In addition, in even-numbered rounds (i.e., 4th round, 6th round, 8th round, 10th round, 12th round, and 14th round) of the jackpot type "probability variation A", the drive mode of the right probability variable area solenoid 73b and the left probability variable area solenoid 74b is as follows. , is equivalent to the second round.

Next, in the third round of the jackpot type "probability variation A", when the first count ball is detected by the jackpot switch 71, the right probability variable area solenoid 73b and the left Both the probability variable area solenoids 74b are turned on for 60 ms, and it is possible to recognize whether or not the right probability variable area solenoid 73b and the left probability variable area solenoid 74b can be driven normally.

Then, when the third count ball is detected by the big prize opening switch 71, only the left probability variable area solenoid 74b is turned on for "2000ms". In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the time required for the ball to reach the left probability variable area 74 after the ball is detected by the big prize opening switch 71 is within "2 seconds" (that is, "1.6 seconds"). ). Therefore, the third count ball can flow into the open left probability variable area 74, and is detected by the left probability variable area switch 74d.

At this time, the valid pattern of the variable probability areas 73 and 74 of the jackpot type "probability variation A" is "C", and in the third round, both probability variable areas 73 and 74 are invalid, and the right probability variable valid flag 203g and the left The probability variation valid flag 203h is set to OFF. Therefore, in the third round, even if the ball passes through the left probability variable area 74 and is detected by the left probability variable area switch 74d, the left probability variable area 74 is not set to be valid, so the probability change transition flag is set. 203i remains off without being turned on.

Next, in the fourth round of the jackpot type "probability variation A", when the first count ball is detected by the jackpot switch 71, as in the first to third rounds, the right probability variation area solenoid 73b and the left Both the probability variable area solenoids 74b are turned on for 60 ms, and it is possible to recognize whether or not the right probability variable area solenoid 73b and the left probability variable area solenoid 74b can be driven normally.

Then, in the fourth round, when the third count ball is detected by the big prize opening switch 71, only the right probability variable area solenoid 73b is turned on for "2000 ms". In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the time required for the ball to reach the right probability variable area 73 after the ball is detected by the big prize opening switch 71 is within "2 seconds" (i.e., "1.6 seconds"). It is. Therefore, the third count ball can flow into the open right probability variable area 73, and is detected by the right probability variable area switch 73d.

At this time, the valid pattern of the probability variation areas 73 and 74 of the jackpot type "probability variation A" is "C", and in the fourth round, only the right probability variation area 73 is valid, and the right probability variation effective flag 203g is set to on. At the same time, the left probability variation valid flag 203h is set to OFF. Therefore, in the fourth round, when the ball passes through the right probability variable area 73 and is detected by the right probability variable area switch 73d, the right probability variable area 73 is set to be valid, so the probability change transition flag 203i is turned on. is set to

In addition, in the 9th round of the jackpot type "probability variation A", only the left probability variation area 74 is valid, the left probability variation valid flag 203h is set to ON, and the right probability variation validity flag 203g is set to OFF. There is. Therefore, even if the variable probability shift flag 203i is not turned on in the fourth round, the ball passes through the left probability variable area 74 and is detected by the left probability variable area switch 74d in the ninth round, so that the probability variable transition flag 203i is not turned on. The transition flag 203i is set to on.

Therefore, in the jackpot type "probability variation A", when the ball passes through the variable probability areas 73 and 74 and is detected by the variable probability area switches 73d and 74d, the ball is detected in the 4th round and the 9th round. Since the probability variable regions 73 and 74 corresponding to the probability variable region switches 73d and 74d are set to be valid, the probability variable shift flag 203i is set to ON. Then, at the end of the jackpot, a "probability variation state" is set with reference to this probability variation transition flag 203i.

Next, with reference to FIG. 20, the manner in which balls are detected in each round of the jackpot type "Time Saving C" will be described. FIG. 20 shows the operation timings of the big prize opening solenoid 65c, right probability variable area solenoid 73b, and left probability variable area solenoid 74b, the big winning opening switch 71, and the right probability variable area in each round of the jackpot type "time saving C" of the second special symbol. It is a timing chart schematically showing the detection timing of a ball in the switch 73d and the left probability variable area switch 74d, and the setting timing of the right probability variation effective flag 203g, the left probability variation effective flag 203h, and the probability variation transition flag 203i.

As shown in FIG. 20, in the jackpot type "time saving C", a total of 15 rounds of the jackpot game are executed, and at the start of each round, the jackpot solenoid 65c is turned on and the opening/closing plate 65b is opened. Then, when a predetermined condition (in the first embodiment, either "30 seconds" has elapsed since opening or 10 balls have been detected by the big winning port switch 71) is satisfied, the big winning port solenoid 65c is turned off, the opening/closing plate 65b is closed, and one round is completed.

In addition, in the jackpot type "Time saving C", the opening/closing pattern of the right probability variable area 73 and the left probability variable area 74 is "Y2", so in the first round, the first count ball was detected by the jackpot switch 71. In this case, both the right probability variable region solenoid 73b and the left probability variable region solenoid 74b are turned on for 60 ms, and it is configured to be able to recognize whether or not the right probability variable region solenoid 73b and the left probability variable region solenoid 74b can be driven normally. .

Then, when the third count ball is detected by the big prize opening switch 71, only the right probability variable area solenoid 73b is turned on for "2000ms". In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the time required for the ball to reach the right probability variable area 73 after it is detected by the big prize opening switch 71 is within "2 seconds" (in the first embodiment, "1. 5 seconds”). Therefore, the third count ball can flow into the open right probability variable area 73, and is detected by the right probability variable area switch 73d.

At this time, the valid pattern of the probability variable areas 73 and 74 of the jackpot type "time saving C" is "A", and the right probability variable area 73 of the second round and the left probability variable area 74 of the fifth round are set effectively. Ru. Therefore, in the first round, both probability variation areas 73 and 74 are invalid, and the right probability variation valid flag 203g and the left probability variation validity flag 203h are set to OFF. Therefore, in the first round, even if the ball passes through the right probability variable area 73 and is detected by the right probability variable area switch 73d, the right probability variable area 73 is not set to be valid, so the probability change transition flag is 203i remains off without being turned on.

In addition, in odd-numbered rounds of the jackpot type "time saving C" (i.e., 3rd round, 5th round, 7th round, 9th round, 11th round, 13th round, and 15th round), the right probability variable area solenoid 73b and the left probability variable area solenoid 74b are driven. The mode is the same as the first round.

Next, in the second round of the jackpot type "time saving C", when the first count ball is detected by the jackpot switch 71, the right probability variable area solenoid 73b and the left probability variable area solenoid 74b are activated as in the first round. Both are turned on for 60 ms so that it can be recognized whether or not the right probability variable region solenoid 73b and the left probability variable region solenoid 74b can be driven normally.

Then, when the third count ball is detected by the big prize opening switch 71, only the left probability variable area solenoid 74b is turned on for "2000ms". In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the time required for the ball to reach the left probability variable area 74 after the ball is detected by the big prize opening switch 71 is within "2 seconds" (i.e., "1.6 seconds"). It is. Therefore, the third count ball can flow into the open left probability variable area 74, and is detected by the left probability variable area switch 74d.

At this time, the valid pattern of the probability variable areas 73 and 74 of the jackpot type "time saving C" is "A", and in the second round, only the right probability variable area 73 is valid, and the right probability variable valid flag 203g is set to on. At the same time, the left probability variation valid flag 203h is set to OFF. Therefore, in the second round, even if the ball passes through the left probability variable area 74 and is detected by the left probability variable area switch 74d, the left probability variable area 74 is not set to be valid, so the probability change transition flag is set. 203i remains off without being turned on.

In addition, in the even numbered rounds of the jackpot type "time saving C" (namely, the 4th round, the 6th round, the 8th round, the 10th round, the 12th round, and the 14th round), the driving mode of the right probability variable area solenoid 73b and the left probability variable area solenoid 74b is as follows. This is equivalent to the second round.

Then, from the third round onwards of the jackpot type "time saving C", the open probability variable areas 73 and 74 are invalid, and the probability variable valid flags 203g and 203h corresponding to the probability variable area switches 73d and 74d where the ball is detected are is set to off. In particular, in the fifth round of the jackpot type "time saving C", only the left probability variation area 74 is valid, and the left probability variation valid flag 203h is set to ON, and the right probability variation validity flag 203g is set to OFF. However, the ball is configured to flow into the right probability variable area 73. Therefore, in the fifth round, even if the ball passes through the right probability variable area 73 and is detected by the right probability variable area switch 73d, the right probability variable area 73 is not set to be valid, so the probability change transition flag is set. 203i remains off without being turned on.

Therefore, in the jackpot type "time saving C", even if the ball passes through the variable probability regions 73, 74 and is detected by the variable probability region switches 73d, 74d, the ball is detected by the variable probability region switches 73d, 74d that have detected the ball. Since the corresponding probability variable areas 73 and 74 are not set effectively, the probability variable transition flag 203i is not turned on and remains off, similar to the jackpot types "time saving A" and "time saving B".

Next, with reference to FIG. 21, the manner in which balls are detected in each round of the jackpot type "latent probability variation C" will be explained. FIG. 21 shows the operation timings of the big winning opening solenoid 65c, right probability variable area solenoid 73b, and left probability variable area solenoid 74b in each round of the jackpot type "latent probability variation C" of the second special symbol, and the big winning opening switch 71, right It is a timing chart schematically showing the detection timing of a ball in the variable probability area switch 73d and the left variable probability area switch 74d, and the setting timing of the right variable probability valid flag 203g, the left variable probability valid flag 203h, and the variable probability transition flag 203i.

As shown in FIG. 21, in the jackpot type "latent probability variation C", a total of 15 rounds of the jackpot game are executed, and at the start of each round, the jackpot solenoid 65c is turned on and the opening/closing plate 65b is opened. Then, when a predetermined condition (in the first embodiment, either "30 seconds" has elapsed since opening or 10 balls have been detected by the big winning port switch 71) is satisfied, the big winning port solenoid 65c is turned off, the opening/closing plate 65b is closed, and one round is completed.

In addition, in the jackpot type "Latent probability variation C", the opening/closing pattern of the right probability variable area 73 and the left probability variable area 74 is "Y2" as in the jackpot type "time saving C", so in the first round, the big winning opening When the first count ball is detected by the switch 71, both the right probability variable region solenoid 73b and the left probability variable region solenoid 74b are turned on for 60 ms, and the right probability variable region solenoid 73b and the left probability variable region solenoid 74b are driven normally. It is configured such that it is possible to recognize whether or not it is possible.

Then, when the third count ball is detected by the big prize opening switch 71, only the right probability variable area solenoid 73b is turned on for "2000ms". In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the time required for the ball to reach the right probability variable area 73 after it is detected by the big prize opening switch 71 is within "2 seconds" (in the first embodiment, "1. 5 seconds”). Therefore, the third count ball can flow into the open right probability variable area 73, and is detected by the right probability variable area switch 73d.

At this time, the effective pattern of the probability variable areas 73 and 74 of the jackpot type "latent probability variation C" is "B", and the right probability variable area 73 of the third round and the left probability variable area 74 of the sixth round are effective. Set. Therefore, in the first round, both probability variation areas 73 and 74 are invalid, and the right probability variation valid flag 203g and the left probability variation validity flag 203h are set to OFF. Therefore, in the first round, even if the ball passes through the right probability variable area 73 and is detected by the right probability variable area switch 73d, the right probability variable area 73 is not set to be valid, so the probability change transition flag is 203i remains off without being turned on.

In addition, in odd-numbered rounds (i.e., 3rd round, 5th round, 7th round, 9th round, 11th round, 13th round, and 15th round) of the jackpot type "Latent probability variation C", the right probability variable area solenoid 73b and the left probability variable area solenoid 74b The driving mode is the same as in the first round.

Next, in the second round of the jackpot type "latent probability variation C", when the first count ball is detected by the jackpot switch 71, the right probability variable area solenoid 73b and the left probability variable area solenoid are activated as in the first round. 74b are both turned on for 60 ms, so that it can be recognized whether or not the right probability variable region solenoid 73b and the left probability variable region solenoid 74b can be driven normally.

Then, when the third count ball is detected by the big prize opening switch 71, only the left probability variable area solenoid 74b is turned on for "2000ms". In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the time required for the ball to reach the left probability variable area 74 after the ball is detected by the big prize opening switch 71 is within "2 seconds" (i.e., "1.6 seconds"). It is. Therefore, the third count ball can flow into the open left probability variable area 74, and is detected by the left probability variable area switch 74d.

At this time, the valid pattern of the probability variable areas 73, 74 of the jackpot type "latent probability variation C" is "B", and both probability variable areas 73, 74 are invalid in the second round, and the right probability variable valid flag 203g and The left probability variation valid flag 203h is set to OFF. Therefore, in the second round, even if the ball passes through the left probability variable area 74 and is detected by the left probability variable area switch 74d, the left probability variable area 74 is not set to be valid, so the probability change transition flag is set. 203i remains off without being turned on.

In addition, in the even-numbered rounds (i.e., 4th round, 6th round, 8th round, 10th round, 12th round, and 14th round) of the jackpot type "Latent probability variation C", the driving mode of the right probability variable area solenoid 73b and the left probability variable area solenoid 74b is equivalent to the second round.

Next, in the third round of the jackpot type "latent probability variation C", when the first count ball is detected by the jackpot switch 71, the right probability variation area solenoid 73b and The left probability variable region solenoid 74b is both turned on for 60 ms, and it is configured to be able to recognize whether or not the right probability variable region solenoid 73b and the left probability variable region solenoid 74b can be driven normally.

Then, in the third round, when the third count ball is detected by the big prize opening switch 71, only the right probability variable area solenoid 73b is turned on for "2000 ms". In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the time required for the ball to reach the right probability variable area 73 after the ball is detected by the big prize opening switch 71 is within "2 seconds" (i.e., "1.5 seconds"). It is. Therefore, the third count ball can flow into the open right probability variable area 73, and is detected by the right probability variable area switch 73d.

At this time, the valid pattern of the probability variable areas 73 and 74 of the jackpot type "latent probability variation C" is "B", and in the third round, only the right probability variable area 73 is valid, and the right probability variable valid flag 203g is turned on. At the same time, the left probability variation valid flag 203h is set to OFF. Therefore, in the third round, when a ball passes through the right probability variable area 73 and is detected by the right probability variable area switch 73d, the right probability variable area 73 is set to be valid, so the probability change transition flag 203i is turned on. is set to

In addition, in the 6th round of the jackpot type "latent probability variation C", only the left probability variation area 74 is valid, and the left probability variation valid flag 203h is set to ON, and the right probability variation validity flag 203g is set to OFF. ing. Therefore, even if the probability variation transition flag 203i is not turned on in the third round, the ball passes through the left probability variation area 74 and is detected by the left probability variation area switch 74d in the sixth round, so that the probability variation transition flag 203i is not turned on. The transition flag 203i is set to on.

Therefore, in the jackpot type "latent probability variation C", if the ball passes through the probability variable areas 73 and 74 and is detected by the probability variable area switches 73d and 74d, the ball is detected in the third and sixth rounds. Since the probability variable regions 73 and 74 corresponding to the probability variable region switches 73d and 74d are set to be valid, the probability variable shift flag 203i is set to ON. Then, at the end of the jackpot, a "probability variation state" is set with reference to this probability variation transition flag 203i.

In this way, the jackpot types with the same opening and closing patterns (i.e., jackpot types "time saving A" and "latent probability variation A", jackpot types "time saving B" and "latent probability variation B", and jackpot type "time saving C") ” and “Latent probability variation C”), and by making it impossible to determine the type of jackpot based only on the opening/closing patterns of the variable probability areas 73 and 74, it is possible for the player to recognize which type of jackpot he has won. It is possible to improve the interest of the game by making it difficult (impossible) to create a gameplay that makes the player guess in which game state he/she is playing the game.

On the other hand, the jackpot type "probability variation A" which informs that it is in a "probability variation state" has a unique opening/closing pattern (i.e. "Y1") different from other jackpot types and has a probability variation area on the right side 73 and a probability variation area on the left side. Controls opening and closing of 74. Therefore, by recognizing the opening/closing pattern of the right probability variable area 73 and the left probability variable area 74, the player can recognize that a "probability variation state" is provided.

Returning to FIG. 7, the explanation will be continued. The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is a calculation device, has a ROM 212 that stores control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal register of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, similar to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured so that a power outage signal SG1 is input from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage, etc. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 31) as processing during a power outage is immediately executed.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like. Further, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch 217 for detecting the paid out prize balls. Note that the prize ball detection switch 217 is connected to the payout control device 111, but not to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotational operation of the operating handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues an instruction to launch the ball. be. The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, when the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop switch 51b for stopping the ball launch is turned off (not operated), the operation handle is turned off. The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operating handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 outputs audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker not shown) 226, outputs turning on and off from a lamp display device (illumination sections 29 to 33, display lamps 34, etc.) 227, and outputs variable effects and continuous output. It controls the setting of the display mode of performances performed on the third symbol display device 81, such as advance notice performances.

The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 222 that stores control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, display control device 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, frame button 22, etc. are connected to the input/output port 225, respectively. In the first embodiment, the configuration is such that commands are sent only in one direction from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp controller 113, and the configuration is such that commands cannot be sent from the audio lamp controller 113 to the main controller 110. ing. On the other hand, the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are configured to be able to send and receive commands to and from each other.

The audio lamp control device 113 also monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the stage of the performance displayed on the third symbol display device 81, The audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the back image of the "Super Reach" production mode, etc., and the third symbol is displayed on the display control device 114 based on the press of the frame button 22. Instruct the display device 81 to display the information.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power cutoff due to a power failure, etc., and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 2). It has an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply section 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply section 251 takes in an AC 24 volt voltage supplied from the outside, and generates a 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are used to supply necessary voltages to each control device 110 to 114, etc.

The power outage monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power outage signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the dispensing control device 111 when the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage or the like. The power outage monitoring circuit 252 monitors a stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power outage (power outage, power interruption) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. Then, a power outage signal SG1 is output to the NMI terminal of the main control device 110 and the dispensing control device 111. By outputting the power outage signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the dispensing control device 111 recognize the occurrence of a power outage and execute the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 31). Note that even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 continues to output the 5 volt voltage, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient time to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain normal values. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process.

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 2) is pressed. When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data and sends a payout initialization command to the payout control device 111 to clear the backup data. It is transmitted to the device 111.

Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 22 to 33. The processing of the MPU 201 can be roughly divided into startup processing that is started upon power-on (see FIG. 32), main processing that is executed after the startup processing (see FIG. 33), and regular processing (see FIG. 33). In this case, there is a timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22) that is started at a "4 millisecond" cycle) and an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 31) that is started by inputting the power outage signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, we will first explain timer interrupt processing (see Figure 22) and NMI interrupt processing (see Figure 31), and then explain startup processing (see Figure 32) and main processing (see Figure 33). Explain.

FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is a regular process that is repeatedly executed every "4 milliseconds", for example. When the MPU 201 executes this timer interrupt process, various processes that should be executed periodically are performed.

In this timer interrupt processing, first, external output processing is executed (S101). In the timer interrupt processing and main processing, commands to be sent to the payout control device 111, the audio lamp control device 113, etc. are generated based on various processes, and are temporarily stored in a command sending ring buffer provided in the RAM 203. . In the external output process of S101, output data such as commands stored in the command transmission ring buffer is transmitted to each sub-side control device (peripheral control device).

For example, a command for the number of reserved balls set in a starting winning process (see FIG. 23) to be described later is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. In addition, the variation pattern command, stop type command, confirmation command, etc. set in the special figure variation process (see FIG. 24) and the variation start process (FIG. 25), which is a process of the special figure variation process, are sent to the voice lamp control device 113. Send. In addition, a ball launch signal set when a ball is launched in the launch control process of S112, which will be described later, is transmitted to the launch control device 112.

Next, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S102), and then the jackpot process is executed to execute the process at the time of jackpot based on the first special symbol or the second special symbol ( S103). Details of this jackpot processing (S103) will be described later with reference to FIG. 26.

Next, a normal electric utility control process is executed to execute a drive control process for the rotating plate of the normal electric accessory 67a (S104). To explain briefly, a variable display of the normal symbol is performed on the normal symbol display device 83 on the condition that the ball passes through the normal symbol gate 67, and as a result of the variable display of the normal symbol, the winning symbol of the normal symbol (for example, When the "○" symbol) appears and a winning state occurs, the rotary plate of the normal electric accessory 67a is driven to open for a predetermined period of time.

Next, a process of reading various winning switches is executed (S105). That is, the state of the big prize opening switch 71, right probability variable area switch 73d, left probability variable area switch 74d, and various switches 208 connected to the main control device 110 is read, and the state of the switch 208 is determined and detected. Save information (win detection information). Furthermore, a prize ball command corresponding to the number of acquired balls to be transmitted to the payout control device 111 based on the winning detection information is set in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203. As a result, the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 111 by the process of S101 of the timer interrupt process to be executed next.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S106). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value ("899" in the first embodiment), it is cleared to "0". Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding counter buffer 203c area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value ("99" in the first embodiment), it is cleared to "0" and the second initial value is The updated value of the random number counter CINI2 is stored in the corresponding counter buffer 203c area of the RAM 203.

Furthermore, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, the fluctuation type counter CS1, and the regular pattern random number counter C4 are updated (S107). Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, the fluctuation type counter CS1, and the random number counter C4 per common pattern are each incremented by 1, and the counter values are set to the maximum value (first implementation). In the format, when they reach "899", "99", "99", "199", "99" respectively, they are cleared to "0". In addition, when the jackpot random number counter C1 or the random number counter C4 per common figure completes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 or second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is converted into the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 or the random number per common figure. The initial value is read as the initial value of the counter C4, and the initial value is set to the jackpot random number counter C1 or the normal hit random number counter C4. Then, the updated values of each counter C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding counter buffer 203c area of the RAM 203.

Next, a starting winning process is executed in response to a winning to the special figure 1 winning hole 64b or the special drawing 2 winning hole 64c (S108), and then, as the ball passes through the normal symbol gate 67, the correctness of the normal symbol is determined. A gate passing process is executed to determine the contents of the variable display, etc. (S109). The details of the starting winning process will be described later with reference to FIG. 23.

After executing the gate passing process (S109), the process for dynamically displaying the special symbol by the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 based on the processing contents of the start winning process (S108) are performed. A special symbol variation process is executed to set the variation pattern of the third symbol, etc. (S110). In addition, the details of the special figure variation process (S110) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, based on the processing contents of the gate passage process (S109), a normal symbol variation process is executed (S111) to execute a process for variable display of normal symbols by the normal symbol display device 83. In the ordinary symbol variation process (S111), the lottery probability of the ordinary symbol is either high probability (for example, 9/10) or low probability (1/10), depending on the value of the time saving counter described later.

After executing the normal figure variation process (S111), a firing control process is executed (S112), and other processes that should be executed periodically are executed (S113), and the timer interrupt process is ended. Note that the firing control process (S112) is performed on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop switch 51b for stopping firing is not operated. This is the process of determining whether to launch the ball on or off. Then, when the ball launch is on, in order to transmit the ball launch signal to the launch control device 112, information on the ball launch signal is set in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203. As a result, the ball firing signal is transmitted to the firing control device 112 via the payout control device 111 by the process of S101 of the timer interrupt process to be executed next.

Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 23, the start winning process (S108), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing this starting winning process (S108). In the starting winning process, it is determined whether or not the ball has entered the special drawing 1 second winning hole 64b or the special drawing 2 winning hole 64c, and if there is a winning, the values of each counter C1 to C3, CS1 are set as winning. A process of storing (holding) the ball in the first holding ball storage area 203d or the second holding ball storage area 203e corresponding to the winning openings 64b and 64c is executed. It also executes a process for transmitting the values of each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 to be held together with the number of held balls to the audio lamp control device 113.

In this starting winning process (S108), the MPU 201 first determines whether or not the ball has won the special map 1 winning opening 64b (starting winning) (S201). Here, the output signal of the special figure 1 ball entrance switch (not shown) that detects the ball entering (winning) into the special figure 1 first prize opening 64b read in the switch reading process (see S105 in FIG. 22) Based on this, the ball entering the special figure 1 winning hole 64b is detected over three timer interrupt processes (see FIG. 22).

When it is determined that the ball has entered the special map 1 winning hole 64b (there has been a starting prize) (S201: Yes), the value of the first reserved ball counter 203a (the number of reserved balls in the main controller 110) is determined (S201: Yes). It is determined whether or not the number of pending balls (N1) of the dynamic display (fluctuating effect) of the first special symbol is less than the upper limit value ("4" in the first embodiment) (S202). Then, even if there is a win in the special figure 1 winning hole 64b, if the number of pending balls N1 is not 4 (S202: No), this start winning process (S108) is ended, and the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22) ) Return to

On the other hand, if the number of active pending balls N1<4 (S202: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the first pending ball number counter 203a (number of active pending balls N1) (S203). Then, this time, since the prize is to be won in the special figure 1 winning hole 64b corresponding to the first special symbol, the first reserved ball storage area 203d is set as the storage destination for each random number value C1 to C3, CS1 (S204), The process moves to S209.

In the process of S201, if it is determined that the ball has not entered the special drawing 1 winning hole 64b (S201: No), then it is determined whether the ball has entered the special drawing 2 winning hole 64c (starting winning). It is determined (S205). Here, similarly to the special figure 1 winning hole 64b, the special figure 2 ball entrance switch ( Based on the output signal of (not shown), the ball entering the special figure 2 winning hole 64c is detected over three timer interrupt processes (see FIG. 22).

When it is determined that the ball has entered the special map 2 winning hole 64c (there has been a starting prize) (S205: Yes), the value of the second reserved ball counter 203b (the number of reserved balls in the main controller 110) is determined (S205: Yes). It is determined whether or not the number of pending balls (N2) for dynamic display of the second special symbol (fluctuating effect) is less than the upper limit value ("4" in the first embodiment) (S206). Then, there is no winning in the special drawing 2 winning hole 64c (S205: No), or even if there is a winning in the special drawing 2 winning hole 64c, the number of pending balls N2 is not 4 (S206: No). , this start winning process (S108) is ended, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22).

On the other hand, if the number of active pending balls N2<4 (S206: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the second pending ball number counter 203b (number of active pending balls N2) (S207). Then, this time, since the prize is to be won in the special figure 2 winning hole 64c corresponding to the second special symbol, the second reserved ball storage area 203e is set as the storage destination for each random number value C1 to C3, CS1 (S208), The process moves to S209.

In the process of S209, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, stop pattern selection counter C3, and fluctuation type counter CS1 is read from the counter buffer 203c (see FIG. 8), and set as a storage destination in S204 or S208. The first reserved ball storage area 203d is the first reserved ball storage area 203d or the second reserved ball storage area 203d or the second reserved ball storage area 203d or the second reserved ball storage area 203e. If specified as the storage destination, the jackpot random number counter storage area 203d1, the jackpot type counter storage area 203d2, the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203d3, and the fluctuation type counter in the area corresponding to the value indicated by the first pending ball number counter 203a. Each is held (stored) in the storage area 203d4 (S209). In addition, when the second reserved ball storage area 203e is specified as the storage destination, the jackpot random number counter storage area 203e1, jackpot type counter storage area 203e2, and stoppage of the area corresponding to the value indicated by the second reserved ball number counter 203b are performed. It is held (stored) in the pattern selection counter storage area 203e3 and the variation type counter storage area 203e4 (S209).

Specifically, for example, the first reserved ball storage area 203d is set as the storage destination in the process of S204 based on the winning in the special drawing 1 winning hole 64b, and the first reserved ball storage area 203d is set as the storage destination in the process of S203. If the value of the number counter 203a is "1", the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are held in each storage area of the first holding area. Furthermore, if the value of the first reserved pitch number counter 203a after addition is "2", the value of the first reserved pitch number counter 203a after addition is "3" in each storage area of the first reserved second area. If the value of the first reserved ball counter 203a after addition is "4", the counters C1 to C3 are stored in each storage area of the first reserved third area, and if the value of the first reserved pitch counter 203a after addition is "4", the counters C1 to C3 are stored in each storage area of the first reserved third area. , CS1 are held.

Also, for example, the second reserved ball storage area 203e is set as the storage destination in the process of S208 based on the winning in the special figure 2 winning hole 64c, and the second reserved ball number counter 203b after the addition in the process of S207 If the value of is "1", the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are held in each storage area of the second storage first area. Further, if the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b after addition is "2", the value of the second reserved pitch number counter 203b after addition is "3" in each storage area of the second reserved second area. If so, the counters C1 to C3 are stored in each storage area of the second reservation third area, and if the value of the second reservation pitch counter 203b after addition is "4", the counters C1 to C3 are stored in each storage area of the second reservation fourth area. , CS1 are held.

Next, the value of the first held ball number counter 203a or the second held ball number counter 203b (active held ball number N1 or active held ball number N2) after addition by the process of S203 or S207, and the first Speak a command for the number of held balls containing the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, stop pattern selection counter C3, and fluctuation type counter CS1 stored (held) in the held ball storage area 203d or the second held ball storage area 203e. In order to transmit it to the lamp control device 113, the command for the number of held balls is set in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 (S210). As a result, the held pitch count command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 by the external output process in S101 of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22) to be executed next. After completing the process of S210, the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22).

Note that the values of the counters C1 to C3, CS1 to be included in the held pitch count command in the process of S210 may be the values themselves read from the counter buffer 203c in the process of S209, or the values of the first held pitches in the process of S209 may be used. You may use the read value stored (reserved) in the ball storage area 203d or the second reserved ball storage area 203e.

Next, with reference to FIG. 24, the special figure variation process (S110), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing this special figure variation process (S110). This special symbol variation processing (S110) is to control the dynamic display on the special symbol display device 37 and the variation performance performed on the third symbol display device 81.

In this special figure variation process (S110), first, it is determined whether or not there is a jackpot at present (S301). During a jackpot game, the jackpot game displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the special symbol display device 37 during a jackpot game and during a predetermined time after the jackpot game ends are included. As a result of the determination, if it is a jackpot (S301: Yes), the special symbol variation process (S110) is ended and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22).

If it is not a jackpot (S301: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the special symbol display device 37 is dynamically displayed (S302), and the display mode of the special symbol display device 37 is dynamically displayed. If not (S302: No), then it is determined whether a predetermined period of time has passed after the dynamic display on the special symbol display device 37 has stopped (S303). As a result, if the predetermined time has not elapsed after the dynamic display stopped (S303: No), the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22). As a result, the stopped symbols in the dynamic display (fluctuation effect) are displayed on the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 for a predetermined period of time, allowing the player to visually recognize the stopped symbols. .

On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S303, if a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the dynamic display stopped (S303: Yes), the value of the second reserved pitch counter 203b (the value of the second special pitch reserved in the main controller 110) It is determined whether or not the number of pending balls (N2) for dynamic display (fluctuating performance) related to symbols is greater than "0" (S304). As a result, if the value of the second held ball counter 203b (active held ball number N2) is not "0" (S304: Yes), it is the timing to start executing the dynamic display (fluctuating effect) regarding the second special symbol. First, the value of the second held ball counter 203b (number of active held balls N2) is subtracted by 1 (S305). This is because the execution of one of the dynamic displays (fluctuating effects) related to the second special symbol that has been suspended is started by the variation start process (S310) described later, so the second This is because the number of reserved balls related to the special symbol decreases by one.

Next, the data stored in the second reserved ball storage area 203e is shifted (S306). This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the second holding first to fourth areas of the second holding ball storage area 203e toward the holding ball execution area 203f. 1 area → Hold ball execution area 203f, 2nd hold 2nd area → 2nd hold 1st area, 2nd hold 3rd area → 2nd hold 2nd area, 2nd hold 4th area → 2nd hold 3rd area The data in each area is shifted in this way.

On the other hand, in the process of S304, if it is determined that the value of the second held ball counter 203b (operated held ball number N2) is "0" (S304: No), then the first held ball number counter 203a It is determined whether or not the value (the number N1 of operation pending balls of the dynamic display (fluctuating effect) related to the first special symbol held in the main control device 110) is larger than "0" (S307). As a result, if the value of the first held ball counter 203a (operating held ball number N1) is not "0" (S307: Yes), it is the timing to start executing the dynamic display (fluctuating effect) regarding the first special symbol. First, the value of the first held ball counter 203a (actual held ball number N1) is subtracted by 1 (S308). This is because the execution of one dynamic display (variable effect) among the dynamic displays (variable effects) related to the first special symbol that has been held is started by the movement start process (S310) described later, so the held ball This is because the number decreases by one.

Next, the data stored in the first reserved ball storage area 203d is shifted (S309). This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first holding areas 1 to 4 of the first holding ball storage area 203d toward the holding ball execution area 203f. 1 area → Hold ball execution area 203f, 1st hold 2nd area → 1st hold 1st area, 1st hold 3rd area → 1st hold 2nd area, 1st hold 4th area → 1st hold 3rd area The data in each area is shifted in this way.

After the data shift process in S306 or S309, a fluctuation start process is executed for the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 based on the values of various counters stored in the held ball execution area 203f by the data shift process. (S310), and returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22). Note that the fluctuation start process (S310) will be described later with reference to FIG. 25.

In the process of S307, if it is determined that the value of the first held ball counter 203a (operated held ball number N1) is "0" (S307: No), a demonstration effect is performed on the third symbol display device 81. In other words, it is determined whether the demonstration is in progress (S311). In this determination process, after transmitting a demo command to the display control device 114 via the audio lamp control device 113, the value of the first held ball number counter 203a or the second held ball number counter 203b (active held ball number N1 or activated The period until any value of the number of reserved pitches (N2) is determined to be greater than "0" is determined to be during the demonstration.

If it is determined that the demo is not in progress (S311: No), a demo command to be sent to the audio lamp control device 113 is set (S312), and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22). On the other hand, if it is determined that the demo is in progress (S311: Yes), the process directly returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22). The demo command set in the process of S312 is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is then executed during the external output process of the timer interrupt process (see S101 in FIG. 22). It is sent to the audio lamp control device 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the demo command, it sends a display demo command to the display control device 114, and the display control device 114 sends a demo command to the third symbol display device 81 based on the reception of the display demo command. Performs control to display effects.

Here, the demonstration command is set when, as described above, there is no held ball when a predetermined period of time has passed after the fluctuation has stopped. Therefore, if the variation effect is not started even after a predetermined period of time has passed after the variation is stopped, a demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Note that if it is determined in the process of S311 that the demo is not in progress (S311: No), a process of determining whether or not a second predetermined time period longer than the predetermined time period has elapsed after the fluctuation is stopped is performed. The demo command may be set by executing the process of S312 when the second predetermined time period has elapsed after the fluctuation has stopped. Thereby, when there are no reserved balls after the fluctuation is stopped, the stopped symbols of the stopped fluctuation performance can be shown to the player for a relatively long time without starting the demonstration performance immediately.

In the process of S302, when it is determined that the display mode of the special symbol display device 37 is dynamically displayed (S302: Yes), it is determined whether the dynamic display time (variable time) has elapsed (S313 ). The display time during the dynamic display of the special symbol display device 37 is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command), and this dynamic display time If (variable time) has not elapsed (S313: No), the display on the special symbol display device 37 is updated (S314), and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22).

In the first embodiment, for example, the display mode of the second LED group 37b of the special symbol display device 37 is set until a variable time period elapses after dynamic display is started.

On the other hand, if the dynamic display time (fluctuating time) of the dynamic display on the special symbol display device 37 has elapsed (S313: Yes), a display mode corresponding to the stopped symbol is set for the special symbol display device 37. (S315). The stop symbols are set in advance by a variation start process (S310) which will be described later with reference to FIG. In the fluctuation start process, whether or not it is a jackpot is determined according to the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f by the process of S306 or S309, and if it is a jackpot, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is determined. Accordingly, the number of rounds at the time of a jackpot and the gaming state after the jackpot are determined.

When the display mode of the special symbol display device 37 corresponding to the stop symbol is set in the process of S315, the stop symbol of the variable performance in the third symbol display device 81 is displayed on the second LED group 37b in the special symbol display device 37. In order to synchronize and confirm the display, a confirmation command is set (S316), and the process moves to S317. The confirmation command is a command for causing the third symbol display device 81 to confirm and display the variable performance being executed. When the audio lamp control device 113 receives this confirmation command, it transmits a display confirmation command to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 is configured to stop the fluctuating performance of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 and display the stopped symbol in a determined manner by receiving the display confirmation command.

In the process of S317, in order to determine whether the state is in a "probability fluctuation state", it is determined whether the value of an ST counter (not shown) provided in the RAM 203 is greater than "0" (S317). This ST counter is set to "100" when the "probability variation state" is started because the probability variation transition flag 203i is set to ON in the jackpot end processing (see S415 in FIG. 26) in the jackpot processing described later. is set (see S472 in FIG. 30).

In the process of S317, if the value of the ST counter is not "0" (S317: Yes), it is a "probability fluctuation state" and the dynamic display (fluctuation effect) of one of the special symbols has been completed once. The value of the ST counter is decremented by 1 (S318), and the process moves to S319. On the other hand, in the process of S317, if the value of the ST counter is "0" (S317: No), it is the "normal gaming state" or the "time reduction state", so the process of S318 is skipped and the process returns to S319. Move to.

In the process of S319, in order to determine whether or not the gaming state has a "time saving function" added, it is determined whether the value of a time saving counter (not shown) provided in the RAM 203 is greater than "0". It is determined (S319). This time saving counter is set to ``100'' when the jackpot type is determined to be ``probability variation A'', ``time saving C'', or ``latent probability variation C'' in the jackpot end process (see S415 in FIG. 26) in the jackpot process described later. " is set (see S475 in FIG. 30), and "50" is set when the jackpot type is determined to be "time saving A", "time saving B", "latent probability variation A", or "latent probability variation B". (See S476 in FIG. 30).

In the process of S319, if the value of the time-saving counter is not "0" (S319: Yes), the game state is in which a "time-saving function" is added, and the dynamic display (variable effect) of any of the special symbols is Since it has been completed once, the value of the time saving counter is decremented by 1 (S320), this special symbol variation process (S110) is ended, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 17). On the other hand, in the process of S319, if the value of the time-saving counter is "0" (S319: No), the "time-saving function" is not added, so the process of S320 is skipped, and this special figure fluctuation process (S110 ) and returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 17).

Next, with reference to FIG. 25, the variation start process (S310) which is one process of the special figure variation process (S110) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation start process (S310). This fluctuation start process (S310) performs a jackpot or loss lottery (jackpot lottery) based on the values of various counters stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f according to the game state, and also performs a jackpot lottery (jackpot lottery). 3. The dynamic display and the dynamic pattern (variation pattern and stop type) of the variation effect performed on the 3-symbol display device 81 are determined.

In the fluctuation start process (S310), first, in order to determine the gaming state, it is determined whether the value of an ST counter (not shown) provided in the RAM 203 is greater than "0" (S321). As a result of the determination, if the value of the ST counter is "0" (S321: No), the gaming state is "normal gaming state" or "time reduction state", and the jackpot probability of the special symbol is low probability state. , sets the jackpot random number table 202a for the low probability state (S322), and moves the process to S324. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the ST counter is larger than "0" (S323: Yes), the gaming state is a "probability fluctuation state", and the jackpot probability of the special symbol is a high probability state. Therefore, a jackpot random number table 202a for the high probability state is set (S323), and the process moves to S324.

In the process of S324, it is determined whether or not it is a jackpot based on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f and the jackpot random number table 202a (see FIG. 9(a)) set in S322 or S323. A jackpot lottery (win/fail determination) process is performed to determine (S324).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, whether or not there is a jackpot is determined based on the relationship between the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the gaming state (mode) at the time. As mentioned above, in the jackpot random number table 202a, when the possible gaming state (mode) of the pachinko machine 10 is the normal low probability state (“normal gaming state” or “time reduction state”), “7,307 , 582'' is defined as the jackpot random value. In addition, when the possible gaming state (mode) of the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state (“probability fluctuation state”), “28,122,298,390,486,567,656,750,866” is a jackpot. Specified as a random value.

In the process of S324, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f is compared with the jackpot random number values defined in the jackpot random number table 202a, and if they match, the jackpot is determined. It is determined that As a result of the processing in S324, if it is determined that it is a jackpot (S324: Yes), the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f and the jackpot for special figure 1 corresponding to the first special symbol. The display mode at the time of jackpot is set based on the type table 202b1 (see FIG. 10(a)) or the jackpot type table 202b2 for special figure 2 corresponding to the second special symbol (see FIG. 10(b)) (S325 ).

In this process, according to the jackpot type table 202b, the jackpot type associated with the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f, that is, after a jackpot with a maximum round number of 15 rounds, the "probability fluctuation state" is set. Either "Probability Variation A" corresponds to the "15R Probable Variable Jackpot" which transitions to "15R Probable Variable Jackpot" which shifts to the "Probability Variable State" after the maximum number of rounds is 15 rounds, or "Latent Probability Variation C" which corresponds to the "15R Latent Probable Variable Jackpot" which shifts to the "Probability Variable State". or "Time saving C" which corresponds to "15R time saving jackpot" which shifts to "time saving state" after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15, or shifts to "probability fluctuation state" after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 7 rounds. "Latent probability variation A" or "Latent probability variation B" corresponding to "7R latent probability variable jackpot", or "7R time saving jackpot" which shifts to "time shortened state" after the maximum number of rounds is 7 rounds jackpot. It is determined whether it is "time saving A" or "time saving B". Then, based on the determined jackpot type, the display mode (display mode of the second LED group 37b) at the time of a jackpot on the special symbol display device 37 is set.

Specifically, when the data stored in the held ball execution area 203f is data shifted from the first held ball storage area 203d, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the held ball execution area 203f. The jackpot type is determined based on the special figure 1 jackpot type table 202b1 (see FIG. 10(a)). In addition, if the data stored in the held ball execution area 203f is data shifted from the second held ball storage area 203e, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the held ball execution area 203f and the special The jackpot type is determined based on the jackpot type table 202b2 for FIG. 2 (see FIG. 10(b)).

Next, a fluctuation pattern at the time of a jackpot is determined (S326), and the process moves to S329. Specifically, a rough production mode is selected based on the jackpot type (display mode) determined in S325 and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f, and the selected performance mode is selected. Based on the value of the variation type counter CS1, a dynamic time (variation time) of a specific dynamic display (variation production) is determined from among the rough production modes. In determining the fluctuation pattern at the time of this jackpot, first, the stop pattern table 202d to be used is selected according to the jackpot type (display mode).

Specifically, in the process of S325, when "probability variation A" corresponding to "15R probability variable jackpot" is set as the jackpot type, if "probability variation A" corresponding to "probability variation A" is set, the stop pattern table 202d provided for "probability variation A" (for example, In the stop pattern table for variation A), the performance mode associated with the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the held ball execution area 203f is selected. In addition, when the "latent probability variation C" corresponding to "15R latent probability variable jackpot" is set as the jackpot type, the stop pattern table 202d provided for "latent probability variation C" (for example, for latent probability variation C) is set. In the stop pattern table), the performance mode associated with the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the held ball execution area 203f is selected. In addition, when "Time-saving C" corresponding to "15R Time-saving jackpot" is set as the jackpot type, in the stop pattern table 202d provided for "Time-saving C" (for example, the stop pattern table for Time-saving C), the hold The performance mode associated with the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the ball execution area 203f is selected. In addition, if "Latent Probability Variation A" or "Latent Probability Variation B" corresponding to "7R Latent Probability Variable Jacket" is set as the jackpot type, the stop pattern table provided for "Latent Probability Variation A/B" is set. In 202d (for example, the stop pattern table for latent probability fluctuations A and B), the performance mode associated with the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the held ball execution area 203f is selected. In addition, when "time saving A" or "time saving B" corresponding to "7R time saving jackpot" is set as the jackpot type, the stop pattern table 202d provided for "time saving A/B" (for example, time saving A/B) is set. In the stop pattern table for B), the performance mode associated with the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the held ball execution area 203f is selected.

Then, in the group of the variation pattern table 202e provided for each performance mode set in the process of S326, the variation pattern associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the held ball execution area 203f is selected. . Then, the variation time is set based on the relationship between the predefined variation pattern and the variation time.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S324 that it is not a jackpot (S324: No), a display mode for a loss is set (S327). In the process of S327, the display mode of the special symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the losing symbol, and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 and the first reserved ball number counter stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f are set. Based on the value of 203a or (and) second reserved ball number counter 203b and the current gaming state, the performance mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is "non-reach (shortened)" production mode, "non-reach (Normal)", "Normal Reach", "Super Reach", or "Special Reach". In the first embodiment, depending on whether the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a "probability fluctuation state", a "time reduction state", or a "normal gaming state", a stop corresponding to each performance mode is provided. The stop pattern table 202d is set so that the range of values of the pattern selection counter C3 is different.

Next, a fluctuation pattern at the time of a loss is determined (S328), and the process moves to S329. In the process of S328, a variable time is determined in the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 until the symbol is stopped and displayed in the case of a losing symbol. Specifically, in the group of the variation pattern table 202e provided for each display mode (performance mode) at the time of loss determined in the process of S327, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the held ball execution area 203f. Select the variation pattern associated with. Then, the variation time is set based on the relationship between the predefined variation pattern and the variation time.

In this way, the process of setting the production mode and variation pattern at the time of a jackpot and the process of setting the production mode and variation pattern at the time of a loss are judged and determined by the same determination program using the same random numbers C3 and CS1. This makes it possible to standardize programs and reduce development man-hours during development.

In the process of S329, based on the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern determined in the processes of S326 and S328, the display control device 114 is notified of the variation time according to the variation pattern via the audio lamp control device 113. A pattern command is set (S329). Specifically, for example, if you win a jackpot lottery, the jackpot is "probability variation A" corresponding to "15R probability variable jackpot", and a "super reach" variation pattern of "25 seconds" is selected. If so, a variation pattern command indicating a jackpot, "probability variation A", and "super reach" of "25 seconds" is set. In addition, if you lose the jackpot lottery and the variation pattern of "25 seconds" "Super Reach" is selected, a variation pattern command indicating the loss/"25 seconds" "Super Reach" will be set. . In this way, even if the variable effects have the same variation time, by setting the appropriateness of the variable effect and the general content of the variation pattern in the variable pattern command, the audio lamp control device 113 can control the effect mode including the appropriateness. By understanding the contents and the variation time, it is possible to determine the variation pattern of the variation performance in more detail based on that information.

In addition, a stop type command is set to notify the display control device 114 via the audio lamp control device 113 of the stop type set in the process of S325 or S327 (S330), and the special figure fluctuation process (see FIG. 24) ) Return to Specifically, for example, if you win a jackpot and the content of the jackpot is "probability variation A" which is a "15R probability variation jackpot", the specific stopping mode of the third symbol (for example, "7" symbol, etc.) ) is not specified, but a stop type command indicating that it is "probability variation A" is set. In addition, if you win a jackpot and the content of the jackpot is "latent probability variation A" which is "7R latent probability variable jackpot", the specific stopping mode of the third symbol (for example, "3" symbol etc.) is specific. Instead, set a stop type command that indicates "latent probability variation A."

On the other hand, if you do not win the jackpot and the "Super Reach" production mode is selected, the specific stopping mode of the third symbol (for example, "787" etc.) will not be specified, and the " Set a stop type command that indicates the "Super Reach" production mode. In addition, if you do not win the jackpot and the "Normal Reach" production mode is selected, the "Normal Reach" effect at the time of loss without specifying the specific stopping mode of the third symbol (for example, "737", etc.) ” Set a stop type command that indicates the production mode. Furthermore, if you do not win the jackpot and the "non-reach" production mode is selected, the specific stopping mode of the third symbol (for example, "258" etc.) will not be specified, and the " Set a stop type command that indicates the "non-reach" production mode.

In this way, by setting a rough stop type based on the propriety of the variation effect in the stop type command, the audio lamp control device 113 (display control device 114) can grasp the stop type based on the propriety of the variation effect and Based on this information, it is possible to determine the stopping result of the variable effect in more detail.

These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are It is sent to the audio lamp control device 113. When the audio lamp control device 113 receives the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command, it generates a display fluctuation pattern command and a display type command based on the fluctuation pattern command and transmits them to the display control device 114.

Next, with reference to FIG. 26, the jackpot process (S103), which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the jackpot processing (S103).

As described above, in this jackpot processing (S103), when a jackpot with a special symbol occurs, the number of openings (round number) of the jackpot 65a is set according to the type of jackpot, and the number of openings of the jackpot 65a is set. Set open time. In addition, based on the jackpot type, a probability variable area opening/closing table 202f (see FIG. 11) is set to set the right probability variable area 73 and left probability variable area 74 that are opened or closed for each round, and the probability variable area opening/closing table 202f (see FIG. 11) is set to be valid for each round. Alternatively, the probability variable area valid table 202g (see FIG. 12) is set in order to set the right probability variable area 73 and the left probability variable area 74 to be invalidated.

In addition, in the jackpot process (S103), in the case of a jackpot state, a jackpot opening/closing control process (see FIG. 27) for opening or closing the jackpot 65a is executed. That is, the big winning hole 65a is opened every round in the jackpot state, and the maximum opening time of the big winning hole 65a (in the first embodiment, "30 seconds") has elapsed, or the ball is in the big winning hole 65a. A closing condition is determined as to whether a specified number of prizes (10 in the first embodiment) have been won. Then, when any of these closing conditions is satisfied, the big prize opening 65a is closed. Control regarding opening and closing of the big prize opening 65a are repeatedly executed a predetermined number of rounds.

In addition, in this big winning opening opening/closing process, a process for opening or closing the right probability variable area 73 and the left probability variable area 74 is executed based on the set probability variable area opening/closing table 202f (see FIG. 11), and the setting The right variable probability region 73 or the left variable probability region 74 is set to be valid or invalid, respectively, based on the variable probability region effective table 202g (see FIG. 12). That is, for each round in the jackpot state, the right probability variable area opening/closing plate 73a of the right probability variable area 73 and the left probability variable area opening/closing of the left probability variable area 74 are opened and closed according to the set probability variable area opening/closing table 202f (see FIG. 11). Drive control of the plate 74a. Furthermore, for each round in the jackpot state, the right probability variation valid flag 203g corresponding to the right probability variation area 73 and the left probability variation validity flag 203g corresponding to the left probability variation area 74 are set according to the set probability variation area validity table 202g (see FIG. 12). The probability variation valid flag 203h is set on or off.

In this jackpot processing (S103), first, it is determined whether or not there is a jackpot (S401). As a result of the determination, if it is not a jackpot (S401: No), then it is determined whether the dynamic display of the special symbol (fluctuation effect) has ended (S402).

As a result of the determination in S402, if the dynamic display (fluctuation effect) of the special symbol has not ended (S402: No), this jackpot process (S103) is ended and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22). On the other hand, if the dynamic display (variable performance) of the special symbol has ended (S402: Yes), then it is determined whether or not a jackpot has been won in the dynamic display (variable performance) (S403).

As a result of the determination in S403, if it is determined that the jackpot has not been won in the dynamic display (fluctuation effect) (S403: No), this jackpot processing (S103) is ended and the timer interrupt processing (Fig. 22 Return to ). On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot has been won in the dynamic display (fluctuation effect) (S403: Yes), in order to execute control regarding the won jackpot, first check whether the number of rounds of the won jackpot is 15R. No, that is, "probability variation A" corresponding to "15R probability variable jackpot", "latent probability variation C" corresponding to "15R potential probability variable jackpot", or "time saving C" corresponding to "15R time saving jackpot" It is determined whether or not the winner has been won (S404).

As a result of the determination in S404, if the number of rounds of the won jackpot is 15R (S404: Yes), the round counter is set to "15" in order to control the opening of the jackpot 65a 15 times in this jackpot ( S405), the process moves to S407. On the other hand, if the number of rounds of the won jackpot is not 15R, that is, "latent probability variation A" or "latent probability variation B" corresponding to "7R latent probability variable jackpot", or "time saving" corresponding to "7R time saving jackpot" If you have won "A" or "Time Saving B" (S404: No), set "7" in the round counter so that the opening control of the big prize opening 65a is performed seven times in this jackpot (S406), The process moves to S407. The MPU 201 checks the value of the round counter, and if a value is set in the round counter (that is, "1" or more), the MPU 201 changes the value of the round counter to 1 while controlling the opening of the big prize opening 65a. Subtract. Then, when the value of the round counter becomes "0", the jackpot being executed is terminated.

In the process of S407, in order to transmit the opening command to the audio lamp control device 113, the opening command is set in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 (S407). Next, the opening time (for example, "10 seconds") of the jackpot is set (S408), and the process moves to S409. The opening command set in the process of S407 is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 during the external output process (see S101 in FIG. 22) of the timer interrupt process to be executed next.

When the audio lamp control device 113 receives the opening command, it outputs a sound indicating that a jackpot has started, controls the lamp, etc., and transmits a display opening command to the display control device 114. Then, the display control device 114 controls the third symbol display device 81 to display an opening effect (for example, notification of the total number of rounds, etc.) based on the reception of the display opening command.

In the process of S409, the probability variable area opening/closing table 202f (see FIG. 11) is set according to the type of jackpot (jackpot type) (S409), and the process moves to S410. Specifically, if the jackpot type is "time saving A" and "latent probability variation A", the opening/closing pattern of the right probability variable area 73 and the left probability variable area 74 is set to "X1", and the jackpot type is "time saving B" and "latent probability variation A". If the type of jackpot is "probability variation B", the opening/closing pattern of the right probability variable area 73 and the left probability variable area 74 is set to "X2", and if the jackpot type is "probability variation A", the opening/closing pattern of the right probability variable area 73 and the left probability variable area 74 is set to "X2". If the jackpot type is "time saving C" and "latent probability variation C", the opening/closing pattern of the right probability variable area 73 and the left probability variable area 74 is set to "Y2".

In the process of S410, the probability variable area effective table 202g (see FIG. 12) is set according to the type of jackpot (jackpot type) (S410), and the process moves to S411. Specifically, if the jackpot type is "time saving A", "time saving C", and "latent probability variation B", the effective pattern of the right probability variable area 73 and the left probability variable area 74 is set to "A", and the jackpot type is "time saving". B", "Latent probability variation A" and "Latent probability variation C", set the effective pattern of the right probability variable area 73 and left probability variable area 74 to "B", and if the jackpot type is "Probability variation A", set the valid pattern to "B". The effective patterns of the probability variable area 73 and the left probability variable area 74 are set to "C".

In the process of S411, it is determined whether the jackpot type of the current jackpot is "probability fluctuation A" (S411). As a result of the determination, if it is determined that the state is "probability variation A" (S411: Yes), a probability variation notification command is set to notify the player of the "probability variation state" (S412). , ends the jackpot process (S103) and returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22).

The probability change notification command set in the process of S412 is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is stored in the external output process of the timer interrupt process to be executed next (see S101 in FIG. 22). , is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. The audio lamp control device 113 is configured to execute a ``probability change notification mode'' in order to notify the player that the probability change notification command is received, that the probability change notification command is received.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S411 that it is not "probability variation A" (S411: No), the process of S412 is skipped so as not to set the probability variation notification command, since the gaming state will not be clearly notified. , ends the main jackpot process (S103) and returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22).

In the pachinko machine of the first embodiment, when the audio lamp control device 113 has not received the above-mentioned probability change notification command, when the jackpot being executed ends, the "time saving notification performance mode" is executed without exception for the performance after the jackpot. The system is configured so that it is difficult (or impossible) for the player to recognize whether the game is in a "probability fluctuation state" or a "time reduction state."

In the process of S401, if it is determined that the jackpot has already been won (S401: Yes), a big winning opening/closing control process (S413) is executed to control opening/closing of the big winning opening 65a.

Here, with reference to FIG. 27, the jackpot opening/closing control process (S413), which is one process of the jackpot process (S103) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the big winning opening opening/closing control process (S413). As described above, in this big winning opening/closing control process (S413), the opening/closing control of the big winning opening 65a and the right side probability variable area 73 are performed based on the number of openings of the big winning opening 65a set in the jackpot process (S103). Then, the opening/closing control of the left probability variable area 74 and the valid setting process or the invalid setting process of the right probability variable area 73 and the left probability variable area 74 are executed.

In this jackpot opening/closing control process (S413), first, it is determined whether the opening time at the time of the current jackpot or the interval time between each round (for example, "1 second") has elapsed (S421) . As a result of the determination, if the opening time or the interval time has not elapsed (S421: No), the condition for opening the big prize opening 65a has not yet been satisfied, so the process of S422 is skipped and the process moves to S423. . On the other hand, if the opening time or the interval time has elapsed (S421: Yes), the conditions for opening the big winning hole 65a are satisfied, so the opening setting process for the big winning hole 65a is performed (S422), and the process moves to S4223. do.

Here, with reference to FIG. 28, the open setting process (S422) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the release setting process (S422). As described above, in this opening setting process (S422), various setting processes and the like for opening the big prize opening 65a are executed.

In this opening setting process (S422), first, since it is the timing to open the big winning hole 65a of the variable winning device 65, the big winning hole opening setting for opening the big winning hole 65a of the variable winning device 65 is performed ( S431), the process moves to S432. By performing this big winning hole opening setting, the big winning hole solenoid 65c is driven, the opening/closing plate 65b is opened, and the ball can flow into the big winning hole 65a.

Next, in the process of S432, in order to count the balls that have won into the opened big winning hole 65a, a winning counter is set to "10" (S432), and the process moves to S433. In the first embodiment, the value of this winning counter is configured to be decremented by 1 every time one ball enters the big winning hole 65a, and after opening the big winning hole 65a, the MPU 201 controls the value of the winning prize counter by 1 after opening the big winning hole 65a. The big prize opening 65a is configured to be closed when time has elapsed or when the value of the winning prize counter becomes "0".

Next, in the process of S433, the maximum opening time (for example, "30 seconds") of the grand prize opening 65a is set (S433), and the sound lamp control device 113 is notified that the grand prize opening 65a is open. A release command shown is set (S434), and the process moves to S435. The release command set in the process of S434 is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process of the timer interrupt process (see S101 in FIG. 17) that is executed next. It is sent to the audio lamp control device 113.

When the audio lamp control device 113 receives the release command, it outputs a sound indicating that the round has started, controls the lamp, etc., and also sends a display release command to the display control device 114, and the display control device 114 Based on the reception of the display release command, control is performed to display a round effect (for example, round number notification) on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, in the process of S435, the right probability variation validity flag 203g or the left probability variation validity flag 203h for the round is set based on the probability variation area validity table 202g set according to the jackpot type in the jackpot process (see FIG. 26). (S435), this release setting process (S422) is ended. After the opening setting process (S422) is completed, the process moves to S423 of the big winning opening opening/closing control process (see FIG. 27).

In the process of S435, specifically, regarding the right probability variation valid flag 203g, if the jackpot type is "time saving A", "latent probability variation B", and "time saving C", and at the start of the second round of the jackpot, , since the probability variation area valid pattern is "A", the right probability variation validity flag 203g is set to ON.

In addition, in the process of S435, if the jackpot type is "time saving B", "latent probability variation A", and "latent probability variation C" and it is the start of the third round of the jackpot, the probability variable area effective pattern is "B". ”, the right probability variation valid flag 203g is set to on.

Furthermore, in the process of S435, if the jackpot type is "probability variation A" and it is the start of the fourth round of the jackpot, the probability variation area valid pattern is "C", so the right probability variation validity flag 203g is turned on. Set. In addition, in all rounds other than the above-mentioned round of each jackpot type, the right probability variation valid flag 203g is set to OFF.

Regarding the left probability variation valid flag 203h, if the jackpot type is "time saving A", "latent probability variation B", and "time saving C" and at the start of the 5th round of the jackpot, the left probability variation valid flag 203h is turned on. is set to Further, if the jackpot type is "time saving B", "latent probability variation A", or "latent probability variation C" and it is the start of the 6th round of the jackpot, the left probability change valid flag 203h is set to ON. Furthermore, if the jackpot type is "probability variation A" and it is the start of the 9th round of the jackpot, the left probability variation valid flag 203h is set to ON. Further, in all rounds other than the above-mentioned rounds of each jackpot type, the left probability variation valid flag 203h is set to OFF.

Returning to FIG. 27, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S423, it is determined whether or not the big prize opening 65a is open (S423). As a result of the determination, if the big winning hole 65a is not open (S423: No), it means that the big winning hole 65a is not open but is during the opening time, interval time, or ending time. , S424 is skipped, this big winning opening opening/closing control process (S413) is ended, and the process returns to the jackpot process (see FIG. 26). On the other hand, if the big winning hole 65a is open (S423: Yes), an opening process is performed to execute various processes associated with opening the big winning hole 65a (S424), and this big winning hole opening/closing control process (S413) is finished, and the process returns to the jackpot process (see FIG. 26).

Here, with reference to FIG. 29, the opening process (S424) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the process during release (S424). As mentioned above, in this opening process (S424), the winning detection process of the ball accompanying the opening of the big winning hole 65a, the opening/closing control of the right probability variable area 73 and the left probability variable area 74, or the opened right probability variable area 73 or the left side probability variable area 74, etc.

In this open processing (S424), first, it is determined whether the right variable probability region switch 73d is turned on (S441). As a result of the determination, if the right probability variable area switch 73d is turned on (S441: Yes), the ball has entered the right probability variable area 73, and then it is determined whether the right probability variable valid flag 203g is set to on. (S442). As a result of the determination, if the right probability variation valid flag 203g is set to ON (S442: Yes), this means that the ball is flowing into the right probability variation area 73 in a situation where the right probability variation area 73 is set to be valid. In order to generate a "probability variation state" after the end of the jackpot, the probability variation transition flag 203i is set on (S443), and the process moves to S446. On the other hand, in the process of S442, if the right probability variation valid flag 203g is not set to ON (S442: No), the ball enters the right probability variation area 73 in a situation where the right probability variation area 73 is not set to be valid. Therefore, the process of S443 is skipped and the process moves to S446.

Further, in the process of S441, if the right probability variable area switch 73d is not turned on (S441: No), then it is determined whether the left probability variable area switch 74d is turned on (S444). As a result of the determination, if the left probability variable area switch 74d is turned on (S444: Yes), the ball has entered the left probability variable area 74, and then it is determined whether the left probability variable valid flag 203h is set to on. (S445). As a result of the determination, if the left probability variation valid flag 203h is set to ON (S445: Yes), this means that the ball is flowing into the left probability variation area 74 in a situation where the left probability variation area 74 is set to be valid. The process moves to S443, the probability change transition flag 203i is set to ON (S443), and the process moves to S446.

On the other hand, in the process of S445, if the left probability variation valid flag 203h is not set to ON (S442: No), the ball enters the left probability variation area 74 in a situation where the left probability variation area 74 is not set to be valid. Therefore, the process of S443 is skipped and the process moves to S446. In addition, in the process of S444, if the left probability variable area switch 74d is not turned on (S444: No), since neither probability variable area switch 73d, 74d has detected a ball, the process moves to S446.

In the process of S446, it is determined whether or not the one-time opening time of the big prize opening 65a set in the above-mentioned opening time setting process (see S433 in FIG. 28) has elapsed (S446). In the process of S446, if the opening time of the big winning opening 65a has elapsed (S446: Yes), the closing condition of the big winning opening 65a is satisfied, and it is the closing timing of the big winning opening 65a in that round. In order to clear the value of the winning counter to "0" (S447) and close the big winning opening 65a, the process moves to S455. The closing process of the big prize opening 65a from S445 will be described later. On the other hand, in the process of S446, if the opening time of the grand prize opening 65a has not elapsed (S446: No), then whether or not a ball enters the grand prize opening 65a and the grand prize opening switch 71 is turned on. (S448).

In the process of S448, if the big winning hole switch 71 is turned on (S448: Yes), the ball has won into the big winning hole 65a, so the value of the winning prize counter is subtracted by 1 (S449), and then, It is determined whether or not the current ON detection of the big winning opening switch 71 is the first count, that is, whether or not the value of the winning winning counter is "9" (S450).

In the process of S450, if it is determined that the current ON detection of the big prize opening switch 71 is not the first count (S450: No), the process moves to S452, while if it is determined that it is the first count (S450: Yes), the right probability variable region solenoid 73b and the left probability variable region solenoid 74b are set to ON for "60 ms" (S451), and the ball flows through the right probability variable region opening/closing plate 73a and the left probability variable region opening/closing plate 74a. Let it open for a moment to the extent that it doesn't.

In this way, at the first count of each round, the right probability variable region solenoid 73b and the left probability variable region solenoid 74b are driven to such an extent that the ball does not flow in, and the right probability variable region opening/closing plate 73a and the left probability variable region opening/closing plate 74a can be opened. Since it is possible to confirm whether or not the probability variable areas 73 and 74 are not opened due to an abnormality or the like, it is possible to grasp at an early stage a situation in which the variable probability areas 73 and 74 are not opened.

Next, in the process of S452, it is determined whether or not the current ON detection of the big winning a prize opening switch 71 is the third count, that is, whether or not the value of the winning a prize counter is "7" (S452). As a result of the determination, if it is determined that the current ON detection of the jackpot switch 71 is the third count (S452: Yes), the probability change set according to the jackpot type in the jackpot processing (see FIG. 26) Based on the area opening/closing table 202f (see FIG. 11), the right probability variable region solenoid 73b or the left probability variable region solenoid 74b is set to ON for "2000ms" (S453), and the right probability variable region opening/closing plate 73a or the left probability variable region opening/closing is performed. Either one of the plates 74a is opened to allow balls to flow into the open probability variable regions 73, 74. With this configuration, in each round, the ball can be caused to pass through one of the preset probability variable regions 73 and 74. In addition, after executing S451 and S453, this process during opening (S424) is ended, and the process returns to the big winning opening opening/closing control process (see FIG. 27).

On the other hand, in the process of S452, if it is determined that the current ON detection of the big winning a prize opening switch 71 is not the third count (S452: No), then the value of the winning prize counter that is subtracted by 1 is a value larger than "0". It is determined whether or not (S454). If the value of the winning counter is not greater than "0" (S454: No), that is, if the value of the winning counter is less than or equal to "0", 10 balls have entered the grand prize opening 65a and the grand prize opening has been opened. Since the closing condition of 65a is satisfied, the process moves to S455 in order to close the big prize opening 65a.

In addition, in the process of S448, if the big prize opening switch 71 is not turned on (S448: No), or if it is determined that the value of the winning prize counter is larger than "0" in the process of S454, (S454: Yes), the closing condition of the big winning hole 65a is not satisfied, and in order to continue opening the big winning hole 65a, the processes of S449 to S453 are skipped and this opening process (S424) is executed. finish. After the opening process (S424) is finished, the process returns to the big prize opening opening/closing control process (see FIG. 27).

In the closing process of the big winning opening 65a from S455, first, the closing setting of the big winning opening 65a is performed (S455), the big winning opening solenoid 65c is turned off, and the opening/closing plate 65b is closed. Next, a closing command indicating that the big prize opening 65a is closed is set to the audio lamp control device 113 (S456), and the process moves to S457. Note that the closing command set in the process of S456 is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is stored in the external output process of the timer interrupt process (see S101 in FIG. 22) to be executed next. and is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113.

When the audio lamp control device 113 receives the closing command, it outputs a voice indicating that one round has ended, controls the lamp, etc., and transmits a display closing command to the display control device 114. Then, the display control device 114 ends the round production (for example, round number notification) being executed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the reception of the display close command, and if the jackpot continues, the interval time Control is performed to switch to and display an interval effect indicating that the jackpot is over, and when the jackpot ends, control is performed to end the jackpot.

Next, in the process of S457, with the closing of the big prize opening 65a, that is, the end of one round, the right probability variation valid flag 203g, the left probability variation validity flag 203h, the right probability variation area solenoid 73b, and the left probability variation area solenoid 74b are set. In order to initialize the setting status once, the right probability variation valid flag 203g and the left probability variation validity flag 203h are set to OFF (S457), and the right probability variation area solenoid 73b and left probability variation area solenoid 74b are set to OFF (S458). , the process moves to S459.

Next, in the process of S459, since 1 round of the big prize opening 65a has been completed, the value of the round counter is subtracted by 1 (S459), and it is determined whether the value of the round counter subtracted by 1 is a value larger than "0". (S460). If the value of the round counter is larger than "0" (S460: Yes), the number of rounds in the jackpot (remaining number of openings of the big winning hole 65a) remains, so the next big winning hole will be opened. An interval time (for example, "2 seconds") is set until 65a is released (S461), this opening process (S424) is ended, and the process returns to the jackpot process (see FIG. 26).

On the other hand, in the process of S460, if the value of the round counter is not larger than "0" (S460: No), that is, if the value of the round counter is less than or equal to "0", the jackpot 65a in this jackpot is Since all the opening operations have been completed, in order to end the jackpot state, the opening processing (S424) is ended and the processing of S414 of the jackpot processing (see FIG. 26) is performed.

Returning to FIG. 26, the explanation will be continued. After executing the big winning opening control process (S413), it is determined whether the value of the round counter is greater than "0" (S414). In the opening process (see FIG. 29) of the above-mentioned big winning hole opening/closing control process, the value of the round counter is decremented as the big winning hole 65a is closed (see S459 in FIG. 29). , If the value of the round counter is greater than "0" (S510: Yes), in order to continue the jackpot, the process of S415 is skipped and this jackpot process (S103) is ended, Return to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22).

On the other hand, if the value of the round counter is not larger than "0", that is, if the value of the round counter is "0" or less (S414: No), the jackpot termination condition is satisfied, so the jackpot is In order to end the process, a jackpot ending process is executed (S415), this jackpot process (S103) is ended, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22).

Here, with reference to FIG. 30, the jackpot end process (S415), which is one process of the jackpot process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end process (S415). As described above, in this jackpot end processing (S415), the end setting control of the jackpot, such as the setting of the ending time (for example, "5 seconds"), and the control of the end of the jackpot, such as setting the ending time (for example, "5 seconds"), and the control of the jackpot end setting such as setting the ending time (for example, "5 seconds"), and setting control of the gaming state after a jackpot based on the inflow of.

In this jackpot end processing (S415), first, it is determined whether or not the probability change transition flag 203i is turned on (S471). As a result of the determination, if the probability change transition flag 203i is turned on (S471: Yes), during this jackpot, the ball passes through the validly set right probability variation area 73 or left probability variation area 74, and the "probability variation state" is established. Since the transition conditions have been met, the value of the ST counter will be "100" is set (S472), the probability change transition flag 203i is set to OFF (S473), and the process proceeds to S474.

On the other hand, in the process of S471, if the probability change transition flag 203i is not turned on (s471: No), the ball did not pass through the validly set right probability variable area 73 or left probability variable area 74 during this jackpot, Since the conditions for transition to the "probability fluctuation state" are not satisfied, the processes of S472 and S473 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S474.

In the process of S474, it is determined whether the current jackpot type is "probability variation A", "latent probability variation C", or "time saving C" (S474). As a result of the determination, if it is determined that the current jackpot type is one of "probability fluctuation A", "latent probability fluctuation C", or "time reduction C" (S474: Yes), the gaming state after the jackpot is determined. In order to add the "time-saving function" until the dynamic display (variable performance) of the special symbol is executed 100 times, the value of the time-saving counter is set to "100" (S475), and the process moves to S477.

On the other hand, in the process of S474, if it is determined that the current jackpot type is not "probability fluctuation A", "latent probability fluctuation C", or "time saving C" (S474: Yes), that is, the current jackpot type is "time saving". A", "Time Saving B", "Latent Probability Variation A" or "Latent Probability Variation B", the dynamic display of the special symbol (variation effect) will change the gaming state after the jackpot is over by 50%. In order to add the "time saving function" until the time saving function is executed, the value of the time saving counter is set to "50" (S476), and the process moves to S477.

Next, in the process of S477, an ending command indicating the start of a jackpot ending performance is set for the audio lamp control device 113 (S477). Then, a jackpot end setting process is performed to set the ending time, etc. (S478), this jackpot end process (S415) is ended, and the process returns to the jackpot process (see FIG. 26). Note that the ending command set in the process of S477 is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is stored in the external output process of the timer interrupt process to be executed next (see S101 in FIG. 22). and is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113.

When the audio lamp control device 113 receives the ending command, it outputs a sound indicating that the jackpot is over, controls the lamp, etc., and also transmits an ending command for display to the display control device 114, and the display control device 114, Based on the reception of the display ending command, the third symbol display device 81 is controlled to display an ending effect (for example, a suggestion of the gaming state after the end of the jackpot, etc.).

In this way, in the jackpot process (see FIG. 26), the opening and closing of the big winning opening 65a is controlled, and the opening and closing of the right probability variable area 73 and the left probability variable area 74 are controlled, as well as the right probability variable area 73 and the left probability variable area 74. A valid setting process or an invalid setting process is executed, and when a ball passes through probability variable areas 73 and 74 which are set to be valid, a "probability variable state" is generated after the jackpot ends. With this configuration, even if the ball passes through each probability variable region 73, 74, if the probability variable regions 73, 74 are not set internally as valid, a "probability variable state" will occur after the jackpot ends. Therefore, even if the player visually recognizes the passage of the ball to each probability variable area 73, 74, it is possible to configure such that the occurrence of the "probability variable state" is not determined after the jackpot is completed. Therefore, even when the "latent probability variation performance mode" is executed, it is possible to create a gameplay that makes the player guess in which gaming state he/she is playing the game, thereby improving the interest of the game. be able to.

Next, with reference to FIG. 31, a description will be given of the NMI interrupt process executed in main controller 110 when a power outage or the like occurs. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like.

Through this NMI interrupt processing, information on the occurrence of power outage is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power outage or the like, a power outage signal SG1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. When the power failure signal SG1 is input to the NMI terminal, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed, starts NMI interrupt processing, and stores the power failure occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the power failure occurrence information setting (S801 ), the NMI interrupt processing ends.

Note that the above NMI interrupt process is similarly executed by the payout control device 111, and information on the occurrence of power outage is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like, a power outage signal SG1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, NMI interrupt processing is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 32, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 when the main controller 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing this startup process. This start-up process is started by a reset when the power is turned on.

In the start-up process, first, initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S901). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, in order to wait for the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the audio lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operational, a wait process (in the first embodiment, “1 second”) is performed. ) is executed (S902). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

After that, it is determined whether the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 2) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S904), and if it is turned on (S904: Yes), the process moves to S911. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), it is further determined whether power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905), and if it is not stored (S905: No). , since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power-off did not end normally, the process also moves to S911 in this case.

If power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905: Yes), a RAM judgment value is calculated (S906), and if the calculated RAM judgment value is not normal (S907: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the judgment value does not match the RAM judgment value saved when the power was cut off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and the process also moves to S911 in such a case.

Note that, as will be explained in S926 of FIG. 33, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of this RAM judgment value, the effectiveness of the backup may be determined based on whether the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the process of S911, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 serving as a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S911). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and becomes ready to start ball payout control. After transmitting the payout initialization command, the main control device 110 executes initialization processing of the RAM 203 (S912, S913).

As described above, in this pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is to be initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall starts business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the startup process is executed, the RAM 203 initialization process (S912, S913) is executed. In addition, in the case where power-off occurrence information is not set or if a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.), the RAM 203 initialization processing (S912, S913) is similarly executed. . In the RAM 203 initialization process (S912, S913), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to "0" (S912), and then an initial value is set in the RAM 203 (S913). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process moves to S910.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), the power-off occurrence information is stored (S905: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.) is normal ( S907: Yes), the power-off occurrence information is cleared while retaining the data backed up in the RAM 203 (S908). Then, a payout return command upon power restoration is transmitted to return the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state at the time of power cutoff (S909), and the process proceeds to S910. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, it becomes ready to start ball payout control while retaining the data stored in the RAM 213.

In the process of S910, interrupts are permitted (S910). Then, the process moves to main processing (see FIG. 33), which will be described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 33, a description will be given of the main processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the start-up processing described above. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing this main processing. This main processing is broadly divided into counter update processing and power-off processing.

In the main process, it is determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S921). If the power outage occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S921: No), the power outage signal SG1 is not output from the power outage monitoring circuit 252, and the power is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, the first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S922, S923).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S922). Specifically, when the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1, and the counter value reaches the maximum value ("899", "99" in the first embodiment), , clear to "0". Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding counter buffer 203c areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process in S107 (see FIG. 22) (S923), and the process moves to S921.

Here, while this main process is being executed, the timer interrupt process described with reference to FIG. 22 is activated and executed at predetermined time intervals ("4 milliseconds" in the first embodiment). In the timer interrupt process, different processes are executed depending on the state of the game. For example, during a jackpot, the opening and closing of the big winning opening 65a is controlled, and if a ball passes through the normal symbol gate 67, display control regarding the variable display of normal symbols by the normal symbol display device 83 is performed. be exposed. In addition, in the jackpot lottery executed when starting the dynamic display on the special symbol display device 37, the number of jackpot random numbers compared with the acquired jackpot random number counter C1 differs depending on whether it is in a high probability state or a low probability state. It's coming. Therefore, the time required to execute one timer interrupt process will vary depending on the state of the game. Therefore, the remaining time from the end of one timer interrupt process to the execution timing of the next timer interrupt process is not constant, but changes depending on the state of the game at the time.

The processes of S922 and S923 described above, which are part of the main process, are executed within the remaining time of this timer interrupt process. In other words, since the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are repeatedly updated using this remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are repeatedly updated. The counter CINI2 (that is, the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the initial value of the normal hit random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 can also be randomly updated in the same way. In particular, by randomly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2, the jackpot random number counter C1 and the common symbol random number counter C4 are updated using these as initial values for updating. It can have randomness.

In addition, in the process of S921, if the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S921: Yes), the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power outage or the power is turned off, and the power outage signal SG1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 252. As a result, the NMI interrupt process shown in FIG. 31 has been executed, so that the process at power-off after S924 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S924), and a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the audio lamp control device 113). and transmits it (S925). Then, a RAM judgment value is calculated, the value is saved (S926), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S927), and an infinite loop is continued until the power is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203.

Note that the process in S921 is executed at the end of one cycle of the processes in S922 and S923, which are performed within the remaining time of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22). As a result, in the main processing of the main controller 110, various settings by the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 22) are completed, and at the timing when each counter CINI1, CINI2, and CS1 has been updated, information on the occurrence of power outage is generated. has been confirmed. Therefore, when recovering from a power-off state, the process can be started from the process of S921 after the start-up process (see FIG. 32) is completed. That is, the process can be started from the process of S921, as in the case where it is initialized in the start-up process.

Therefore, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved during power-off processing, the stack pointer is saved during the initial setting process (S901). By setting it to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the process of S921. As a result, the control burden on the main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main controller 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

In the first embodiment, the process to be executed periodically is executed by the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22), and in the main process (see FIG. 33), each counter is Although we have explained the case where CINI1, CINI2, and CS1 are updated, some or all of the processing that was being executed in the timer interrupt processing (see Figure 22) can be replaced with a predetermined one in the main processing (see Figure 33). It may be configured to be executed every time (for example, "4 milliseconds"). For example, the prize ball counting signal and payout abnormal signal reading process (S102), the jackpot process (S103), and the normal power control process (S104) that were executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22) in the first embodiment And some or all of the switch reading process (S105), start winning process (S108), gate passage process (S109), special figure variation process (S110), regular figure variation process (S111), and launch control process (S112) , it may be configured to be executed every "4 milliseconds" in the main processing (see FIG. 33) instead of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 22).

In this case, a step is provided in the main process (see Figure 33) to determine whether a predetermined time (4 milliseconds) has elapsed, and only when it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed, the step is executed every predetermined time. The counters CINI1, CINI2, and CS1 may be updated regardless of whether or not a predetermined period of time has elapsed. As a result, the counters CINI1, CINI2, and CS1 are updated during the remaining time of the process that is executed at predetermined time intervals, but the process that is executed at predetermined time intervals is executed depending on the state of the game. Since the time required for this changes, even with this configuration, each of the counters CINI1, CINI2, and CS1 can be randomly updated.

Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 34 to 36. The processing of the MPU 221 can be roughly divided into a start-up process (see FIG. 34) that is started upon power-on, and a main process (see FIG. 35) that is executed after the start-up process.

First, with reference to FIG. 34, the startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing this startup process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

When startup processing is executed, first, initialization processing associated with power-on is executed (S1001). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether the power-off process flag is on or not, the current startup process may be interrupted by an instantaneous voltage drop (momentary power outage, so-called "instantaneous power outage"), resulting in the power-off process in S1115 (see Figure 35). ) is started during execution (S1002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 35, upon receiving the power-off command from the main control device 110, the audio lamp control device 113 executes the power-off process in S1115. Before executing the power-off processing, the power-off processing flag is turned on, and after the power-off processing is completed, the power-off processing flag is turned off. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing in S1115 is in progress can be determined based on the state of the power-off processing flag.

If the power-off processing flag is off (S1002: No), the current startup process was started after the power was completely cut off, or after a momentary power outage occurred and the power-off processing in S1115 was started. The process was started after the execution of the process was completed, or the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). be. Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S1003).

Confirmation of data destruction in the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword "55AAh" has been written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S1006. Therefore, it is possible to check the data stored in the specific area, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data destruction in the RAM 223, and conversely, if it is not "55AAh", it can be confirmed that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed. If data destruction in the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1003: Yes), the process moves to S1004 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data destruction in the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1003: No), the process moves to S1008.

Note that if the current startup process is started after the power is completely shut off, the keyword "55AAh" will not be stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 will be lost due to the power shutoff). ), it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S1003: Yes), and the process moves to S1004. On the other hand, the current start-up process was started after a momentary power outage occurred and the power-off process in S1115 was completed, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like. When the process is started, the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1003: No), and the process moves to S1008.

If the power-off processing flag is on (S1002: Yes), the current startup process is performed after a momentary power outage occurs, and during the execution of the power-off process in S1115, the audio lamp control device 113 The process was started when the MPU 221 of the computer was reset. In such a case, since the power-off process is in the middle of execution, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, in such a case, control cannot be continued, so the process moves to S1004 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the process of S1004, the entire storage area of the RAM 223 is checked (S1004). The checking method is to first write "0FFh" to each byte, read each byte to check whether it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. This write and check for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". This read/write check of the RAM 223 clears all storage areas of the RAM 223 to "0".

If the read/write check is determined to be normal for all storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1005: Yes), a keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223, and RAM destruction check data is set (S1006). By checking the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read/write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S1005: No), the abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified (S1007), and an endless loop is performed until the power is cut off. An abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. Note that the audio output device 226 may output a sound to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message. You can also do this.

In the process of S1008, it is determined whether the power-off flag is turned on (S1008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process in S1116 is executed (see S1115 in FIG. 35). In other words, the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process in S1116 is executed, so the reason why the process in S1008 is reached with the power-off flag on is because the current startup process is instantaneous. This is a case where the process is started after a power outage has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S1116 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1008: Yes), the work area of the RAM 223 is cleared in order to initialize each process of the audio lamp control device 113 (S1009), and after setting the initial value of the RAM 223 (S1010), the interrupt Permission is set (S1011) and the process moves to main processing. Note that the work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110.

On the other hand, the reason why the process reaches S1008 with the power-off flag turned off is because the current startup process was started after the power was completely shut off, so the process goes through S1004 to S1006 and then S1008. This is a case where the process has been started, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S1008: No), S1009, which is processing to clear the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, the process moves to S1010, and after setting the initial value of the RAM 223 (S1010), interrupt permission is set. (S1011), and the process moves to main processing.

Note that the reason why the clearing process in S1009 is skipped is because if the process has reached S1008 from S1004 via the process in S1006, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process in S1004. If only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and startup processing is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared. This is because it is possible to continue controlling the

Next, with reference to FIG. 35, the main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 after the startup processing of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing this main processing.

When the main processing is executed, first, it is determined whether or not "1 millisecond" or more has passed since the previous processing of S1101 was executed (S1101), and if "1 millisecond" or more has not passed ( S1101: No), the process proceeds to S1110 without performing the processes of S1102 to S1109. In the process of S1101, determining whether "1 millisecond" has elapsed is not necessary in S1102 to S1109 in a short cycle (within "1 millisecond"), but in S1110. This is because the fluctuation effect processing in S1111 and the command determination processing in S1111 are processes that are preferably executed in short cycles. By executing the process in S1111 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent failure to receive commands sent from the main controller 110, and by executing the process in S1110 in a short cycle, commands received by the command determination process can be prevented. Based on this, settings regarding variable effects can be made without delay.

In the process of S1101, if it is determined that "1 millisecond" or more has elapsed since the last time the process of S1101 was executed (S1101: Yes), the process moves to S1102. Note that if the process in S1101 is executed for the first time after the start-up process shown in FIG. 34, the process directly proceeds to S1102.

In the process of S1102, various commands for the display control device 114 set in the processes of S1103 to S1112 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1102). Next, the output of each lamp is set to match the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S1107, which will be described later (S1103), and then a power-on notification process is executed (S1104). . The power-on notification process is to notify that the power has been turned on for a predetermined period of time (for example, "30 seconds") when the power is turned on. 227. Further, a command may be sent to the display control device 114 to notify that power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. Note that if the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to step S1105 without providing notification through the power-on notification process.

Next, in the process of S1105, a jackpot performance process is performed to execute a performance related to the jackpot set by the command determination process of S1111, which will be described later (S1105), and the process moves to S1106.

Next, in the process of S1106, a frame button input monitoring/presentation process is executed (S1106). In this frame button input monitoring/performance processing, during the valid period of the frame button 22 operated by the player to enhance the performance effect, input as to whether or not the frame button 22 is pressed is monitored, and This is a process of setting to perform a corresponding effect when the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed.

When the frame button input monitoring/presentation process (S1106) is finished, a lamp editing process is then executed (S1107), and then a sound editing/output process is executed (S1108). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination parts 29 to 33 are set to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing/output processing, the output pattern of the audio output device 226 is set to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81, and sound is output from the audio output device 226 according to the setting.

After the process of S1108, a liquid crystal presentation execution management process is executed (S1109), and the process moves to S1110. In the liquid crystal presentation execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the variable presentation performed on the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp editing process in S1107 is executed based on the time set in this liquid crystal performance execution monitoring process, and the sound editing/output process in S1108 is also synchronized with the time required for the variable performance performed on the third symbol display device 81. executed in time.

In the process of S1110, in order to display a variable effect on the third symbol display device 81, a variable effect process is performed, which is a process for starting a variable effect based on the variable pattern command and stop type command received from the main control device 110. Execute. After the fluctuation effect processing, a command determination process is performed to perform processing according to the command received from the main control device 110 (S1111), and the process moves to S1112. Details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 36.

In S1112, counter update processing is executed to update various counters provided in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 (S1112). For example, a counter that determines a detailed variation pattern of a variation performance is updated during this counter update process. The counter is updated by sequentially incrementing the counter by 1 within a predetermined range (in this embodiment, "0 to 99") and returning it to "0" after reaching the maximum value ("99").

When the process of S1112 is completed, it is determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1113). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main controller 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S1113 (S1113: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off process flag are turned on (S1115), and the power-off process is executed (S1116). After executing the power-off processing, the power-off processing flag is turned off (S1117), and then the processing is looped infinitely. In the power-off processing, the generation of interrupt processing is prohibited, and each output port is turned off, and output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 is turned off. It also erases the memory of the power-off occurrence information.

On the other hand, if power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S1113 (S1113: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1114), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1114: No), the process returns to S1101 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1114: Yes), the process is looped infinitely in order to stop the execution of subsequent processes.

Here, if it is determined that the RAM has been destroyed and the process loops endlessly, the main process will not be executed, so the display by the third symbol display device 81 will not change thereafter. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, he or she can call the hall clerk or the like and ask them to repair the pachinko machine 10. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM destruction.

Next, with reference to FIG. 36, the command determination process (S1111) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S1111). This command determination process (S1111) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 35) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and as described above, the command is received from the main control device 110 or the display control device 114. Determine which command was executed.

In the command determination process (S1111), first, it is determined whether a command from the main controller 110 is received in the command storage area provided in the RAM 223 (S1201). As a result of the determination, if no command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1201: No), this command determination process (S1111) is ended and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 35).

On the other hand, in the process of S1201, if a command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1201: Yes), the first command received from the main controller 110 among the unprocessed commands is read out and analyzed, and the main controller 110, it is determined whether or not a probability change notification command has been received (S1202). If it is determined that the probability change notification command has been received (S1202: Yes), a "probability change notification effect mode" is set in order to notify the player of the "probability change state" (S1203).

Here, the "probability change notification presentation mode" means that when a jackpot occurs, the notification mode (for example, character display of "SUPER LUCKY!") in which a "probability change state" occurs after the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device. 81, and if a variation effect is in progress, the third symbol display device 81 displays text to indicate that a “probability variation state” is occurring, or changes the background color of the third symbol display device 81 to a normal color. By changing the background color to a different color (for example, from blue to red), the player is made aware that the game is in a "probability fluctuation state." Thereafter, this command determination process (S1111) is ended and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 35).

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, if the audio lamp control device 113 does not receive the probability change notification command at the end of the jackpot, the "time saving notification effect" indicating the "time reduction state" is performed as the effect after the jackpot ends. The system is configured to execute all aspects of the system. In other words, even if the jackpot is a jackpot with the jackpot type "Latent probability variation A", "Latent probability variation B", or "Latent probability variation C", the jackpot is not notified to the player that it is in the "probability variation state". An effect equivalent to the type "time saving A", "time saving B", or "time saving C" is executed.

On the other hand, in the process of S1202, if the probability change notification command is not received from the main controller 110 (S1202: No), processes corresponding to other commands are executed (S1204), and this command determination process (S1111) is ended. Then, the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 35).

As explained above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, two probability variable areas (the right probability variable area 73 and the left probability variable area 74) are provided in the big winning opening 65a, and the jackpot is determined according to the jackpot type. In each round, the drive is controlled to open either one of the opening/closing plates 73a, 74a provided for each probability variable area 73, 74, and the player can set whether each probability variable area 73, 74 is enabled or disabled. control to switch (internally) in a state that cannot be recognized. Then, during a jackpot, if the ball passes through the effectively set probability variable regions 73, 74, a "probability variation state" is generated after the jackpot ends. On the other hand, even if the ball passes through probability variable regions 73 and 74 that are set to be invalid, the system is configured so that the "probability variable state" does not occur after the jackpot ends.

With this configuration, even if the ball passes through each probability variable area 73, 74, if the probability variable area 73, 74 is not set internally as valid, a "probability variable state" will occur after the jackpot ends. Therefore, even if the player visually recognizes the passing of the ball to each probability variable area 73, 74, it is possible to configure such that the occurrence of the "probability variable state" is not determined after the jackpot is completed. Further, the "latent probability variation performance mode" and the "time-saving notification performance mode" or the "normal notification mode" are configured to be equivalent performance. With this configuration, even when the "latent probability variable performance mode" is executed, it is possible to determine whether the game is in the "probability variation state", "time reduction state" or "normal gaming state". It is possible to create a gameplay that makes it difficult for the player to recognize and to make the player guess in which game state he/she is playing the game, thereby improving the interest of the game.

In addition, if a jackpot type that generates a "probability fluctuation state" is won after the jackpot ends, the ball is configured to be able to pass through the effectively set probability fluctuation regions 73 and 74 in multiple rounds of the jackpot. has been done. Therefore, even if the ball cannot pass through the valid variable probability areas 73, 74 in one of the rounds in which the variable probability areas 73, 74 are valid, It becomes possible to cause the ball to pass through the probability variable regions 73 and 74 that are effectively set in the round. Therefore, due to a sudden trouble (for example, a game abnormality such as a firing abnormality, a player's poor physical condition, etc.), it may be difficult for the ball to pass through the probability variable areas 73 and 74 in one of the valid rounds. Even if this occurs, by providing the possibility that the ball will pass through the probability variable areas 73 and 74 that are effectively set in the other round that are effectively set, the player will not be affected by unforeseen circumstances. It is possible to realize a comfortable game without incurring profits.

Further, different probability variable areas 73 and 74 are configured to be effectively set in a plurality of rounds during a jackpot. With this configuration, even if one of the probability variable regions 73, 74 that is set effectively in one round cannot normally detect the passage of a ball due to an abnormality such as a failure, the other It is possible to generate a "probability variation state" by the ball passing through the other probability variation regions 74 and 73 that are effectively set in the round. Therefore, even if there is a problem in passing the ball to the probability variable areas 73, 74 in one of the rounds for which the valid setting is made due to a sudden trouble (for example, a malfunction), the valid setting will still be valid. By providing the possibility for the ball to pass through the probability variable areas 73 and 74 that are effectively set in the other round, the player can enjoy a comfortable game without suffering any disadvantage due to unforeseen circumstances. be able to.

Also, at the first count of each round, the right probability variable area solenoid 73b and the left probability variable area solenoid 74b are driven to such an extent that the ball does not flow in, and it is determined whether the right probability variable area opening/closing plate 73a and the left probability variable area opening/closing plate 74a can be opened. Therefore, it is possible to quickly grasp a situation in which the variable probability regions 73 and 74 are not opened due to an abnormality or the like.

Furthermore, in the case of winning a jackpot type that generates a "probability fluctuation state" after the end of the jackpot, regarding multiple rounds in which the variable probability areas 73 and 74 are set to be valid, the round in which the variable probability areas 73 and 74 are set to be valid. In this case, the right probability variable area 73 located on the upstream side of the big prize opening 65a is configured to be set effectively. With this configuration, if an abnormality such as a ball jam occurs in the big prize opening 65a, the ball jam etc. will be prevented especially on the downstream side of the right probability variable area 73 and upstream of the left probability variable area 74. Even if an abnormality occurs, the right probability variation region 73 located upstream of the big prize opening 65a can be set effectively first, and the ball can flow into the right probability variation region 73. It is possible to make it easier to grant rights to a player based on the status.

<Second embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 37 to 41. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, a right probability variable area 73 and a left probability variable area 74 are provided in the big winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65, and balls are placed in the probability variable areas 73 and 74 that are set effectively. Based on the passage, it is configured to give a "probability fluctuation state" after the jackpot ends.

However, since the jackpot game is played by opening or closing the big win opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 of 1, it is necessary to provide an interval time when the big winning opening 65a is closed. There is a risk that the jackpot game will be delayed and the players will lose interest. In particular, in situations where the player has won consecutive jackpots within a predetermined period of time (so-called consecutive winnings), the player wants to play quickly. If it takes a long time, the player is likely to lose interest in the game.

In addition, the provision of the "probability fluctuation state" is determined by a combination of two factors: opening or closing of the probability variable areas 73, 74 in the variable winning device 65 of 1, and validity or invalidation of the probability variable areas 73, 74. Therefore, even when the "latent probability variation performance mode" is executed, the opening/closing pattern of the probability variation areas 73, 74 and the effective pattern of the probability variation areas 73, 74 are recognized (inferred) by the player. , there is a possibility that it may be foreseeable that a "probability fluctuating state" will be added.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, a second variable winning device 76 is provided in addition to the variable winning device 65, and predetermined jackpot games (“probability fluctuation A,” “time saving C,” and “latent probability The variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 76 are opened alternately in each round of "Variation C"), and one of the variable winning devices 65, 76 is opened without interruption during a predetermined jackpot game. do. By configuring in this way, it is possible to eliminate the interval time during a predetermined jackpot game, and the jackpot game can be quickly completed, and the game is not prolonged, so that the player does not lose interest. can be prevented.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the inside of the variable winning device 65 and the inside of the second variable winning device 76 are communicated with each other by a communication passage 77, and a right probability variable region 73 and a left probability variable region 73 are connected to the communication passage 77. A region 74 is provided. With this configuration, the variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 76 (hereinafter, the variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 76 are collectively referred to as "variable winning devices 65, 76") Since it is not necessary to provide a plurality of probability variable regions 73 and 74 for each of the pachinko machine 10, the number of parts in the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced and the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, in addition to the two elements of opening or closing the variable probability areas 73, 74 and validating or invalidating the variable probability areas 73, 74, the opening or closing of the variable winning devices 65, 76 Since the assignment of the "probability fluctuating state" is determined by a combination of three elements (1), it is possible to make it difficult to predict that the "probability fluctuating state" will be assigned. Therefore, even when the "latent probability variation performance mode" is executed, it is possible to create a gameplay that allows the player to guess in which gaming state he/she is playing the game, thereby improving the interest of the game. be able to.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the variable winning device is used for jackpot types that can be won during so-called consecutive games (that is, jackpot types "probability variation A", "time saving C", and "latent probability variation C"). 65 and the second variable prize winning device 76 are opened alternately without interruption, it is possible to realize the quick play desired by the so-called consecutive players, prevent them from losing interest in the game, and increase the speed of the game. can improve the interest of

The pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described below, focusing on the differences from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment. In the following description, the same elements as those in the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustrations and explanations thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 37, the variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 76 of the second embodiment will be explained. FIG. 37 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 76 of the second embodiment when viewed from the front.

As shown in FIG. 37, the second variable winning device 76 is provided at a position above the variable winning device 65, and includes a second opening/closing plate 76b having a horizontally long rectangular shape that covers the second big winning opening 76a, and a second opening/closing plate 76b having a horizontally long rectangular shape that covers the second big winning opening 76a. A second grand prize opening solenoid 76c (see FIG. 38) for opening and closing the front side around the lower side of 76b, and a second grand prize opening switch 71a for detecting the ball that has entered the second grand prize opening 76a. A communication passage 77 is provided through which the ball detected by the second big prize opening switch 71a flows down.

The second big winning opening switch 71a is buried in a passage near the second big winning opening 76a, and when a ball is detected by the second big winning opening switch 71a, 15 winning balls are paid out. In addition, after the second opening/closing plate 76b is opened, if 10 balls are detected by the second big prize opening switch 71a, the second opening/closing plate 76b is closed and one round ends. It is configured.

The communication passage 77 is a passage through which the ball that has flowed into the second large prize opening 76a flows down, and is communicated with the guide passage 72 of the variable prize winning device 65 via a confluence portion 77a. A right probability variable region 73 and a left probability variable region 74 are provided downstream from the confluence 77a of the guide passage 72 of the variable winning device 65 and the communication passage 77 of the second variable winning device 76, and the right probability variable region 73 and the left probability variable region 74 are provided. A discharge passage 75 is provided downstream of the variable probability region 73 and the left variable probability region 74. Therefore, the ball that flows into the second big prize opening 76a and flows down the communication passage 77 passes through the right probability variable area 73 or the left probability variable area 74, similar to the ball that flows into the large winning hole 65a of the variable winning device 65. or the discharge passage 75.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, after the ball that has flowed into the second big winning opening 76a is detected by the second big winning opening switch 71a, it takes approximately It is configured such that it takes "1.7 seconds", and after the ball that has flowed into the second big winning opening 76a is detected by the second big winning opening switch 71a, it passes through the communication passage 77 and enters the left probability variable area 74. It is configured so that it takes approximately 1.8 seconds to reach the top. Therefore, the ball detected by the second big prize opening switch 71a is configured to be able to flow into the right probability variable area 73 or the left probability variable area 74 within "2 seconds".

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the inside of the variable winning device 65 and the inside of the second variable winning device 76 are communicated with each other by the communication passage 77, and the right probability variable area 73 and the communication passage 77 are connected to each other. A left probability variable area 74 is provided. With this configuration, it is not necessary to provide a plurality of variable probability areas 73 and 74 for each variable winning device 65 and 76, so the number of parts in the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced and manufacturing costs can be reduced. .

Next, with reference to FIG. 38, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 38 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment.

A big prize opening opening/closing table 202h is stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 of the second embodiment.

Here, with reference to FIG. 39, the big prize opening opening/closing table 202h will be explained. FIG. 39 is a diagram schematically showing an example of the big winning opening opening/closing table 202h. The big winning opening opening/closing table 202h shown in FIG. 39 shows the variable winning device 65 or the second variable winning device 76 that is opened every round for each jackpot type in each special symbol, and the variable winning device 65 or the second variable winning device 76 is opened every round. When the device 65 is opened, it is expressed as "lower", and when the second variable prize winning device 76 is opened, it is expressed as "upper". In the second embodiment, when one variable winning device 65, 76 (for example, variable winning device 65) is opened, the other variable winning device 65, 76 (for example, second variable winning device 76) is opened. is configured so that it is closed.

As shown in FIG. 39, the opening/closing pattern "top only" of each variable winning device 65, 76 corresponding to the jackpot type "time saving A" and "latent probability variation A" of the first special symbol is the same for all rounds (i.e. Only the second variable winning device 76 is opened during the first to seventh rounds), and the variable winning device 65 remains closed during the jackpot game.

Therefore, in the jackpot type "Time saving A" and "Latent probability variation A", the opening and closing of the second big prize opening 76a of the second variable winning device 76 is repeated during the jackpot game, and the interval time during the closing is repeated. is configured to occur.

In addition, since the opening and closing patterns of the variable winning devices 65 and 76 are the same for the jackpot types "Time saving A" and "Latent probability variation A", the jackpot type cannot be determined only by the opening and closing patterns of the variable winning devices 65 and 76. By doing so, it is made difficult (or impossible) for the player to recognize which type of jackpot he has won, and creates a gameplay that makes the player guess in which gaming state he/she is playing the game. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Next, as shown in FIG. 39, the opening/closing pattern "lower only" of each variable winning device 65, 76 corresponding to the jackpot type "time saving B" and "latent probability variation B" of the first special symbol is set in all rounds ( In other words, only the variable winning device 65 is opened during the first to seventh rounds), and the second variable winning device 76 remains closed during the jackpot game.

Therefore, in the jackpot type "time saving B" and "latent probability fluctuation B", the opening and closing of the jackpot 65a of the variable winning prize device 65 are repeated during the jackpot game, and an interval time occurs during the closing. It is configured.

In addition, since the opening and closing patterns of the variable winning devices 65 and 76 are the same for the jackpot types "Time saving B" and "Latent probability variation B", the jackpot type cannot be determined only by the opening and closing patterns of the variable winning devices 65 and 76. By doing so, it is made difficult (or impossible) for the player to recognize which type of jackpot he has won, and creates a gameplay that makes the player guess in which gaming state he/she is playing the game. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Next, as shown in FIG. 39, the opening/closing pattern "alternately up and down" of each variable winning device 65, 76 corresponding to "probability fluctuation A" which is the jackpot type of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is the odd number round ( That is, only the second variable prize winning device 76 is opened in the 1st round, 3rd round, 5th round, 7th round, 9th round, 11th round, 13th round, and 15th round, and the variable winning device 65 is closed during the odd numbered rounds. It is configured to

In addition, in the opening/closing pattern "alternating up and down", only the variable winning device 65 opens in even numbered rounds (i.e., 2nd round, 4th round, 6th round, 8th round, 10th round, 12th round, and 14th round), and during the even numbered round. is configured so that the second variable winning device 76 is closed.

Therefore, in the jackpot type "probability variation A", one of the variable winning devices 65, 76 is configured to be opened without interruption. With this configuration, it is possible to eliminate the interval time during the jackpot game, and the jackpot game can be quickly completed, and the game is not prolonged, thereby preventing the player from losing interest. can do. In particular, the jackpot type "probability fluctuation A" informs the player that the "probability fluctuation state" will be given after the jackpot game, and the player can quickly get the "probability fluctuation state" with the aim of winning the next jackpot. I look forward to it arriving. In such a state, by quickly completing the jackpot game, it is possible to realize the game as expected by the player.

Next, as shown in FIG. 39, the opening/closing pattern "lower and upper alternating" of each variable winning device 65, 76 corresponding to the jackpot type of the second special symbol "time saving C" and "latent probability variation C" is set to odd number Only the variable prize winning device 65 is opened in the rounds (i.e., the 1st round, the 3rd round, the 5th round, the 7th round, the 9th round, the 11th round, the 13th round, and the 15th round), and the second variable prize winning device 76 is opened during the odd numbered rounds. Configured to be closed.

In addition, in the opening/closing pattern "lower and upper alternating", only the second variable winning device 76 opens in even numbered rounds (i.e., 2nd round, 4th round, 6th round, 8th round, 10th round, 12th round, and 14th round), and The variable winning device 65 is configured to be closed during even rounds.

Therefore, in the jackpot type "time saving C" and "latent probability variation C", either one of the variable winning devices 65, 76 is configured to be opened without interruption, as in the jackpot type "probability variation A". With this configuration, it is possible to eliminate the interval time during the jackpot game, and the jackpot game can be quickly completed, and the game is not prolonged, thereby preventing the player from losing interest. can do.

In addition, since the opening and closing patterns of the variable winning devices 65 and 76 are the same for the jackpot types "Time saving C" and "Latent probability variation C", the jackpot type cannot be determined only by the opening and closing patterns of the variable winning devices 65 and 76. By doing so, it is made difficult (or impossible) for the player to recognize which type of jackpot he has won, and creates a gameplay that makes the player guess in which gaming state he/she is playing the game. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Returning to FIG. 38, the explanation will be continued. The input/output port 205 of the main control device 110 of the second embodiment is provided in the second variable winning device 76, and is driven to open and close forward with the lower side of the second opening/closing plate 76b of the second big winning opening 76a as an axis. The second big prize opening solenoid 76c is connected, and the MPU 201 transmits a control signal via the input/output port 205.

In addition, a second big prize opening switch 71a is connected to the input/output port 205 of the second embodiment, which is provided in the second big winning mouth 76a and detects a ball that has entered the second big winning mouth 76a. , the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signal output from the second big prize opening switch 71a.

Next, with reference to FIG. 40, the manner in which balls are detected in each round of the jackpot type "latent probability variation C" of the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 40 shows the big winning opening solenoid 65c, the second big winning opening solenoid 76c, the right probability variable area solenoid 73b, and the left probability variable area solenoid in the first to third rounds of the jackpot type "latent probability variation C" of the second embodiment. 74b, the detection timing of the ball in the big winning opening switch 71, the second big winning opening switch 71a, the right probability varying area switch 73d and the left probability varying area switch 74d, the right probability varying valid flag 203g, the left probability varying valid flag 203h, and It is a timing chart which schematically shows each time with the setting timing of the probability change transition flag 203i.

As described above, in the jackpot type "latent probability variation C", a total of 15 rounds of the jackpot game are executed, and at the start of the odd numbered round, the jackpot solenoid 65c is turned on and the opening/closing plate 65b is opened, and the even numbered round starts. At the same time, the second big prize opening solenoid 76c is turned on and the second opening/closing plate 76b is opened. Then, if a predetermined condition (in the second embodiment, a maximum of "30 seconds" has elapsed since the opening/closing plates 65b, 76b are opened (see Max t1 in FIG. 40; Max t1<"30000ms"), or the big prize opening switch 71 or 10 balls are detected by the second big winning opening switch 71a), the opened big winning opening solenoid 65c or the second big winning opening solenoid 76c is turned off. The opening/closing plate 65b or the second opening/closing plate 76b is closed, and one round is completed.

When the jackpot continues after one round ends, the other variable winning device 76, 65, which is not the first variable winning device 65, 76 that was opened in the previous round, is opened first. After the variable prize winning devices 65 and 76 are closed, they are immediately opened. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce (eliminate) the interval time when a jackpot occurs.

In addition, in the jackpot type "latent probability variation C", the opening/closing pattern of the right probability variable area 73 and the left probability variable area 74 is "Y2", as in the jackpot type "time saving C". Therefore, in the first round, when the first count ball is detected by the big prize opening switch 71, both the right probability variable area solenoid 73b and the left probability variable area solenoid 74b are turned on for "60 ms" (see t2 in FIG. 40). t2 = "60ms"), and is configured to be able to recognize whether or not the right probability variable region solenoid 73b and the left probability variable region solenoid 74b can be driven normally.

Then, when the third count ball is detected by the big winning opening switch 71, only the right probability variable area solenoid 73b is turned on for 2000 ms (see t3 in FIG. 40. t3 = "2000 ms"). In the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the time required for the ball to reach the right probability variable area 73 after the ball is detected by the big prize opening switch 71 is within "2 seconds" (in the second embodiment, "1. 5 seconds". See t4 in FIG. 40. t4<"2000ms"). Therefore, the third count ball can flow into the open right probability variable area 73, and is detected by the right probability variable area switch 73d.

At this time, the effective pattern of the probability variable areas 73 and 74 of the jackpot type "latent probability variation C" is "B", and the right probability variable area 73 of the third round and the left probability variable area 74 of the sixth round are effective. Set. Therefore, in the first round, both probability variation areas 73 and 74 are invalid, and the right probability variation valid flag 203g and the left probability variation validity flag 203h are set to OFF. Therefore, in the first round, even if the ball passes through the right probability variable area 73 and is detected by the right probability variable area switch 73d, the right probability variable area 73 is not set to be valid, so the probability change transition flag is 203i remains off without being turned on.

In addition, in odd-numbered rounds (i.e., 3rd round, 5th round, 7th round, 9th round, 11th round, 13th round, and 15th round) of the jackpot type "Latent probability variation C", the right probability variable area solenoid 73b and the left probability variable area solenoid 74b The driving mode is the same as in the first round (not shown).

Next, in the second round of the jackpot type "latent probability variation C", when the first count ball is detected by the second big prize opening switch 71a, the right probability variable area solenoid 73b and the left probability variable are activated as in the first round. Both area solenoids 74b are turned on for "60 ms" (see t5 in FIG. 40. t5 = "60 ms"), so that it can be recognized whether or not the right probability variable region solenoid 73b and the left probability variable region solenoid 74b can be driven normally. has been done.

Then, when the third count ball is detected by the second big prize opening switch 71a, only the left probability variable area solenoid 74b is turned on for "2000ms" (see t6 in FIG. 40. t6 = "2000ms"). In the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the time required for the ball to reach the left probability variable area 74 after being detected by the second big prize opening switch 71a is within "2 seconds" (i.e., "1.8 seconds"). ”.See t7 in FIG. 40. t7<“2000ms”). Therefore, the third count ball can flow into the open left probability variable area 74, and is detected by the left probability variable area switch 74d.

At this time, the valid pattern of the probability variable areas 73, 74 of the jackpot type "latent probability variation C" is "B", and both probability variable areas 73, 74 are invalid in the second round, and the right probability variable valid flag 203g and The left probability variation valid flag 203h is set to OFF. Therefore, in the second round, even if the ball passes through the left probability variable area 74 and is detected by the left probability variable area switch 74d, the left probability variable area 74 is not set to be valid, so the probability change transition flag is set. 203i remains off without being turned on.

In addition, in the even-numbered rounds (i.e., 4th round, 6th round, 8th round, 10th round, 12th round, and 14th round) of the jackpot type "Latent probability variation C", the driving mode of the right probability variable area solenoid 73b and the left probability variable area solenoid 74b is equivalent to the second round (not shown).

Next, in the third round of the jackpot type "latent probability variation C", when the first count ball is detected by the jackpot switch 71, the right probability variation area solenoid 73b and The left probability variable region solenoid 74b is both turned on for "60 ms" (see t8 in FIG. 40. t8 = "60 ms"), and it is possible to recognize whether the right probability variable region solenoid 73b and the left probability variable region solenoid 74b can be driven normally. It is composed of

Then, in the third round, when the third count ball is detected by the big prize opening switch 71, only the right probability variable area solenoid 73b is turned on for "2000ms" (see t9 in FIG. 40. t9 = "2000ms") ). In the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the time required for the ball to reach the right probability variable area 73 after the ball is detected by the big prize opening switch 71 is within "2 seconds" (that is, "1.5 seconds"). See t10 in FIG. 40. t10<"2000ms"). Therefore, the third count ball can flow into the open right probability variable area 73, and is detected by the right probability variable area switch 73d.

At this time, the valid pattern of the probability variable areas 73 and 74 of the jackpot type "latent probability variation C" is "B", and in the third round, only the right probability variable area 73 is valid, and the right probability variable valid flag 203g is turned on. At the same time, the left probability variation valid flag 203h is set to OFF. Therefore, in the third round, when a ball passes through the right probability variable area 73 and is detected by the right probability variable area switch 73d, the right probability variable area 73 is set to be valid, so the probability change transition flag 203i is turned on. is set to

Although not shown, in the 6th round of the jackpot type "latent probability variation C", only the left probability variation area 74 is valid, the left probability variation valid flag 203h is set to on, and the right probability variation valid flag 203g is set to ON. is set to off. Therefore, even if the probability variation transition flag 203i is not turned on in the third round, the ball can flow into the left probability variation area 74 located downstream of the right probability variation area 73 in the sixth round, and the left probability variation transition flag 203i is not turned on. When the ball passes through the area 74 and is detected by the left probability variable area switch 74d, the probability variable transition flag 203i is set to ON.

Therefore, in the jackpot type "latent probability variation C", if the ball passes through the probability variable areas 73 and 74 and is detected by the probability variable area switches 73d and 74d, the ball is detected in the third and sixth rounds. Since the probability variable regions 73 and 74 corresponding to the probability variable region switches 73d and 74d are set to be valid, the probability variable shift flag 203i is set to ON. Then, at the end of the jackpot, a "probability variation state" is set with reference to this probability variation transition flag 203i.

In this way, in the second embodiment, the variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 76 are alternately operated in each round of the predetermined jackpot game (“Probability Variation A,” “Time Saving C” and “Latent Probability Variation C”). and one of the variable winning devices 65, 76 is opened without interruption during a predetermined jackpot game. By configuring in this way, it is possible to eliminate the interval time during a predetermined jackpot game, and the jackpot game can be quickly completed, and the game is not prolonged, so that the player does not lose interest. can be prevented.

In particular, the variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 76 are interrupted for jackpot types that can be won during the so-called consecutive winnings (i.e., jackpot types "probability variation A," "time saving C," and "latent probability variation C.") It is possible to realize the quick game desired by the so-called consecutive players by opening the game alternately without any delay, and it is possible to prevent the players from losing interest in the game and improve the interest in the game.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, in addition to the two elements of opening or closing the variable probability areas 73 and 74 and enabling or disabling the variable probability areas 73 and 74, the variable winning devices 65 and 76 are opened or closed. Since the assignment of the "probability fluctuating state" is determined by a combination of three elements (1), it is possible to make it difficult to predict that the "probability fluctuating state" will be assigned. Therefore, even when the "latent probability variation performance mode" is executed, it is possible to create a gameplay that allows the player to guess in which gaming state he/she is playing the game, thereby improving the interest of the game. be able to.

Furthermore, while shortening the interval time of the variable winning devices 65 and 76, the opening pattern and effective pattern of the probability variable areas 73 and 74 are made different between the "time saving C" and the "latent probability variation C", thereby making it easier for players to A "probability variable state" is given by shortening the time required to consider which variable winning device 65, 76 is open and which probability variable area 73, 74 is valid. This can make it difficult to predict what will happen. Therefore, even when the "latent probability variation performance mode" is executed, it is possible to create a gameplay that allows the player to guess in which gaming state he/she is playing the game, thereby improving the interest of the game. be able to.

Next, with reference to FIG. 41, the jackpot process (S103) of the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the jackpot process (S103) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 of the second embodiment. In the jackpot process (S103) of the second embodiment, at the start of a jackpot, a probability variable area opening/closing table 202f (see FIG. 11) and a probability variable area valid table 202g (see FIG. 12) are set according to the jackpot type. In addition, a big winning opening opening/closing table 202h (see FIG. 39) is set.

In the jackpot process (S103) of the second embodiment, when it is determined that the jackpot has been won (S403: Yes), the processes of S404 to S410 are executed similarly to the jackpot process of the first embodiment (see FIG. 26). Then, set the round counter (S404 to S406), set the opening command (S407), set the opening time (S408), set the variable area opening/closing table 202f (see FIG. 11) (S409), and set the variable area effective table. 202g (see FIG. 12) is set (S410).

Next, the jackpot opening/closing table 202h (see FIG. 39) is set according to the type of jackpot (jackpot type) (S501), and the process moves to S411. Specifically, as described above, if the jackpot type is "time saving A" and "latent probability variation A", the opening/closing pattern of the variable winning devices 65, 76 is set to "top only", and the jackpot type is "time saving B". If the jackpot type is "probability variation A", the opening/closing pattern of the variable winning devices 65, 76 is set to "lower only" if the jackpot type is "latent probability variation B", and the opening/closing pattern of the variable winning devices 65, 76 is set to "upper/lower". If the jackpot type is "time saving C" and "latent probability fluctuation C", the opening/closing pattern of the variable winning devices 65, 76 is set to "lower and upper alternating".

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the second variable winning device 76 is provided in addition to the variable winning device 65, and predetermined jackpot games (“probability fluctuation A”, “time saving C”) are provided. and "latent probability variation C"), the variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 76 are opened alternately, and either one of the variable winning devices 65, 76 is opened without interruption during a predetermined jackpot game. Configure it to do so. With this configuration, it is possible to eliminate the interval time during a predetermined jackpot game. Therefore, the jackpot game can be completed quickly and the game is not delayed, so it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the inside of the variable winning device 65 and the inside of the second variable winning device 76 are communicated with each other by a communication passage 77, and a right probability variable region 73 and a left probability variable region 73 are connected to the communication passage 77. A region 74 is provided. With this configuration, it is not necessary to provide a plurality of variable probability areas 73 and 74 for each variable winning device 65 and 76, so the number of parts in the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced and manufacturing costs can be reduced. .

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, in addition to the two elements of opening or closing the variable probability areas 73, 74 and validating or invalidating the variable probability areas 73, 74, the opening or closing of the variable winning devices 65, 76 Since the assignment of the "probability fluctuating state" is determined by a combination of three elements (1), it is possible to make it difficult to predict that the "probability fluctuating state" will be assigned. Therefore, even when the "latent probability variation performance mode" is executed, it is possible to create a gameplay that allows the player to guess in which gaming state he/she is playing the game, thereby improving the interest of the game. be able to.

In addition, for multiple jackpot types (for example, "Time saving C" and "Latent probability variation C"), the opening and closing patterns of the variable winning devices 65 and 76 are the same, so if only the opening and closing patterns of the variable winning devices 65 and 76 are used, the jackpot will be won. Configure so that the type cannot be determined. By configuring it in this way, it is difficult (or impossible) for the player to recognize which type of jackpot he has won, and the gameplay is made to make the player guess in which game state he is playing the game. It is possible to create new games and improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, a variable winning device is used for jackpot types that can be won during so-called consecutive games (i.e., jackpot types "probability variation A", "time saving C", and "latent probability variation C"). 65 and the second variable prize winning device 76 are opened alternately without interruption, it is possible to realize the quick play desired by the so-called consecutive players, prevent them from losing interest in the game, and increase the speed of the game. can improve the interest of

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment has the same configuration as the first embodiment, and has the same effects.

<Third embodiment>
Next, a pachinko machine 10 in a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 42 to 47. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, a plurality of variable winning devices 65 and 76 are provided, and variable probability regions 73 and 74 are shared by each variable winning device 65 and 76, so that the opening and closing patterns of the variable probability regions 73 and 74 are By switching the effective pattern in each round of the jackpot game, it is possible to control whether or not to generate a "probability fluctuation state" after the jackpot ends.

Here, variable probability areas 73 and 74 are provided inside the big winning hole 65a (second big winning hole 76a), and for each variable variable area 73 and 74, a right variable area opening/closing plate 73a and a left variable area opening/closing plate 74a ( Hereinafter, the right variable area opening/closing plate 73a and the left variable area opening/closing plate 74a may be collectively referred to as "variable area opening/closing plates 73a, 74a"), and the variable area opening/closing plates 73a, 74a are driven to open and close. The right probability variable region solenoid 73b, the left probability variable region solenoid 74b (hereinafter, the right probability variable region solenoid 73b and the left probability variable region solenoid 74b may be collectively referred to as "probability variable region solenoids 73b, 74b"), and the right probability variable region solenoid 74b. When the switch 73d and the left probability variable area switch 74d (hereinafter, the right probability variable area switch 73d and the left probability variable area switch 74d may be collectively referred to as "probability variable area switches 73d, 74d") are provided, The above-mentioned parts 73a, 73b, 73d, 74a, 74b, and 74d must be installed in the space, which may complicate the design of the variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 76.

In addition, the opening/closing plate 65b, the grand prize opening solenoid 65c, and the grand prize opening switch 71 in the variable winning device 65, the second opening/closing plate 76b, the second grand prize opening solenoid 76c, and the second grand prize opening in the second variable winning device 76 Since the above-mentioned parts 73a, 73b, 73d, 74a, 74b, and 74d are provided in addition to the switch 71a, the number of parts used in the pachinko machine 10 increases, which may increase the manufacturing cost.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, two variable winning devices 65 and 76 are provided as in the second embodiment, and the second variable winning device 76 is provided with respect to the guide path 72 of the variable winning device 65. The communication passages 77 are communicated via a merging portion 77a, and the merging portion 77a is located downstream of the right probability variable region 73 and upstream of the left probability variable region 74. And, without providing variable probability area opening/closing plates 73a, 74a in the variable probability areas 73, 74, it is configured such that balls can always flow into each variable probability area 73, 74. With this configuration, the ball that has won into the variable winning device 65 will flow into the right variable probability region 73, and the ball that has won the second variable winning device 76 will flow into the left probability variable region 74.

In the case of a jackpot type that gives a "probability variation state" (that is, "latent probability variation A to C" and "probability variation A"), the variable corresponding to the probability variation areas 73 and 74 that are set effectively In the case of a jackpot type (i.e., "time saving A to C") in which a "probability fluctuating state" is given when a ball is entered into the prize winning device 65, 76 and a "probability fluctuating state" is not given (that is, "time saving A to C"), it is set to be valid. The ball is placed in the variable probability areas 73, 74 which are set to be invalid, instead of the variable probability areas 73, 74, so that the "probability variable state" is not given.

With this configuration, even if the ball passes through each probability variable area 73, 74, if the probability variable area 73, 74 is not set internally as valid, a "probability variable state" will occur after the jackpot ends. Therefore, even if the player visually recognizes the passage of the ball to each probability variable area 73, 74, the probability variable area opening/closing plate 73a, 74a and variable probability area solenoids 73b, 74b, the variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 76 can have a simple configuration without complicating the design of the variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 76. This makes it easy to design.

Further, since it is not necessary to provide variable variable area opening/closing plates 73a, 74a and variable variable area solenoids 73b, 74b, the number of parts of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced, and manufacturing costs can be reduced.

Hereinafter, the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment will be explained, focusing on the differences from the pachinko machine 10 in the first and second embodiments. In the following description, the same elements as in the first embodiment and the second embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 42, the variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 76 of the third embodiment will be explained. FIG. 42 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 76 of the third embodiment when viewed from the front.

As shown in FIG. 42, the communication passage 77 of the second variable winning device 76 communicates with the guide passage 72 of the variable winning device 65 via a confluence part 77a, and the position of the confluence part 77a is in the right probability variable area. It is provided on the downstream side of 73 and upstream of the left probability variable area 74.

The variable probability regions 73, 74 of the third embodiment are not provided with variable variable region opening/closing plates 73a, 74a and variable variable region solenoids 73b, 74b as in the second embodiment. Therefore, the ball that reaches above each variable probability area 73, 74 is configured to flow into the variable probability area 73, 74.

That is, in the third embodiment, the ball that has won the variable winning device 65 is configured to flow into the right variable probability region 73, and the ball that has won the second variable winning device 76 flows into the left probability variable region 74. is configured to do so. Note that the variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 76 are configured to share the discharge passage 75.

Next, with reference to FIG. 43, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 43 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment.

Since the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment is not provided with the variable probability area opening/closing plates 73a, 74a and the variable probability area solenoids 73b, 74b, the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 of the third embodiment does not contain the information in the first embodiment. Also, the variable probability region opening/closing table 202f (see FIG. 11) as in the second embodiment is not stored. On the other hand, similar to the second embodiment, a large prize opening opening/closing table 202h is stored.

Here, with reference to FIG. 44, the big prize opening opening/closing table 202h of the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 44 is a diagram schematically showing an example of the big prize opening opening/closing table 202h of the third embodiment. The big winning opening opening/closing table 202h shown in FIG. 44 shows the variable winning device 65 or the second variable winning device 76 that is opened every round for each jackpot type in each special symbol, and the variable winning device 65 or the second variable winning device 76 is opened every round. When the device 65 is opened, it is expressed as "lower", and when the second variable prize winning device 76 is opened, it is expressed as "upper". In the third embodiment, when one variable winning device 65, 76 (for example, variable winning device 65) is opened, the other variable winning device 65, 76 (for example, second variable winning device 76) is configured so that it is closed.

As shown in FIG. 44, in the third embodiment, the variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 76 are configured to be alternately opened and closed in all jackpot types. Specifically, each variable winning device 65 corresponds to the jackpot type "time saving A" and "latent probability variation A" of the first special symbol, and "time saving C" and "latent probability variation C" of the second special symbol. , 76, the opening/closing pattern "lower and upper alternating" is such that only the variable winning device 65 opens in odd numbered rounds (i.e., 1st, 3rd, 5th, 7th, 9th, 11th, 13th, and 15th rounds). , the second variable winning device 76 is configured to be closed during the odd numbered rounds.

In addition, in the opening/closing pattern "lower and upper alternating", only the second variable winning device 76 opens in even numbered rounds (i.e., 2nd round, 4th round, 6th round, 8th round, 10th round, 12th round, and 14th round), and The variable winning device 65 is configured to be closed during even rounds.

Next, the opening/closing pattern "alternating up and down" of each variable winning device 65, 76 corresponding to the jackpot type "time saving B", "latent probability variation B", and "probability variation A" of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is as follows. Only the second variable prize winning device 76 is opened in odd numbered rounds (i.e. 1st round, 3rd round, 5th round, 7th round, 9th round, 11th round, 13th round and 15th round), and during the odd numbered rounds, variable prize winning device 65 is opened. is configured to be closed.

In addition, in the opening/closing pattern "alternating up and down", only the variable winning device 65 opens in even numbered rounds (i.e., 2nd round, 4th round, 6th round, 8th round, 10th round, 12th round, and 14th round), and during the even numbered round. is configured so that the second variable winning device 76 is closed.

Therefore, in all the jackpot types of the third embodiment, one of the variable prize winning devices 65, 76 is configured to be opened without interruption. With this configuration, it is possible to eliminate the interval time during the jackpot game, and the jackpot game can be quickly completed, and the game is not prolonged, thereby preventing the player from losing interest. can do.

In addition, the jackpot type "Time saving A" and "Latent probability variation A", "Time saving B" and "Latent probability variation B", or "Time saving C" and "Latent probability variation C" are the variable winning devices 65, 76. Since the opening/closing patterns are the same, by making it impossible to determine the type of jackpot based only on the opening/closing pattern of the variable winning devices 65 and 76, it is difficult (or impossible) for the player to recognize which type of jackpot he/she has won. It is possible to improve the interest of the game by creating a game feature that allows the player to guess in which game state he/she is playing the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 45, the jackpot process (S103) of the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the jackpot process (S103) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 of the third embodiment. In the jackpot process (S103) of the third embodiment, when the jackpot starts, a probability variable area effective table 202g (see FIG. 12) and a jackpot opening/closing table 202h (see FIG. 44) are set according to the jackpot type, and the jackpot opening/closing table 202h (see FIG. 44) is set. The variable probability region opening/closing table 202f as in the second embodiment is not set.

In the jackpot processing (S103) of the third embodiment, when it is determined that the jackpot has been won (S403: Yes), similarly to the jackpot processing (see FIG. 26) of the first and second embodiments, S404 to The process of S408 is executed, and a round counter is set (S404 to S406), an opening command is set (S407), and an opening time is set (S408).

Then, the variable probability region opening/closing table 202f (see FIG. 11) as in the first and second embodiments is not set, but the variable probability region effective table 202g (see FIG. 12) is set (S410).

Next, the jackpot opening/closing table 202h (see FIG. 44) is set according to the type of jackpot (jackpot type) (S501), and the process moves to S411. Specifically, as mentioned above, if the jackpot type is "time saving A", "latent probability variation A", "time saving C", and "latent probability variation C", the opening/closing pattern of the variable winning devices 65, 76 is set to "lower". If the jackpot type is "Time saving B", "Latent probability fluctuation B", and "Probability fluctuation A", the opening/closing pattern of the variable winning devices 65, 76 is set to "Up and down alternate".

Next, with reference to FIG. 46, the open setting process (S422) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 of the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the release setting process (S422) of the third embodiment. In the opening setting process (S422) of the third embodiment, with reference to the big winning opening opening/closing table 202h (see FIG. 44) set at the start of the jackpot, either the variable winning device 65 or the second variable winning device 76 is selected. Configure the opening settings.

In the opening setting process (S422) of the third embodiment, first, since it is the timing to open the big winning hole 65a or the second big winning hole 76a, either the big winning hole 65a or the second big winning hole 76a is opened. In order to do so, the opening setting of the variable winning device 65 or the second variable winning device 76 is performed based on the set big winning opening opening/closing table 202h (S511), and the process moves to S432. By performing this opening setting, either the big winning hole solenoid 65c or the second big winning hole solenoid 76c is driven, and the opening/closing plate 65b or the second opening/closing plate 76b corresponding to the driven solenoid 65c, 76c is activated. It is opened and the ball can flow into the grand prize opening 65a or the second grand prize opening 76a.

Next, with reference to FIG. 47, the open processing (S424) of the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the open processing (S424) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 of the third embodiment. In the opening process (S424) of the third embodiment, since the probability variable area opening/closing plates 73a and 74a are not provided, when the big winning opening switch 71 or the second big winning opening switch 71a is detected, the count number This eliminates the need for confirmation processing, reducing the control burden.

In the opening process (S424) of the third embodiment, if it is determined in the process of S446 that the opening time of either of the big prize openings 65a, 76a has not elapsed (S446: No), then Determine whether or not a ball enters the winning opening 65a and the grand winning opening switch 71 is turned on, or whether a ball enters the second grand winning opening 76a and the second grand winning opening switch 71a is turned on. (S515).

In the process of S515, if the grand prize opening switch 71 or the second grand prize opening switch 71a is turned on (S515: Yes), the ball has entered the grand prize opening 65a or the second grand prize opening 76a, so The value of the prize winning counter is decremented by 1 (S449), and then it is determined whether the value of the winning prize counter subtracted by 1 is larger than "0" (S454). If the value of the winning counter is not larger than "0" (S454: No), that is, if the value of the winning counter is less than or equal to "0", there are 10 balls in the grand prize opening 65a or the second grand prize opening 76a. Since the condition for closing the grand prize opening 65a or the second grand prize opening 76a is satisfied after winning an individual prize, the process moves to S455 in order to close the grand prize opening 65a or the second grand prize opening 76a.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, two variable winning devices 65 and 76 are provided, and the communication path of the second variable winning device 76 is connected to the guide path 72 of the variable winning device 65. 77 are communicated via a merging portion 77a, and the merging portion 77a is located downstream of the right probability variable region 73 and upstream of the left probability variable region 74. And, without providing variable probability area opening/closing plates 73a, 74a in the variable probability areas 73, 74, it is configured such that balls can always flow into each variable probability area 73, 74. With this configuration, the ball that has won into the variable winning device 65 will flow into the right variable probability region 73, and the ball that has won the second variable winning device 76 will flow into the left probability variable region 74. In the case of a jackpot type that gives a "probability variation state" (that is, "latent probability variation A to C" and "probability variation A"), the variable corresponding to the probability variation areas 73 and 74 that are set effectively A "probability fluctuating state" is given by making the ball enter the winning device 65, 76 and passing it through the validly set probability varying regions 73, 74. On the other hand, in the case of a jackpot type that does not have a "probability fluctuation state" (that is, "time saving A to C"), the probability variation area 73, which is set to be invalid, is not the probability variation area 73, 74 which is set to be valid. , 74, and do not allow the ball to pass through the probability variable areas 73, 74 that are set to be valid, but pass the ball to the variable winning areas 73, 74 that are set to be invalid. By allowing it to pass, the configuration is configured so that the "probability fluctuation state" is not added.

With this configuration, even if the ball passes through each probability variable area 73, 74, if the probability variable area 73, 74 is not set internally as valid, a "probability variable state" will occur after the jackpot ends. Therefore, even if the player visually recognizes the passage of the ball to each probability variable area 73, 74, the probability variable area opening/closing plate 73a, 74a and variable area solenoids 73b and 74b are no longer necessary. As a result, the variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 76 can be easily designed with a simple configuration without complicating the design of the variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 76.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, there is no need to provide variable variable area opening/closing plates 73a, 74a and variable variable area solenoids 73b, 74b, which reduces the number of parts of the pachinko machine 10 and reduces manufacturing costs. can do.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, since the variable probability area opening/closing plates 73a, 74a are not provided, the big prize opening switch 71 for determining the opening/closing timing of the variable probability area opening/closing plates 73a, 74a. Or, when the second big prize opening switch 71a is detected, the process of checking the count becomes unnecessary, and the control burden can be reduced.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment has the same configuration as the first embodiment or the second embodiment, and has the same effects.

<Fourth embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 48 to 52. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, a right probability variable area 73 and a left probability variable area 74 are provided in the big winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65, and balls are placed in the probability variable areas 73 and 74 that are set effectively. Based on the passage, it is configured to give a "probability fluctuation state" after the end of the jackpot.

Here, variable probability areas 73 and 74 are provided inside the big winning opening 65a, and variable variable area opening/closing plates 73a and 74a are provided for each variable variable area 73 and 74, and variable variable area opening/closing plates 73a and 74a are provided for each variable variable area, and a variable rate variable driving the opening and closing plates 73a and 74a. When a plurality of drive mechanisms with the area solenoids 73b and 74b are provided, each part 73a, 73b, 74a, and 74b must be installed in a small space, which may complicate the design of the variable prize winning device 65. .

In addition, in addition to the opening/closing plate 65b, the big winning hole solenoid 65c, and the big winning hole switch 71 in the variable winning device 65, the above-mentioned parts 73a, 73b, 74a, and 74b are provided, so the number of parts used in the pachinko machine 10 increases. However, there is a risk that manufacturing costs will increase.

Furthermore, since a plurality of drive mechanisms are arranged in the variable probability regions 73 and 74, maintenance work is required for each drive mechanism, which may increase the number of maintenance steps.

In addition, when opening and closing each probability variable region 73, 74 by a plurality of drive mechanisms, for example, if a failure occurs, both probability variable regions 73, 74 may remain open, or both probability variable regions 73, 74 may remain open. If it continues to be closed, there is a risk that the gameplay that provides a "probability variable state" after the jackpot is completed based on the passage of the ball to the probability variable areas 73 and 74 that have been effectively set may collapse.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, the right variable rate area 73 and the left variable rate area 74 are controlled by one drive mechanism composed of a variable rate area opening/closing motor 78a, a drive gear 78b, and a variable rate area opening/closing plate 78c. The variable area opening/closing plate 78c can be slid in a direction parallel to the guide passage 72 by driving the variable area opening/closing motor 78a in forward or reverse rotation.

Specifically, when the variable variable region opening/closing motor 78a is driven to rotate normally, the variable variable region opening/closing plate 78c slides toward the downstream side of the guide passage 72, opens the right variable region 73, and closes the right variable region. The ball flows into 73. On the other hand, when the variable probability region opening/closing motor 78a is driven in reverse, the variable probability region opening/closing plate 78c slides toward the upstream side of the guide passage 72, opens the left variable region 74, and directs the ball to the left variable region 74. Let it flow.

With this configuration, two probability variable areas (right probability variable area 73 and left probability variable area 74) are provided in the big winning opening 65a, and the probability variable area opening/closing motor 78a is operated for each jackpot round according to the jackpot type. is driven forward or backward to cause a ball to flow into either of the variable probability regions 73, 74, and to switch (internally) the valid or invalid setting of each variable probability region 73, 74 in a state that the player cannot recognize. Control as follows. Then, during a jackpot, if the ball passes through the effectively set probability variable regions 73, 74, a "probability variation state" is generated after the jackpot ends. On the other hand, even if the ball passes through probability variable regions 73 and 74 that are set to be invalid, the system is configured so that the "probability variable state" does not occur after the jackpot ends.

With this configuration, it is possible to open or close the probability variable areas 73 and 74 with one drive mechanism 78, so the design of the variable winning device 65 can be simplified without complicating the design of the variable winning device 65. The configuration can be simplified and designed easily.

In addition, the number of parts of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced because the single drive mechanism 78 opens, closes, and closes the variable rate areas 73 and 74, and there is no need to open and close the variable rate areas 73 and 74 using multiple drive mechanisms. , manufacturing costs can be reduced.

Furthermore, since the probability variable regions 73 and 74 are opened, closed, or closed by one drive mechanism 78, maintenance work only needs to be done for one drive mechanism 78, and the number of maintenance steps can be reduced.

Further, by opening and closing the variable probability regions 73, 74 by one drive mechanism 78, when one variable probability region 73, 74 is opened, the other variable probability region 74, 73 can be closed without fail. Therefore, if both probability variable regions 73 and 74 are opened due to a malfunction or the like, a "probability variable state" is given after the jackpot is completed based on the passage of the ball to the probability variable regions 73 and 74 that are set effectively. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of an event that would destroy the gameplay, and to realize a novel gameplay.

The pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment will be described below, focusing on the differences from the pachinko machine 10 in the first to third embodiments. In the following description, the same elements as those in the first to third embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 48, the variable prize winning device 65 of the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 48(a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the variable prize winning device 65 of the fourth embodiment when viewed from the front.

As shown in FIG. 48(a), in the fourth embodiment, one drive mechanism 78 is provided between the right probability variable area 73 and the left probability variable area 74 provided in the guide passage 72 of the variable winning device 65. It is being

The drive mechanism 78 includes a variable probability area opening/closing motor 78a (see FIG. 49) built in the depth direction of the wall located between the right variable rate area 73 and the left variable rate area 74, and a motor for opening/closing the variable rate area 78a (see FIG. 49). It is provided with a drive gear 78b rotationally driven by the drive gear 78a, and a variable probability area opening/closing plate 78c provided with a transmission gear that meshes with the drive gear 78b.

The variable area opening/closing motor 78a (see FIG. 49) is composed of a stepping motor that can be driven in forward rotation (counterclockwise) and reverse rotation (clockwise). Therefore, when the variable accuracy region opening/closing motor 78a is driven to rotate in the normal direction, the drive gear 78b is also driven to rotate counterclockwise, and when it is driven in the reverse direction, the drive gear 78b is also driven to rotate in the clockwise direction.

The drive gear 78b is connected to the variable probability region opening/closing motor 78a, and the drive gear 78b is also rotationally driven as the variable probability region opening/closing motor 78a is driven. This drive gear 78b is meshed with a transmission gear provided on the lower surface of a variable probability region opening/closing plate 78c, which will be described later.

The probability variable region opening/closing plate 78c is configured such that in the initial state, the right side portion of the probability variable region opening/closing plate 78c closes the right probability variable region 73, and the left side portion of the probability variable region opening/closing plate 78c closes the left probability variable region 74. has been done. The variable probability region opening/closing plate 78c is arranged so that its upper surface is flush with the bottom surface of the guide passage 72 (the rolling surface of the ball). Further, a transmission gear that meshes with the drive gear 78b is provided on the lower surface of the variable area opening/closing plate 78c, and the variable area opening/closing plate 78c is configured to be slidable as the driving gear 78b is rotated. has been done.

In the fourth embodiment, when the variable variable area opening/closing motor 78a rotates normally (counterclockwise) and the drive gear 78b rotates counterclockwise, the variable area that meshes with the drive gear 78b is provided. The opening/closing plate 78c is configured to slide toward the downstream side of the guide passage 72, and the right probability variable region 73 is opened. On the other hand, when the variable variable area opening/closing motor 78a is driven in reverse (clockwise) and the drive gear 78b is rotated clockwise, the variable area opening/closing plate 78c meshed with the driving gear 78b moves into the guide path. 72 is slid upstream to open the left probability variable region 74.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 48(b) to 48(d), the inflow pattern of the balls flowing down the guide passage 72 will be described. FIG. 48(b) shows a state in which the variable probability region opening/closing plate 78c is slid downstream, and when the right variable variable region 73 is in the open state and the left variable variable region 74 is in the closed state, the inside of the guide passage 72 is shown. FIG. 48(c) is a schematic enlarged sectional view for explaining the behavior of a ball flowing down. FIG. 48(d) is a schematic enlarged sectional view for explaining the behavior of the ball flowing down in the guide passage 72 when the right variable area 73 is in a closed state, and FIG. is an initial state, and is a schematic enlarged cross-sectional view for explaining the behavior of a ball flowing down within the guide passage 72 when both the right probability variable region 73 and the left probability variable region 74 are in a closed state.

As shown in FIG. 48(b), when the jackpot is won and a special game state occurs, the opening/closing plate 65b of the variable winning device 65 is opened and balls can flow into the jackpot opening 65a. Then, when the variable probability area opening/closing plate 78c is slid downstream and the right variable probability area 73 is in the open state, the ball that has flowed into the large winning opening 65a is first detected by the large winning opening switch 71, and then , flows down the guide passage 72. Since the variable variable area opening/closing plate 78c is slid downstream by the variable variable area opening/closing motor 78a (see FIG. 49), the right variable area 73 is opened, and the ball passes into the right variable area passage 73c. Inflow. Thereafter, the ball is detected by the right probability variable area switch 73d embedded in the right probability variable area passage 73c. The ball detected by the right probability variable area switch 73d is discharged to the outside of the variable winning device 65 (to the back side of the game board 13) through a discharge path (not shown).

Next, as shown in FIG. 48(c), when the probability variable area opening/closing plate 78c is slid to the upstream side and the left probability variable area 74 is in the open state, the ball that has flowed into the big prize opening 65a first, It is detected by the big prize opening switch 71 and then flows down the guide path 72. Then, it rolls on the upper surface of a variable variable area opening/closing plate 78c that closes the right variable variable area 73, and the variable variable area opening/closing plate 78c is slid upstream by a variable variable area opening/closing motor 78a (see FIG. 49). Therefore, the left probability variable region 74 is open, and the ball flows into the left probability variable region passage 74c. Thereafter, the ball is detected by the left probability variable area switch 74d embedded in the left probability variable area passage 74c. The ball detected by the left probability variable area switch 74d is discharged to the outside of the variable winning device 65 (to the back side of the game board 13) through a discharge path (not shown).

Next, as shown in FIG. 48(d), when the probability variable area opening/closing plate 78c is in the initial position and both the right probability variation area 73 and the left probability variation area 74 are in the closed state, the winnings flowed into the big prize opening 65a. The ball is first detected by the big prize opening switch 71, and then flows down the guide path 72. Then, it rolls on the upper surface of the variable rate area opening/closing plate 78c, passes above the right variable rate area 73 and the left variable rate area 74, and exits the variable winning device 65 from the discharge passage 75 provided on the downstream side (the back side of the game board 13). side).

With this configuration, it is possible to open or close the probability variable areas 73 and 74 with one drive mechanism 78, so the design of the variable winning device 65 can be simplified without complicating the design of the variable winning device 65. The configuration can be simplified and designed easily. In addition, the number of parts of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced because the single drive mechanism 78 opens, closes, and closes the variable rate areas 73 and 74, and there is no need to open and close the variable rate areas 73 and 74 using multiple drive mechanisms. , manufacturing costs can be reduced. Furthermore, since the probability variable regions 73 and 74 are opened, closed, or closed by one drive mechanism 78, maintenance work only needs to be done for one drive mechanism 78, and the number of maintenance steps can be reduced. Further, by opening and closing the variable probability regions 73, 74 by one drive mechanism 78, when one variable probability region 73, 74 is opened, the other variable probability region 74, 73 can be closed without fail. Therefore, if both probability variable regions 73 and 74 are opened due to a malfunction or the like, a "probability variable state" is given after the jackpot is completed based on the passage of the ball to the probability variable regions 73 and 74 that are set effectively. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of an event that would destroy the gameplay, and to realize a novel gameplay.

Next, with reference to FIG. 49, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 49 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment.

The ROM 202 of the main controller 110 of the fourth embodiment stores a probability variable area opening/closing table 202f for setting a drive pattern of the variable probability area opening/closing motor 78a.

Further, the variable area opening/closing motor 78a for slidingly driving the variable area opening/closing plate 78c is connected to the input/output port 205 of the main controller 110 of the fourth embodiment, and the MPU 201 is connected to the input/output port 205 via the input/output port 205. Send control signals. In the fourth embodiment, the probability variable area opening/closing table 202f set based on the jackpot type is referred to at the start of each round, and the probability variable area opening/closing motor 78a is driven in forward or reverse rotation to select one of the probability variable areas. Open 73 and 74. When a predetermined period of time (6000 ms in the fourth embodiment) has elapsed since the forward rotation drive or reverse rotation drive, the variable variable region opening/closing motor 78a is returned to the initial position, and both the variable variable regions 73 and 74 are closed. Configure to close.

Here, with reference to FIG. 50, the opening/closing pattern of each probability variable area 73, 74 for each type of jackpot will be explained. FIG. 50 is a diagram schematically showing an example of the variable probability region opening/closing table 202f of the fourth embodiment. The probability variable area opening/closing table 202f shown in FIG. 50 shows the drive pattern of the probability variable area opening/closing motor 78a for each jackpot type in each special symbol, and the probability variable area opening/closing motor 78a is driven forward (reversely) for each round. When the right variable area 73 is opened (clockwise), it is expressed as "correct", and when the variable area opening/closing motor 78a is driven in the reverse direction (clockwise) and the left variable area 74 is opened, it is expressed as "correct". It is expressed as "the opposite." In addition, in the fourth embodiment, when one probability variable area 73, 74 (for example, the right probability variable area 73) is open, the other probability variable area 74, 73 (for example, the left probability variable area 74) is always closed. It is configured as follows.

As shown in FIG. 50, the opening/closing pattern "X3" of each probability variable area 73, 74 corresponding to the jackpot type "time saving A" and "latent probability variation A", which is a jackpot of up to 7 rounds of the first special symbol, is an odd number In the rounds (namely, the first round, the third round, the fifth round, and the seventh round), the variable variable area opening/closing motor 78a is driven to rotate normally, the variable variable area opening/closing plate 78c is slid downstream, and the right variable area 73 is opened. As a result, the ball can pass through the right variable probability region 73, and the left variable probability region 74 is closed by the variable probability region opening/closing plate 78c, making it impossible for the ball to pass through the left variable probability region 74.

Moreover, in the opening/closing pattern "X3", in even number rounds (namely, 2nd round, 4th round, and 6th round), the definite variable area opening/closing motor 78a is driven in reverse, the definite variable area opening/closing plate 78c is slid upstream, and the left side By opening the probability variable region 74, the ball can pass through the left probability variable region 74, and the right probability variable region 73 is closed by the probability variable region opening/closing plate 78c, making it impossible for the ball to pass through the right probability variable region 73.

That is, in the opening/closing pattern "X3", the ball can pass through the right probability variable area 73 in the first round of the jackpot, the ball can pass through the left probability variable area 74 in the next round (i.e., the second round), and then the ball can pass through the left probability variable area 74 in the first round of the jackpot. The ball can alternately pass through the right probability variable area 73 or the left probability variable area 74 every round until the end (that is, the end of the seventh round). Therefore, the number of rounds that can be passed to the right variable probability region 73 is "4", and the number of rounds that can be passed to the left probability variable region 74 is "3".

Next, as shown in FIG. 50, the opening/closing pattern "X4" of each probability variable area 73, 74 corresponding to the jackpot type "time saving B" and "latent probability variation B" which is a jackpot of maximum 7 rounds of the first special symbol is , in odd-numbered rounds (i.e., rounds 1, 3, 5, and 7), the variable area opening/closing motor 78a is driven in reverse, the variable area opening/closing plate 78c is slid upstream, and the left variable area 74 is opened. As a result, the ball can pass through the left variable probability region 74, and the right variable probability region 73 is closed by the variable probability region opening/closing plate 78c, making it impossible for the ball to pass through the right variable probability region 73.

Moreover, in the opening/closing pattern "X4", in even number rounds (i.e., 2nd round, 4th round, and 6th round), the definite variable area opening/closing motor 78a is driven to rotate normally, and the definite variable area opening/closing plate 78c is driven to slide downstream, By opening the right variable probability region 73, a ball can pass through the right variable probability region 73, and the left variable probability region 74 is closed by the variable probability region opening/closing plate 78c, making it impossible for a ball to pass through the left variable probability region 74. .

That is, in the opening/closing pattern "X4", the ball can pass through the left probability variable area 74 in the first round of the jackpot, the ball can pass through the right probability variable area 73 in the next round (i.e., the second round), and after that, the ball can pass through the right probability variable area 73 in the first round of the jackpot. The ball can alternately pass through the left probability variable area 74 or the right probability variable area 73 every round until the end (that is, the end of the seventh round). Therefore, the number of rounds that can be passed to the left probability variable area 74 is "4", and the number of rounds that can be passed to the right probability variable area 73 is "3".

Next, as shown in FIG. 50, the opening/closing pattern "Y3" of each probability variable area 73, 74 corresponding to the jackpot type "probability fluctuation A" which is a jackpot of maximum 15 rounds of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is as follows. In odd-numbered rounds (i.e., 1st round, 3rd round, 5th round, 7th round, 9th round, 11th round, 13th round, and 15th round), the definite variable area opening/closing motor 78a is driven in reverse, and the definite variable area opening/closing plate 78c is moved to the upstream side. The left probability variable area 74 is opened, allowing the ball to pass through the left probability variable area 74, and the right probability variable area 73 is closed by the probability variable area opening/closing plate 78c, allowing the ball to pass through the right probability variable area 73. It becomes impossible to pass.

Furthermore, in the opening/closing pattern "Y3", in even number rounds (i.e., 2nd round, 4th round, 6th round, 8th round, 10th round, 12th round, and 14th round), the definite variable area opening/closing motor 78a is driven in normal rotation and the definite variable area is changed. The region opening/closing plate 78c slides downstream and opens the right variable probability region 73, allowing the ball to pass through the right variable probability region 73, and the left probability variable region 74 is closed by the variable probability region opening/closing plate 78c. The ball cannot pass through the left probability variable region 74.

That is, in the opening/closing pattern "Y3", the ball can pass through the left probability variable area 74 in the first round of the jackpot, the ball can pass through the right probability variable area 73 in the next round (i.e., the second round), and then the ball can pass through the right probability variable area 73 in the first round of the jackpot. The ball can alternately pass through the left probability variable area 74 or the right probability variable area 73 every round until the end (that is, the end of the 15th round). Therefore, the number of rounds that can be passed to the left probability variable area 74 is "8", and the number of rounds that can be passed to the right probability variable area 73 is "7".

Next, as shown in FIG. 50, the opening/closing pattern "Y4" of each probability variable area 73, 74 corresponding to the jackpot type "time saving C" and "latent probability variation C" which is a jackpot of maximum 15 rounds of the second special symbol is , in odd-numbered rounds (i.e., 1st round, 3rd round, 5th round, 7th round, 9th round, 11th round, 13th round, and 15th round), the definite variable area opening/closing motor 78a is driven to rotate normally, and the definite variable area opening/closing plate 78c is driven. By sliding to the downstream side and opening the right side probability variable area 73, the ball can pass through the right side probability variable area 73, and the left side probability variable area 74 is closed by the probability variable area opening/closing plate 78c to open the left side probability variable area 74. The ball cannot pass.

Further, in the opening/closing pattern "Y4", the variable area opening/closing motor 78a is driven in reverse in even number rounds (i.e., 2nd round, 4th round, 6th round, 8th round, 10th round, 12th round, and 14th round), and The opening/closing plate 78c slides upstream and opens the left side probability variable area 74, allowing the ball to pass through the left side probability variable area 74, and the right side probability variable area 73 is closed by the probability variable area opening/closing plate 78c and moves to the right side. The ball cannot pass through the variable probability region 73.

That is, in the opening/closing pattern "Y4", the ball can pass through the right probability variable area 73 in the first round of the jackpot, the ball can pass through the left probability variable area 74 in the next round (i.e., the second round), and then the ball can pass through the left probability variable area 74 in the first round of the jackpot. The ball can alternately pass through the right probability variable area 73 or the left probability variable area 74 every round until the end (that is, the end of the 15th round). Therefore, the number of rounds that can be passed to the right variable probability region 73 is "8", and the number of rounds that can be passed to the left probability variable region 74 is "7".

In this way, the jackpot types in which the opening/closing patterns of the probability variable areas 73 and 74 are the same in accordance with the drive pattern of the probability variable area opening/closing motor 78a (i.e., the jackpot types "time saving A" and "latent probability variation A", the jackpot type "time saving B" and "Latent probability variation B", and jackpot types "Time saving C" and "Latent probability variation C"), respectively, so that the jackpot type cannot be determined only from the opening/closing pattern of each probability variable area 73, 74. In this way, it is difficult (or impossible) for the player to recognize which jackpot type he or she has won, creating a gameplay that makes the player guess in which gaming state he/she is playing the game. You can improve your interest.

Next, with reference to FIG. 51, the open setting process (S422) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 of the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the release setting process (S422) of the fourth embodiment. In the opening setting process (S422) of the fourth embodiment, the variable probability area opening/closing motor 78a is driven in forward or reverse rotation with reference to the variable probability area opening/closing table 202f (see FIG. 50) set at the start of the jackpot.

In the opening setting process (S422) of the fourth embodiment, similar to the opening setting process (S422) of the first embodiment, the processes of S431 to S434 are performed to set the big winning opening opening (S431), and the winning counter is set. "10" is set (S432), an opening time is set (S433), and an opening command is set (S434).

Next, depending on the type of jackpot (jackpot type), the variable probability area opening/closing motor 78a is driven in forward or reverse rotation based on the variable probability area opening/closing table 202f (see FIG. 50) set at the start of the jackpot ( S521), one of the variable probability regions 73, 74 is opened and the other variable probability region 74, 73 is closed, and the process proceeds to S436.

Next, with reference to FIG. 52, the open processing (S424) of the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the open processing (S424) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 of the fourth embodiment. In the opening process (S424) of the fourth embodiment, it is determined whether a predetermined time (in the fourth embodiment, "6000 ms") has elapsed since the drive of the variable probability region opening/closing motor 78a has started; If the predetermined time has elapsed, the variable variable area opening/closing motor 78a is returned to the initial position to close both variable variable areas 73 and 74.

In the opening process (S424) of the fourth embodiment, as in the first embodiment, first, the processes of S441 to S445 are performed, and the probability variable transition flag 203i is set based on the passage of the ball to the probability variable regions 73 and 74. is performed, and the process moves to S531.

In the process of S531, it is determined whether "6000 ms" has elapsed since the variable probability region opening/closing motor 78a started driving in S521 of the above-mentioned opening setting process (see FIG. 51) (S531). As a result of the determination, if "6000 ms" has passed since the start of driving of the variable area opening/closing motor 78a (S531: Yes), the variable area opening/closing motor 78a is returned to the initial position (S532), and both the variable areas 73 and 74 are closed. It is closed and the process moves to S446. On the other hand, if "6000 ms" has not elapsed since the drive start of the variable probability region opening/closing motor 78a (S531: No), the process skips S532 and moves to S446.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, the right variable area 73 and the left side variable area are driven by the driving mechanism 1, which includes the variable variable area opening/closing motor 78a, the variable variable area opening/closing plate 78c, etc. 74 can be closed at the same time, and by driving the variable variable area opening/closing motor 78a in forward or reverse rotation, the variable variable area opening/closing plate 78c can be slid in a direction parallel to the guide passage 72. In addition, two probability variable regions (right probability variable region 73 and left probability variable region 74) are provided in the jackpot 65a, and the motor 78a for opening and closing the probability variable region is driven in forward or reverse rotation for each round of the jackpot depending on the type of jackpot. The ball is driven to flow into one of the probability variable areas 73, 74, and the setting of each probability variable area 73, 74 is controlled to be switched between valid and invalid (internally) in a state that the player cannot recognize. Then, during a jackpot, if the ball passes through the effectively set probability variable regions 73, 74, a "probability variation state" is generated after the jackpot ends. On the other hand, even if the ball passes through probability variable regions 73 and 74 that are set to be invalid, the system is configured so that the "probability variable state" does not occur after the jackpot ends.

With this configuration, it is possible to open or close the probability variable areas 73 and 74 with one drive mechanism 78, so the design of the variable winning device 65 can be simplified without complicating the design of the variable winning device 65. The configuration can be simplified and designed easily.

In addition, the number of parts of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced because the single drive mechanism 78 opens, closes, and closes the variable rate areas 73 and 74, and there is no need to open and close the variable rate areas 73 and 74 using multiple drive mechanisms. , manufacturing costs can be reduced.

Furthermore, since the probability variable regions 73 and 74 are opened, closed, and closed by one drive mechanism 78, maintenance work only needs to be performed on one drive mechanism 78, and the number of maintenance steps for the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

Furthermore, when one variable variable area 73, 74 is opened by slidingly driving the variable variable area opening/closing plate 78c to open and close the variable variable area 73, 74, the other variable area 74, 73 must be closed. Can be done. Therefore, if both probability variable regions 73 and 74 are opened due to a malfunction or the like, a "probability variable state" is given after the jackpot is completed based on the passage of the ball to the probability variable regions 73 and 74 that are set effectively. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of an event that would destroy the gameplay, and to realize a novel gameplay.

Furthermore, by configuring both variable areas 73 and 74 to be closed when the variable variable area opening/closing plate 78c is not driven (initial position), it is possible to prevent the variable area opening/closing motor 78a from operating normally due to a failure or the like. Even if there is, both probability variable regions 73 and 74 can be kept in a closed state, and balls can be prevented from flowing into probability variable regions 73 and 74 even in an abnormal situation. Therefore, even if the variable probability areas 73 and 74 are set to be effective in an abnormal situation, it is possible to prevent unexpected disadvantages from occurring in the gaming hall.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment has the same configuration as the first to third embodiments, and has the same effects.

<Fifth embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 53 to 56. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, a right probability variable area 73 and a left probability variable area 74 are provided in the big winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65, and balls are placed in the probability variable areas 73 and 74 that are set effectively. Based on the passage, it is configured to give a "probability fluctuation state" after the end of the jackpot.

Here, there is a possibility that the ball that won a prize in the big prize opening 65a in the round before the round being executed remains (remains) in the guide passage 72. In particular, as in the second embodiment, when the two variable winning devices 65 and 76 are used to play a jackpot game in which there is no (little) interval time between rounds, the above phenomenon occurs frequently.

However, if the above-mentioned event occurs, since the valid setting of the variable probability areas 73 and 74 is done at the same time as the start of each round, it may not be possible to initially win a jackpot type that does not give a "probability variable state". Despite the fact that the ball that won the prize in the previous round passed through the validly set variable probability areas 73 and 74 that it could not normally pass through, the game value was unexpected due to the game specifications. There is a risk that unexpected losses may occur at the gaming facility.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, the validity setting of the variable probability regions 73 and 74 is performed not at the start of a round but after a predetermined period has elapsed after the grand prize opening 65a is opened. Specifically, the probability variable regions 73, 74 are set to be effective at the same time as the probability variable region solenoids 73b, 74b are driven in accordance with the winning of the third ball after the big winning opening 65a is opened.

By configuring this way, even though you initially won a jackpot type that does not give a "probability fluctuation state", the ball that won the prize in the previous round is set to be valid and cannot pass normally. To make it difficult for a player to pass through the variable probability regions 73 and 74, to provide a player with a gaming value as expected in the game specifications, and to prevent unexpected losses from occurring in a gaming parlor. Can be done.

The pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment will be described below, focusing on the differences from the pachinko machines 10 according to the first to fourth embodiments. In the following description, the same elements as those in the first to fourth embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 53, the manner in which balls are detected in each round of the jackpot type "time saving A" of the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 53 shows the operation timings of the big prize opening solenoid 65c, the right probability variable area solenoid 73b, and the left probability variable area solenoid 74b in the first and second rounds of the jackpot type "time saving A" of the first special symbol of the fifth embodiment. , the timing of ball detection in the big winning opening switch 71, the right probability variable area switch 73d, and the left probability variable area switch 74d, and the setting timings of the right probability variation valid flag 203g, left probability variation valid flag 203h, and probability variation transition flag 203i are schematically shown. FIG.

In the jackpot type "time saving A" of the fifth embodiment, a total of seven rounds of jackpot games are executed as in the first embodiment, and at the start of each round, the jackpot solenoid 65c is turned on and the opening/closing plate 65b is opened. be done. Then, under a predetermined condition (in the fifth embodiment, a maximum of "30 seconds" has elapsed since the opening (see Max t1 in FIG. 53. Max t1 < "30000ms"), or when 10 balls are detected by the big winning opening switch 71, If either one of these events) is established, the big prize opening solenoid 65c is turned off, the opening/closing plate 65b is closed, and one round ends.

In addition, in the jackpot type "Time saving A", the opening/closing pattern of the right probability variable area 73 and the left probability variable area 74 is "X1", so in the first round, the first count ball was detected by the big winning opening switch 71. In this case, both the right probability variable region solenoid 73b and the left probability variable region solenoid 74b are turned on for "60 ms" (see t2 in FIG. 53. t2 = "60 ms"), and the right probability variable region solenoid 73b and left probability variable region solenoid 74b are normal. It is configured such that it is possible to recognize whether or not it can be driven.

Then, when the third count ball is detected by the big prize opening switch 71, only the right probability variable area solenoid 73b is turned on for "2000ms" (see t3 in FIG. 53. t3 = "2000ms"). In the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, the time required for the ball to reach the right probability variable area 73 after the ball is detected by the big prize opening switch 71 is within "2 seconds" (in the fifth embodiment, "1. 5 seconds". See t4 in FIG. 53. t4<"2000ms"). Therefore, the third count ball can flow into the open right probability variable area 73, and is detected by the right probability variable area switch 73d.

At this time, the effective pattern of the probability variable areas 73 and 74 of the jackpot type "time saving A" is "A", and the right probability variable area 73 of the second round and the left probability variable area 74 of the fifth round are set effectively. Ru. Therefore, in the first round, both probability variation areas 73 and 74 are invalid, and the right probability variation valid flag 203g and the left probability variation validity flag 203h are set to OFF. Therefore, in the first round, even if the ball passes through the right probability variable area 73 and is detected by the right probability variable area switch 73d, the right probability variable area 73 is not set to be valid, so the probability change transition flag is 203i remains off without being turned on.

In addition, in the odd-numbered rounds (namely, 3rd round, 5th round, and 7th round) of jackpot type "time saving A", the driving manner of the right probability variable area solenoid 73b and the left probability variable area solenoid 74b is the same as in the first round.

Next, in the second round of the jackpot type "time saving A", when the first count ball is detected by the jackpot switch 71, the right probability variable area solenoid 73b and the left probability variable area solenoid 74b are activated as in the first round. Both are turned on for "60 ms" (see t5 in FIG. 53; t5 = "60 ms"), so that it can be recognized whether the right probability variable region solenoid 73b and the left probability variable region solenoid 74b can be driven normally.

Then, when the third count ball is detected by the big prize opening switch 71, only the left probability variable area solenoid 74b is turned on for "2000ms" (see t6 in FIG. 53. t6 = "2000ms"). In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the time required for the ball to reach the left probability variable area 74 after the ball is detected by the big prize opening switch 71 is within "2 seconds" (that is, "1.6 seconds"). See t7 in FIG. 53. t7<"2000ms"). Therefore, the third count ball can flow into the open left probability variable area 74, and is detected by the left probability variable area switch 74d.

In addition, in the fifth embodiment, when setting the variable probability areas 73 and 74 to be effective, when the third count ball is detected by the big winning opening switch 71, the corresponding variable probability valid flags 203g and 203h are set to ON. It is configured as follows. In other words, even in a round in which the probability change areas 73 and 74 are set as valid, the probability change occurs during the period when at least three balls flow into the big prize opening 65a after the start of the round (see t8 in FIG. 53). Valid flags 203g and 203h are set to off. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10, the balls are fired at intervals of "0.6 seconds", so the probability variation valid flags 203g and 203h are turned off for at least "1.8 seconds" after the grand prize opening 65a is opened. You can leave it as is.

In particular, when the first count ball is detected by the big prize opening switch 71 in each round, the probability variable area opening/closing plates 73a, 74a are opened for "60ms" to confirm the operation. If a round ball remains (remains) in the guide passage 72, there is a risk that the ball may flow into the open variable probability regions 73, 74.

Therefore, the validity setting of the probability variable areas 73 and 74 is configured to be performed not at the start of a round but after a predetermined period has elapsed after the big prize opening 65a is opened. Specifically, the probability variable regions 73, 74 are set to be effective at the same time as the probability variable region solenoids 73b, 74b are driven in accordance with the winning of the third ball after the big winning opening 65a is opened. With this configuration, even though the ball won the jackpot type "time saving A" which does not have a "probability fluctuation state", the ball that won the prize in the previous round (i.e., the first round) It is possible to eliminate as much as possible the event of passing through the effectively set probability variable regions 73 and 74 that would otherwise not be possible to pass through. Therefore, while checking the operation of the variable probability area opening/closing plates 73a and 74a, it is possible to provide the player with a gaming value as expected in the gaming specifications, and to prevent unexpected losses from occurring in the gaming parlor.

Next, with reference to FIG. 54, the manner in which balls are detected in each round of the jackpot type "latent probability variation A" of the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 54 shows the operation timings of the big winning opening solenoid 65c, the right probability variable area solenoid 73b, and the left probability variable area solenoid 74b in the first to third rounds of the jackpot type "latent probability variation A", and the big winning opening switch 71, right It is a timing chart schematically showing each time of the detection timing of the ball in the probability variable area switch 73d and the left probability variable area switch 74d, and the setting timing of the right probability variation valid flag 203g, the left probability variation valid flag 203h, and the probability variation transition flag 203i. .

In the jackpot type "latent probability variation A" of the fifth embodiment, a total of seven rounds of jackpot games are executed as in the first embodiment, and at the start of each round, the jackpot solenoid 65c is turned on and the opening/closing plate 65b will be released. Then, under a predetermined condition (in the fifth embodiment, a maximum of "30 seconds" has elapsed since the opening (see Max t1 in FIG. 54. Max t1 < "30000ms"), or when 10 balls are detected by the big winning opening switch 71, If either one of these events) is established, the big prize opening solenoid 65c is turned off, the opening/closing plate 65b is closed, and one round ends.

In addition, in the jackpot type "Latent probability variation A", the opening/closing pattern of the right probability variable area 73 and the left probability variable area 74 is "X1" as in the jackpot type "time saving A", so in the first round, the big winning opening When the first count ball is detected by the switch 71, both the right probability variable area solenoid 73b and the left probability variable area solenoid 74b are turned on for "60 ms" (see t2 in FIG. 54. t2 = "60 ms"), and the right It is configured to be able to recognize whether or not the probability variable region solenoid 73b and the left probability variable region solenoid 74b can be driven normally.

At this time, since the variable probability valid flags 203g and 203h are still set to OFF, even if a ball flows into the variable probability regions 73, 74 at this timing, the ON condition for the variable probability transition flag 203i will not be satisfied.

Then, when the third count ball is detected by the big prize opening switch 71, only the right probability variable area solenoid 73b is turned on for "2000ms" (see t3 in FIG. 54. t3 = "2000ms"). In the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, the time required for the ball to reach the right probability variable area 73 after the ball is detected by the big prize opening switch 71 is within "2 seconds" (in the fifth embodiment, "1. 5 seconds". See t4 in FIG. 54. t4<"2000ms"). Therefore, the third count ball can flow into the open right probability variable area 73, and is detected by the right probability variable area switch 73d.

At this time, the effective pattern of the probability variable areas 73 and 74 of the jackpot type "latent probability variation A" is "B", and the right probability variable area 73 of the third round and the left probability variable area 74 of the sixth round are effective. Set. Therefore, in the first round, both probability variation areas 73 and 74 are invalid, and the right probability variation valid flag 203g and the left probability variation validity flag 203h are set to OFF. Therefore, in the first round, even if the ball passes through the right probability variable area 73 and is detected by the right probability variable area switch 73d, the right probability variable area 73 is not set to be valid, so the probability change transition flag is 203i remains off without being turned on.

In addition, in odd-numbered rounds (i.e., 3rd round, 5th round, and 7th round) of the jackpot type "Latent probability variation A", the driving manner of the right probability variable area solenoid 73b and the left probability variable area solenoid 74b is the same as in the first round. .

Next, in the second round of the jackpot type "latent probability variation A", when the first count ball is detected by the jackpot switch 71, the right probability variable area solenoid 73b and the left probability variable area solenoid are activated as in the first round. 74b are both turned on for "60 ms" (see t5 in FIG. 54; t5 = "60 ms"), so that it can be recognized whether or not the right probability variable region solenoid 73b and the left probability variable region solenoid 74b can be driven normally. There is.

Then, when the third count ball is detected by the big prize opening switch 71, only the left probability variable area solenoid 74b is turned on for "2000ms" (see t6 in FIG. 54. t6 = "2000ms"). In the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, the time required for the ball to reach the left probability variable area 74 after the ball is detected by the big prize opening switch 71 is within "2 seconds" (that is, "1.6 seconds"). See t7 in FIG. 54. t7<"2000ms"). Therefore, the third count ball can flow into the open left probability variable area 74, and is detected by the left probability variable area switch 74d.

At this time, the valid pattern of the probability variable areas 73, 74 of the jackpot type "latent probability variation A" is "B", and both probability variable areas 73, 74 are invalid in the second round, and the right probability variable valid flag 203g and The left probability variation valid flag 203h is set to OFF. Therefore, in the second round, even if the ball passes through the left probability variable area 74 and is detected by the left probability variable area switch 74d, the left probability variable area 74 is not set to be valid, so the probability change transition flag is set. 203i remains off without being turned on.

In addition, in the even-numbered rounds (namely, the 4th round and the 6th round) of the jackpot type "latency probability variation A", the driving manner of the right probability variable area solenoid 73b and the left probability variable area solenoid 74b is the same as in the second round.

Next, in the third round of the jackpot type "latent probability variation A", when the first count ball is detected by the jackpot switch 71, the right probability variation area solenoid 73b and Both the left probability variable region solenoid 74b are turned on for "60 ms" (see t8 in FIG. 54. t8 = "60 ms"), and it is possible to recognize whether the right probability variable region solenoid 73b and the left probability variable region solenoid 74b can be driven normally. It is composed of

Then, in the third round, only the right variable area solenoid 73b is turned on for "2000 ms" (see t9 in FIG. 54. t9 = "2000 ms"). In the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, the time required for the ball to reach the right probability variable area 73 after the ball is detected by the big prize opening switch 71 is within "2 seconds" (that is, "1.5 seconds"). See t10 in FIG. 54. t10<"2000ms"). Therefore, the third count ball can flow into the open right probability variable area 73, and is detected by the right probability variable area switch 73d.

At this time, the valid pattern of the variable probability areas 73 and 74 of the jackpot type "latent probability variation A" is "B", and only the right variable probability area 73 is valid in the third round. Moreover, when the third count ball is detected by the big winning a prize opening switch 71 after the big winning a prize opening 65a is opened (see t11 in FIG. 53), the right probability variation valid flag 203g is set to ON. Therefore, in the third round, when a ball after the third count flows into the right probability variable area 73 and is detected by the right probability variable area switch 73d, the right probability variable area 73 is set to be valid. The probability change transition flag 203i is set to on.

Therefore, in the jackpot type "latent probability variation A" of the fifth embodiment, even if the valid setting of the probability variable areas 73, 74 is started from the third count of the big winning opening switch 71, the probability variable areas 73, 74 are changed. Balls can be passed after the third count. As a result, it becomes possible to pass the ball to the validly set variable probability areas 73, 74, and as the ball passes through the valid variable areas 73, 74, the variable probability transition flag 203i is turned on. By setting this, at the end of the jackpot, a "probability variation state" can be added by referring to this probability variation transition flag 203i.

Next, with reference to FIG. 55, the open setting process (S422) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 of the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the release setting process (S422) of the fifth embodiment. In the opening setting process (S422) of the fifth embodiment, the probability variation valid flags 203g and 203h are not processed at the start of a round.

Therefore, in the opening setting process (S422) of the fifth embodiment, similar to the opening setting process (S422) of the first embodiment, the processes of S431 to S434 are performed to set the big winning opening opening (S431), and the winning opening is set (S431). The counter is set to "10" (S432), the opening time is set (S433), and the opening command is set (S434).

Then, the open setting process (S422) of the fifth embodiment does not refer to the variable probability area effective table 202g at this stage, and ends the open setting process (S422) as it is. Therefore, at the start of the round, the probability variation valid flags 203g and 203h remain set to OFF.

Next, with reference to FIG. 56, the open process (S424) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 of the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the opening process (S424) of the fifth embodiment. In the opening process of the fifth embodiment, a ball winning detection process accompanying the opening of the big winning opening 65a, an opening/closing control process of the right probability variable area 73 and the left probability variable area 74, or the opened right probability variable area 73 or the left side In addition to executing the process of detecting the passage of a ball to the variable probability area 74, and at the timing when a predetermined number of balls have won, the validity of the variable probability areas 73 and 74 is set based on the set variable probability area effective table 202g (see FIG. 12). I do.

In the opening process (S424) of the fifth embodiment, in the process of S452, whether or not the current detection of turning on the big winning opening switch 71 is the third count, that is, whether the value of the winning prize counter is "7" or not. (S452). As a result of the determination, if it is determined that the current ON detection of the jackpot switch 71 is the third count (S452: Yes), the probability change set according to the jackpot type in the jackpot processing (see FIG. 26) Based on the area opening/closing table 202f (see FIG. 11), the right probability variable region solenoid 73b or the left probability variable region solenoid 74b is set to ON for "2000ms" (S453), and the right probability variable region opening/closing plate 73a or the left probability variable region opening/closing is performed. Either one of the plates 74a is opened to allow balls to flow into the open probability variable regions 73, 74.

After the process of S453, the right probability variation valid flag 203g or the left probability variation validity flag in the relevant round is determined based on the probability variation area validity table 202g (see FIG. 12) set according to the jackpot type in the jackpot process (see FIG. 26). 203h (S491), and this release setting process (S422) ends. After the opening setting process (S422) is completed, the process moves to S423 of the big winning opening opening/closing control process (see FIG. 27). Therefore, in the fifth embodiment, the valid setting of the variable probability valid flags 203g and 203h can be performed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the big prize opening 65a was opened.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, the valid setting of the variable probability regions 73 and 74 is performed not at the start of a round but after a predetermined period has elapsed after the big prize opening 65a is opened. Configure it as follows. Specifically, the probability variable regions 73 and 74 are set to be valid at the same time as the probability variable region solenoids 73b and 74b are driven in accordance with the winning of the third ball after the big winning opening 65a is opened.

By configuring this way, even though you initially won a jackpot type that does not give a "probability fluctuation state", the ball that won the prize in the previous round is set to be valid and cannot pass normally. To make it difficult for a player to pass through the variable probability regions 73 and 74, to provide a player with a gaming value as expected in the game specifications, and to prevent unexpected losses from occurring in a gaming parlor. Can be done.

Further, even if the valid setting of the variable probability areas 73, 74 is started from the third count of the big winning a prize opening switch 71, it is possible to pass the ball to the variable probability areas 73, 74 after the third count. As a result, it becomes possible to pass the ball to the validly set variable probability areas 73, 74, and as the ball passes through the valid variable areas 73, 74, the variable probability transition flag 203i is turned on. By setting this, at the end of the jackpot, a "probability variation state" can be added by referring to this probability variation transition flag 203i.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment has the same configuration as the first to fourth embodiments, and has the same effects.

<Sixth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 57, a pachinko machine 10 in a sixth embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, in one round of a jackpot, ``30 seconds'' must elapse after the grand prize opening 65a starts opening, or 10 balls win while the grand prize opening 65a is open. The configuration is such that one "round" is executed. Therefore, the player is configured to be able to grasp the current number of rounds by counting the number of times the big prize opening 65a is opened.

In addition, the interval between rounds is a state in which the grand prize opening 65a is closed, and the player can determine whether the grand prize opening 65a is open (that is, during the round) or during the interval in the jackpot game. It is possible to easily understand what is happening.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment, in a predetermined round (in the sixth embodiment, the second round and the third round), the big prize opening 65a is opened multiple times (the first (opening and second opening), and the closing time of the pseudo interval that takes place between the first opening and second opening in the round and the opening time of the first opening and second opening are the same time. (Hereinafter, the above opening mode will be referred to as "special opening"). Furthermore, the interval time between rounds is also configured to be the same as the opening time and closing time. Then, in a part of the round in which the above-mentioned special opening is executed, the probability variable areas 73 and 74 are set to be valid, and when the ball passes through the probability variable areas 73 and 74 that are set to be valid, after the jackpot ends, the The configuration is configured to give "fluctuation state".

With this configuration, even if the player is aware of the number of rounds in the probability variable areas 73 and 74 that have been effectively set, the player will not be able to grasp the number of rounds currently being executed. It is possible to configure the system so that it is difficult to clearly recognize whether or not a "probability fluctuating state" occurs. Therefore, even when the "latent probability variation performance mode" is executed, it is possible to create a gameplay that makes the player guess in which gaming state he/she is playing the game, thereby improving the interest of the game. be able to.

The pachinko machine 10 in the sixth embodiment will be described below, focusing on the differences from the pachinko machines 10 in the first to fifth embodiments. In the following description, the same elements as those in the first to fifth embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 57, the operation of the big winning opening solenoid 65c, right probability variable area solenoid 73b, and left probability variable area solenoid 74b in the first to third rounds of the jackpot type "latent probability variation A" of the sixth embodiment The timing, the detection timing of the ball in the big winning opening switch 71, the right probability variable area switch 73d, and the left probability variable area switch 74d, and the setting timing of the right probability variation valid flag 203g, left probability variation valid flag 203h, and probability variation transition flag 203i. 2 is a timing chart schematically showing the timing chart.

In the jackpot type "latent probability variation A" of the sixth embodiment, a total of seven rounds of jackpot games are executed as in the first embodiment, and at the start of each round, the jackpot solenoid 65c is turned on and the opening/closing plate 65b will be released. In the first round, the opening pattern of the big winning hole 65a is normal opening, and a maximum of "30 seconds" has elapsed since the big winning hole 65a was opened (see Max t1 in FIG. 57. Max t1 < "30000ms"). Or, when either one of the events of detecting 10 balls by the big winning opening switch 71 is established, the big winning opening solenoid 65c is turned off, the opening/closing plate 65b is closed, and the first round ends.

In addition, in the jackpot type "latent probability variation A", the opening/closing pattern of the right probability variable area 73 and the left probability variable area 74 is "X1" as in the jackpot type "time saving A". Therefore, in the first round, when the first count ball is detected by the big winning opening switch 71, both the right probability variable area solenoid 73b and the left probability variable area solenoid 74b are turned on for "60 ms" (see t2 in FIG. 57). t2 = "60ms"), and is configured to be able to recognize whether or not the right probability variable region solenoid 73b and the left probability variable region solenoid 74b can be driven normally.

Then, when the third count ball is detected by the big prize opening switch 71, only the right probability variable area solenoid 73b is turned on for "2000ms" (see t3 in FIG. 57. t3 = "2000ms"). In the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment, the time required for the ball to reach the right probability variable area 73 after the ball is detected by the big prize opening switch 71 is within "2 seconds" (in the sixth embodiment, "1. 5 seconds". See t4 in FIG. 57. t4<"2000ms"). Therefore, the third count ball can flow into the open right probability variable area 73, and is detected by the right probability variable area switch 73d.

At this time, the effective pattern of the probability variable areas 73 and 74 of the jackpot type "latent probability variation A" is "B", and the right probability variable area 73 of the third round and the left probability variable area 74 of the sixth round are effective. Set. Therefore, in the first round, both probability variation areas 73 and 74 are invalid, and the right probability variation valid flag 203g and the left probability variation validity flag 203h are set to OFF. Therefore, in the first round, even if the ball passes through the right probability variable area 73 and is detected by the right probability variable area switch 73d, the right probability variable area 73 is not set to be valid, so the probability change transition flag is 203i remains off without being turned on.

Next, when the big prize opening 65a in the first round of the jackpot type "latent probability variation A" is closed, an interval time of "3 seconds" (Fig. 57 t5 = "3000ms") is provided. When the MPU 201 (see FIG. 7) of the main control device 110 determines that this interval time has elapsed, it starts opening the big prize opening 65a for the second round.

Next, in the second round of the jackpot type "latent probability variation A" of the sixth embodiment, the opening mode of the big winning opening 65a is a special opening, and the first opening is performed among the multiple openings, and the big winning is achieved. When "3 seconds" have passed since the opening of the opening 65a (see t6 in FIG. 57. t6 = "3000ms"), the big winning opening solenoid 65c is turned off, the opening/closing plate 65b is closed, and the first round of the second round is closed. Opening ends.

At the time of the first opening of this second round, when the first count ball is detected by the big prize opening switch 71, similarly to the first round, both the right probability variable area solenoid 73b and the left probability variable area solenoid 74b are activated for 60ms. " is turned on (see t7 in FIG. 57; t5 = "60 ms"), and is configured to be able to recognize whether or not the right probability variable region solenoid 73b and the left probability variable region solenoid 74b can be driven normally.

Then, after the first opening of the second round, a pseudo interval is performed, and if "3 seconds" have elapsed since the closing of the big prize opening 65a (see t8 in FIG. 57. t8 = "3000ms"), a big prize is won. The mouth solenoid 65c is turned on, the opening/closing plate 65b is opened, and the second round pseudo interval ends.

After that, in the second round of the jackpot type "Latent probability variation A", the second opening among the multiple openings is performed, and "3 seconds" have elapsed since the opening of the jackpot 65a (see t9 in FIG. 57. t9 = "3000ms"), the big prize opening solenoid 65c is turned off, the opening/closing plate 65b is closed, the second opening of the second round is completed, and the second round is completed.

When the third count ball is detected by the big prize opening switch 71 during the first opening or the second opening of the second round, only the left probability variable area solenoid 74b is turned on for "2000ms" (see FIG. 57). (See t10. t10 = "2000ms"). In the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment, the time required for the ball to reach the left probability variable area 74 after the ball is detected by the big prize opening switch 71 is within "2 seconds" (in the sixth embodiment, "1. 6 seconds". See t11 in FIG. 57. t11<"2000ms"). Therefore, the third count ball can flow into the open left probability variable area 74, and is detected by the left probability variable area switch 74d.

At this time, the valid pattern of the probability variable areas 73, 74 of the jackpot type "latent probability variation A" is "B", and both probability variable areas 73, 74 are invalid in the second round, and the right probability variable valid flag 203g and The left probability variation valid flag 203h is set to OFF. Therefore, even if the ball passes through the left probability variable area 74 and is detected by the left probability variable area switch 74d during the second opening of the second round, the left probability variable area 74 is not set to be valid. Therefore, the probability change transition flag 203i remains off without being turned on.

In addition, in the even-numbered rounds (namely, the 4th round and the 6th round) of the jackpot type "latency probability variation A", the driving manner of the right probability variable area solenoid 73b and the left probability variable area solenoid 74b is the same as in the second round. In addition, when a total of 10 balls are detected by the big winning hole switch 71 during the first opening and second opening of the big winning hole 65a in the second round, the second round will start. is configured to end.

Next, when the big prize opening 65a in the second round of the jackpot type "Latent probability variation A" is closed, the " An interval time of "3 seconds" (see t12 in FIG. 57; t12 = "3000 ms") is provided. When it is determined that the interval time has elapsed, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 7) starts opening the big prize opening 65a for the third round.

Next, in the third round of the jackpot type "latent probability variation A" of the sixth embodiment, the opening mode of the big prize opening 65a is a special opening, as in the second round, and the first opening among the plural openings. is carried out, and when "3 seconds" have passed since the opening of the big winning opening 65a (see t13 in FIG. 57. t13 = "3000ms"), the big winning opening solenoid 65c is turned off and the opening/closing plate 65b is closed, The first opening of the third round ends.

When the first count ball is detected by the big prize opening switch 71 during the first opening of the third round, as in the first and second rounds, the right probability variable area solenoid 73b and the left probability variable area solenoid 74b are both turned on for "60 ms" (see t14 in FIG. 57. t14 = "60 ms"), so that it can be recognized whether or not the right probability variable region solenoid 73b and the left probability variable region solenoid 74b can be driven normally. .

Then, after the first opening of the third round, a pseudo interval is performed, and if "3 seconds" have elapsed since the closure of the grand prize opening 65a (see t15 in FIG. 57. t15 = "3000ms"), a grand prize is won. The mouth solenoid 65c is turned on, the opening/closing plate 65b is opened, and the third round pseudo interval ends.

After that, in the third round of the jackpot type "Latent probability variation A", the second opening among the multiple openings is performed, and "3 seconds" have elapsed since the opening of the jackpot 65a (see t16 in FIG. 57. t16 = "3000ms"), the big prize opening solenoid 65c is turned off, the opening/closing plate 65b is closed, the second opening of the third round is completed, and the third round is completed.

When the third count ball is detected by the big prize opening switch 71 during the first opening or the second opening of the third round, only the right probability variable area solenoid 73b is turned on for "2000ms" (see FIG. 57). (See t17. t17 = "2000ms"). In the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment, the time required for the ball to reach the right probability variable area 73 after the ball is detected by the big prize opening switch 71 is within "2 seconds" (in the sixth embodiment, "1. 5 seconds". See t18 in FIG. 57. t18<"2000ms"). Therefore, the third count ball can flow into the open right probability variable area 73, and is detected by the right probability variable area switch 73d.

At this time, the valid pattern of the probability variable areas 73 and 74 of the jackpot type "latent probability variation A" is "B", and in the third round, only the right probability variable area 73 is valid, and the right probability variable valid flag 203g is turned on. At the same time, the left probability variation valid flag 203h is set to OFF. Therefore, in the third round, when a ball passes through the right probability variable area 73 and is detected by the right probability variable area switch 73d, the right probability variable area 73 is set to be valid, so the probability change transition flag 203i is turned on. is set to

Therefore, in the jackpot type "latent probability variation A", since the probability variable areas 73 and 74 corresponding to the probability variable area switches 73d and 74d where the ball was detected in the third round (sixth round) are set to be valid, the probability variable transition is made. Flag 203i is set on. Then, at the end of the jackpot, a "probability variation state" is set with reference to this probability variation transition flag 203i.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment, in a predetermined round (in the sixth embodiment, the second round and the third round), a plurality of big prize openings 65a are opened in one round. In addition to executing a special opening that opens twice (first opening and second opening), the closing time of the pseudo interval performed between the first opening and second opening in the round is Execute at the same time as the open time. Moreover, the interval time between rounds is also configured to be the same as the opening time and closing time. Then, in the round in which the above-mentioned special opening is executed, the probability variable areas 73 and 74 are set to be valid, and when the ball passes through the probability variable areas 73 and 74 that are set to be valid, the "probability variable state" is entered after the jackpot ends. Configure it to give.

With this configuration, even if the player is aware of the number of rounds in the probability variable areas 73 and 74 that are effectively set, the player will not be able to grasp the number of rounds currently being executed. It is possible to configure the system so that it is difficult to clearly recognize whether or not a "probability fluctuating state" occurs. Therefore, even when the "latent probability variation performance mode" is executed, it is possible to create a gameplay that allows the player to guess in which gaming state he/she is playing the game, thereby improving the interest of the game. be able to.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth embodiment has the same configuration as the first to fifth embodiments, and has the same effects.

<Seventh embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 58, a pachinko machine 10 in a seventh embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, a right probability variable region 73 and a left probability variable region 74 are provided as probability variable regions through which the ball flowing from the variable winning device 65 can pass, and the right probability variable region 73 is arranged on the upstream side. A left probability variable area 74 is arranged on the downstream side in the left direction of the game board 13 when viewed from the front.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment, a near side probability variable area 73e is provided on the front side of the game board 13 in front view as a variable probability area through which the ball flowing from the variable winning device 65 can pass, and a It is configured such that a back-side probability variable region 74e is provided on the side and on the back side when viewed from the front. Then, the two probability variable areas (the front probability variable area 73e and the back probability variable area 74e) are placed on the opening/closing plates 73f and 74f provided for each probability variable area 73e and 74e for each round of the jackpot, depending on the type of jackpot. Drive control is performed to open either one of them, and control is performed to switch (internally) the valid or invalid setting of each probability variable area 73e, 74e in a state that is unrecognizable to the player. Then, during a jackpot, if the ball passes through the effectively set probability variable regions 73e, 74e, a "probability variable state" is generated after the jackpot ends. On the other hand, even if the ball passes through probability variable regions 73e and 74e that are set to be invalid, the "probability variable state" is not generated after the jackpot is completed.

With this configuration, the variable probability regions 73e and 74e overlap in the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 10, so that a player viewing from the front side of the pachinko machine 10 can see which of the variable probability regions 73e and 74e the player has flowed into. It is possible to make it difficult to recognize whether the In particular, by configuring variable probability region opening/closing plates 73f and 74f from transparent members, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize which variable probability regions 73e and 74e are open or not. Therefore, even when the "latent probability variation performance mode" is executed, it is difficult for the player to recognize whether the "probability variation state", "time reduction state", or "normal gaming state" is being executed. Therefore, it is possible to create a gameplay that allows the player to guess in which gaming state the player is playing the game, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment will be described below, focusing on the points that are different from the pachinko machines 10 according to the first to sixth embodiments. In the following description, the same elements as those in the first to sixth embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

With reference to FIG. 58, the variable prize winning device 65 of the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 58 is a diagram showing the configuration of the variable winning device 65 of the seventh embodiment, and FIG. (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view (cross-sectional top view) of the variable prize winning device 65 taken along line AA in FIG. 58(a).

As shown in FIGS. 58(a) and 58(b), the variable winning device 65 of the seventh embodiment has a horizontally long rectangular opening/closing plate 65b that covers the big winning opening 65a, and the lower side of the opening/closing plate 65b is an axis. On the front side, there is a big winning hole solenoid 65c (see FIG. 7) for opening and closing the opening/closing plate 65b, a big winning hole switch 71 for detecting the ball that has won in the big winning hole 65a, and a big winning hole switch 71 for detecting the winning ball in the big winning hole 65a. A guide path 72 through which the ball detected in the guide path 72 flows down, a near side probability variable area 73e provided on the downstream side of the guide path 72 and toward the rear side of the game board 13 when viewed from the front, and the near side probability variable area 73e. A back probability variable area 74e provided on the downstream side of 73e and toward the back side of the game board 13 when viewed from the front, and a rearmost variable area 74e provided downstream of the back side probability variable area 74e and toward the back side of the game board 13 when viewed from the front. A discharge passage 75a is provided.

The guide passage 72 of the seventh embodiment is a passage formed in a crank shape when viewed from above in a cross section of the game board 13, through which the ball flowing into the big prize opening 65a flows down. This guide passage 72 is provided with a near side probability variable area 73e and a back side probability variable area 74e at predetermined positions on the downstream side of the guide passage 72 and the passage extending in the depth direction of the game board 13 when viewed from the front. An innermost discharge passage 75a is provided downstream of the front probability variable area 73e and the rear probability variable area 74e and toward the rear side of the game board 13 when viewed from the front. Therefore, the ball that flows into the big prize opening 65a and flows down the guide passage 72 passes through the near side probability variable area 73e, the back side probability variable area 74e, or the innermost discharge passage 75a. .

In the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment, after the ball that has flown into the big winning opening 65a is detected by the big winning opening switch 71, it passes through the guide path 72 and reaches the upper part of the near side probability variable area 73e until it reaches the upper part of the near side probability variable area 73e. 5 seconds, and after the ball that has entered the big winning opening 65a is detected by the big winning opening switch 71, it takes approximately It is configured to take "1.6 seconds". Therefore, the ball detected by the big prize opening switch 71 is configured to be able to flow into the near side probability variable area 73e or the back side probability variable area 74e within "2 seconds".

The front side probability variable region 73e is arranged so that its upper surface is flush with the bottom surface of the guide passage 72 (rolling surface of the ball) in the closed state (projected state), and is changed from the closed state to the open state (recessed state). A front variable area opening/closing plate 73f configured to be able to be displaced, a front variable area solenoid 73g (not shown) capable of opening and closing the front variable area opening/closing plate 73f, and a vertically lower side of the front variable area opening/closing plate 73f. a front probability variable region passage 73h provided in the front probability variable region passage 73h, through which a ball can flow down; a front probability variable region switch 73i, which is embedded in the passage of the front probability variable region passage 73h, and is capable of detecting a ball passing through the front probability variable region passage 73h; It is made up of.

Here, each of the members 73f to 73i constituting the near side probability variable region 73e is all formed of a transparent material or a semitransparent material (eg, polycarbonate resin, acrylic resin, etc.). As a result, the player can watch the ball passing through the near side variable probability area 73e and the ball passing through the back side variable probability area 74e (and the innermost discharge passage 75a) arranged in the front view depth direction of the game board 13. Each of them can be visually recognized from the front side of the game board 13.

The inner fixed variable region 74e is a inner fixed variable region whose upper surface is arranged flush with the bottom surface of the guide passage 72 in the closed state (projected state), and is configured to be movable from the closed state to the open state (recessed state). An opening/closing plate 74f, an opening/closing area solenoid 74g (not shown) capable of driving the opening/closing area opening/closing plate 74f, and a back area provided on the vertically lower side of the opening/closing plate 74f to allow the ball to flow down. It is composed of a variable probability area passage 74h and a variable probability area switch 74i which is embedded in the passageway 74h and is capable of detecting a ball passing through the variable area passage 74h.

Here, each of the members 74f to 74i constituting the back side variable probability region 74e is made of a transparent material or a translucent material (for example, polycarbonate resin, acrylic resin, etc.), similar to each member 73f to 73i constituting the near side variable probability region 73e. ) is formed. As a result, the player can check the ball passing through the back probability variable area 74e and the ball passing through the innermost discharge passage 75a arranged in the front view depth direction of the game board 13 from the front side of the game board 13. It becomes possible to visually recognize it.

In addition, when the front probability variation area opening/closing plate 73f of the near side probability variation area 73e and the back probability variation area opening/closing plate 74f of the back side probability variation area 74e open each probability variation area 73e, 74e, the front side of the game board 13 of the guide passage 72 It is driven by the front probability variable area solenoid 73g and the back probability variable area solenoid 74g so as to be submerged (buried) in the side wall on the left side of the view. Then, the front fixed variable area opening/closing plate 73f and the inner fixed variable area opening/closing plate 74f are retracted to the front side (player side) of the game board 13 in the retracted position of the front fixed variable area opening/closing plate 73f and the inner fixed variable area opening/closing plate 74f. A concealing member (not shown) is arranged to conceal the condition from visibility. Therefore, by making the state where the front probability changing area opening/closing plate 73f and the back probability changing area opening/closing plate 74f recessed into the side wall of the guide passage 72 invisible to the player sitting on the front side of the game board 13, This can make it difficult to grasp the driving states of the area opening/closing plate 73f and the depth variable area opening/closing plate 74f.

The innermost discharge passage 75a carries the ball outside the variable winning device 65 (game board 13) is a passageway for discharging to the rear side.

Here, each member constituting the innermost discharge passage 75a is made of transparent material, similar to each member 73f to 73i constituting the near side probability variable area 73e and each member 74f to 74i constituting the back side variable probability area 74e. Alternatively, it is made of a translucent material (for example, polycarbonate resin, acrylic resin, etc.). This allows the player to visually recognize the balls passing through the innermost discharge passage 75a from the front side of the game board 13.

Further, the front variable area opening/closing plate 73f, the rear variable area opening/closing plate 74f, and the innermost discharge passage 75a are made of transparent or semi-transparent materials. Therefore, by making it difficult for the player to recognize the position (drive mode) of each probability variable area opening/closing plate 73f, 74f, it is possible to determine whether the probability variable area 73e, 74e is opened or closed by each variable probability area opening/closing plate 73f, 74f. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine whether the player is present or not. Note that the front variable area opening/closing plate 73f and the rear variable area opening/closing plate 74f may be made of colored resin.

Here, the inflow pattern of the balls that have flowed into the big winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 of the seventh embodiment will be explained. In the seventh embodiment, when a jackpot is won and a special game state occurs, the opening/closing plate 65b of the variable winning device 65 is opened and balls can flow into the jackpot 65a. Then, when the front probability variable area opening/closing plate 73f is in an open state (immersed state) and the back probability variable area opening/closing plate 74f is in a closed state (protruding state), the ball that has flowed into the big prize opening 65a is First, it is detected by the big prize opening switch 71, and then flows down the guide passage 72. Then, it collides with the front side wall of the guide passage 72, and the flowing direction changes to the depth direction of the game board 13 when viewed from the front. After that, since the front probability variable area opening/closing plate 73f is opened (retracted) by the front probability variable area solenoid 73g (not shown), the ball flows into the front probability variable area passage 73h. Thereafter, the ball is detected by the front probability variable area switch 73i embedded in the front probability variable area passage 73h. The ball detected by the front probability variable area switch 73i is discharged to the outside of the variable winning device 65 (to the back side of the game board 13) through a discharge path (not shown).

In addition, when the front probability variable area opening/closing plate 73f is in a closed state (protruding state) and the back probability varying area opening/closing plate 74f is in an open state (recessed state), the ball that has flowed into the big prize opening 65a, First, it is detected by the big prize opening switch 71, and then flows down the guide passage 72. Then, it collides with the front side wall of the guide passage 72, and the flowing direction changes to the depth direction of the game board 13 when viewed from the front. Thereafter, it rolls on the upper surface of the front variable area opening/closing plate 73f in the closed state (protruding state), and the rear variable area opening/closing plate 74f, which is provided on the downstream side of the front variable area opening/closing plate 73f and on the back side in front view, moves to the rear variable area opening/closing plate 74f. Since it is opened (retracted) by a region solenoid 74g (not shown), the ball flows into the depth variable region passage 74h. Thereafter, the ball is detected by a depth variable area switch 74i embedded in the depth variable area passage 74h. The ball detected by the depth variable area switch 74i is discharged to the outside of the variable winning device 65 (to the back side of the game board 13) through a discharge path (not shown).

Furthermore, when the front probability variable area opening/closing plate 73f and the back probability variation area opening/closing plate 74f are both in the closed state (protruding state), the ball that has flowed into the big winning opening 65a is first detected by the big winning opening switch 71, Thereafter, it flows down the guide passage 72. Then, it collides with the front side wall of the guide passage 72, and the flowing direction changes to the depth direction of the game board 13 when viewed from the front. After that, it rolls on the upper surface of the front variable area opening/closing plate 73f and the upper surface of the rear variable area opening/closing plate 74f in the closed state (protruding state), collides with the back wall of the guide passage 72, and the flowing direction is the game board. 13 changes to the left side when viewed from the front. Then, it is discharged to the outside of the variable winning device 65 (to the back side of the game board 13) from the innermost discharge passage 75a provided on the downstream side.

With this configuration, the front probability variable region 73e and the back probability variable region 74e (and the innermost discharge passage 75a) overlap in the front-back direction (depth direction) of the Pachinko machine 10 when viewed from the front. In general, human vision has difficulty perceiving differences between depth images than differences between plane images. ), compared to the case where the near side variable probability area 73e and the back side variable variable area 74e (and the innermost discharge passage 75a) are arranged in the front-rear direction when viewed from the front, this near side variable variable area from the front side of the pachinko machine 10. It is possible to make it difficult for the player who visually recognizes the variable probability region 73e and the innermost discharge passage 75a to recognize which of the variable probability regions 73e and 74e (or the innermost discharge passage 75a) the player has entered. . In particular, by configuring the front probability variable area opening/closing plate 73f and the back probability variable area opening/closing plate 74f from transparent members, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize which probability variable area 73e, 74e is open or not. Therefore, even if the player recognizes the variable probability regions 73e and 74e that have been set effectively, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to identify the variable probability regions 73e and 74e through which the ball has passed. It is possible to make it difficult to grasp whether or not a "probability fluctuating state" has been added. As a result, even when the "latent probability variation mode" is executed, it becomes difficult for the player to recognize whether it is in the "probability variation state," "time reduction state," or "normal gaming state." In this way, it is possible to create a gameplay that allows the player to guess in which gaming state he/she is playing the game, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Although the present invention has been described above based on the above-mentioned embodiments, the present invention is not limited to the above-mentioned embodiments in any way, and various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. can be easily inferred. For example, the numerical values listed in each of the above embodiments are merely examples, and it is of course possible to employ other numerical values.

Further, it is naturally possible to configure any of the configurations of the modified examples shown below by combining the configurations of the respective embodiments described above. Furthermore, it is naturally possible to configure any of the configurations of the following modified examples by combining each configuration of one or more other modified examples. In these cases, further effects can be achieved by applying each configuration.

<Modification 1: One side continuously open (non-alternating)>
In the above embodiment, in each round at the time of a jackpot, the right probability variable area 73 and the left probability variable area 74 are opened alternately. Alternatively, one of the variable probability regions 73 and 74 may be opened continuously, or only one of the variable probability regions 73 and 74 may be opened. By configuring in this way, variations in the opening and closing patterns of the variable probability areas 73 and 74 are made abundant according to the type of jackpot, making it difficult (or impossible) for the player to recognize which type of jackpot he has won. , it is possible to improve the interest of the game by creating a gameplay that allows the player to guess in which game state he/she is playing the game.

<Modification 2: Effective number of rounds is 3 or more, or only 1>
In the above embodiment, the probability variable areas 73 and 74 are configured to be set effectively in any two rounds in one jackpot type. Instead of this, a jackpot type in which the number of rounds in which the variable probability areas 73 and 74 are enabled is 3 or more, a jackpot type in which the number of rounds in which the variable probability areas 73 and 74 are enabled is only 1, or a jackpot type in which the number of rounds in which the variable probability areas 73 and 74 are enabled is only 1, or a jackpot type in which the number of rounds in which the variable probability areas 73 and 74 are enabled is only 1, or It may be configured to provide jackpot types that are not set as valid. By configuring in this way, it is possible to increase the variation of effective patterns in the variable probability areas 73 and 74 according to the type of jackpot, and to make it possible for the player to recognize which type of jackpot he has won. It is possible to improve the interest of the game by making it difficult or impossible for the player to play the game, thereby creating a gameplay that makes the player guess in which game state he/she is playing the game.

<Variation 3: Turn off the valid flag before the end of the round>
In the embodiment described above, the timing for turning off the probability variation valid flags 203g and 203h is configured to be performed at the end of one round, that is, when the big prize opening 65a is closed. On the other hand, the definite variable valid flags 203g and 203h are set at a timing before the closing of the first round, that is, for example, when the definite variable region solenoids 73b and 74b are turned off (when the definite variable regions 73 and 74 are closed), or when a predetermined number of When counting balls (for example, the 5th count, etc.), or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed (for example, "5 seconds", etc.) after the opening of the big prize opening 65a or the opening of the probability variable areas 73, 74, may be configured. With this configuration, the period during which the probability variable areas 73 and 74 are set effectively is shortened, and, for example, balls that have won in other rounds are retained in the variable winning device 65 and cannot otherwise pass through. Even if an event occurs in which a ball passes through the variable probability regions 73, 74, by shortening the effective period of the variable probability regions 73, 74, the ball that has remained in the variable region 73, 74 can pass through the variable region 73, 74. , 74 are set to be invalid, it is possible to prevent unintended addition of a "probability fluctuation state". Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a gaming value as expected in the gaming specifications, and to prevent unexpected losses from occurring at the gaming parlor.

<Modification 4: One specific area for each double attacker>
In the second embodiment, the plurality of variable winning devices 65 and 76 are configured to share the probability variable areas 73 and 74. Instead of this, one variable probability area 73, 74 may be provided for each variable winning device 65, 76, respectively. With this configuration, the flow paths in each variable winning device 65, 76 can be designed individually, and there is no need to design them in consideration of the merging of the guide path 72 and the communication path 77, etc. The degree of freedom in designing the variable prize winning devices 65 and 76 can be increased.

<Variation 5: All hidden jackpots>
In the above embodiment, when the jackpot type "probability variation A" is won, the "probability variation notification performance mode" is executed to notify that the "probability variation state" is given. On the other hand, it may be configured so as not to notify that the "probability fluctuation state" is given to all jackpot types. By configuring in this way, it is possible to always create a gameplay that makes the player guess in which gaming state the game is being played, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<Variation 6: Sudden, small hit>
In each of the above embodiments, in the lottery of each special symbol, one of the following jackpots is ``15R probability variable jackpot'', ``15R latent probability variable jackpot'', ``7R latent probability variable jackpot'', ``15R time saving jackpot'', and ``7R time saving jackpot''. It was configured to be granted. On the other hand, it may be configured to perform a lottery for a jackpot different from the above-mentioned jackpot (for example, a so-called "sudden probability variable jackpot (2R probability variable jackpot)") or a "small win" different from the jackpot. With this configuration, when a player wins a jackpot, the game value given to the player is different, thereby creating variations in the game and realizing diverse gameplay, thereby increasing the interest of the game. be able to.

In particular, when a "small win" is provided in a special symbol lottery, when a small win is won, the opening/closing manner of the big prize opening 65a etc. similar to or similar to the jackpot to which a "latent probability fluctuation state" is given (i.e., If it is a "7R latent probability strange jackpot", it will be a "7R small win" in which the opening/closing operation of the big prize opening 65a is performed 7 times in the same way as the "7R latent probability strange jackpot", etc.), so that the player can play the "normal game". It is difficult to distinguish between "state" and "state of varying latent probability." By configuring in this way, it is possible to create a gameplay that allows players to guess which game state the game is in, and to improve the interest of the game.

It should be noted that the "small win" is a lottery result in which the opening and closing of the big prize opening 65a etc. is executed, but unlike the "15R probability variable jackpot" and the "7R potential probability variable jackpot", the transition of the gaming state is not executed.

<Variation 7: Definite change suggestion performance>
In the embodiment described above, the player is informed that the "probability variation state" is provided only in the "probability variation notification effect mode". Alternatively, a special effect may be used to suggest to the player that the "probability fluctuating state" is or will be provided. As a special effect, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may display a special character that is more likely to be selected in a situation where a "probability fluctuation state" is given, and is difficult to be selected in a situation where a "probability fluctuation state" is not given. It is likely to be output when it appears at a predetermined timing (for example, during a jackpot, at the end of a jackpot, or during a variable performance) or when passing through probability variable areas 73 and 74 that are set to be valid, and is set to be disabled. When passing through variable probability areas 73 and 74, effects such as special sound effects that are difficult to output are performed. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to create a gameplay that allows the player to guess in which gaming state the game is being played, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<Modification 8: Valid setting multiple times>
In the embodiment described above, the opening pattern in which a ball can flow into either of the variable probability regions 73, 74 is executed once in one round of a jackpot. Alternatively, an opening pattern that allows a ball to flow into either of the variable probability regions 73, 74 may be executed two or more times within one round. With this configuration, it is possible to increase the chances of a ball flowing into the probability variable areas 73 and 74 that have been effectively set, and to make it easier to grant the right to the "probability variable state" to the player.

<Modification 9: Switching the effective setting according to the number of counts in one round>
In the above embodiment, one of the probability variable regions 73 and 74 is set effectively in one round. Alternatively, the configuration may be such that the valid settings of the variable probability regions 73 and 74 are switched within one round. Specifically, for example, when opening the big prize opening 65a in the second round, the right probability variable area 73 is set to be valid, and after that, after the 5th count in the second round, the right probability variable area 73 is set to be invalid. The configuration is such that the left probability variable area 74 is set effectively. By configuring in this way, the variations in the effective patterns in the variable probability areas 73 and 74 are made abundant, making it difficult for the player to recognize which type of jackpot he has won, and allowing him to play the game in any gaming state. It is possible to improve the interest of the game by creating a gameplay that makes the player guess whether the game is true or not.

<Modification 10: Opening/closing member only on the upstream side of the variable probability region of 2>
In the first embodiment, the opening/closing plates 73a, 74a are provided in the right side probability variable region 73 and the left probability variable region 74, respectively, and by controlling the opening/closing of the opening/closing plates 73a, 74a, flow into the probability variable regions 73, 74 is achieved. He was distributing the ball. Instead, a right variable area opening/closing plate 73a is provided only in the upstream variable area, that is, the right variable area 73, and when the right variable area opening/closing plate 73a is open, the ball is directed to the right variable area 73. The structure is such that the ball flows into the left probability variable area 74 when the right probability variable area opening/closing plate 73a is closed. With this configuration, there is no need to provide a drive mechanism in the left probability variable region 74, so the number of parts can be reduced and manufacturing costs can be reduced. In addition, since the winning ball of the variable winning device 65 always passes through the left probability variable region 74, and there is no need to provide the discharge passage 75 downstream of the left probability variable region 74, the degree of freedom in designing the variable winning device 65 is improved. can do.

<Modification 11: Non-electric sorting device>
In the embodiment described above, the variable rate areas 73 and 74 are opened or closed by an electric member (the variable rate solenoids 73b and 74b or the motor 78a for opening and closing the variable rate area) disposed near the variable rate areas 73 and 74, and the ball is rotated. It was configured to change the probability variable regions 73 and 74 into which the current flows. Instead of this, a non-motorized sorting device (for example, a sorting device that alternately sorts the balls that enter the sorting ball entrance into the left path or the right path in the alternate distribution unit 64), It may be configured to distribute balls to areas 73 and 74. With this configuration, the number of parts in the variable prize winning device 65 can be reduced, and control regarding each drive mechanism is no longer necessary, so the control burden on the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 can be reduced.

<Modification 12: The time for rolling on the top surface of the opening/closing plate is different>
In the above embodiment, when the right variable probability region 73 and the left variable probability region 74 are respectively closed, a special difference is provided between the variable probability region opening/closing plates 73a and 74a that close the variable probability regions 73 and 74. The structure is such that there is no difference in the time it takes for the ball to pass over the upper surfaces of the probability variable regions 73 and 74. On the other hand, by making the configuration of one variable probability region opening/closing plate 73a, 74a different from the configuration of the other variable probability region opening/closing plate 73a, 74a, a difference in the time taken for the ball to pass over the upper surface of the variable probability region 73, 74 can be made. It may be configured so that it occurs. Specifically, for example, the length of the right probability variable area opening/closing plate 73a is made longer than the length of the left probability variable area opening/closing plate 74a, and the time for the ball to roll on the upper surface of the right probability variable area opening/closing plate 73a is changed to the left probability variable area opening/closing plate 73a. The upper surface of the area opening/closing plate 74a is configured to take longer than the rolling time of the ball. With this configuration, by providing variations in the opening/closing timing of the variable variable area opening/closing plates 73a, 74a, it is possible to increase the variation of the variable variable areas 73, 74 into which the balls flowing down the guide passage 72 flow. .

<Modification 13: Loop type>
In each of the above embodiments, a so-called ST type game specification is adopted in which a predetermined number of "probability fluctuation states" are given after the jackpot ends, regardless of which jackpot is won. On the other hand, a so-called loop type game specification may be adopted in which the "probability fluctuation state" is maintained after the jackpot ends until the next jackpot occurs. By applying the configuration of the present invention to a so-called loop-type pachinko machine in which the next jackpot is guaranteed, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game based on whether the ball passes through the effectively set probability variable areas 73 and 74. can be achieved.

<Modification 14: Variable area of probability of 3 or more>
In the above embodiment, two variable probability areas 73 and 74 are provided in the guide passage 72, and the ball that enters the big winning hole 65a during a jackpot is configured to flow into one of the variable probability areas 73 and 74. Ta. Instead of this, three or more variable probability areas may be provided in the guide passage 72, and the ball that enters the big prize opening 65a may be configured to flow into any one variable probability area. By configuring it in this way, the variations in the inflow patterns in the variable probability areas 73 and 74 are made abundant, making it difficult (or impossible) for the player to recognize which jackpot type has won, and which game state It is possible to improve the interest of the game by creating a gameplay that makes the player guess whether he or she is playing the game.

<Modification 15: Opening/closing according to drive amount>
In the fourth embodiment, the probability variable region opening/closing motor 78a is disposed between the right probability variable region 73 and the left probability variable region 74, and the probability variable region opening/closing motor 78a is driven forward or reversely to drive the probability variable region. The opening/closing plate 78c is configured to be able to be slid upstream or downstream of the guide passage 72 in accordance with the above driving. Instead of this, the variable probability area opening/closing motor 78a is disposed on the upstream side of the right variable area area 73, and the variable probability area opening/closing motor 78a is configured to be capable of only one direction (clockwise rotation), and A plurality of patterns may be provided for the drive amount of the motor 78a. When the variable variable region opening/closing motor 78a is driven by a first drive amount (for example, 60 pulses), only the left variable variable region 74 is opened, and a second drive amount (for example, 120 pulses) that is greater than the first drive amount is driven. When driven, both the right side probability variable region 73 and the left probability variable region 74 are opened. With this configuration, the balls flowing into the probability variable regions 73 and 74 can be sorted according to the drive amount of the one drive mechanism 78, and the above sorting can be done even with a motor that can only drive in one direction, which is inexpensive. The gaming nature of the present invention can be realized at low cost.

<Modification 16: Movement of opening/closing plate hanging>
In the fourth embodiment, the probability variable region opening/closing motor 78a is disposed between the right probability variable region 73 and the left probability variable region 74, and the probability variable region opening/closing motor 78a is driven forward or reversely to drive the probability variable region. The opening/closing plate 78c is configured to be able to be slid upstream or downstream of the guide passage 72 in accordance with the above driving. Instead of this, a drive solenoid (or drive motor) and an opening/closing plate connected to the driving solenoid are provided, and when the driving solenoid is off, the opening/closing plate opens the right variable area 73 and the left side. While the probability variable region 74 is closed, the opening/closing plate may close the right probability variable region 73 and open the left probability variable region 74 when the drive solenoid is turned on. With this configuration, the balls flowing into the variable probability areas 73 and 74 can be sorted by driving the one drive mechanism 78, and the gaming nature of the present invention can be realized at low cost.

<Variation 17: Multiple pseudo intervals in one round>
In the sixth embodiment, the pseudo interval time is provided once during one round. Alternatively, the pseudo interval time may be provided multiple times during one round. In other words, when a plurality of pseudo interval times are provided during one round, the number of times the variable prize winning device 65 is opened in the round may be set to three or more times. With this configuration, it is possible to make it more difficult for the player to grasp the number of rounds currently being executed.

<Modification 18: Variable winning device that wins by hitting left-handed and second variable winning device that wins winning by hitting right-handed>
In the second embodiment, the two variable prize winning devices 65 and 76 are respectively arranged on the right side of the gaming area. Instead of this, one variable winning device is arranged in the center of the gaming area, and the other variable winning device is arranged on the right side of the gaming area, and the variable winning device that can win by left-handed or right-handed hitting is different. It may be configured as follows.

<Modification 19: A jackpot that is opened only on one side with the variable prize winning device of 2>
In the second embodiment, the two variable winning devices 65 and 76 are configured to be opened alternately in accordance with each jackpot type at the time of a jackpot. On the other hand, even if two variable winning devices 65, 76 are arranged, a jackpot type may be provided in which only one of the variable winning devices 65, 76 is opened.

<Modification 20: Identity of pseudo interval time>
In the sixth embodiment, the interval time between jackpot rounds and the closing time of the pseudo interval that is pseudo closed during the round are configured to be the same time. On the other hand, the interval time between rounds of jackpots and the closing time of the pseudo-interval that pseudo-closes during the round can be determined by any time (form) that makes it difficult for the player to identify each time. (aspect). Specifically, if the interval time between jackpot rounds is 2 seconds, the pseudo interval time may be set between 1 second and 3 seconds, or the interval time between jackpot rounds may be set to multiple times ( For example, the pseudo interval time is executed at a time equivalent to the plurality of times (for example, 1 second or 2 seconds). With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the number of rounds being executed, and even if a round in which the probability variation areas 73 and 74 are set to be valid is recognized, the probability variation The configuration can be such that it is difficult to grasp whether a status is assigned or not.

<Modification 21: One side continuously valid (non-alternating)>
In the embodiment described above, the right probability variable area 73 and the left probability variable area 74 are alternately set to be effective in each round at the time of a jackpot. Alternatively, one of the variable probability regions 73 and 74 may be set to be valid continuously, or only one of the variable probability regions 73 and 74 may be set to be valid. By configuring in this way, variations in the effective patterns of the variable probability areas 73 and 74 are made abundant according to the type of jackpot, making it difficult (or impossible) for the player to recognize which type of jackpot he has won. , it is possible to improve the interest of the game by creating a gameplay that allows the player to guess in which game state he/she is playing the game.

<Modification 22: Validity/invalidation of 1 specific area in 1 big prize opening>
In the first embodiment, one variable winning device 65 is provided with two variable probability areas 73 and 74, and for each jackpot round, one of the variable probability areas 73 and 74 is set to be valid, and the other is set to be invalid. It was set. On the other hand, in the case where one variable winning device 65 is provided with one variable probability area, the variable probability area is set to be valid or valid for each jackpot round, and the ball passes through the variable probability area which is set effectively. It may also be configured to generate a probability fluctuation state.

<Variation 23: Valid setting round is fixed>
In the first embodiment, one variable winning device 65 is provided with two variable probability areas 73 and 74, and one of the variable probability areas 73 and 74 is set to be valid for each round based on the type of jackpot, and the other is set as valid. was set to disabled. On the other hand, by configuring a fixed round in which the variable probability regions 73 and 74 are effective in all jackpots, and by changing only the opening/closing patterns of the variable probability region opening/closing plates 73a and 74a, a probability variable state can be imparted. may be configured.

<Modification 24: Multiple opening/closing patterns of special map 2>
In the first embodiment, in the jackpot type of the second special symbol, there is one type of opening/closing pattern of the probability variable areas 73 and 74 (i.e., " It consisted only of the opening/closing pattern ``Y2'' of ``time saving C'' and ``latency probability variation C''. On the other hand, in the second special symbol, similar to the first special symbol, the jackpot type (for example, "Time-saving D " and "Latent probability fluctuation D") may be provided to make it difficult for the player to determine whether or not the ball has passed through the probability variable regions 73 and 74 that are effectively set.

<Modification 25: Pattern with all probability variable regions closed>
In the first embodiment, one of the variable probability areas 73 and 74 is always opened in the event of a jackpot. On the other hand, an opening/closing pattern (closed pattern) in which both the variable probability regions 73 and 74 are closed may be provided.

<Modification 26: Double attacker without communication path>
In the second embodiment, two variable prize winning devices 65 and 76 are provided, and the inside thereof is communicated with each other through a communication passage 77. In contrast, the opening/closing plate of another variable winning device is provided directly above (directly below) the opening/closing plate of the first variable winning device, and the second variable winning device is provided such that the balls flowing from each opening/closing plate immediately merge. It may be configured as follows. With this configuration, the configuration of a communication passage becomes unnecessary, and it is possible to reduce the installation space and manufacturing cost when two variable prize winning devices are provided.

<Modification 27: Electric chew type attacker>
In the first embodiment, the opening/closing plate 65b is normally closed, so that the ball does not enter the jackpot 65a provided inside the opening/closing plate 65b, and the opening/closing plate 65b opens based on a jackpot, thereby preventing the ball from entering the jackpot 65a. Probability variable areas 73 and 74 are provided in the variable winning device 65 in which a ball enters a big winning opening 65a provided in It was configured to be granted. In contrast, a so-called electric chew type variable winning device is provided, in which the ball is easier to win when the ball is rotating, and it is more difficult to win the ball when the ball is not rotating than when the ball is rotating, and variable probability areas 73 and 74 are provided inside the variable winning device. You may. In addition, in normal times, by closing or setting the probability variable areas 73 and 74 to be invalid, the ball does not pass through the probability variable areas 73 and 74 that are set to be valid. Even if it is possible to do so, it is possible to avoid adding the probability fluctuation state.

<Modification 28: Variable winning device 65 and variable probability area are separate>
In the first embodiment, the variable winning device 65 is configured to have variable probability regions 73 and 74. On the other hand, the variable probability areas 73 and 74 may be arranged in a mechanism on the back side of the game board 13 that is separate from the variable winning device 65 (for example, a collection path board for collecting winning balls). With this configuration, the degree of freedom in designing the variable prize winning device 65 and the variable probability regions 73 and 74 can be improved.

<Modification 29: One variable region version of the seventh embodiment>
In the seventh embodiment, the variable winning device 65 is provided with a variable probability region 73e on the front side and a variable probability region 74e on the back side, configured so that a ball can pass through each, and one of the variable probability regions 73e and 74e are set to be valid, while the other probability variable areas 74e and 73e are set to be invalid, and when a ball passes through the probability variable areas 73e and 74e that are set to be valid, a probability variable state is given. was. On the other hand, it may be configured such that only the near side probability variable area 73e is disposed within the variable winning device 65, and the innermost discharge passage 75a is disposed on the rear side when viewed from the front. With this configuration, even if there is only one opening/closing plate 73f, the near side variable probability region 73e and the innermost discharge passage 75a overlap when viewed from the front of the game board 13, so that the near side variable probability region 73e By being opened, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize whether the ball has passed through the front probability variable area 73e or the innermost discharge passage 75a.

<Modification 30: Version without the innermost discharge passage of the seventh embodiment>
In the seventh embodiment, the variable winning device 65 is provided with a front probability variable region 73e, a back probability variable region 74e, and the innermost discharge passage 75a, so that the ball flowing into the variable winning device 65 is directed to any region or passage. It was configured to flow in. On the other hand, the innermost discharge passage 75a may be omitted and the ball may be configured to flow into either the near side probability variable area 73e or the back side probability variable area 74e. In this case, as an opening/closing plate that closes each probability variable area 73e, 74e, when one probability variable area 73e, 74e is closed, it is desirable that the opening/closing plate is an opening/closing plate that opens the other probability variable area 74e, 73e. With this configuration, the ball that has flowed into the variable winning device 65 can be made to flow into either of the variable probability areas 73e, 74e, and must always pass through either of the variable probability areas 73e, 74e from the inside of the big winning opening 65a. It can be configured to be drained.

<Modification 31: Opening and closing the discharge passage>
In the embodiment described above, the opening/closing plates 73a, 74a are provided in the variable probability areas 73, 74, respectively, and by opening and closing the opening/closing plates 73a, 74a, it is controlled whether or not the ball flows into the variable probability areas 73e, 74e. . On the other hand, the discharge passage 75 may be provided upstream (on the near side) of the variable probability regions 73 and 74, and an opening/closing plate may be disposed in the discharge passage 75. In this case, when the opening/closing plate is open, the ball flows down the discharge passage 75, while when the opening/closing plate is closed, the ball does not flow down the discharge passage 75, and the probability variable regions 73, 74 on the downstream side thereof will flow down.

In the above embodiment, each command is sent from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp controller 113, and the audio lamp controller 113 instructs the display controller 114 to display. Commands may also be sent directly from the control device 110 to the display control device 114. Alternatively, the display control device 114 may be connected to the audio lamp control device 113 so that the display control device 114 sends commands to the audio lamp control device 113 to instruct output of each audio and lighting of the lamp. Furthermore, the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 may be configured as one control device. By incorporating these into one control device, the number of parts can be reduced and an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine can be suppressed.

In the above embodiment, the fluctuation that becomes a jackpot during the fluctuation performance of the third symbol (special symbol) that is suspended and executed triggered by the ball entering the special symbol 1 winning hole 64b or the special symbol 2 winning hole 64c (starting winning) The case where a "pending change notice" is performed in the executed symbol and the pending symbol to determine whether or not there is a production has been explained. On the other hand, whether or not there is a variable display of normal symbols that is suspended and executed when the ball passes through the normal symbol gate 67 (starting winning) is a hit (stops at the "○" symbol). In addition to or instead of whether there is a variable performance that will be a jackpot during the variable performance of the third symbol, the player may be informed using the normal symbol holding lamp 84, the third symbol display device 81, etc. You may notify. Thereby, the player can grasp whether there is a variable display that is a win among the variable displays of normal symbols that are on hold, or among the variable displays of normal symbols that are being executed and on hold. Therefore, it is possible to estimate whether or not the normal symbol will be a hit before executing the variable display of the normal symbol. Some gaming machines enhance the gameplay depending on whether or not the symbols hit, and this is particularly effective for such gaming machines.

In the above embodiment, a case has been described in which the demonstration effect is to stop and display the third symbol consisting of the main symbol to which numbers "0" to "9" are not attached, but it is not necessarily limited to this. , a third symbol consisting of a main symbol with numbers or a main symbol without numbers may be stopped and displayed in a translucent state. Alternatively, only the back image may be changed without displaying the third symbol. Furthermore, a character or a back image that is completely different from the third symbol or back image used in the variable effect may be displayed.

In the above embodiment, a case has been described in which the third symbol display device 81 in which the variable effect is performed executes a "suspended change notice" which is one form of continuous notice effect, but this is not necessarily limited to this. The machine 10 is provided with a fourth symbol display device different from the third symbol display device 81, and the fourth symbol is displayed on the fourth symbol display device in conjunction with the variable performance executed by the third symbol display device 81. , executes a continuous notice performance (hereinafter referred to as "continuous notice performance" including "pending change notice") that is different from "pending change notice" or "pending change notice" and is executed across multiple variable performances. You may. In this case, the fourth symbol display device may be controlled by the display control device 114 or the audio lamp control device 113. Furthermore, by providing the pachinko machine 10 with an accessory different from each movable accessory that operates according to various performances, and operating the accessory in a predetermined manner together with the variable production, a continuous preview performance can be executed. Good too. Furthermore, under the control of the audio lamp control device 113, the continuous notice performance may be executed by outputting the sound for the continuous notice performance from the sound output device 226 of the pachinko machine 10. A continuous preview performance may be executed by lighting or blinking 29 to 33 together with the variable performance.

As a result, each time a variable performance (dynamic display) is performed on the third symbol display device 81 (and special symbol display device 37), symbols are continuously displayed on the fourth symbol display device, or accessories are displayed in a predetermined manner. By operating in this manner, by outputting a sound from the sound output device 226, or by lighting or flashing the illumination parts 29 to 33, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation of a jackpot. In addition, the player usually continues playing the game by watching the third symbol display device 81 where the variable performance is performed, but the symbols are displayed by a fourth symbol display device different from the third symbol display device 81. , a continuous notice effect is performed by the operation of the accessory, the sound output from the sound output device 226, or the lighting/blinking of the illumination parts 29 to 33, so that the player is shown a different effect than usual. This can be easily recognized. In addition, continuous notice performances can be easily performed continuously by simple controls such as displaying symbols on the fourth symbol display device, operating accessories, outputting audio from the audio output device 226, or lighting/blinking the illumination sections 29 to 33. A preview performance can be performed.

Furthermore, if the continuous preview performance is performed by audio output from the audio output device 226 or lighting or flashing of the illumination parts 29 to 33, the control of the continuous preview performance is performed by the audio lamp control device 113, so that when starting a winning prize, By having the main control device 110 perform the correctness judgment and the lottery process at the start of the fluctuation, the audio lamp control device 113 to perform the continuous notice performance, and the display control device 114 to perform the fluctuation performance, the pachinko machine 10 continuously performs the lottery process. When performing a preview effect, each control device can be assigned to each process. Therefore, since it is possible to prevent the load from being concentrated on one control device, the performance required of the MPU of each control device can be kept low.

In addition, the display of symbols for continuous preview performance on the third symbol display device 81, the display of the symbols for continuous preview performance on the fourth symbol display device, the operation of the accessory in a predetermined manner, and the sound from the audio output device 226. A continuous preview performance may be executed by combining at least two or more of the output and the lighting or blinking of the illumination parts 29 to 33 and controlling each in conjunction with each other. Thereby, it is possible to execute more diverse continuous preview effects. In addition, the execution method of the continuous notice performance (display by the third symbol display device 81, display by the fourth symbol display device, operation of accessories, audio output from the audio output device 226, lighting or blinking of the illumination parts 29 to 33) , or a combination thereof), the game state after the end of the continuous preview performance ("15R guaranteed strange jackpot", "15R latent probability strange jackpot", "15R time saving jackpot", "7R latent probability strange jackpot", "7R time saving jackpot") A plurality of continuous preview performance modes may be prepared, which are selected depending on whether the game is a jackpot or a loss.

In the above embodiment, the main control device 110 controls the number of reserved balls added by "1" by voice lamp control when there is a winning (starting winning) in the special drawing 1 winning hole 64b or the special drawing 2 winning hole 64c. A case has been described in which each counter C1 to C3, CS1 acquired from the counter buffer 203c due to the starting prize is included as is in the pending ball count command notified to the device 113, and is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. However, the types of counters included in the held pitch count command may be part of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1, or may include values of other counters. In addition, when the main control device 110 notifies the audio lamp control device 113 of the values of each counter acquired in connection with the start winning, the information indicating the values of each of these counters is included in the held ball count command and notified. Instead, information indicating the values of each counter may be included in a command other than the held pitch count command, and these values may be notified to the audio lamp control device 113. Another command may be a dedicated command that notifies the voice lamp control device 113 of the value of each counter acquired in conjunction with a start-up winning, or a command that sends other information such as a fluctuation pattern command or a stop symbol command by voice. The command for notifying the lamp control device 113 may include the values of each counter acquired in conjunction with the winning start. As another command, when notifying the audio lamp control device 113 of the value of each counter acquired with the start winning, the value of each counter to be notified is specified in the fluctuating performance corresponding to which number of holds. Information indicating whether this is the case may also be included. As a result, the voice lamp control device 113 stores each of the hold information included in the command in any of the first to fourth hold information areas corresponding to the hold count, based on the information regarding the hold count included in the command. Counter values can be stored.

In the above embodiment, winnings to the special figure 1 winning hole 64b and special figure 2 winning hole 64c, and passage through the normal symbol gate 67 are each held up to four times, but the maximum number of reserved balls is The number is not limited to four, and may be set to three or less, or five or more (for example, eight). In addition, the number of reserved balls for the variable performance based on winnings in the special drawing 1 winning hole 64b or the special drawing 2 winning hole 64c can be displayed numerically or divided into four in a part of the third symbol display device 81. The area may be displayed in a different manner (for example, color or lighting pattern) for the number of reserved balls, and a light-emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the special symbol display device 37, and the light-emitting member It may be configured to notify the number of pitches.

Further, as shown in the above embodiment, the variable display that is the variable display of the third symbol is not limited to scrolling the symbol as identification information in the vertical direction on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, The display may be performed by moving the symbols horizontally or along a predetermined path such as an L-shape. In addition, the variable display of a symbol is not limited to a variable display of a symbol; for example, a display in which one or more characters are displayed in a wide variety of motions or changes together with the symbol or separately from the symbol. This also includes display. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

In each of the above embodiments, when executing a variation effect, a case has been described in which a high-speed variation is displayed in which all symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are scrolled at a high speed to such an extent that the player cannot see them. Instead, all symbol rows Z1 to Z3 may be displayed in a reduced size to the extent that they are not visible, or all symbol rows Z1 to Z3 may be displayed as snow noise-like images in which a large number of white dots are randomly displayed. Good too.

The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a different type from the above embodiment. For example, there are pachinko machines (commonly known as 2-hit and 3-hit machines) that increase the expected jackpot value until you hit the jackpot once and hit the jackpot multiple times (for example, 2 or 3 times). It may also be implemented as Furthermore, after a jackpot symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that provides a predetermined game value to the player, with the necessary condition of landing a ball in a predetermined area. Furthermore, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone, and enters a special gaming state with the requirement that a ball be won in the special area. Furthermore, in addition to the pachinko machine, the present invention may be implemented as various gaming machines such as arepachi, mahjong ball, slot machine, and a so-called gaming machine that is a combination of a pachinko machine and a slot machine.

Note that the slot machine is a well-known slot machine in which, for example, the symbols are changed by operating a control lever after inserting a coin and determining the symbol active line, and the symbols are stopped and fixed by operating a stop button. It is something. Therefore, the basic concept of a slot machine is that it is equipped with a display device that variably displays an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, and then definitively displays the identification information. The fluctuating display of the identification information is started, and the fluctuating display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of a stop operation means (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, and the display is confirmed. A slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined gaming value to the player, with the necessary condition that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific one, and in this case, the gaming medium is typically coins, medals, etc. Examples include:

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine that is a combination of a pachinko machine and a slot machine, it is equipped with a display device that displays a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner, and then displays the symbol in a fixed manner, and is equipped with a handle for launching a ball. Here are some things that are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the pattern starts to fluctuate due to, for example, the operation of the operating lever, and the fluctuation of the symbol starts due to, for example, the operation of the stop button, or As time passes, the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped, and a special game is generated in which the player is given a predetermined gaming value with the necessary condition that the determined symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol. In this case, a large number of balls are paid out into the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used instead of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as the gaming value in the gaming hall, which reduces the gaming value seen in current gaming halls where pachinko machines and slot machines coexist. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on where gaming machines can be installed can be resolved.

Below, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be shown.
<Group A: Switch enable/disable of specific area>
Conventionally, in game machines such as pachinko machines, game media such as game balls are fired toward a game area provided on a game board, and the game ball is launched into one of a plurality of ball entrances provided in the game area. A lottery is conducted based on the entry of balls, and if the player wins an advantageous state such as a hit in the lottery, the variable ball entry means, which is normally closed, is opened and the player receives a predetermined gaming value. is configured so that it is granted.

In such a gaming machine, a special area is provided through which the game ball that has flowed into the variable ball entry means can pass, and the opening and closing of the special area is controlled by an opening/closing member, etc., so that when the game ball passes through the special area, There is a pachinko machine that generates a special gaming value based on a second advantageous state that is different from a predetermined gaming value based on the advantageous state.

In addition, in the above pachinko machine, for example, even if a second advantageous state occurs, the player is not notified whether or not the second advantageous state occurs, and the second advantageous state does not occur. There is one that executes the notification mode. In other words, by creating a gameplay that makes it appear as if the second advantageous state will not occur for the player and guessing whether or not the second advantageous state will be given to the player, the interest of the game is increased. (For example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2017-148264)).

However, the above gaming machine is configured to generate the second advantageous state without fail when the game ball passes through the special area, so when the player visually recognizes that the game ball has passed through the special area, the second advantageous state is generated. 2. The player is made aware of the occurrence of an advantageous situation. For this reason, if the normal notification mode is executed after the player recognizes the occurrence of the second advantageous state due to the passage of the game ball into the special area, the game may not be as interesting as expected for the player. In fact, there is a risk that the player may lose interest in the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The inventions of Group A have been made in view of the circumstances exemplified above, and their purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of gaming.

A firing means for firing a game ball (for example, ball firing unit 112a),
Ball entry means (for example, special figure 1 prize opening 64b) into which the game ball launched by the launch means can enter;
Information acquisition means (for example, first holding ball storage area 203d) that acquires predetermined information due to the game ball entering the ball entrance means;
determination means (for example, jackpot random number table 202a) for determining the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means;
A gaming state changing means (for example, jackpot end processing (S415)) that changes the gaming state by using the determination result of the determining means;
When the game state is changed by the game state changing means, a notification means (for example, a third symbol display device) that executes a state suggestion notification (for example, "probability change notification performance mode") that suggests the game state to the player; 81) and
Variable entry ball means (for example, variable prize winning device 65) that can change between a first state in which it is difficult or impossible for game balls to enter and a second state in which game balls can enter;
Advantageous state means (for example, jackpot processing (S103)) that changes the variable ball entry means from the first state to the second state (for example, a jackpot state) by using the judgment result by the judgment means. )and,
A gaming machine comprising a special area (for example, a right probability variable area 73 and a left probability variable area 74) through which a game ball flowing into the variable ball entry means can pass,
The game state changing means is
a second advantageous state means (for example, probability change transition flag 203i) capable of generating a second advantageous state different from the advantageous state by the advantageous state means;
The advantageous state means are:
Special area switching means for switching whether or not to enable the special area (for example, turning on the right probability variation valid flag 203g or the left probability variation validity flag 203h),
The second advantageous state means is
generating the second advantageous state when the game ball passes through the special area that has been effectively set by the special area switching means;
When the game ball passes through the special area that has not been effectively set by the special area switching means, the second advantageous state is configured not to occur;
The notification means is
Suggestion notification non-execution means (for example, "latent probability variation A A gaming machine A0 characterized in that it is equipped with a ``latent probability change performance mode'' based on the winning of ``.

According to the game machine A0, the game ball is fired by the firing means, and the game ball fired by the firing means is configured to be able to enter the ball entering means, and when the game ball enters the ball entering means, As a result, predetermined information is acquired by the information acquisition means. Then, the determining means determines the predetermined information acquired by the information acquiring means, and by using the determination result of the determining means, the gaming state changing means changes the gaming state, and the gaming state changing means changes the gaming state. When the game status is changed, the notification means executes status suggestion notification to notify the player of the gaming status. In addition, variable ball entry means is provided that can change between a first state in which it is difficult or impossible for the game ball to enter and a second state in which the game ball can enter, and by using the determination result by the determination means, The advantageous state means brings the variable ball entry means into an advantageous state from the first state to the second state. Further, a special area is provided through which game balls flowing into the variable ball entry means can pass. Here, the second advantageous state means provided in the game state changing means may generate a second advantageous state different from the advantageous state produced by the advantageous state means. Further, the special area switching means provided in the advantageous state means switches whether or not to enable the special area. When the game ball passes through a special area that has been effectively set by the special area switching means, a second advantageous state is generated by the second advantageous state means, and a second advantageous state is generated by the second advantageous state means. The second advantageous state means is configured to prevent the second advantageous state from occurring when the game ball passes through a special area where the game ball does not exist. Then, by the suggestion notification non-execution means provided in the notification means, the state suggestion notification corresponding to the second advantageous state is not executed at the timing when the game ball passes through the special area effectively set by the special area switching means. That is, even if the game ball passes through a special area, it is possible to prevent the second advantageous state from occurring unless the special area is valid, and even if the game ball passes through a special area that is set to be valid, it is possible to prevent the second advantageous state from occurring. However, the player is not advised that the second advantageous state will occur at that timing. Thereby, even if the player recognizes that the game ball has passed into the special area, it is possible to create a situation in which the second advantageous state cannot occur. Then, the suggestion notification non-execution means does not execute the state suggestion notification corresponding to the second advantageous state at the timing when the game ball passes through the validly set special area, and informs the player that the second advantageous state is present. In the case where the recognition is not made, it is not possible to recognize whether or not the second advantageous state occurs only by passing the game ball in the special area. As a result, it is possible to create a gameplay that allows the player to guess whether or not he or she is playing the game in the second advantageous state, which has the effect of increasing the interest of the game.

In gaming machine A0,
The advantageous state means are:
Unit game execution means (for example, jackpot processing (S103)) that executes a unit game (for example, one round) for changing the variable ball entry means from the first state to the second state a plurality of times in the advantageous state of No. 1; ),
The special area switching means
In at least one of the unit games, a unit game enabling means (for example, the second round of "latent probability variation B") that makes the special area effective;
A game characterized in that the unit game validating means includes valid suggestion non-execution means (for example, non-notification of valid setting of probability variable areas 73 and 74) that does not suggest that the special area is valid. Machine A1.

According to gaming machine A1, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machine A0, the following effects are achieved. That is, the unit game execution means provided in the advantageous state means executes a unit game for changing the variable ball entry means from the first state to the second state a plurality of times in one advantageous state. Then, the unit game valid means provided in the special area switching means makes the special area valid in at least one of the unit games, and the valid suggestion non-execution means also provided in the special area switching means determines that the unit game is valid. Validity means does not imply that the special area is valid. As a result, the special area becomes valid in any of the unit games in an advantageous state, and by causing a game ball to flow into the special area during the unit game while there is no indication that the special area is valid, the second advantageous condition can be achieved. can be generated. Therefore, it is not possible to recognize whether or not the second advantageous state will occur only by passing the game ball in the special area. As a result, it is possible to create a gameplay that allows the player to guess whether or not he or she is playing the game in the second advantageous state, which has the effect of increasing the interest of the game.

In gaming machine A1,
The special area is
the first special area (for example, the right variable probability area 73);
a second special area different from the first special area (for example, left probability variable area 74),
The special area switching means
A gaming machine A2 characterized in that, in the predetermined unit game, either one of the first special area or the second special area is activated, and the other is not activated.

According to gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machine A1, the following effects are achieved. That is, a first special area and a second special area different from the first special area are provided as special areas, and the special area switching means switches between the first special area and the second special area in a predetermined unit game. It is configured such that one of them is valid and the other is not. As a result, by providing valid patterns for a plurality of special areas, it is possible to make the first special area or second special area that is set valid difficult to understand, and as a result, it is possible to play the game in the second advantageous state. This has the effect of increasing the interest of the game by creating a gameplay that allows the player to guess whether there is a player or not.

In any of gaming machines A0 to A2,
The second advantageous state means is
The advantageous state based on the first lottery result when the determination means determines that the first lottery result can cause the second advantageous state (for example, the lottery result of "latent probability variation A") Therein, a valid passage means (for example, turning on the right probability variation valid flag 203g and turning on the right probability variation area solenoid 73b) for passing the game ball to the special area where it is valid;
If the determination means determines that the second lottery result does not cause the second advantageous state (for example, the "time saving A" lottery result), during the advantageous state based on the second lottery result, A game machine A3 characterized in that it is equipped with passage prevention means (for example, turning on the right probability variation valid flag 203g and turning off the right probability variation area solenoid 73b) for preventing the game ball from passing through the special area where it is valid. .

According to gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machines A0 to A2, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the determining means determines that the first lottery result is capable of generating the second advantageous state, the valid passage means provided in the second advantageous state means determines that the first lottery result is in an advantageous state based on the first lottery result. The game ball is then configured to pass through a special area where it is valid. On the other hand, when the determining means determines that the second lottery result does not cause the second advantageous state, the passage blocking means provided in the second advantageous state means causes the second lottery result to be set during the advantageous state based on the second lottery result. It is configured to prevent the game ball from passing through the special area where it is valid. That is, if the first lottery result can cause the second advantageous state to occur, by passing the game ball to the valid special area, the second advantageous state will occur, but the second advantageous state will not occur. If it is the second lottery result, the second advantageous state is not generated by preventing the game ball from passing through the valid special area. As a result, a second advantageous state is generated depending on whether or not the game ball passes through a special area that is valid, and even if the game ball passes through the special area, if the special area is not valid, the second advantageous state occurs. By configuring the game so that it does not occur, it is possible to create a gameplay that makes the player guess whether or not he or she is playing the game in the second advantageous state, and the effect is that it is possible to improve the interest of the game. There is.

In gaming machine A3,
a first opening/closing means (for example, right variable area opening/closing plate 73a) for opening and closing the first special area;
A second opening/closing means (for example, left probability variable area opening/closing plate 74a) for opening and closing the second special area,
The valid passage means is
If the first special area is valid according to the special area switching means, open the first opening/closing means to allow the game ball to flow into the first special area,
A gaming machine A4 characterized in that when the second special area is enabled by the special area switching means, the second opening/closing means is opened to allow game balls to flow into the two special areas.

According to gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machine A3, the following effects are achieved. That is, the first opening and closing means opens and closes the first special area, and the second opening and closing means opens and closes the second special area. Then, when the first special area is valid by the special area switching means, the valid passing means opens the first opening/closing means to allow the game ball to flow into the first special area, and the special area switching means causes the game ball to flow into the first special area. When the special area is valid, the second opening/closing means is opened to allow game balls to flow into the second special area. This has the effect that when generating the second advantageous condition, the second advantageous condition can be appropriately generated by passing the game ball to the valid special area.

In gaming machine A4,
The passage blocking means is
When the first special area is determined to be valid by the special area switching means, closing the first opening/closing means to prevent the game balls from flowing into the first special area;
A gaming machine A5 characterized in that when the second special area is enabled by the special area switching means, the second opening/closing means is closed to prevent game balls from flowing into the two special areas.

According to gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machine A4, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the first special area is enabled by the special game switching means, the passage blocking means closes the first opening/closing means and prevents the game balls from flowing into the first special area. Similarly, when the second special area is enabled by the special area switching means, the second opening/closing means is closed by the passage blocking means, so that game balls are not allowed to flow into the second special area. As a result, by not allowing the game ball to pass through the valid special area when the second advantageous state is not generated, even if the player recognizes that the game ball has passed through the special area, It is possible to create a situation in which the second advantageous state cannot occur. Therefore, it is possible to create a gameplay that allows the player to guess whether or not he or she is playing the game in the second advantageous state, which has the effect of increasing the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine A4 or A5,
The passage blocking means is
If the first special area is valid according to the special area switching means, open the second opening/closing means to allow the game ball to flow into the second special area,
A gaming machine A6 characterized in that when the second special area is enabled by the special area switching means, the first opening/closing means is opened to allow game balls to flow into the first special area.

According to gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machine A4 or A5, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the first special area is enabled by the special game switching means, the passage blocking means opens the second opening/closing means and the game balls flow into the second special area. Similarly, when the second special area is enabled by the special area switching means, the passage blocking means opens the first opening/closing means and allows the game balls to flow into the first special area. As a result, by allowing the game ball to pass through the ineffective special area when the second advantageous state is not generated, even if the player recognizes that the game ball has passed through the special area, the second advantageous state will not occur. 2. It is possible to create a situation in which an advantageous situation cannot occur. Therefore, it is possible to create a gameplay that allows the player to guess whether or not he or she is playing the game in the second advantageous state, and there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

In any of gaming machines A3 to A6,
The second advantageous state means is
Valid pattern determining means (for example, variable probability area valid table 202g) that determines whether or not to validate the special area for each unit game using the determination result by the determining unit;
Opening/closing pattern determining means (for example, probability variable area opening/closing table 202f) for determining whether or not to cause game balls to flow into the special area for each unit game using the determination result by the determining means;
Opening/closing pattern matching means (for example, opening/closing pattern "X1") for making the opening/closing pattern of the special area by the opening/closing pattern determining means the same between the first lottery result and the second lottery result;
and effective pattern mismatching means (for example, effective patterns "A" and "B") for differentiating the effective pattern of the special area determined by the effective pattern determining means between the first lottery result and the second lottery result. A gaming machine A7 is characterized by:

According to gaming machine A7, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machines A3 to A6, the following effects are achieved. That is, the valid pattern determining means provided in the second advantageous state means determines whether or not to make the special area valid for each unit game, using the determination result by the determining means. Further, the opening/closing pattern determining means similarly provided in the second advantageous state means determines whether or not to cause the game ball to flow into the special area for each unit game, using the determination result by the determining means. Then, the opening/closing pattern matching means determines that the opening/closing pattern of the special area is the same between the first lottery result and the second lottery result, and the effective pattern mismatching means determines that the opening/closing pattern of the special area is the same between the first lottery result and the second lottery result. Thus, the effective pattern of the special area by the effective pattern determining means is made different. As a result, the opening/closing pattern of the special area is made the same between the first lottery result and the second lottery result, making it impossible to identify the lottery result only by the opening/closing pattern, and the special area can be differentiated between the first lottery result and the second lottery result. By making the effective patterns different, it is difficult to recognize whether or not the second advantageous state will occur, creating a gameplay that allows the player to guess whether or not he or she is playing the game in the second advantageous state. This has the effect of increasing the interest of the game.

In any of gaming machines A3 to A7,
Display means (for example, special symbol display device 37) for displaying the first lottery result and the second lottery result;
The display result by the display means makes it difficult to identify the first lottery result or the second lottery result. A gaming machine A8 characterized in that there are 127 types of display patterns, each display pattern being a random pattern with no regularity formed by eight LEDs.

According to gaming machine A8, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machines A3 to A7, the following effects are achieved. That is, the display means displays the first lottery result and the second lottery result, and the result identification difficulty means makes it difficult to identify the first lottery result or the second lottery result based on the display result by the display means. As a result, even if the first lottery result and the second lottery result are displayed, it is difficult to distinguish which lottery result it is, thereby preventing the player from recognizing that the second lottery result is in an advantageous state. In such a case, it is not possible to recognize whether or not the second advantageous condition will occur only by passing the game ball in the special area, and whether or not the second advantageous condition will occur can be determined by the display result of the display means. Unrecognizable. As a result, it is possible to create a gameplay that allows the player to guess whether or not he or she is playing the game in the second advantageous state, which has the effect of increasing the interest of the game.

In any of gaming machines A0 to A8,
The special area is
A gaming machine A9 characterized in that it is arranged at a position visible to the player.

According to gaming machine A9, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machines A0 to A8, the following effects are achieved. That is, the special area is arranged at a position that is visible to the player. As a result, it is possible to create a gameplay that allows the player to visually recognize that the game ball has passed through the special area and to guess whether or not a second advantageous state will occur, thereby increasing the interest of the game. effective.

In any of gaming machines A4 to A9,
The first opening/closing means and/or the second opening/closing means,
A gaming machine A10 characterized in that it is made of a transparent or translucent material.

According to gaming machine A10, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machines A4 to A9, the following effects are achieved. That is, the first opening/closing means and/or the second opening/closing means are formed of a transparent or translucent material. This makes it difficult for the player to determine the driving mode of the first opening/closing means and/or the second opening/closing means. It is possible to make it difficult to recognize whether the second special area is likely to be opened and flow into the second special area. As a result, it becomes difficult to recognize the inflow pattern to each special area in advance, and it is possible to create a gameplay that makes players guess whether or not they are playing the game in the second advantageous state, which increases the interest of the game. The effect is that it can be improved.

<Group B: Double attacker x variable area>
Conventionally, in game machines such as pachinko machines, game media such as game balls are fired toward a game area provided on a game board, and the game balls are launched into one of a plurality of ball entrances provided in the game area. A lottery is held based on the entry of balls, and if the player wins an advantageous state such as a hit in the lottery, the variable ball entry means, which is normally closed, is opened and the player receives a predetermined gaming value. is configured so that it is granted.

In such a gaming machine, a special area is provided through which the game ball that has flowed into the variable ball entry means can pass, and the opening and closing of the special area is controlled by an opening/closing member, etc., so that when the game ball passes through the special area, There is a pachinko machine that generates a special gaming value based on a second advantageous state that is different from a predetermined gaming value based on the advantageous state.

In addition, in the above pachinko machine, for example, even if a second advantageous state occurs, the player is not notified whether or not the second advantageous state occurs, and the second advantageous state does not occur. There is one that executes the notification mode. In other words, by creating a gameplay that makes it appear as if the second advantageous state will not occur for the player and guessing whether or not the second advantageous state will be given to the player, the interest of the game is increased. (For example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2017-148264)).

However, in the gaming machine described above, the second advantageous state is generated without fail when the game ball passes through the special area, so when the player visually recognizes that the game ball has passed through the special area, the second advantageous state is generated. 2. The player is made aware of the occurrence of an advantageous situation. For this reason, if the normal notification mode is executed after the player recognizes the occurrence of the second advantageous state due to the passage of the game ball into the special area, the game may not be as interesting as expected for the player. In fact, there is a risk that the player may lose interest in the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The inventions in group B were made in view of the circumstances exemplified above, and their purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of gaming.

A firing means for firing a game ball (for example, ball firing unit 112a),
Ball entry means (for example, special figure 1 prize opening 64b) into which the game ball launched by the launch means can enter;
Information acquisition means (for example, first holding ball storage area 203d) that acquires predetermined information due to the game ball entering the ball entrance means;
determination means (for example, jackpot random number table 202a) for determining the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means;
A gaming state changing means (for example, from "normal gaming state" to "latency probability variation state") by using the determination result of the determining means;
When the game state is changed by the game state changing means, a notification means (for example, a third symbol display device) that executes a state suggestion notification (for example, "probability change notification performance mode") that suggests the game state to the player; 81) and
A first variable ball entry means (for example, a variable prize winning device 65) and a second variable ball entry means that can change between a first state in which it is difficult or impossible for a game ball to enter and a second state in which a game ball can enter. means (for example, second variable winning device 76);
By using the determination result by the determination means, an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot state) in which one or both of the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means is changed from the first state to the second state is achieved. ), an advantageous state means (for example, opening the grand prize opening 65a and the second grand prize opening 76a at the time of a jackpot);
A gaming machine comprising a special area (for example, a right probability variable area 73 and a left probability variable area 74) through which game balls flowing into the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means can pass,
The game state changing means is
a second advantageous state means capable of generating a second advantageous state different from the advantageous state by the advantageous state means (for example, generation of a "probability fluctuating state"),
The advantageous state means are:
Special area switching means for switching whether or not to enable the special area (for example, turning on the right probability variation valid flag 203g or the left probability variation validity flag 203h),
The second advantageous state means is
generating the second advantageous state when the game ball passes through the special area that has been effectively set by the special area switching means;
configured so that the second advantageous state does not occur when the game ball passes through the special area that has not been effectively set by the special area switching means,
The notification means is
Suggestion notification non-execution means (for example, "latent probability variation A A game machine B0 characterized in that it is equipped with a ``latent probability change performance mode'' based on the winning of ``.

According to the gaming machine B0, the game ball is fired by the firing means, and the game ball fired by the firing means is configured to be able to enter the ball entering means, and when the game ball enters the ball entering means, As a result, predetermined information is acquired by the information acquisition means. Then, the determining means determines the predetermined information acquired by the information acquiring means, and by using the determination result of the determining means, the gaming state changing means changes the gaming state, and the gaming state changing means changes the gaming state. When the game status is changed, the notification means executes status suggestion notification to notify the player of the gaming status. Further, a first variable ball entry means and a second variable ball entry means are provided which can change between a first state in which it is difficult or impossible for a game ball to enter and a second state in which a game ball can enter, and a determining means. By using the determination result, the advantageous state means brings one or both of the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means into an advantageous state from the first state to the second state. Further, a special area is provided through which game balls flowing into the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means can pass. Here, the second advantageous state means provided in the game state changing means may generate a second advantageous state different from the advantageous state produced by the advantageous state means. Here, the special area switching means provided in the advantageous state means switches whether or not to enable the special area. When the game ball passes through a special area that has been effectively set by the special area switching means, a second advantageous state is generated by the second advantageous state means, and a second advantageous state is generated by the second advantageous state means. The second advantageous state means is configured to prevent the second advantageous state from occurring when the game ball passes through a special area where the game ball does not exist. Then, by the suggestion notification non-execution means provided in the notification means, the state suggestion notification corresponding to the second advantageous state is not executed at the timing when the game ball passes through the special area effectively set by the special area switching means. That is, even if the game ball passes through a special area, it is possible to prevent the second advantageous state from occurring unless the special area is valid, and even if the game ball passes through a special area that is set to be valid, it is possible to prevent the second advantageous state from occurring. However, the player is not advised that the second advantageous state will occur at that timing. Thereby, even if the player recognizes that the game ball has passed into the special area, it is possible to create a situation in which the second advantageous state cannot occur. Therefore, when the suggestion notification non-execution means does not execute the state suggestion notification corresponding to the second advantageous state and prevents the player from recognizing that the second advantageous state is present, the game ball in the special area It is not possible to recognize whether or not the second advantageous state occurs only by passing the vehicle. In addition, by giving a second advantageous state by a combination of the opening/closing of the variable ball entrance means (2) and the activation/invalidity of the special area (2), if the variations of each combination are not known in advance, the second advantageous state will not occur. cannot recognize that it occurs. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize whether or not the second advantageous state will occur, and it is possible to create a gameplay that allows the player to guess whether or not he or she is playing the game in the second advantageous state. This has the effect of increasing the interest of the game.

In gaming machine B0,
The advantageous state means are:
A unit game in which a unit game (for example, one round) is executed a plurality of times in which the first variable ball entry means or the second variable ball entry means is changed from the first state to the second state in the advantageous state of No. 1. Execution means (for example, jackpot processing (S103));
Each time the unit game is executed in the predetermined advantageous state by the unit game execution means, the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means are alternately and continuously brought into the second state. A gaming machine B1 characterized in that it is equipped with alternate ball entry means (for example, opening the variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 76 without an interval time).

According to gaming machine B1, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machine B0, the following effects are achieved. That is, the unit game executing means provided in the advantageous state means executes a unit game multiple times in which the first variable ball entry means or the second variable ball entry means is changed from the first state to the second state in one advantageous state. be done. Each time a unit game is executed in a predetermined advantageous state by the unit game execution means, the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means are activated by the alternate ball entry means provided in the advantageous state means. The second state is alternately and without interruption.

Conventionally, when extinguishing an advantageous state by opening or closing one variable ball entry means, it is necessary to provide an interval time due to the closing of the variable ball entry means, and it takes time to eliminate the advantageous state. There is a risk that the game will be delayed and the players will lose interest, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, the first variable ball entering means and the second variable ball entering means are alternately and continuously brought into the second state for each unit game in a predetermined advantageous state by the alternate ball entering means, It is possible to eliminate the interval time associated with closing the variable ball entry means. Therefore, the advantageous state can be quickly used up, and the game is not delayed, so that it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest. In addition, by giving a second advantageous state by a combination of the opening/closing of the variable ball entrance means (2) and the activation/invalidity of the special area (2), if the variations of each combination are not known in advance, the second advantageous state will not occur. cannot recognize that it occurs. As a result, in an advantageous state that occurs quickly, it is possible to reduce the thinking time of the player and make it difficult to recognize whether or not a second advantageous state will occur, allowing the player to play the game in the second advantageous state. This has the effect that it is possible to create a gameplay that allows the player to guess whether the game is true or not, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In gaming machine B0 or B1,
a first channel (for example, guide passage 72) through which the game balls flowing into the first variable ball entry means flow;
a second channel (for example, a communication passage 77) through which the game balls flowing into the second variable ball entry means flow down;
A gaming machine B2 comprising: a merging means (for example, a merging section 77a) for merging the first flow path and the second flow path on the upstream side of the special area.

According to gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machine B0 or B1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the game balls that have flowed into the first variable ball entry means are flown down through the first flow path, the game balls that have flowed into the second variable ball entry means are flowed down through the second flow path, and the game balls that have flowed into the second variable ball entry means are flowed down through the merging means. The flow path and the second flow path are merged on the upstream side of the special region. As a result, the game balls that have flowed into the first variable ball entry means and the game balls that have flowed into the second variable ball entry means can both flow into the special area. With this configuration, there is no need to provide a special area for each variable ball entry means, so there is an effect that the number of parts in the gaming machine can be reduced and manufacturing costs can be reduced.

In gaming machine B1 or B2,
The alternate ball entering means is
The first advantageous condition appears, and then a new advantageous condition appears within a predetermined period (for example, during the "probability fluctuation state" or "time reduction state", that is, the jackpot with the second special symbol). In this case, the game machine B3 is characterized in that each time the unit game is executed, the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means are brought into the second state alternately and without interruption.

According to gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machine B1 or B2, the following effects are achieved. That is, if one advantageous state appears by the alternate ball entry means and then a new advantageous state appears within a predetermined period, each time a unit game is executed, the first variable ball entry means and the second advantageous state appear. The two variable ball entry means are alternately and continuously placed in the second state.

Conventionally, in situations where advantageous conditions occur consecutively within a predetermined period of time (so-called consecutive winnings), players desire quick play; If the interval time associated with closing the ball entry means takes time, there is a risk that the player will easily lose interest in the game.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B3, when a new advantageous state appears within a predetermined period, the first variable ball entering means and the second variable ball entering means are activated each time a unit game is executed. It is possible to alternately enter the second state without interruption and quickly eliminate the advantageous state. Therefore, in a situation where advantageous states are continuously occurring, the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means are alternately set to the second state without any interruption, and the quick game desired by the player is achieved. This has the effect of preventing players from losing interest in the game and improving the interest in the game. In addition, by giving a second advantageous state by the combination of opening/closing of the variable ball entry means (2) and enabling or disabling the special area (2), if the variations of each combination are not known in advance, the second advantageous state will not occur. cannot recognize that it occurs. As a result, in an advantageous state that occurs quickly, it is possible to reduce the thinking time of the player and make it difficult to recognize whether or not a second advantageous state will occur, allowing the player to play the game in the second advantageous state. This has the effect that it is possible to create a gameplay that allows the player to guess whether the game is true or not, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In any of gaming machines B1 to B3,
The special area switching means
In at least any one of the unit games, a unit game enabling means (for example, the second round of "latent probability variation B") that makes the special area effective;
A game characterized in that the unit game validating means includes valid suggestion non-execution means (for example, non-notification of valid setting of probability variable areas 73 and 74) that does not suggest that the special area is valid. Machine B4.

According to gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machines B1 to B3, the following effects are achieved. That is, the unit game valid means provided in the special area switching means makes the special area valid in at least one of the unit games, and the valid suggestion non-execution means also provided in the special area switching means makes the unit game valid. Validity means does not imply that the special area is valid. As a result, the special area becomes valid in any of the unit games in an advantageous state, and by causing a game ball to flow into the special area during the unit game while it is not suggested that the special area is valid, the second advantageous condition can be achieved. can be generated. Therefore, it is not possible to recognize whether or not the second advantageous state will occur only by passing the game ball in the special area. As a result, it is possible to create a gameplay that allows the player to guess whether or not he or she is playing the game in the second advantageous state, which has the effect of increasing the interest of the game.

In any of gaming machines B1 to B4,
The special area is
the first special area (for example, the right variable probability area 73);
a second special area different from the first special area (for example, left probability variable area 74),
The special area switching means
A gaming machine B5 characterized in that, in a predetermined unit game, either the first special area or the second special area is activated, and the other is not activated.

According to gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machines B1 to B4, the following effects are achieved. That is, a first special area and a second special area different from the first special area are provided as special areas, and the special area switching means switches between the first special area and the second special area in a predetermined unit game. It is configured such that one of them is valid and the other is not. As a result, by providing valid patterns for a plurality of special areas, it is possible to make it difficult to understand the first special area or second special area that is set as valid, and as a result, it is possible to play the game in the second advantageous state. This has the effect of increasing the interest of the game by creating a gameplay that allows the player to guess whether there is a player or not.

In any of gaming machines B0 to B5,
The second advantageous state means is
The advantageous state based on the first lottery result when the determination means determines that the first lottery result can cause the second advantageous state (for example, the lottery result of "latent probability variation A") Therein, a valid passing means (for example, turning on the right probability variation valid flag 203g and turning on the right probability variation area solenoid 73b) for passing the game ball to the special area that is valid;
If the determination means determines that the second lottery result does not cause the second advantageous state (for example, the "time saving A" lottery result), during the advantageous state based on the second lottery result, A game machine B6 characterized in that it is equipped with passage prevention means (for example, turning on the right probability variation valid flag 203g and turning off the right probability variation area solenoid 73b) for preventing the game ball from passing through the special area where it is valid. .

According to gaming machine B6, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machines B0 to B5, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the determination means determines that the first lottery result is capable of generating the second advantageous state, the valid passage means provided in the second advantageous state means determines that the first lottery result is in an advantageous state based on the first lottery result. The game ball is then configured to pass through a special area where it is valid. On the other hand, when the determining means determines that the second lottery result does not cause the second advantageous state, the passage blocking means provided in the second advantageous state means causes the second lottery result to be set during the advantageous state based on the second lottery result. It is configured to prevent the game ball from passing through the special area where it is valid. That is, if the first lottery result can cause the second advantageous state to occur, the second advantageous state will be generated by passing the game ball to the valid special area, but the second advantageous state will not occur. If it is the second lottery result, the second advantageous state is not generated by preventing the game ball from passing through the valid special area. As a result, a second advantageous state is generated depending on whether or not the game ball passes through a special area that is valid, and even if the game ball passes through the special area, if the special area is not valid, the second advantageous state occurs. By configuring the game so that it does not occur, it is possible to create a gameplay that makes the player guess whether or not he or she is playing the game in the second advantageous state, and the effect is that it is possible to improve the interest of the game. There is.

In gaming machine B6,
a first opening/closing means (for example, right variable area opening/closing plate 73a) for opening and closing the first special area;
A second opening/closing means (for example, left probability variable area opening/closing plate 74a) for opening and closing the second special area,
The valid passing means is
If the first special area is valid by the special area switching means, open the first opening/closing means to allow the game balls to flow into the first special area;
A gaming machine B7 characterized in that, when the second special area is enabled by the special area switching means, the second opening/closing means is opened to allow game balls to flow into the two special areas.

According to gaming machine B7, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machine B6, the following effects are achieved. That is, the first opening and closing means opens and closes the first special area, and the second opening and closing means opens and closes the second special area. Then, when the first special area is valid by the special area switching unit, the first opening/closing unit is opened and the game ball flows into the first special area by the valid passing unit, and the special area switching unit allows the game ball to flow into the first special area. When the special area is valid, the second opening/closing means is opened to allow game balls to flow into the second special area. Thereby, when generating the second advantageous condition, there is an effect that the second advantageous condition can be appropriately generated by passing the game ball to the valid special area.

In gaming machine B7,
The passage blocking means is
When the first special area is determined to be valid by the special area switching means, closing the first opening/closing means to prevent the game balls from flowing into the first special area;
A game machine B8 characterized in that when the second special area is enabled by the special area switching means, the second opening/closing means is closed to prevent game balls from flowing into the two special areas.

According to gaming machine B8, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machine B7, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the first special area is enabled by the special game switching means, the passage blocking means closes the first opening/closing means and prevents the game balls from flowing into the first special area. Similarly, when the second special area is enabled by the special area switching means, the second opening/closing means is closed by the passage blocking means, so that game balls are not allowed to flow into the second special area. As a result, by not allowing the game ball to pass through the valid special area when the second advantageous state is not generated, even if the player recognizes that the game ball has passed through the special area, It is possible to create a situation in which the second advantageous state cannot occur. Therefore, it is possible to create a gameplay that allows the player to guess whether or not he or she is playing the game in the second advantageous state, which has the effect of increasing the interest of the game.

In gaming machine B7 or B8,
The passage blocking means is
If the first special area is valid according to the special area switching means, open the second opening/closing means to allow the game ball to flow into the second special area,
A gaming machine B9 characterized in that when the second special area is enabled by the special area switching means, the first opening/closing means is opened to allow game balls to flow into the first special area.

According to gaming machine B9, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machine B7 or B8, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the first special area is enabled by the special game switching means, the passage blocking means opens the second opening/closing means and the game balls flow into the second special area. Further, when the second special area is determined to be valid by the special area switching means, the first opening/closing means is opened by the passage blocking means and the game ball flows into the first special area. As a result, by allowing the game ball to pass through the ineffective special area when the second advantageous state is not generated, even if the player recognizes that the game ball has passed through the special area, the second advantageous state will not occur. 2. It is possible to create a situation in which an advantageous situation cannot occur. Therefore, it is possible to create a gameplay that allows the player to guess whether or not he or she is playing the game in the second advantageous state, and there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

In any of gaming machines B6 to B9,
The second advantageous state means is
Valid pattern determining means (for example, variable probability area valid table 202g) that determines whether or not to validate the special area for each unit game by using the determination result by the determining unit;
Opening/closing pattern determining means (for example, probability variable area opening/closing table 202f) that determines whether or not to cause a game ball to flow into the special area for each unit game by using the determination result by the determining means;
Opening/closing pattern matching means (for example, opening/closing pattern "X1") for making the opening/closing pattern of the special area by the opening/closing pattern determining means the same between the first lottery result and the second lottery result;
and effective pattern mismatching means (for example, effective patterns "A" and "B") for differentiating the effective pattern of the special area determined by the effective pattern determining means between the first lottery result and the second lottery result. A gaming machine B10 is characterized in that:

According to gaming machine B10, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machines B6 to B9, the following effects are achieved. That is, the valid pattern determining means provided in the second advantageous state means determines whether or not to make the special area valid for each unit game by using the determination result by the determining means. Furthermore, the opening/closing pattern determining means similarly provided in the second advantageous state means determines whether or not to cause the game ball to flow into the special area for each unit game by using the determination result by the determining means. Then, the opening/closing pattern matching means determines that the opening/closing pattern of the special area is the same between the first lottery result and the second lottery result, and the effective pattern mismatching means determines that the opening/closing pattern of the special area is the same between the first lottery result and the second lottery result. Thus, the effective pattern of the special area by the effective pattern determining means is made different. As a result, the opening/closing pattern of the special area is made the same between the first lottery result and the second lottery result, making it impossible to identify the lottery result only by the opening/closing pattern, and the special area can be differentiated between the first lottery result and the second lottery result. By differentiating the effective patterns, it is difficult to recognize whether or not the second advantageous state will occur, creating a gameplay that allows the player to guess whether or not he or she is playing the game in the second advantageous state. This has the effect of increasing the interest of the game.

In any of gaming machines B6 to B10,
Display means (for example, special symbol display device 37) for displaying the first lottery result and the second lottery result;
The display result by the display means makes it difficult to identify the first lottery result or the second lottery result. A gaming machine B11 characterized in that there are 127 types of display patterns, each display pattern being a random pattern with no regularity formed by eight LEDs.

According to gaming machine B11, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machines B6 to B10, the following effects are achieved. That is, the display means displays the first lottery result and the second lottery result, and the result identification difficulty means makes it difficult to identify the first lottery result or the second lottery result based on the display result by the display means. As a result, even if the first lottery result and the second lottery result are displayed, it is difficult to distinguish which lottery result it is, thereby preventing the player from recognizing that the second lottery result is in an advantageous state. In such a case, it is not possible to recognize whether or not the second advantageous state will occur only by passing the game ball in the special area, and whether or not the second advantageous condition will occur can be determined by the display result of the display means. Unrecognizable. As a result, it is possible to create a gameplay that allows the player to guess whether or not he or she is playing the game in the second advantageous state, which has the effect of increasing the interest of the game.

In any of gaming machines B0 to B11,
The special area is
A gaming machine B12 is characterized in that it is arranged at a position that is visible to the player.

According to gaming machine B12, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machines B0 to B11, the following effects are achieved. That is, the special area is arranged at a position that is visible to the player. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by making the player visually recognize that the game ball has passed through the special area, and creating a gameplay that allows the player to guess whether or not a second advantageous state will occur. effective.

<Group C: Sorting into two paths by one drive member>
Conventionally, in game machines such as pachinko machines, game media such as game balls are fired toward a game area provided on a game board, and the game balls are launched into one of a plurality of ball entrances provided in the game area. A lottery is held based on the entry of balls, and if the player wins an advantageous state such as a hit in the lottery, the variable ball entry means, which is normally closed, is opened and the player receives a predetermined gaming value. is configured so that it is granted.

In such a gaming machine, a special area is provided through which the game ball that has flown into the variable ball entry means can pass, and the opening and closing of the special area is controlled by an opening/closing member, etc., so that when the game ball passes through the special area, There is a pachinko machine that generates a special gaming value based on a second advantageous state that is different from a predetermined gaming value based on the advantageous state.

In addition, in the above pachinko machine, for example, even if a second advantageous state occurs, the player is not notified whether or not the second advantageous state occurs, and the second advantageous state does not occur. There is one that executes the notification mode. In other words, by creating a gameplay that makes it appear as if the second advantageous state will not occur for the player and guessing whether or not the second advantageous state will be given to the player, the interest of the game is increased. (For example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2017-148264)).

However, in the gaming machine described above, the second advantageous state is generated without fail when the game ball passes through the special area, so when the player visually recognizes that the game ball has passed through the special area, the second advantageous state is generated. 2. The player is made aware of the occurrence of an advantageous situation. For this reason, if the normal notification mode is executed after the player recognizes the occurrence of the second advantageous state due to the passage of the game ball into the special area, the game may not be as interesting as expected for the player. In fact, there is a risk that the player may lose interest in the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The inventions in Group C were made in view of the circumstances exemplified above, and their purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of gaming.

A firing means for firing a game ball (for example, ball firing unit 112a),
Ball entry means (for example, special figure 1 prize opening 64b) into which the game ball launched by the launch means can enter;
Information acquisition means (for example, first holding ball storage area 203d) that acquires predetermined information due to the game ball entering the ball entrance means;
determination means (for example, jackpot random number table 202a) for determining the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means;
A gaming state changing means (for example, jackpot end processing (S415)) that changes the gaming state by using the determination result of the determining means;
When the game state is changed by the game state changing means, a notification means (for example, a third symbol display device) that executes a state suggestion notification (for example, "probability change notification performance mode") that suggests the game state to the player; 81) and
Variable entry ball means (for example, variable prize winning device 65) that can change between a first state in which it is difficult or impossible for game balls to enter and a second state in which game balls can enter;
Advantageous state means (for example, jackpot processing (S103)) that changes the variable ball entry means from the first state to the second state (for example, a jackpot state) by using the judgment result by the judgment means. ) and,
The game state changing means is
A gaming machine comprising a second advantageous state means (for example, probability change transition flag 203i) capable of generating a second advantageous state different from the advantageous state caused by the advantageous state means,
A first special area (for example, the right variable probability area 73) and a second special area (for example, the left probability variable area 74) through which the game ball flowing into the variable ball entry means can pass;
An opening/closing means (for example, variable area opening/closing plate 78c) capable of opening and closing the first special area or the second special area;
A drive means (for example, a variable area opening/closing motor 78a) that drives the opening/closing means to open/close;
A special area switching means (for example, turning on the right probability change valid flag 203g or the left probability change validity flag 203h) for switching validity or invalidity of the first special area or the second special area,
The second advantageous state means is
When the second advantageous state is generated, the drive means drives the opening/closing means to open the first special area or the second special area that has been made effective;
When the second advantageous state is not generated, the driving means drives the opening/closing means to close the first special area or the second special area that is made effective;
The notification means is
Suggestion notification non-execution means that does not execute the state suggestion notification corresponding to the second advantageous state at the timing when the game ball passes through the first special area or the second special area that is effectively set by the special area switching means. (For example, a "latent probability variation performance mode" based on the winning of "latent probability variation A").

According to the game machine C0, the game ball is fired by the firing means, and the game ball fired by the firing means is configured to be able to enter the ball entering means, and when the game ball enters the ball entering means, As a result, predetermined information is acquired by the information acquisition means. Then, the determining means determines the predetermined information acquired by the information acquiring means, and by using the determination result of the determining means, the gaming state changing means changes the gaming state, and the gaming state changing means changes the gaming state. When the game status is changed, the notification means executes status suggestion notification to notify the player of the gaming status. In addition, variable ball entry means is provided that can change between a first state in which it is difficult or impossible for the game ball to enter and a second state in which the game ball can enter, and by using the determination result by the determination means, The advantageous state means brings the variable ball entry means into an advantageous state from the first state to the second state. Further, the second advantageous state means provided in the game state changing means may generate a second advantageous state different from the advantageous state caused by the advantageous state means. Here, a first special area and a second special area are provided through which game balls flowing into the variable ball entry means can pass, and the first special area or the second special area is configured to be openable and closable by the opening/closing means, and the driving means The opening/closing means is driven to open/close. Further, the special area switching means switches between validity and invalidity of the first special area or the second special area. When the second advantageous state is to be generated, the opening/closing means is driven by the driving means by the second advantageous state means to open the first special area or the second special area that has been made effective. Further, when the second advantageous state is not generated, the opening/closing means is driven by the driving means by the second advantageous state means to close the first special region or the second special region that has been made effective. Then, the suggestion notification non-execution means provided in the notification means causes the game ball to be in a state corresponding to the second advantageous state at the timing when the game ball passes through the first special area or the second special area that has been effectively set by the special area switching means. The configuration is such that the suggestion notification is not executed. That is, even if the game ball passes through the first special area or the second special area, it is possible to prevent the second advantageous state from occurring unless the first special area or the second special area is valid, and Even if the game ball passes through the first special area or the second special area that is set effectively, the player is not advised that the second advantageous state will occur at that timing. Thereby, even if the player recognizes that the game ball has passed into the first special area or the second special area, it is possible to create a situation in which the second advantageous state cannot occur. Therefore, when the suggestion notification non-execution means does not execute the state suggestion notification corresponding to the second advantageous state and prevents the player from recognizing that the second advantageous state exists, the first special area or It is not possible to recognize whether or not the second advantageous state will occur only by passing the game ball through the second special area. As a result, it is possible to create a gameplay that allows the player to guess whether or not he or she is playing the game in the second advantageous state, which has the effect of increasing the interest of the game.

In gaming machine C0,
The second advantageous state means is
When the second advantageous state is generated, the drive means drives the opening/closing means to close the second special area or the first special area that is not activated;
A game machine characterized in that, when the second advantageous state is not generated, the opening/closing means is driven by the driving means to open the second special area or the first special area that is not considered to be valid. C1.

According to the gaming machine C1, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine C0, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the second advantageous state is generated, the opening/closing means is driven by the driving means by the second advantageous state means to close the second special region or the first special region which is not activated. Further, when the second advantageous state is not generated, the opening/closing means is driven by the drive means by the second advantageous state means to open the second special region or the first special region which is not activated. As a result, when it is desired to generate a second advantageous state, the first special area or the second special area that is not set effectively is closed, and the ball is directed to the first special area or the second special area that is set effectively. can be passed. Therefore, when it is desired to generate the second advantageous state, the ball can be passed through the effectively set first special area or second special area, and the second advantageous condition can be reliably generated. There is an effect.

In the gaming machine C0 or C1,
The driving means is
a first direction drive means (for example, forward rotation drive) that opens the first special area and closes the second special area by driving the opening/closing means in a first direction;
a second direction driving means (for example, reverse drive) that opens the second special area and closes the first special area by driving the opening/closing means in a second direction different from the first direction; A gaming machine C2 characterized by comprising:

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine C0 or C1, the following effects are achieved. That is, by driving the opening/closing means in the first direction by the first direction driving means provided in the driving means, the first special area is opened and the second special area is closed. Further, by driving the opening/closing means in a second direction different from the first direction by a second direction driving means also provided in the driving means, the second special area is opened and the first special area is closed. Ru.

Conventionally, when a plurality of special areas were provided inside the variable entry means and a drive mechanism was provided for each special area, the parts of each drive mechanism had to be installed in a small space, and the variable entry means There is a possibility that the design of the ball means becomes complicated.

Furthermore, since the above-mentioned parts are provided, the number of parts used in the gaming machine increases, and there is a risk that manufacturing costs will increase.

Furthermore, since a drive mechanism is provided in each special area, maintenance work is required for each drive mechanism, which may increase the number of maintenance steps.

On the other hand, according to the game machine C2, the first special area and the second special area can be opened or closed depending on the drive direction of the first drive mechanism, which complicates the design of the variable ball entry means. This has the effect of simplifying the overall configuration of the variable ball entry means and making it easy to design.

In addition, since the first special area and the second special area are opened, closed, or closed by one drive mechanism, it is not necessary to open or close the first special area and the second special area by multiple drive mechanisms. This has the effect of reducing the number of parts and reducing manufacturing costs.

Furthermore, since the first special area and the second special area are opened and closed by the first drive mechanism, maintenance work only needs to be done on the first drive mechanism, reducing the number of maintenance steps for the gaming machine. effective.

In the gaming machine C0 or C1,
The first special area is located upstream of the second special area,
The driving means is
disposed upstream from the first special area and the second special area,
A first predetermined drive means that opens the second special area and closes the first special area by driving the opening/closing means by a first predetermined amount (for example, drives the variable area opening/closing motor 78a by 60 pulses). )and,
By driving the opening/closing means by a second predetermined amount, which is the same direction as the driving direction based on the first predetermined amount of driving, and which is greater than the first predetermined amount, the first special area and the second special area A game machine C3 characterized in that it is equipped with a second predetermined amount driving means (for example, driving the variable probability area opening/closing motor 78a with 120 pulses) for opening both the areas.

According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine C0 or C1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the first special area is disposed upstream of the second special area, and the driving means is disposed upstream of the first special area and the second special area. Then, by driving the opening/closing means by a first predetermined amount by a first predetermined amount driving means provided in the driving means, the second special area is opened and the first special area is closed. Further, by driving the opening/closing means by a second predetermined amount driving means, which is also provided in the driving means, in the same direction as the driving based on the first predetermined amount and by a second predetermined amount that is greater than the first predetermined amount, Both the first special area and the second special area are opened. As a result, the balls flowing into the first special area or the second special area can be sorted by the amount of drive of one drive mechanism, and the above-mentioned sorting becomes possible by the amount of drive of one drive means in one direction. There is no need to provide a drive means, and the game features of the present invention can be realized at low cost.

In the gaming machine C0 or C1,
The driving means includes:
A first drive pattern means (for example, a right variable area when a drive solenoid is turned off) that opens the first special area and closes the second special area when the drive pattern is the first drive pattern (including the initial position). 73 and closes the left side variable area 74),
If the second drive pattern is different from the first drive pattern, the second drive pattern means closes the first special area and opens the second special area (for example, when the drive solenoid is turned on, (closing the area 73 and opening the left probability variable area 74).

According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine C0 or C1, the following effects are achieved. That is, in the case of the first drive pattern, the first special area is opened and the second special area is closed by the first drive pattern means provided in the drive means. Further, when the second drive pattern is different from the first drive pattern, the first special area is closed and the second special area is opened by the second drive pattern means, which is also provided in the drive means. As a result, the game machine balls flowing into the first special area or the second special area can be sorted according to each drive pattern of the first drive mechanism, and the gaming experience of the present invention can be realized at low cost. effective.

In any of gaming machines C0 to C4,
The opening/closing means is
A gaming machine C5 characterized in that the first special area and the second special area are closed at an initial position of the opening/closing means.

According to gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machines C0 to C4, the following effects are achieved. That is, the first special area and the second special area are closed by the opening/closing means at the initial position of the opening/closing means. That is, by configuring the opening/closing means to close both the first special area and the second special area in the initial position, even if the driving means does not operate normally due to a failure etc., both special areas can be closed. The state can be set as follows. Thereby, it is possible to prevent game balls from flowing into the first special area and the second special area even in abnormal situations. Therefore, even if the first special area or the second special area is valid at the time of an abnormality, the second advantageous state can be prevented from occurring, and unexpected disadvantages can be prevented from occurring in the gaming hall. The effect is that it can be prevented.

In any of gaming machines C0 to C5,
The variable ball entry means is
A game machine C6 characterized in that it is provided with a discharge means (for example, a discharge passage 75) for discharging game balls out of the variable ball entry means on the downstream side of the first special area and the second special area. .

According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machines C0 to C5, the following effects are achieved. That is, the discharge means provided in the variable ball entry means discharges the game balls flowing downstream of the first special area and the second special area to the outside of the variable ball entry means. As a result, game balls that have not flown into the first special area or the second special area can be appropriately discharged outside the variable ball entry means, and game balls can be prevented from staying within the variable ball entry means. Can be done. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game balls that have stayed within the variable ball entry means from flowing into the first special area or the second special area, and the game balls that have stayed within the variable ball entry means can be prevented from flowing into the first special area or the second special area. There is an effect that it is possible to prevent an unexpected disadvantage from occurring in the gaming hall, such as the occurrence of an unintended second advantageous state due to the flow into the second special area.

In any of gaming machines C0 to C6,
The advantageous state means are:
Unit game execution means (for example, jackpot processing (S103)) that executes a unit game (for example, one round) for changing the variable ball entry means from the first state to the second state a plurality of times in the advantageous state of No. 1; ),
The special area switching means
In at least one of the unit games, a unit game enabling means (for example, the second round of "latent probability variation B") that makes the special area effective;
A game characterized in that the unit game validating means includes valid suggestion non-execution means (for example, non-notification of valid setting of probability variable areas 73 and 74) that does not suggest that the special area is valid. Machine C7.

According to gaming machine C7, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machines C0 to C6, the following effects are achieved. That is, the unit game executing means provided in the advantageous state means executes a unit game for changing the variable ball entry means from the first state to the second state a plurality of times in one advantageous state. Then, the unit game valid means provided in the special area switching means makes the special area valid in at least one of the unit games, and the valid suggestion non-execution means also provided in the special area switching means determines that the unit game is valid. Validity means does not imply that the special area is valid. As a result, the special area becomes valid in any of the unit games in an advantageous state, and by causing a game ball to flow into the special area during the unit game while it is not suggested that the special area is valid, the second advantageous condition can be achieved. can be generated. Therefore, it is not possible to recognize whether or not the second advantageous state will occur only by passing the game ball in the special area. As a result, it is possible to create a gameplay that allows the player to guess whether or not he or she is playing the game in the second advantageous state, which has the effect of increasing the interest of the game.

In any of gaming machines C0 to C7,
The special area switching means
A gaming machine C8 characterized in that, in a predetermined unit game, either the first special area or the second special area is enabled, and the other is not enabled.

According to gaming machine C8, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machines C0 to C7, the following effects are achieved. That is, the special area switching means is configured such that either the first special area or the second special area is made valid and the other is not made valid in a predetermined unit game. As a result, by providing valid patterns for a plurality of special areas, it is possible to make the first special area or second special area that is set valid difficult to understand, and as a result, it is possible to play the game in the second advantageous state. This has the effect of increasing the interest of the game by creating a gameplay that allows the player to guess whether there is a player or not.

In any of gaming machines C0 to C8,
The second advantageous state means is
The advantageous state based on the first lottery result when the determination means determines that the first lottery result can cause the second advantageous state (for example, the lottery result of "latent probability variation A") A valid passing means (for example, turning on the right probability variation valid flag 203g and turning on the right probability variation area solenoid 73b) for passing the game ball to the first special area or the second special area that is valid;
If the determination means determines that the second lottery result does not cause the second advantageous state (for example, the "time saving A" lottery result), during the advantageous state based on the second lottery result, Passage prevention means (for example, turning on the right probability variation valid flag 203g and turning off the right probability variation area solenoid 73b) for preventing the game ball from passing through the first special area or the second special area where the ball is valid is provided. A gaming machine C9 characterized by the following.

According to gaming machine C9, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machines C0 to C8, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the determining means determines that the first lottery result is one that can generate the second advantageous state, the valid passage means provided in the second advantageous state means generates an advantageous state based on the first lottery result. Inside, the game ball is configured to pass to a first special area or a second special area that is valid. On the other hand, when the determining means determines that the second lottery result does not cause the second advantageous state, the passage blocking means provided in the second advantageous state means prevents the second lottery result from occurring during the advantageous state based on the second lottery result. , the game ball is configured not to pass through the valid first special area or second special area. That is, in the case of the first lottery result that can generate the second advantageous state, by passing the game ball to the valid first special area or second special area, the second advantageous state is generated, If the second lottery result does not cause the second advantageous state to occur, the game ball is not allowed to pass through the valid first special area or second special area, thereby preventing the second advantageous state from occurring. As a result, a second advantageous state is generated depending on whether or not the game ball passes through the valid first special area or second special area, and even if the game ball passes through the first special area or the second special area. Also, by configuring the second special area so that the second advantageous state does not occur unless the first special area or the second special area is valid, the player can guess whether or not he or she is playing the game in the second advantageous state. This has the effect that it is possible to create gameplay and improve the interest of the game.

In gaming machine C9,
The second advantageous state means is
Valid pattern determining means (for example, variable probability area valid table) that determines whether or not to validate the first special area or the second special area for each unit game by using the determination result by the determining unit. 202g) and
An opening/closing pattern determining means (for example, a probability variable area) that determines whether or not to cause a game ball to flow into the first special area or the second special area for each unit game by using the determination result by the determining means. Opening/closing table 202f),
Opening/closing pattern matching means (for example, opening/closing pattern "X1") for making the opening/closing pattern of the first special area or the second special area the same by the opening/closing pattern determining means based on the first lottery result and the second lottery result. )and,
Effective pattern mismatching means (for example, effective pattern "A" and A gaming machine C10 characterized by comprising: "B").

According to the gaming machine C10, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine C9, the following effects are achieved. That is, the valid pattern determining means provided in the second advantageous state means determines whether or not to make the first special area or the second special area valid for each unit game by using the determination result by the determining means. It is determined. Furthermore, the opening/closing pattern determining means similarly provided in the second advantageous state means determines whether the game ball is caused to flow into the first special area or the second special area for each unit game by using the determination result by the determining means. It is decided whether or not. Then, the opening/closing pattern matching means determines that the opening/closing pattern of the first special area or the second special area is the same between the first lottery result and the second lottery result, and the effective pattern mismatching means determines that the opening/closing pattern of the first special area or the second special area is the same between the first lottery result and the second lottery result. The effective pattern of the first special area or the second special area by the effective pattern determining means is made different between the lottery result and the second lottery result. As a result, the opening/closing pattern of the first special area or the second special area is made the same between the first lottery result and the second lottery result, and the opening/closing pattern alone makes it impossible to identify the lottery result. By making the effective pattern of the first special area or the second special area different between the two lottery results, it is configured to make it difficult to recognize whether or not the second advantageous state will occur, and the game is played in the second advantageous state. This has the effect of increasing the interest of the game by creating a gameplay that allows the player to guess whether it is true or not.

In the gaming machine C9 or C10,
Display means (for example, special symbol display device 37) for displaying the first lottery result and the second lottery result;
The display result by the display means makes it difficult to identify the first lottery result or the second lottery result. A gaming machine C11 characterized in that there are 127 types of display patterns, each display pattern being a random pattern with no regularity formed by eight LEDs.

According to the gaming machine C11, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine C9 or C10, the following effects are achieved. That is, the display means displays the first lottery result and the second lottery result, and the result identification difficulty means makes it difficult to identify the first lottery result or the second lottery result based on the display result by the display means. As a result, even if the first lottery result and the second lottery result are displayed, it is difficult to distinguish which lottery result it is, thereby preventing the player from recognizing that the second lottery result is in an advantageous state. If the game ball passes through the first special area or the second special area, it is not possible to recognize whether or not the second advantageous state will occur, and the display result of the display means does not indicate that the second advantageous state will occur. It is not possible to recognize whether or not this will occur. As a result, it is possible to create a gameplay that allows the player to guess whether or not he or she is playing the game in the second advantageous state, which has the effect of increasing the interest of the game.

In any of the gaming machines C0 to C11,
The special area is
A gaming machine C12 characterized in that it is arranged at a position visible to the player.

According to the gaming machine C12, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machines C0 to C11, the following effects are achieved. That is, the special area is arranged at a position that is visible to the player. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by making the player visually recognize that the game ball has passed through the special area, and creating a gameplay that allows the player to guess whether or not a second advantageous state will occur. effective.

<Group D: Opportunities to acquire variable rights multiple times during one jackpot>

Conventionally, in game machines such as pachinko machines, game media such as game balls are fired toward a game area provided on a game board, and the game ball is launched into one of a plurality of ball entrances provided in the game area. A lottery is conducted based on the entry of balls, and if the player wins an advantageous state such as a hit in the lottery, the variable ball entry means, which is normally closed, is opened and the player receives a predetermined gaming value. is configured so that it is granted.

In such a gaming machine, a special area is provided through which the game ball that has flowed into the variable ball entry means can pass, and the opening and closing of the special area is controlled by an opening/closing member, etc., so that when the game ball passes through the special area, There is a pachinko machine that generates a special gaming value based on a second advantageous state that is different from a predetermined gaming value based on the advantageous state (for example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-148264)).

However, the timing at which the game ball can pass through the special area is configured to occur only once during one advantageous state. Therefore, if it is not possible to cause the game ball to flow into the special area at the above timing due to a game abnormality such as a game ball firing abnormality or a sudden problem such as the player's poor physical condition, the second advantageous state cannot be generated. If the player is unable to do so, there is a risk that the player may suffer an unexpected disadvantage and lose interest in the game.

The inventions of group D have been made in view of the circumstances exemplified above, and their purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of gaming.

A firing means for firing a game ball (for example, ball firing unit 112a),
Ball entry means (for example, special figure 1 prize opening 64b) into which the game ball launched by the launch means can enter;
Information acquisition means (for example, first holding ball storage area 203d) that acquires predetermined information due to the game ball entering the ball entrance means;
determination means (for example, jackpot random number table 202a) for determining the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means;
Variable entry ball means (for example, variable prize winning device 65) that can change between a first state in which it is difficult or impossible for game balls to enter and a second state in which game balls can enter;
Advantageous state means (for example, jackpot processing (S103)) that changes the variable ball entry means from the first state to the second state (for example, a jackpot state) by using the judgment result by the judgment means. )and,
a special area (for example, the right probability variable area 73 and the left probability variable area 74) through which the game ball flowing into the variable ball entry means can pass;
A gaming machine comprising a second advantageous state means (for example, probability change transition flag 203i) capable of generating a second advantageous state different from the advantageous state caused by the advantageous state means,
The advantageous state means are:
Special area switching means for switching whether or not to enable the special area (for example, turning on the right probability variation valid flag 203g or the left probability variation validity flag 203h),
The second advantageous state means is
generating the second advantageous state when the game ball passes through the special area that has been effectively set by the special area switching means;
configured so that the second advantageous state does not occur when the game ball passes through the special area that has not been effectively set by the special area switching means,
When generating the second advantageous state, a plurality of timing inflow means (for example, 3 in "latent probability variation A") causes game balls to flow into the effectively set special area at a plurality of timings during the advantageous state. A gaming machine D0 is characterized in that it is equipped with the following: (a round and a sixth round).

According to the gaming machine D0, the game ball is fired by the firing means, and the game ball fired by the firing means is configured to be able to enter the ball entering means, and when the game ball enters the ball entering means, As a result, predetermined information is acquired by the information acquisition means. Then, the determination means determines the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means. Further, variable ball entry means is provided which can change between a first state in which it is difficult or impossible for the game ball to enter and a second state in which the game ball can enter, and by using the determination result by the determination means, The advantageous state means brings the variable ball entry means into an advantageous state from the first state to the second state. Further, a special area is provided through which game balls flowing into the variable ball entry means can pass. Then, the second advantageous state means can generate a second advantageous state different from the advantageous state caused by the advantageous state means. Here, the special area switching means provided in the advantageous state means switches whether or not to enable the special area. When the game ball passes through a special area that has been effectively set by the special area switching means, a second advantageous state is generated by the second advantageous state means, and a second advantageous state is generated by the second advantageous state means. The second advantageous state means is configured to prevent the second advantageous state from occurring when the game ball passes through a special area where the game ball does not exist. Further, when the second advantageous state is generated, the game balls are caused to flow into the valid special area at a plurality of timings during the advantageous state by the plurality of timing inflow means provided in the second advantageous state means. That is, even if the game ball passes through a special area, it is possible to prevent the second advantageous state from occurring unless the special area is valid, and even if the game ball passes through a special area that is set to be valid, it is possible to prevent the second advantageous state from occurring. However, the player is not advised that the second advantageous state will occur at that timing. Thereby, even if the player recognizes that the game ball has passed into the special area, it is possible to create a situation in which the second advantageous state cannot occur. Therefore, it is possible to create a gameplay that allows the player to guess whether or not he or she is playing the game in the second advantageous state, and there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved. Furthermore, when winning an advantageous state that generates a second advantageous state, the game ball is configured to be able to pass through a special area that is effectively set at a plurality of timings during the advantageous state. As a result, even if it is not possible to pass the game ball to the special area at the first timing when the special area is valid, the game ball will pass to the special area that is valid at the other timing. It becomes possible to do so. Therefore, due to a sudden trouble (for example, a game abnormality such as a firing abnormality, a player's poor physical condition, etc.), there is a problem in passing the game ball to the special area at the timing 1 when the special area is valid. To realize a comfortable game without a player suffering a disadvantage due to an unforeseen situation by providing the possibility of passing a game ball to a special area that is valid at the other timing even if the player Can be done. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game and to improve the interest in the game.

In the gaming machine D0,
The special area is
the first special area (for example, the right variable probability area 73);
a second special area different from the first special area (for example, left probability variable area 74),
The multiple timing inflow means includes:
At one timing during the advantageous state, the game ball is allowed to flow into the first special area which is valid, and at another timing different from the first timing during the advantageous state, the second special area which is valid. A game machine D1 is characterized in that it allows game balls to flow into a special area.

According to the gaming machine D1, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine D0, the following effects are achieved. That is, a first special area and a second special area different from the first special area are provided as special areas. The multiple timing inflow means allows the game ball to flow into the first special area which is valid at one timing during the advantageous state, and at another timing which is different from the one timing during the advantageous state. Game balls can flow into a certain second special area. As a result, even if an abnormality occurs in either the first special area or the second special area, if the game ball passes through the other second special area or first special area, A second advantageous condition can occur. Therefore, the player is not disadvantaged due to unforeseen circumstances and can play the game comfortably, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine D0 or D1,
The advantageous state means are:
Unit game execution means (for example, jackpot processing (S103)) that executes a unit game (for example, one round) for changing the variable ball entry means from the first state to the second state a plurality of times in the advantageous state of No. 1; ),
The special area switching means
In each of at least any two of the unit games, a unit game enabling means for activating the special area (for example, the third and sixth rounds of "latent probability variation A");
A game characterized in that the unit game validating means includes valid suggestion non-execution means (for example, non-notification of valid setting of probability variable areas 73 and 74) that does not suggest that the special area is valid. Machine D2.

According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine D0 or D1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the unit game executing means provided in the advantageous state means executes a unit game for changing the variable ball entry means from the first state to the second state a plurality of times in one advantageous state. Then, the unit game valid means provided in the special area switching means makes the special area valid in each of at least two unit games, and the valid suggestion non-execution means also provided in the special area switching means, It is not suggested that the special area is valid by the unit game valid means. As a result, the special area becomes valid in either of at least two unit games of the unit games in an advantageous state, and when there is no indication that the special area is valid, the game ball is placed in the special area in either one of the unit games in the advantageous state. A second advantageous state can be generated by causing the flow to occur. Therefore, it is not possible to recognize whether or not the second advantageous state will occur only by passing the game ball in the special area. As a result, while the configuration is such that the second advantageous state can occur at a plurality of timings, it is possible to create a gameplay that allows the player to guess whether or not he or she is playing the game in the second advantageous state. It has the effect of increasing the interest of people.

In any of the gaming machines D0 to D2,
A gaming state changing means (for example, jackpot end processing (S415)) that changes the gaming state by using the determination result of the determining means;
When the game state is changed by the game state changing means, a notification means (for example, a third symbol display device) that executes a state suggestion notification (for example, "probability change notification performance mode") that suggests the game state to the player; 81) and
The notification means is
Suggestion notification non-execution means (for example, "latent probability variation A A game machine D3 characterized in that it is equipped with a "latent probability variation performance mode" based on the winning of "."

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machines D0 to D2, the following effects are achieved. That is, the gaming state changing means changes the gaming state by using the determination result of the determining means, and when the gaming state changing means changes the gaming state, the notifying means notifies the player of the gaming state. Status suggestion notification is executed. Then, by the suggestion notification non-execution means provided in the notification means, the state suggestion notification corresponding to the second advantageous state is not executed at the timing when the game ball passes through the special area effectively set by the special area switching means. As a result, when the suggestion notification non-execution means does not execute the state suggestion notification corresponding to the second advantageous state and prevents the player from recognizing that the second advantageous state is present, the game ball in the special area Since it is not possible to recognize whether or not the second advantageous state will occur only by passing , it is possible to create a gameplay that allows the player to guess whether or not he or she is playing the game in the second advantageous state. This has the effect of increasing the interest of the game.

In any of the gaming machines D0 to D3,
The special area switching means
A gaming machine D4 characterized in that, in the predetermined unit game, either the first special area or the second special area is activated, and the other is not activated.

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machines D0 to D3, the following effects are achieved. That is, the special area switching means is configured such that either the first special area or the second special area is made valid and the other is not made valid in a predetermined unit game. As a result, by providing valid patterns for a plurality of special areas, it is possible to make it difficult to understand the first special area or second special area that is set as valid, and as a result, it is possible to play the game in the second advantageous state. This has the effect of increasing the interest of the game by creating a gameplay that allows the player to guess whether there is a player or not.

In any of the gaming machines D0 to D4,
The second advantageous state means is
The advantageous state based on the first lottery result when the determination means determines that the first lottery result can cause the second advantageous state (for example, the lottery result of "latent probability variation A") Therein, a valid passage means (for example, turning on the right probability variation valid flag 203g and turning on the right probability variation area solenoid 73b) for passing the game ball to the special area where it is valid;
If the determination means determines that the second lottery result does not cause the second advantageous state (for example, the "time saving A" lottery result), during the advantageous state based on the second lottery result, A game machine D5 characterized in that it is equipped with passage prevention means (for example, turning on the right probability variation valid flag 203g and turning off the right probability variation area solenoid 73b) that prevents the game ball from passing through the special area where it is valid. .

According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machines D0 to D4, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the determination means determines that the first lottery result is capable of generating the second advantageous state, the valid passage means provided in the second advantageous state means determines that the first lottery result is in an advantageous state based on the first lottery result. The game ball is then configured to pass through a special area where it is valid. On the other hand, when the determining means determines that the second lottery result does not cause the second advantageous state, the passage blocking means provided in the second advantageous state means causes the second lottery result to be set during the advantageous state based on the second lottery result. It is configured to prevent the game ball from passing through the special area where it is valid. That is, if the first lottery result can cause the second advantageous state to occur, the second advantageous state will be generated by passing the game ball to the valid special area, but the second advantageous state will not occur. If it is the second lottery result, the second advantageous state is not generated by preventing the game ball from passing through the valid special area. As a result, a second advantageous state is generated depending on whether or not the game ball passes through a special area that is valid, and even if the game ball passes through the special area, if the special area is not valid, the second advantageous state occurs. By configuring the game so that it does not occur, it is possible to create a gameplay that makes the player guess whether or not he or she is playing the game in the second advantageous state, and the effect is that it is possible to improve the interest of the game. There is.

In the gaming machine D5,
a first opening/closing means (for example, right variable area opening/closing plate 73a) for opening and closing the first special area;
A second opening/closing means (for example, left probability variable area opening/closing plate 74a) for opening and closing the second special area,
The valid passing means is
If the first special area is valid according to the special area switching means, open the first opening/closing means to allow the game ball to flow into the first special area,
A gaming machine D6, characterized in that when the second special area is enabled by the special area switching means, the second opening/closing means is opened to allow game balls to flow into the two special areas.

According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine D5, the following effects are achieved. That is, the first opening and closing means opens and closes the first special area, and the second opening and closing means opens and closes the second special area. Then, when the first special area is valid by the special area switching means, the valid passing means opens the first opening/closing means to allow the game ball to flow into the first special area, and the special area switching means causes the game ball to flow into the first special area. When the special area is valid, the second opening/closing means is opened to allow game balls to flow into the second special area. This has the effect that when generating the second advantageous condition, the second advantageous condition can be appropriately generated by passing the game ball to the valid special area.

In the gaming machine D6,
The passage blocking means is
If the first special area is valid according to the special area switching means, the first opening/closing means is closed; and if the second special area is valid according to the special area switching means, the second opening/closing means is closed. A gaming machine D7 characterized by being closed.

According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine D6, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the first special area is enabled by the special game switching means, the passage blocking means closes the first opening/closing means and prevents the game balls from flowing into the first special area. Similarly, when the second special area is enabled by the special area switching means, the second opening/closing means is closed by the passage blocking means, so that game balls are not allowed to flow into the second special area. As a result, by not allowing the game ball to pass through the valid special area when the second advantageous state is not generated, even if the player recognizes that the game ball has passed through the special area, It is possible to create a situation in which the second advantageous state cannot occur. Therefore, it is possible to create a gameplay that allows the player to guess whether or not he or she is playing the game in the second advantageous state, which has the effect of increasing the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine D6 or D7,
The passage blocking means is
If the first special area is valid according to the special area switching means, open the second opening/closing means to allow the game ball to flow into the second special area,
A gaming machine D8, characterized in that when the second special area is enabled by the special area switching means, the first opening/closing means is opened to allow game balls to flow into the first special area.

According to the gaming machine D8, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine D6 or D7, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the first special area is valid according to the special game switching means, the passage blocking means opens the second opening/closing means and the game balls flow into the second special area. Further, when the second special area is determined to be valid by the special area switching means, the first opening/closing means is opened by the passage blocking means to allow the game ball to flow into the first special area. As a result, by allowing the game ball to pass through the ineffective special area when the second advantageous state is not generated, even if the player recognizes that the game ball has passed through the special area, the second advantageous state will not occur. 2. It is possible to create a situation in which an advantageous situation cannot occur. Therefore, it is possible to create a gameplay that allows the player to guess whether or not he or she is playing the game in the second advantageous state, which has the effect of increasing the interest of the game.

In any of gaming machines D5 to D8,
The second advantageous state means is
Valid pattern determining means (for example, variable probability area valid table 202g) that determines whether or not to validate the special area for each unit game by using the determination result by the determining unit;
Opening/closing pattern determining means (for example, probability variable area opening/closing table 202f) that determines whether or not to cause game balls to flow into the special area for each unit game by using the determination result by the determining means;
Opening/closing pattern matching means (for example, opening/closing pattern "X1") for making the opening/closing pattern of the special area by the opening/closing pattern determining means the same between the first lottery result and the second lottery result;
and effective pattern mismatching means (for example, effective patterns "A" and "B") for differentiating the effective pattern of the special area determined by the effective pattern determining means between the first lottery result and the second lottery result. A gaming machine D9 is characterized by:

According to the gaming machine D9, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machines D5 to D8, the following effects are achieved. That is, the valid pattern determining means provided in the second advantageous state means determines whether or not to make the special area valid for each unit game by using the determination result by the determining means. Further, the opening/closing pattern determining means similarly provided in the second advantageous state means determines whether or not to cause the game ball to flow into the special area for each unit game by using the determination result by the determining means. Then, the opening/closing pattern matching means determines that the opening/closing pattern of the special area is the same between the first lottery result and the second lottery result, and the effective pattern mismatching means determines that the opening/closing pattern of the special area is the same between the first lottery result and the second lottery result. Thus, the effective pattern of the special area by the effective pattern determining means is made different. As a result, the opening/closing pattern of the special area is made the same between the first lottery result and the second lottery result, making it impossible to identify the lottery result only by the opening/closing pattern, and the special area can be differentiated between the first lottery result and the second lottery result. By making the effective patterns different, it is difficult to recognize whether or not the second advantageous state will occur, creating a gameplay that allows the player to guess whether or not he or she is playing the game in the second advantageous state. This has the effect of increasing the interest of the game.

In any of gaming machines D5 to D9,
Display means (for example, special symbol display device 37) for displaying the first lottery result and the second lottery result;
The display result by the display means makes it difficult to identify the first lottery result or the second lottery result. A gaming machine D10 characterized in that there are 127 types of display patterns, each display pattern being a random pattern with no regularity formed by eight LEDs.

According to the gaming machine D10, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machines D5 to D9, the following effects are achieved. That is, the display means displays the first lottery result and the second lottery result, and the result identification difficulty means makes it difficult to identify the first lottery result or the second lottery result based on the display result by the display means. As a result, even if the first lottery result and the second lottery result are displayed, it is difficult to distinguish which lottery result it is, thereby preventing the player from recognizing that the second lottery result is in an advantageous state. In such a case, it is not possible to recognize whether or not the second advantageous condition will occur only by passing the game ball in the special area, and whether or not the second advantageous condition will occur can be determined by the display result of the display means. Unrecognizable. As a result, it is possible to create a gameplay that allows the player to guess whether or not he or she is playing the game in the second advantageous state, which has the effect of increasing the interest of the game.

In any of the gaming machines D0 to D10,
The special area is
A gaming machine D11 characterized in that it is arranged at a position that is visible to the player.

According to the gaming machine D11, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machines D0 to D10, the following effects are achieved. That is, the special area is arranged at a position that is visible to the player. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by making the player visually recognize that the game ball has passed through the special area, and creating a gameplay that allows the player to guess whether or not a second advantageous state will occur. effective.

<Group E: Valid setting period of variable valid flag>

Conventionally, in game machines such as pachinko machines, game media such as game balls are fired toward a game area provided on a game board, and the game ball is launched into one of a plurality of ball entrances provided in the game area. A lottery is conducted based on the entry of balls, and if an advantageous state such as a win is won in the lottery, a unit game is executed multiple times in which a variable ball entry means that is normally closed is opened. It is configured such that a predetermined gaming value is awarded to the player.

In such a gaming machine, a special area is provided through which game balls that have flowed into the variable ball entry means can pass, and opening and closing of the special area is controlled by an opening/closing member, etc., and the game is played by opening and closing the opening/closing member in a predetermined unit game. There is a pachinko machine that generates a special gaming value based on a second advantageous state that is different from the predetermined gaming value based on the advantageous state when the ball passes through the special area.

In the pachinko machine described above, in an advantageous state in which a second advantageous state can occur, in a predetermined unit game, the opening/closing member is opened so that the game balls that have flowed into the variable ball entry means can flow into the special area; In an advantageous state in which an advantageous state cannot occur, the opening/closing member is configured to open so that the game balls that have flowed into the variable ball entry means cannot flow into the special area in the unit game (for example, as disclosed in the patent Document 1 (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2017-148264)).

However, in the unit game one before the unit game that opens the special area, the game balls that have flowed into the variable ball entry means may remain (remain) in the variable ball entry means. In such a case, even though the game ball is initially in an advantageous state that does not generate a second advantageous state, the game ball that entered in the previous unit game remains in the variable ball entry means, so that the game ball that normally would not have passed through remains in the variable ball entry means. There is a risk that the player will pass through a special area in which he or she cannot earn any money, and a game value that is not expected based on the game specifications will be awarded, causing an unexpected loss to the game parlor.

The inventions in group E were made in view of the circumstances exemplified above, and their purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can prevent unexpected losses from occurring in a gaming parlor.

A firing means for firing a game ball (for example, ball firing unit 112a),
Ball entry means (for example, special figure 1 prize opening 64b) into which the game ball launched by the launch means can enter;
Information acquisition means (for example, first holding ball storage area 203d) that acquires predetermined information due to the game ball entering the ball entrance means;
determination means (for example, jackpot random number table 202a) for determining the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means;
Variable entry ball means (for example, variable prize winning device 65) that can change between a first state in which it is difficult or impossible for game balls to enter and a second state in which game balls can enter;
Advantageous state means (for example, jackpot processing (S103)) that changes the variable ball entry means from the first state to the second state (for example, a jackpot state) by using the judgment result by the judgment means. )and,
A gaming machine comprising a second advantageous state means (for example, probability change transition flag 203i) capable of generating a second advantageous state different from the advantageous state by the advantageous state means,
Unit game execution means (for example, jackpot processing (S103)) that executes a unit game (for example, one round) for changing the variable ball entry means from the first state to the second state a plurality of times in the advantageous state of No. 1; )and,
a special area (for example, the right probability variable area 73 and the left probability variable area 74) through which the game ball flowing into the variable ball entry means can pass;
Among the unit games executed by the unit game execution means, in a predetermined first unit game, special area switching means (for example, a right probability change valid flag 203g or a left probability change valid flag 203g or a left probability change valid flag 203g (on of the valid flag 203h);
The second advantageous state means is
generating the second advantageous state when the game ball passes through the special area that has been effectively set by the special area switching means;
configured so that the second advantageous state does not occur when the game ball passes through the special area that has not been effectively set by the special area switching means,
The special area switching means
In the first unit game, when the variable ball entry means changes from the first state to the second state, a validity delay means (for example, one count of a round) that does not make the special area valid for a predetermined period. 2nd count) and
A gaming machine E0 characterized in that it is provided with a period validating means (for example, after the third count of a round) for validating the special area after the predetermined period has passed.

According to the game machine E0, the game ball is fired by the firing means, and the game ball fired by the firing means is configured to be able to enter the ball entering means, and when the game ball enters the ball entering means, As a result, predetermined information is acquired by the information acquisition means. Then, the determination means determines the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means. In addition, variable ball entry means is provided that can change between a first state in which it is difficult or impossible for the game ball to enter and a second state in which the game ball can enter, and by using the determination result by the determination means, The advantageous state means brings the variable ball entry means into an advantageous state from the first state to the second state. Further, the second advantageous state means may generate a second advantageous state different from the advantageous state caused by the advantageous state means. Here, in one advantageous state, the unit game executing means provided in the advantageous state means executes a unit game for changing the variable ball entry means from the first state to the second state a plurality of times. A special area is provided through which the game balls flowing into the variable ball entry means can pass, and in a predetermined first unit game among the unit games executed by the unit game execution means, the special area is set by the special area switching means. You can switch whether to enable or not. When the game ball passes through a special area that has been effectively set by the special area switching means, a second advantageous state is generated by the second advantageous state means, and a second advantageous state is generated by the second advantageous state means. The second advantageous state means is configured to prevent the second advantageous state from occurring when the game ball passes through a special area where the game ball does not exist. Here, in the first unit game, when the variable ball entry means changes from the first state to the second state, the special area is activated for a predetermined period by the activation delay means provided in the special area switching means. After the predetermined period has passed, the special area is made valid by the after-period valid means. That is, the special area is configured to be activated not at the start of the first unit game but after a predetermined period has elapsed after the variable ball entry means changes from the first state to the second state. As a result, the game ball that entered in the unit game before the first unit game remains in the variable ball entry means even though the player wins an advantageous state that does not generate the second advantageous state. In this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to pass through a special area that is considered to be valid but should not be able to pass through. This has the effect of preventing losses from occurring.

In the gaming machine E0,
The firing means is
A specific interval firing means for firing game balls at specific intervals (for example, firing game balls at intervals of "0.6 seconds"),
The predetermined period is
In the first unit game, the gaming machine E1 is characterized in that it is a period until a predetermined number of two or more (for example, three) game balls enter.

According to the gaming machine E1, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine E0, the following effects are achieved. That is, the game balls are fired at specific intervals by the specific interval firing means provided in the firing means, and the predetermined period is the period until a predetermined number of game balls flow in in the first unit game. That is, in the first unit game, the special area is not made valid until at least two or more predetermined number of game balls flow in. As a result, by not making the special area valid for at least twice the specific interval at which game balls are fired, the game balls that flowed in in the unit game before the first unit game should not be able to pass through. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to pass through the special area that is considered effective, to give the player the gaming value as expected in the gaming specifications, and to prevent unexpected losses from occurring in the gaming hall. The effect is that you can.

In the gaming machine E0,
The variable ball entry means is
comprising a downstream path (for example, a guide path 72) through which the game balls flowing into the variable ball entry means flow;
The special area is
disposed at a predetermined position on the downstream path,
The predetermined period is
A game machine E2 characterized in that the period is longer than the period from when the game ball flows into the variable entry ball means to the time when the game ball flows down the flow path to the predetermined position.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine E0, the following effects are achieved. That is, the game ball that has flowed into the variable ball entry means is caused to flow down by the flow path provided in the variable ball entry means, and a special area is provided at a predetermined position on the flow path. The predetermined period is equal to or longer than the period during which the game ball enters the variable ball entry means and flows down the flow path to a predetermined position. In other words, the special area is not made effective at least until the ball flows into the variable entry means and flows down to a predetermined position where the special area is disposed. As a result, the special area can be activated after the game balls that flowed in in the unit game before the first unit game flow downstream from the special area, and the special area can be activated at first in an advantageous state in which the second advantageous condition does not occur. To make it difficult to cause a phenomenon in which game balls that flowed in in a unit game before the first unit game pass through a special area that is considered valid, which should not be able to pass through, even though the game ball has been won. be able to. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with a gaming value as expected in the gaming specifications, and to prevent unexpected losses from occurring at the gaming parlor.

In any of gaming machines E0 to E2,
The variable ball entry means is
A first variable ball entry means (for example, variable winning device 65),
A second variable ball entry means (for example, a second variable prize winning device 76) different from the variable ball entry means,
The advantageous state means are:
In the predetermined advantageous state, each time the unit game is executed, the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means are alternately brought into the second state without interruption (for example, , the variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 76 are opened without an interval time), a first channel (for example, a guide passage 72) through which the game balls that have flowed into the first variable ball entering means flow down;
a second channel (for example, a communication passage 77) through which the game balls flowing into the second variable ball entry means flow;
A gaming machine E3 characterized in that it includes a merging means (for example, a merging portion 77a) for merging the first flow path and the second flow path on the upstream side of the special area.

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machines E0 to E2, the following effects are achieved. That is, as the variable ball entry means, a first variable ball entry means and a second ball entry means different from the first ball entry means are provided. The unit game executing means provided in the advantageous state means executes a unit game multiple times in which the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means are changed from the first state to the second state in one advantageous state. be done. Then, by the alternate ball entering means provided in the advantageous state means, the first variable ball entering means and the second variable ball entering means are alternately and continuously operated each time a unit game is executed in a predetermined advantageous state. It is set to the second state. Here, the game balls that have flowed into the first variable ball entry means are flown down by the first flow path, the game balls that have flowed into the second variable ball entry means are flowed down by the second flow path, and the game balls that have flowed into the second variable ball entry means are flown down by the merging means. The first flow path and the second flow path are merged on the upstream side of the special area.

Conventionally, in a unit game that precedes a unit game that opens a special area, game balls that have flowed into the variable ball entry means may remain (remain) in the variable ball entry means. In such a case, even though the game ball is initially in an advantageous state that does not generate a second advantageous state, the remaining game balls that flowed in in the previous unit game pass through a special area that cannot normally pass through. Therefore, there is a risk that a game value that is not expected based on the game specifications will be awarded, causing an unexpected loss to the game parlor.

In particular, in an advantageous situation where two variable ball entry means are used to alternately play unit games without interruption, and when a special area is shared by the two variable ball entry means, the unit game Since there is no (short) interval time between games, if one of the first variable ball entry means or the second variable ball entry means is in the second state based on the first unit game, the There is a high possibility that the game ball that flowed into the other second variable ball entry means or first variable ball entry means remains in the unit game, and it becomes easy to cause unexpected losses in the game parlor.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E3, the special area is not set at the start of the first unit game, but after the first variable ball entry means or the second variable ball entry means changes from the first state to the second state. It is configured to be valid after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. As a result, even though you initially won an advantageous state that does not generate a second advantageous state, the game ball that entered in the unit game before the first unit game becomes valid, which should not normally be able to pass. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to pass through the designated special area, provide the player with the gaming value as expected in the game specifications, and prevent unexpected losses from occurring in the gaming hall. , there is an effect.

In any of gaming machines E0 to E3,
A gaming state changing means (for example, jackpot end processing (S415)) that changes the gaming state by using the determination result of the determining means;
When the game state is changed by the game state changing means, a notification means (for example, a third symbol display device) that executes a state suggestion notification (for example, "probability change notification performance mode") that suggests the game state to the player; 81) and
The notification means is
Suggestion notification non-execution means (for example, "latent probability variation A A game machine E4 characterized in that it is equipped with a ``latent probability change performance mode'' based on the winning of ``.

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machines E0 to E3, the following effects are achieved. That is, the gaming state changing means changes the gaming state by using the determination result of the determining means, and when the gaming state changing means changes the gaming state, the notifying means notifies the player of the gaming state. Status suggestion notification is executed. Then, by the suggestion notification non-execution means provided in the notification means, the state suggestion notification corresponding to the second advantageous state is not executed at the timing when the game ball passes through the special area effectively set by the special area switching means. As a result, when the suggestion notification non-execution means does not execute the state suggestion notification corresponding to the second advantageous state and prevents the player from recognizing that the second advantageous state is present, the game ball in the special area Since it is not possible to recognize whether or not the second advantageous state will occur only by passing , it is possible to create a gameplay that allows the player to guess whether or not he or she is playing the game in the second advantageous state. This has the effect of increasing the interest of the game.

In any of gaming machines E0 to E4,
The special area is
the first special area (for example, the right variable probability area 73);
a second special area different from the first special area (for example, left probability variable area 74);
The special area switching means
A gaming machine E5 characterized in that, in a predetermined unit game, either the first special area or the second special area is activated, and the other is not activated.

According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machines E0 to E4, the following effects are achieved. That is, the special area includes a first special area and a second special area different from the first special area, and the special area switching means selects either the first special area or the second special area for each unit game. The configuration is such that one of the two is valid and the other is not. As a result, by providing valid patterns for a plurality of special areas, it is possible to make the first special area or second special area that is set valid difficult to understand, and as a result, it is possible to play the game in the second advantageous state. This has the effect of increasing the interest of the game by creating a gameplay that allows the player to guess whether there is a player or not.

In any of gaming machines E0 to E5,
The second advantageous state means is
The advantageous state based on the first lottery result when the determination means determines that the first lottery result can cause the second advantageous state (for example, the lottery result of "latent probability variation A") Therein, a valid passing means (for example, turning on the right probability variation valid flag 203g and turning on the right probability variation area solenoid 73b) for passing the game ball to the special area that is valid;
If the determination means determines that the second lottery result does not cause the second advantageous state (for example, the "time saving A" lottery result), during the advantageous state based on the second lottery result, A game machine E6 characterized in that it is equipped with passage prevention means (for example, turning on the right probability variation valid flag 203g and turning off the right probability variation area solenoid 73b) for preventing the game ball from passing through the special area where it is valid. .

According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machines E0 to E5, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the determination means determines that the first lottery result is such that the second advantageous state can be generated by the valid passing means provided in the second advantageous state means, the advantageous state based on the first lottery result is determined. Inside, the game ball is configured to pass to a special area where it is valid. On the other hand, when the passage blocking means provided in the second advantageous state means determines that the second lottery result does not cause a second advantageous state, the second lottery result is determined to be a second lottery result that does not generate a second advantageous state. , is configured to prevent the game ball from passing through the special area where it is valid. That is, if the first lottery result can cause the second advantageous state to occur, by passing the game ball to the valid special area, the second advantageous state will occur, but the second advantageous state will not occur. If it is the second lottery result, the second advantageous state is not generated by preventing the game ball from passing through the valid special area. As a result, a second advantageous state is generated depending on whether or not the game ball passes through a special area that is valid, and even if the game ball passes through the special area, if the special area is not valid, the second advantageous state occurs. By configuring the game so that it does not occur, it is possible to create a gameplay that makes the player guess whether or not he or she is playing the game in the second advantageous state, and the effect is that it is possible to improve the interest of the game. There is.

In gaming machine E6,
a first opening/closing means (for example, right variable area opening/closing plate 73a) for opening/closing the first special area;
A second opening/closing means (for example, left probability variable area opening/closing plate 74a) for opening and closing the second special area,
The valid passage means is
If the first special area is valid according to the special area switching means, open the first opening/closing means to allow the game ball to flow into the first special area,
A gaming machine E7 characterized in that when the second special area is enabled by the special area switching means, the second opening/closing means is opened to allow game balls to flow into the two special areas.

According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine E6, the following effects are achieved. That is, the first opening and closing means opens and closes the first special area, and the second opening and closing means opens and closes the second special area. Then, when the first special area is valid by the special area switching unit, the first opening/closing unit is opened and the game ball flows into the first special area by the valid passing unit, and the special area switching unit allows the game ball to flow into the first special area. When the special area is valid, the second opening/closing means is opened to allow game balls to flow into the second special area. Thereby, when generating the second advantageous condition, there is an effect that the second advantageous condition can be appropriately generated by passing the game ball to the valid special area.

In gaming machine E7,
The passage blocking means is
When the first special area is determined to be valid by the special area switching means, the first opening/closing means is closed to prevent game balls from flowing into the first special area;
A gaming machine E8 characterized in that when the second special area is enabled by the special area switching means, the second opening/closing means is closed to prevent game balls from flowing into the two special areas.

According to the gaming machine E8, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine E7, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the first special area is enabled by the special game switching means, the passage blocking means closes the first opening/closing means and prevents game balls from flowing into the first special area. Further, when the second special area is determined to be valid by the special area switching means, the second opening/closing means is closed by the passage blocking means to prevent the game balls from flowing into the second special area. As a result, by not allowing the game ball to pass through the valid special area when the second advantageous state is not generated, even if the player recognizes that the game ball has passed through the special area, It is possible to create a situation in which the second advantageous state cannot occur. Therefore, it is possible to create a gameplay that allows the player to guess whether or not he or she is playing the game in the second advantageous state, which has the effect of increasing the interest of the game.

In gaming machine E7 or E8,
The passage blocking means is
When the first special area is determined to be valid by the special area switching means, the second opening/closing means is opened to allow the game ball to flow into the second special area;
A gaming machine E9 characterized in that when the second special area is enabled by the special area switching means, the first opening/closing means is opened to allow game balls to flow into the first special area.

According to the gaming machine E9, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine E7 or E8, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the first special area is valid according to the special game switching means, the passage blocking means opens the second opening/closing means and the game balls flow into the second special area. Further, when the second special area is determined to be valid by the special area switching means, the first opening/closing means is opened by the passage blocking means to allow the game ball to flow into the first special area. As a result, by allowing the game ball to pass through the ineffective special area when the second advantageous state is not generated, even if the player recognizes that the game ball has passed through the special area, the second advantageous state will not occur. 2. It is possible to create a situation in which an advantageous situation cannot occur. Therefore, it is possible to create a gameplay that allows the player to guess whether or not he or she is playing the game in the second advantageous state, which has the effect of increasing the interest of the game.

In any of gaming machines E6 to E9,
The second advantageous state means is
Valid pattern determining means (for example, variable probability area valid table 202g) that determines whether or not to validate the special area for each unit game by using the determination result by the determining unit;
Opening/closing pattern determining means (for example, probability variable area opening/closing table 202f) that determines whether or not to cause a game ball to flow into the special area for each unit game by using the determination result by the determining means;
Opening/closing pattern matching means (for example, opening/closing pattern "X1") for making the opening/closing pattern of the special area by the opening/closing pattern determining means the same between the first lottery result and the second lottery result;
and effective pattern mismatching means (for example, effective patterns "A" and "B") for differentiating the effective pattern of the special area determined by the effective pattern determining means between the first lottery result and the second lottery result. A game machine E10 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine E10, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machines E6 to E9, the following effects are achieved. That is, the valid pattern determining means provided in the second advantageous state means determines whether or not to make the special area valid for each unit game by using the determination result by the determining means. Further, the opening/closing pattern determining means similarly provided in the second advantageous state means determines whether or not to cause the game ball to flow into the special area for each unit game by using the determination result by the determining means. Then, the opening/closing pattern matching means determines that the opening/closing pattern of the special area is the same between the first lottery result and the second lottery result, and the effective pattern mismatching means determines that the opening/closing pattern of the special area is the same between the first lottery result and the second lottery result. Thus, the effective pattern of the special area by the effective pattern determining means is made different. As a result, the opening/closing pattern of the special area is made the same between the first lottery result and the second lottery result, making it impossible to identify the lottery result only by the opening/closing pattern, and the special area can be differentiated between the first lottery result and the second lottery result. By differentiating the effective patterns, it is difficult to recognize whether or not the second advantageous state will occur, creating a gameplay that allows the player to guess whether or not he or she is playing the game in the second advantageous state. This has the effect of increasing the interest of the game.

In any of gaming machines E6 to E10,
Display means (for example, special symbol display device 37) for displaying the first lottery result and the second lottery result;
The display result by the display means makes it difficult to identify the first lottery result or the second lottery result. A gaming machine E11 characterized in that there are 127 types of display patterns, each display pattern being a random pattern with no regularity formed by eight LEDs.

According to the gaming machine E11, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machines E6 to E10, the following effects are achieved. That is, the display means displays the first lottery result and the second lottery result, and the result identification difficulty means makes it difficult to identify the first lottery result or the second lottery result based on the display result by the display means. As a result, even if the first lottery result and the second lottery result are displayed, it is difficult to distinguish which lottery result it is, thereby preventing the player from recognizing that the second lottery result is in an advantageous state. In such a case, it is not possible to recognize whether or not the second advantageous state will occur only by passing the game ball in the special area, and whether or not the second advantageous condition will occur can be determined by the display result of the display means. Unrecognizable. As a result, it is possible to create a gameplay that allows the player to guess whether or not he or she is playing the game in the second advantageous state, which has the effect of increasing the interest of the game.

In any of gaming machines E0 to E11,
The special area is
A gaming machine E12 characterized in that it is arranged at a position visible to the player.

According to the gaming machine E12, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machines E0 to E11, the following effects are achieved. That is, the special area is arranged at a position that is visible to the player. As a result, it is possible to create a gameplay that allows the player to visually recognize that the game ball has passed through the special area and to guess whether or not a second advantageous state will occur, thereby increasing the interest of the game. effective.

<Group F: Synchronize interval time and open time>
Conventionally, in game machines such as pachinko machines, game media such as game balls are fired toward a game area provided on a game board, and the game balls are launched into one of a plurality of ball entrances provided in the game area. A lottery is conducted based on the entry of balls, and if an advantageous state such as a win is won in the lottery, a unit game is executed multiple times in which a variable ball entry means that is normally closed is opened. It is configured such that a predetermined gaming value is awarded to the player.

In such a gaming machine, a special area is provided through which game balls that have flowed into the variable ball entry means can pass, and opening and closing of the special area is controlled by an opening/closing member, etc., and the game is played by opening/closing the opening/closing member in a predetermined unit game. There is a pachinko machine that generates a special gaming value based on a second advantageous condition that is different from the predetermined gaming value based on the advantageous condition when the ball passes through the special area.

In addition, in the above pachinko machine, for example, even if a second advantageous state occurs, the player is not notified whether or not the second advantageous state occurs, and the second advantageous state does not occur. There is one that executes the notification mode. In other words, by creating a gameplay that makes it appear as if the second advantageous state will not occur for the player and guessing whether or not the second advantageous state will be given to the player, the interest of the game is increased. (For example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2017-148264)).

However, since the above gaming machine is configured to generate the second advantageous state without exception when the game ball passes through the special area, the player can know in advance the unit game in which the special area is opened, and the unit At the stage when the player visually recognizes that the game ball has passed through the special area during the game, the player recognizes that the second advantageous state will occur. For this reason, if the normal notification mode is executed after the player recognizes the occurrence of the second advantageous state due to the passage of the game ball into the special area, the game may not be as interesting as expected for the player. In fact, there is a risk that the player may lose interest in the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The inventions of group F were made in view of the circumstances exemplified above, and their purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of gaming.

A firing means for firing a game ball (for example, ball firing unit 112a),
Ball entry means (for example, special figure 1 prize opening 64b) into which the game ball launched by the launch means can enter;
Information acquisition means (for example, first holding ball storage area 203d) that acquires predetermined information due to the game ball entering the ball entrance means;
determination means (for example, jackpot random number table 202a) for determining the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means;
A gaming state changing means (for example, jackpot end processing (S415)) that changes the gaming state by using the determination result of the determining means;
When the game state is changed by the game state changing means, a notification means (for example, a third symbol display device) that executes a state suggestion notification (for example, "probability change notification performance mode") that suggests the game state to the player; 81) and
Variable entry ball means (for example, variable prize winning device 65) that can change between a first state in which it is difficult or impossible for game balls to enter and a second state in which game balls can enter;
Advantageous state means (for example, jackpot processing (S103)) that changes the variable ball entry means from the first state to the second state (for example, a jackpot state) by using the judgment result by the judgment means. ),
Unit game execution means (for example, jackpot processing (S103)) that executes a unit game (for example, one round) for changing the variable ball entry means from the first state to the second state a plurality of times in the advantageous state of No. 1; )and,
In the advantageous state of No. 1, after the execution of the unit game, the variable ball entry means is changed from the second state to the first state, and then a standby game (for example, an interval time) is performed until the variable ball entry means is changed to the second state again. A standby game execution means to be executed (for example, S461 of the open process (S424)),
a special area (for example, the right probability variable area 73 and the left probability variable area 74) through which the game ball flowing into the variable ball entry means can pass;
Special area switching means for switching whether or not to enable the special area (for example, turning on the right probability variation valid flag 203g or the left probability variation validity flag 203h),
The game state changing means is
When a game ball passes through the special area effectively set by the special area switching means, a second advantageous state means (for example, a probability change transition) that can generate a second advantageous state different from the advantageous state by the advantageous state means. flag 203i),
The unit game execution means is
Pseudo-standby execution means for executing a pseudo-standby game (for example, a pseudo-interval time) in which the variable ball entry means is in the first state during a predetermined unit game for a period equivalent to or approximately the same as the standby game; , comprising;
The second advantageous state means is
generating the second advantageous state when the game ball passes through the special area that has been effectively set by the special area switching means;
configured so that the second advantageous state does not occur when the game ball passes through the special area that has not been effectively set by the special area switching means,
The notification means is
Suggestion notification non-execution means (for example, "latent probability variation A A game machine F0 is characterized in that it is equipped with a ``latent probability change performance mode'' based on the winning of ``.

According to the gaming machine F0, the game ball is fired by the firing means, and the game ball fired by the firing means is configured to be able to enter the ball entering means, and when the game ball enters the ball entering means, As a result, predetermined information is acquired by the information acquisition means. Then, the determining means determines the predetermined information acquired by the information acquiring means, and by using the determination result of the determining means, the gaming state changing means changes the gaming state, and the gaming state changing means changes the gaming state. When the game status is changed, the notification means executes status suggestion notification to notify the player of the gaming status. In addition, variable ball entry means is provided that can change between a first state in which it is difficult or impossible for the game ball to enter and a second state in which the game ball can enter, and by using the determination result by the determination means, The advantageous state means brings the variable ball entry means into an advantageous state from the first state to the second state. Here, in the advantageous state 1, the unit game execution means executes the unit game for changing the variable ball entry means from the first state to the second state a plurality of times, and in the advantageous state 1, the unit game execution means After the game is executed, the variable ball entry means is changed from the second state to the first state, and then a standby game is executed until it is changed to the second state again. A special area is provided through which the game balls flowing into the variable ball entry means can pass, and whether or not the special area is enabled is switched by the special area switching means. Further, when the game ball passes through the special area effectively set by the special area switching means, the second advantageous state means provided in the game state changing means generates a second advantageous state different from the advantageous state according to the advantageous state means. may occur. Here, the pseudo standby execution means provided in the unit game execution means executes, during a predetermined unit game, a pseudo standby game in which the variable ball entering means is in the first state for a period equivalent to or approximately the same as the standby game. executed. When the game ball passes through a special area that has been effectively set by the special area switching means, a second advantageous state is generated by the second advantageous state means, and a second advantageous state is generated by the second advantageous state means. The second advantageous state means is configured to prevent the second advantageous state from occurring when the game ball passes through a special area where the game ball does not exist. Then, the suggestion notification non-execution means provided in the notification means prevents the state suggestion notification corresponding to the second advantageous state from being executed at the timing when the game ball passes through the special area effectively set by the special area switching means. configured. That is, even if the game ball passes through a special area, it is possible to prevent the second advantageous state from occurring unless the special area is valid, and even if the game ball passes through a special area that is set to be valid, it is possible to prevent the second advantageous state from occurring. However, the player is not advised that the second advantageous state will occur at that timing. Further, by making it difficult for the player to distinguish between a standby game and a pseudo standby game, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the unit game that is being executed. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to grasp the unit game in which the special area is valid, and to make it difficult to recognize whether or not the second advantageous state occurs. Therefore, when the suggestion notification non-execution means does not execute the state suggestion notification corresponding to the second advantageous state and prevents the player from recognizing that the second advantageous state is present, the game in the second advantageous state is This has the effect that it is possible to create a gameplay that allows the player to guess whether or not he or she is playing the game, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

Furthermore, "a period equivalent to or approximately equivalent to a waiting game" may be any period of time as long as it is difficult for a player to distinguish between waiting time and pseudo waiting time. For example, waiting time Examples include a period in which the waiting time and the pseudo waiting time completely match, and a period in which the waiting time and the pseudo waiting time have a time difference (for example, about 0.2 seconds) that is difficult for humans to recognize.

In the gaming machine F0,
The special area switching means
The gaming machine F1 is characterized by comprising a predetermined timing validating means for validating the special area at a predetermined timing other than the pseudo standby game by the pseudo standby execution means during the unit game.

According to the gaming machine F1, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine F0, the following effects are achieved. That is, by the predetermined timing validating means provided in the special area switching means, the special area is made valid during the unit game at least at a predetermined timing other than the pseudo standby game by the pseudo standby execution means. As a result, the special area is enabled in a situation where the variable ball entry means is in the second state, and by configuring the special area so that the game ball can pass through, the game player enters the special area when it is desired to generate the second advantageous state. This has the effect of allowing the ball to pass through and reliably generating the second advantageous state.

In the gaming machine F0 or F1,
The unit game execution means is
The length of the period of the pseudo standby game executed by the pseudo standby execution means is made to be the same as the length of the second state period in which the variable ball entering means is in the second state during the unit game. A gaming machine F2 is characterized in that the unit game is executed at a time.

According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine F0 or F1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the length of the period of the pseudo standby game executed by the unit game execution means by the pseudo standby execution means is the same as the length of the second state period during which the variable ball entering means is in the second state during the unit game. A unit game is executed so that. As a result, it becomes difficult to distinguish between the standby game and the pseudo standby game only by the period, and the effect is that it becomes even more difficult for the player to grasp the number of unit games being executed.

In gaming machine F2,
The unit game execution means is
A gaming machine F3 characterized in that the second state period is executed a plurality of times during one of the unit games.

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine F2, the following effects are achieved. That is, the unit game execution means executes the second state period a plurality of times during one unit game. This has the effect of making it even more difficult for the player to grasp the number of unit games being executed.

In gaming machine F2 or F3,
The pseudo standby execution means is
The gaming machine F4 is characterized in that the pseudo standby game is executed a plurality of times during the unit game of 1.

According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine F2 or F3, the following effects are achieved. That is, the pseudo standby game is executed a plurality of times during one unit game by the pseudo standby execution means. This makes it difficult to distinguish between a standby game and a pseudo standby game, and has the effect of making it even more difficult for the player to grasp the number of unit games being executed.

In any of gaming machines F0 to F4,
A game characterized by comprising: validity suggestion non-execution means (for example, non-notification of validity setting of variable probability regions 73 and 74) that does not suggest that the special area is valid by the predetermined timing validity means. Machine F5.

According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machines F0 to F4, the following effects are achieved. That is, the valid suggestion non-execution means does not suggest that the special area is valid by the predetermined timing game valid means. As a result, the special area becomes valid in any of the unit games in an advantageous state, and by causing a game ball to flow into the special area during the unit game while it is not suggested that the special area is valid, the second advantageous condition can be achieved. can be generated. Therefore, it is not possible to recognize whether or not the second advantageous state will occur only by passing the game ball in the special area. As a result, it is possible to create a gameplay that allows the player to guess whether or not he or she is playing the game in the second advantageous state, which has the effect of increasing the interest of the game.

In any of gaming machines F0 to F5,
The special area is
the first special area (for example, the right variable probability area 73);
a second special area different from the first special area (for example, left probability variable area 74),
The special area switching means
A gaming machine F6 characterized in that, in the predetermined unit game, either the first special area or the second special area is activated, and the other is not activated.

According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machines F0 to F5, the following effects are achieved. That is, a first special area and a second special area different from the first special area are provided as special areas, and the special area switching means switches between the first special area and the second special area in a predetermined unit game. It is configured such that one of them is valid and the other is not. As a result, by providing valid patterns for a plurality of special areas, it is possible to make the first special area or second special area that is set valid difficult to understand, and as a result, it is possible to play the game in the second advantageous state. This has the effect of increasing the interest of the game by creating a gameplay that allows the player to guess whether there is a player or not.

In any of gaming machines F0 to F6,
The second advantageous state means is
The advantageous state based on the first lottery result when the determination means determines that the first lottery result can cause the second advantageous state (for example, the lottery result of "latent probability variation A") Therein, a valid passage means (for example, turning on the right probability variation valid flag 203g and turning on the right probability variation area solenoid 73b) for passing the game ball to the special area where it is valid;
If the determination means determines that the second lottery result does not cause the second advantageous state (for example, the "time saving A" lottery result), during the advantageous state based on the second lottery result, A game machine F7 characterized in that it is equipped with passage prevention means (for example, turning on the right probability variation valid flag 203g and turning off the right probability variation area solenoid 73b) for preventing the game ball from passing through the special area where it is valid. .

According to the gaming machine F7, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machines F0 to F6, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the determining means determines that the first lottery result is capable of generating the second advantageous state, the valid passage means provided in the second advantageous state means determines that the first lottery result is in an advantageous state based on the first lottery result. The game ball is then configured to pass through a special area where it is valid. On the other hand, when the determining means determines that the second lottery result does not cause the second advantageous state, the passage blocking means provided in the second advantageous state means causes the second lottery result to be set during the advantageous state based on the second lottery result. It is configured to prevent the game ball from passing through the special area where it is valid. That is, if the first lottery result can cause the second advantageous state to occur, by passing the game ball to the valid special area, the second advantageous state will occur, but the second advantageous state will not occur. If it is the second lottery result, the second advantageous state is not generated by preventing the game ball from passing through the valid special area. As a result, a second advantageous state is generated depending on whether or not the game ball passes through a special area that is valid, and even if the game ball passes through the special area, if the special area is not valid, the second advantageous state occurs. By configuring the game so that it does not occur, it is possible to create a gameplay that makes the player guess whether or not he or she is playing the game in the second advantageous state, and the effect is that it is possible to improve the interest of the game. There is.

In gaming machine F7,
a first opening/closing means (for example, right variable area opening/closing plate 73a) for opening and closing the first special area;
A second opening/closing means (for example, left probability variable area opening/closing plate 74a) for opening and closing the second special area,
The valid passage means is
If the first special area is valid according to the special area switching means, open the first opening/closing means to allow the game ball to flow into the first special area,
A gaming machine F8 characterized in that, when the second special area is enabled by the special area switching means, the second opening/closing means is opened to allow game balls to flow into the two special areas.

According to the gaming machine F8, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine F7, the following effects are achieved. That is, the first opening and closing means opens and closes the first special area, and the second opening and closing means opens and closes the second special area. Then, when the first special area is valid by the special area switching unit, the first opening/closing unit is opened and the game ball flows into the first special area by the valid passing unit, and the special area switching unit allows the game ball to flow into the first special area. When the special area is valid, the second opening/closing means is opened to allow game balls to flow into the second special area. Thereby, when generating the second advantageous condition, there is an effect that the second advantageous condition can be appropriately generated by passing the game ball to the valid special area.

In gaming machine F8,
The passage blocking means is
If the first special area is enabled by the special area switching means, the first opening/closing means is closed to prevent game balls from flowing into the first special area;
A gaming machine F9 characterized in that when the second special area is enabled by the special area switching means, the second opening/closing means is closed to prevent game balls from flowing into the two special areas.

According to the gaming machine F9, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine F8, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the first special area is enabled by the special game switching means, the passage blocking means closes the first opening/closing means and prevents game balls from flowing into the first special area. Further, when the second special area is determined to be valid by the special area switching means, the second opening/closing means is closed by the passage blocking means to prevent the game balls from flowing into the second special area. As a result, by not allowing the game ball to pass through the valid special area when the second advantageous state is not generated, even if the player recognizes that the game ball has passed through the special area, It is possible to create a situation in which the second advantageous state cannot occur. Therefore, it is possible to create a gameplay that allows the player to guess whether or not he or she is playing the game in the second advantageous state, which has the effect of increasing the interest of the game.

In gaming machine F8 or F9,
The passage blocking means is
If the first special area is valid according to the special area switching means, open the second opening/closing means to allow the game ball to flow into the second special area,
A gaming machine F10 characterized in that when the second special area is enabled by the special area switching means, the first opening/closing means is opened to allow game balls to flow into the first special area.

According to the gaming machine F10, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine F8 or F9, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the first special area is valid according to the special game switching means, the passage blocking means opens the second opening/closing means and the game balls flow into the second special area. Further, when the second special area is determined to be valid by the special area switching means, the first opening/closing means is opened by the passage blocking means to allow the game ball to flow into the first special area. As a result, by allowing the game ball to pass through the ineffective special area when the second advantageous state is not generated, even if the player recognizes that the game ball has passed through the special area, the second advantageous state will not occur. 2. It is possible to create a situation in which an advantageous situation cannot occur. Therefore, it is possible to create a gameplay that allows the player to guess whether or not he or she is playing the game in the second advantageous state, which has the effect of increasing the interest of the game.

In any of gaming machines F7 to F10,
The second advantageous state means is
Valid pattern determining means (for example, variable probability area valid table 202g) that determines whether or not to validate the special area for each unit game by using the determination result by the determining unit;
Opening/closing pattern determining means (for example, probability variable area opening/closing table 202f) that determines whether or not to cause game balls to flow into the special area for each unit game by using the determination result by the determining means;
Opening/closing pattern matching means (for example, opening/closing pattern "X1") for making the opening/closing pattern of the special area by the opening/closing pattern determining means the same between the first lottery result and the second lottery result;
and effective pattern mismatching means (for example, effective patterns "A" and "B") for differentiating the effective pattern of the special area determined by the effective pattern determining means between the first lottery result and the second lottery result. Gaming machine F11 is characterized by:

According to the gaming machine F11, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machines F7 to F10, the following effects are achieved. That is, the valid pattern determining means provided in the second advantageous state means determines whether or not to make the special area valid for each unit game by using the determination result by the determining means. Further, the opening/closing pattern determining means similarly provided in the second advantageous state means determines whether or not to cause the game ball to flow into the special area for each unit game by using the determination result by the determining means. Then, the opening/closing pattern matching means determines that the opening/closing pattern of the special area is the same between the first lottery result and the second lottery result, and the effective pattern mismatching means determines that the opening/closing pattern of the special area is the same between the first lottery result and the second lottery result. Thus, the effective pattern of the special area by the effective pattern determining means is made different. As a result, the opening/closing pattern of the special area is made the same between the first lottery result and the second lottery result, making it impossible to identify the lottery result only by the opening/closing pattern, and the special area can be differentiated between the first lottery result and the second lottery result. By differentiating the effective patterns, it is difficult to recognize whether or not the second advantageous state will occur, creating a gameplay that allows the player to guess whether or not he or she is playing the game in the second advantageous state. This has the effect of increasing the interest of the game.

In any of gaming machines F7 to F11,
Display means (for example, special symbol display device 37) for displaying the first lottery result and the second lottery result;
The display result by the display means makes it difficult to identify the first lottery result or the second lottery result. A gaming machine F12 characterized in that there are 127 types of display patterns, each display pattern being a random pattern with no regularity formed by eight LEDs.

According to the gaming machine F12, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machines F7 to F11, the following effects are achieved. That is, the display means displays the first lottery result and the second lottery result, and the result identification difficulty means makes it difficult to identify the first lottery result or the second lottery result based on the display result by the display means. As a result, even if the first lottery result and the second lottery result are displayed, it is difficult to distinguish which lottery result it is, thereby preventing the player from recognizing that the second lottery result is in an advantageous state. In such a case, it is not possible to recognize whether or not the second advantageous state will occur only by passing the game ball in the special area, and whether or not the second advantageous condition will occur can be determined by the display result of the display means. Unrecognizable. As a result, it is possible to create a gameplay that allows the player to guess whether or not he or she is playing the game in the second advantageous state, which has the effect of increasing the interest of the game.

In any of gaming machines F0 to F12,
The special area is
A gaming machine F13 characterized in that it is disposed at a position visible to the player.

According to the gaming machine F13, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machines F0 to F12, the following effects are achieved. That is, the special area is arranged at a position that is visible to the player. As a result, it is possible to create a gameplay that allows the player to visually recognize that the game ball has passed through the special area and to guess whether or not a second advantageous state will occur, thereby increasing the interest of the game. effective.

In gaming machines F0 to F13,
The unit game is
a pure unit game in which, after changing the variable ball entry means from the first state to the second state, one unit game is ended as the first state based on the establishment of a predetermined ending condition;
After the variable ball entry means is changed from the first state to the second state, the first state is set as the pseudo standby game, and then the variable ball entry means is set to the second state, based on the establishment of the end condition. A gaming machine F14 characterized in that the first state includes a pseudo unit game that ends one of the unit games.

According to the gaming machine F14, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machines F0 to F13, the following effects are achieved. That is, as a unit game, a pure unit game is provided in which, after changing the variable ball entry means from the first state to the second state, one unit game is brought to the first state based on the establishment of a predetermined ending condition. . Also, as a unit game, after changing the variable ball entry means from the first state to the second state, the first state as a pseudo standby game, and then the second state, based on the establishment of the end condition. As the first state, a pseudo unit game is provided in which one unit game is completed. This has the effect of providing variations in unit games and increasing the interest of the game.

<G group: Operation check release before actual release>
Conventionally, in game machines such as pachinko machines, game media such as game balls are fired toward a game area provided on a game board, and the game ball is launched into one of a plurality of ball entrances provided in the game area. A lottery is conducted based on the entry of balls, and if the player wins an advantageous state such as a hit in the lottery, the variable ball entry means, which is normally closed, is opened and the player receives a predetermined gaming value. is configured so that it is granted.

In such a gaming machine, a special area is provided through which the game ball that has flown into the variable ball entry means can pass, and the opening and closing of the special area is controlled by an opening/closing member, etc., so that when the game ball passes through the special area, There is a pachinko machine that generates a special gaming value based on a second advantageous state that is different from a predetermined gaming value based on the advantageous state (for example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-148264)).

However, in the gaming machine described above, if some abnormality occurs and the opening/closing member is not opened, the game balls may not be allowed to flow into the special area, which may cause the player to suffer an unexpected disadvantage.

The inventions of group G were made in view of the circumstances exemplified above, and their purpose is to provide a gaming machine that suppresses disadvantages to players.

A firing means for firing a game ball (for example, ball firing unit 112a),
Ball entry means (for example, special figure 1 prize opening 64b) into which the game ball launched by the launch means can enter;
Information acquisition means (for example, first holding ball storage area 203d) that acquires predetermined information due to the game ball entering the ball entrance means;
determination means (for example, jackpot random number table 202a) for determining the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means;
Variable entry ball means (for example, variable prize winning device 65) that can change between a first state in which it is difficult or impossible for game balls to enter and a second state in which game balls can enter;
Advantageous state means (for example, jackpot processing (S103)) that changes the variable ball entry means from the first state to the second state (for example, a jackpot state) by using the judgment result by the judgment means. )and,
A gaming machine comprising a second advantageous state means (for example, probability change transition flag 203i) capable of generating a second advantageous state different from the advantageous state by the advantageous state means,
a special area (for example, the right probability variable area 73 and the left probability variable area 74) through which the game ball flowing into the variable ball entry means can pass;
An opening/closing means for opening and closing the special area (for example, a right probability variable area opening/closing plate 73a and a left probability variable area opening/closing plate 74a);
A driving means (for example, a right variable area solenoid 73b and a left variable area solenoid 74b) for opening and closing the opening/closing means,
The driving means is
A main release execution means for executing a main release that allows game balls to flow into the special area (for example, a "2000ms" release based on a win on the third count);
Before the regular opening is executed by the regular opening execution means, the temporary opening execution means executes a temporary opening in which the opening/closing means is opened for a shorter time than the regular opening (for example, the opening for "60 ms" based on the first count win). )and,
Temporary release determining means (for example, the right probability variable area solenoid 73b and the left probability variable area solenoid 74b operate normally based on the first count win ) and
Abnormality reporting means (for example, error notification) for notifying that an abnormality has occurred in the opening/closing means when the temporary opening determining means determines that the temporary opening is not normally executed. A gaming machine G0 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine G0, the game ball is fired by the firing means, and the game ball fired by the firing means is configured to be able to enter the ball entering means, and when the game ball enters the ball entering means, As a result, predetermined information is acquired by the information acquisition means. Then, the determination means determines the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means. In addition, variable ball entry means is provided that can change between a first state in which it is difficult or impossible for the game ball to enter and a second state in which the game ball can enter, and by using the determination result by the determination means, The advantageous state means brings the variable ball entry means into an advantageous state from the first state to the second state. Further, the second advantageous state means may generate a second advantageous state different from the advantageous state caused by the advantageous state means. Here, a special area is provided through which game balls flowing into the variable ball entry means can pass, the special area is opened and closed by the opening and closing means, and the opening and closing means is driven to open and close by the driving means. Further, the main release execution means provided in the drive means executes the main release so that game balls can flow into the special area, and the provisional release execution means also provided in the drive means causes the main release execution by the main release execution means to be executed. Before execution, a temporary opening is performed in which the opening/closing means is opened for a shorter time than the actual opening. Then, the temporary release determining means, which is also provided in the drive means, determines whether or not the temporary release by the temporary release executing means has been normally executed, and the temporary release determining means determines that the temporary opening has not been normally executed. If it is determined, the abnormality notification means notifies that an abnormality has occurred in the opening/closing means. As a result, it is possible to perform temporary release before allowing game balls to flow into the special area, and determine whether or not the special area will be opened normally. By being notified, this can be recognized at an early stage. Therefore, it is possible to recognize at an early stage before the opening of the game that game balls cannot be allowed to flow into the special area, and to make the staff of the game parlor aware of this fact. As a result, the clerk at the game parlor can understand the abnormality in the opening/closing means and respond to the player, and can prevent the player from being disadvantaged by not being given the second advantageous state. There is an effect.

In gaming machine G0,
A gaming machine G1 comprising: a game progress stopping means for stopping the progress of the game when the provisional opening determining means determines that the provisional opening is not normally executed.

According to the gaming machine G1, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine G0, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the provisional release determining means determines that the provisional release is not normally executed, the game progress stopping means stops the progress of the game. As a result, by stopping the progress of the game when an abnormality in which the special area is not opened normally is recognized, it is possible to prevent future problems such as the game ball not passing through the special area. This has the effect of suppressing disadvantages to players.

In gaming machine G1,
A gaming machine G2 comprising a game restarting means for restarting the game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition when the game is stopped by the game progress stopping means.

According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine G1, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the game is stopped by the game progress stopping means, the game restarting means restarts the game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. As a result, for example, by stopping the progress of the game when an abnormality in which the special area is not opened normally is recognized, it is possible to restart the game from the point after the stop after the abnormality is resolved, and the second advantageous state is There is an effect that it is possible to suppress disadvantages to the player due to not being awarded the bonus.

In any of gaming machines G0 to G2,
The temporary release execution means is
A game machine G3 characterized in that the opening/closing means is driven to open so that it becomes difficult or impossible for game balls to flow into the special area.

According to gaming machine G3, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machines G0 to G2, the following effects are achieved. That is, the opening/closing means is driven to open by the temporary opening execution means so that it becomes difficult or impossible for game balls to flow into the special area. As a result, by not allowing game balls to flow into the special area during the temporary opening, it is possible to prevent unexpected events such as, for example, game balls staying in the variable ball entry means from flowing into the special area, This has the effect of providing the player with a gaming value as expected in the gaming specifications and preventing unexpected losses from occurring at the gaming parlor.

In any of gaming machines G0 to G3,
The book opening execution means is
regular opening determining means (for example, probability variable area opening/closing table 202f) for determining whether to execute the regular opening;
When the main release determining means decides to execute the main release, an execution means for executing the main release (for example, opening the right probability variable area 73 in the first round of "time saving A"); Prepare,
The temporary release execution means is
A gaming machine G4 characterized in that the provisional release is executed even when the actual release is not executed by the execution means.

According to gaming machine G4, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machines G0 to G3, the following effects are achieved. That is, the official release determining means provided in the official release executing means determines whether or not to carry out the official release, and when the official release determining means determines to execute the official release, the executing means The official release is executed. Then, the provisional release execution means executes the provisional release even when the execution means does not execute the main release. As a result, even if the actual opening of the special area is not executed, it is possible to recognize whether or not the opening/closing means can be opened normally and allow the game ball to flow into the special area, and the game ball can be moved into the special area. It is possible to recognize at an early stage that the game cannot be allowed to flow into the game, and to make the store staff at the game parlor etc. aware of this fact. As a result, the clerk at the game parlor can understand the abnormality in the opening/closing means and respond to the player, and can prevent the player from being disadvantaged by not being given the second advantageous state. There is an effect.

In any of gaming machines G0 to G4,
The special area is
the first special area (for example, the right variable probability area 73);
a second special area different from the first special area (for example, left probability variable area 74),
The opening/closing means is
a first opening/closing means (for example, right variable area opening/closing plate 73a) for opening/closing the first special area;
A second opening/closing means (for example, left probability variable area opening/closing plate 74a) for opening and closing the second special area,
The book opening execution means is
Executing the main opening by opening either the first opening/closing means or the second opening/closing means,
The temporary release execution means is
A gaming machine G5 characterized in that the temporary opening is executed by opening both the first opening/closing means and the second opening/closing means.

According to gaming machine G5, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machines G0 to G4, the following effects are achieved. That is, the special area is provided with a first special area and a second special area different from the first special area, and the first special area is opened and closed by the first opening and closing means provided in the opening and closing means, and the first special area is also opened and closed. The second special area is opened and closed by the second opening/closing means provided in the means. Then, the main opening execution means opens either the first opening/closing means or the second opening/closing means to execute the final opening, and the temporary opening execution means opens both the first opening/closing means and the second opening/closing means. temporary release is executed. As a result, even if the main opening of the first special area or the second special area is not executed, the temporary opening is executed by both the first opening/closing means and the second opening means, and both opening/closing means are opened normally and the special It is possible to recognize whether or not it is possible to cause game balls to flow into the area. Therefore, it is possible to recognize at an early stage that the game balls cannot be allowed to flow into the special area, and to make the staff of the game parlor etc. aware of this fact. As a result, the clerk at the game parlor can understand the abnormality in the opening/closing means and respond to the player, and can prevent the player from being disadvantaged by not being given the second advantageous state. There is an effect.

In any of gaming machines G0 to G5,
Special area switching means for switching whether or not to enable the special area (for example, turning on the right probability variation valid flag 203g or the left probability variation validity flag 203h),
The second advantageous state means is
generating the second advantageous state when the game ball passes through the special area that has been effectively set by the special area switching means;
A gaming machine G6 characterized in that the gaming machine G6 is configured so that the second advantageous state does not occur when a game ball passes through the special area that has not been effectively set by the special area switching means.

According to gaming machine G6, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machines G0 to G5, the following effects are achieved. That is, the special area switching means switches whether or not to enable the special area. When the game ball passes through a special area that has been effectively set by the special area switching means, a second advantageous state is generated by the second advantageous state means, and a second advantageous state is generated by the second advantageous state means. The second advantageous state means is configured to prevent the second advantageous state from occurring when the game ball passes through a special area where the game ball does not exist. Thereby, even if the game ball passes through the special area, it is possible to prevent the second advantageous state from occurring unless the special area is valid. Therefore, even if the player recognizes that the game ball has passed into the special area, it is possible to create a situation in which the second advantageous state cannot occur, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. , there is an effect.

In any of gaming machines G0 to G6,
A gaming state changing means (for example, jackpot end processing (S415)) that changes the gaming state by using the determination result of the determining means;
When the game state is changed by the game state changing means, a notification means (for example, a third symbol display device) that executes a state suggestion notification (for example, "probability change notification performance mode") that suggests the game state to the player; 81) and,
The notification means is
Suggestion notification non-execution means (for example, "latent probability variation A A game machine G7 characterized in that it is equipped with a ``latent probability change performance mode'' based on the winning of ``.

According to gaming machine G7, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machines G0 to G6, the following effects are achieved. That is, by using the determination result of the determining means, the gaming state is changed by the gaming state changing means, and when the gaming state is changed by the gaming state changing means, the notifying means notifies the player of the gaming state. A status suggestion notification is executed. Then, the suggestion notification non-execution means provided in the notification means prevents the state suggestion notification corresponding to the second advantageous state from being executed at the timing when the game ball passes through the special area effectively set by the special area switching means. It is composed of As a result, when the suggestion notification non-execution means does not execute the state suggestion notification corresponding to the second advantageous state and prevents the player from recognizing that the second advantageous state is present, the game ball in the special area It is not possible to recognize whether or not the second advantageous state occurs only by passing through. As a result, it is possible to create a gameplay that allows the player to guess whether or not he or she is playing the game in the second advantageous state, which has the effect of increasing the interest of the game.

In gaming machine G6 or G7,
The advantageous state means are:
Unit game execution means (for example, jackpot processing (S103)) that executes a unit game (for example, one round) for changing the variable ball entry means from the first state to the second state a plurality of times in the advantageous state of No. 1; ),
The special area switching means
In at least one of the unit games, a unit game enabling means (for example, the second round of "latent probability variation B") that makes the special area effective;
A game characterized in that the unit game validating means includes valid suggestion non-execution means (for example, non-notification of valid setting of probability variable areas 73 and 74) that does not suggest that the special area is valid. Machine G8.

According to the gaming machine G8, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine G6 or G7, the following effects are achieved. That is, the unit game executing means provided in the advantageous state means executes a unit game for changing the variable ball entry means from the first state to the second state a plurality of times in one advantageous state. Then, the unit game valid means provided in the special area switching means makes the special area valid in at least one of the unit games, and the valid suggestion non-execution means also provided in the special area switching means determines that the unit game is valid. Validity means does not imply that the special area is valid. As a result, the special area becomes valid in any of the unit games in an advantageous state, and by causing a game ball to flow into the special area during the unit game while it is not suggested that the special area is valid, the second advantageous condition can be achieved. can be generated. Therefore, it is not possible to recognize whether or not the second advantageous state will occur only by passing the game ball in the special area. As a result, it is possible to create a gameplay that allows the player to guess whether or not he or she is playing the game in the second advantageous state, which has the effect of increasing the interest of the game.

In gaming machine G8,
The special area switching means
A gaming machine G9 characterized in that, in a predetermined unit game, either the first special area or the second special area is enabled, and the other is not enabled.

According to gaming machine G9, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machine G8, the following effects are achieved. That is, the special area switching means is configured such that either the first special area or the second special area is made valid and the other is not made valid in a predetermined unit game. As a result, by providing valid patterns for a plurality of special areas, it is possible to make the first special area or second special area that is set valid difficult to understand, and as a result, it is possible to play the game in the second advantageous state. This has the effect of increasing the interest of the game by creating a gameplay that allows the player to guess whether there is a player or not.

In any of gaming machines G0 to G9,
The second advantageous state means is
The advantageous state based on the first lottery result when the determination means determines that the first lottery result can cause the second advantageous state (for example, the lottery result of "latent probability variation A") Therein, a valid passage means (for example, turning on the right probability variation valid flag 203g and turning on the right probability variation area solenoid 73b) for passing the game ball to the special area where it is valid;
If the determination means determines that the second lottery result does not cause the second advantageous state (for example, the "time saving A" lottery result), during the advantageous state based on the second lottery result, A gaming machine G10 characterized in that it is equipped with passage prevention means (for example, turning on the right probability variation valid flag 203g and turning off the right probability variation area solenoid 73b) that prevents the game ball from passing through the special area where it is valid. .

According to gaming machine G10, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machines G0 to G9, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the determining means determines that the first lottery result is capable of generating the second advantageous state, the valid passage means provided in the second advantageous state means determines that the first lottery result is in an advantageous state based on the first lottery result. The game ball is then configured to pass through a special area where it is valid. On the other hand, when the determining means determines that the second lottery result does not cause the second advantageous state, the passage blocking means provided in the second advantageous state means causes the second lottery result to be set during the advantageous state based on the second lottery result. It is configured to prevent the game ball from passing through the special area where it is valid. That is, if the first lottery result can cause the second advantageous state to occur, by passing the game ball to the valid special area, the second advantageous state will occur, but the second advantageous state will not occur. If it is the second lottery result, the second advantageous state is not generated by preventing the game ball from passing through the valid special area. As a result, a second advantageous state is generated depending on whether or not the game ball passes through a special area that is valid, and even if the game ball passes through the special area, if the special area is not valid, the second advantageous state occurs. By configuring the game so that it does not occur, it is possible to create a gameplay that makes the player guess whether or not he or she is playing the game in the second advantageous state, and the effect is that it is possible to improve the interest of the game. There is.

In gaming machine G10,
The valid passing means is
If the first special area is valid by the special area switching means, open the first opening/closing means to allow the game balls to flow into the first special area;
A gaming machine G11 characterized in that when the second special area is enabled by the special area switching means, the second opening/closing means is opened to allow game balls to flow into the two special areas.

According to the gaming machine G11, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine G10, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the first special area is valid by the special area switching means, the first opening/closing means is opened and the game ball flows into the first special area, and the special area switching means allows the game ball to flow into the first special area. When the special area is valid, the second opening/closing means is opened to allow game balls to flow into the second special area. Thereby, when generating the second advantageous condition, there is an effect that the second advantageous condition can be appropriately generated by passing the game ball to the valid special area.

In the gaming machine G10 or G11,
The passage blocking means is
If the first special area is enabled by the special area switching means, the first opening/closing means is closed to prevent the game balls from flowing into the first special area;
A gaming machine G12 characterized in that when the second special area is enabled by the special area switching means, the second opening/closing means is closed to prevent game balls from flowing into the two special areas.

According to the gaming machine G12, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine G10 or G11, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the first special area is enabled by the special game switching means, the passage blocking means closes the first opening/closing means and prevents game balls from flowing into the first special area. Further, when the second special area is determined to be valid by the special area switching means, the second opening/closing means is closed by the passage blocking means to prevent the game balls from flowing into the second special area. This prevents the game ball from passing through the valid special area when the second advantageous state does not occur, even if the player recognizes that the game ball has passed through the special area. , it is possible to create a situation in which the second advantageous state cannot occur. Therefore, it is possible to create a gameplay that allows the player to guess whether or not he or she is playing the game in the second advantageous state, which has the effect of increasing the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine G11 or G12,
The passage blocking means is
When the first special area is determined to be valid by the special area switching means, the second opening/closing means is opened to allow the game ball to flow into the second special area;
A gaming machine G13 characterized in that when the second special area is enabled by the special area switching means, the first opening/closing means is opened to allow game balls to flow into the first special area.

According to the gaming machine G13, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine G11 or G12, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the first special area is valid according to the special game switching means, the passage blocking means opens the second opening/closing means and the game balls flow into the second special area. Further, when the second special area is determined to be valid by the special area switching means, the first opening/closing means is opened by the passage blocking means to allow the game ball to flow into the first special area. As a result, by allowing the game ball to pass through the ineffective special area when the second advantageous state is not generated, even if the player recognizes that the game ball has passed through the special area, the second advantageous state will not occur. 2. It is possible to create a situation in which an advantageous situation cannot occur. Therefore, it is possible to create a gameplay that allows the player to guess whether or not he or she is playing the game in the second advantageous state, which has the effect of increasing the interest of the game.

In any of gaming machines G8 to G13,
The second advantageous state means is
Valid pattern determining means (for example, variable probability area valid table 202g) that determines whether or not to validate the special area for each unit game by using the determination result by the determining unit;
Opening/closing pattern determining means (for example, probability variable area opening/closing table 202f) that determines whether or not to cause a game ball to flow into the special area for each unit game by using the determination result by the determining means;
Opening/closing pattern matching means (for example, opening/closing pattern "X1") for making the opening/closing pattern of the special area by the opening/closing pattern determining means the same between the first lottery result and the second lottery result;
and effective pattern mismatching means (for example, effective patterns "A" and "B") for differentiating the effective pattern of the special area determined by the effective pattern determining means between the first lottery result and the second lottery result. Game machine G14 is characterized by:

According to gaming machine G14, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machines G8 to G13, the following effects are achieved. That is, the valid pattern determining means provided in the second advantageous state means determines whether or not to make the special area valid for each unit game by using the determination result by the determining means. Furthermore, the opening/closing pattern determining means similarly provided in the second advantageous state means determines whether or not to cause the game ball to flow into the special area for each unit game by using the determination result by the determining means. Then, the opening/closing pattern matching means determines that the opening/closing pattern of the special area is the same between the first lottery result and the second lottery result, and the effective pattern mismatching means determines that the opening/closing pattern of the special area is the same between the first lottery result and the second lottery result. Thus, the effective pattern of the special area by the effective pattern determining means is made different. As a result, the opening/closing pattern of the special area is made the same between the first lottery result and the second lottery result, making it impossible to identify the lottery result only by the opening/closing pattern, and the special area can be differentiated between the first lottery result and the second lottery result. By differentiating the effective patterns, it is difficult to recognize whether or not the second advantageous state will occur, creating a gameplay that allows the player to guess whether or not he or she is playing the game in the second advantageous state. This has the effect of increasing the interest of the game.

In any of gaming machines G10 to G14,
Display means (for example, special symbol display device 37) for displaying the first lottery result and the second lottery result;
The display result by the display means makes it difficult to identify the first lottery result or the second lottery result. A gaming machine G15 characterized in that there are 127 types of display patterns, each display pattern being a random pattern with no regularity formed by eight LEDs.

According to gaming machine G15, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machines G10 to G14, the following effects are achieved. That is, the display means displays the first lottery result and the second lottery result, and the result identification difficulty means makes it difficult to identify the first lottery result or the second lottery result based on the display result by the display means. As a result, even if the first lottery result and the second lottery result are displayed, it is difficult to distinguish which lottery result it is, thereby preventing the player from recognizing that the second lottery result is in an advantageous state. In such a case, it is not possible to recognize whether or not the second advantageous state will occur only by passing the game ball in the special area, and whether or not the second advantageous condition will occur can be determined by the display result of the display means. Unrecognizable. As a result, it is possible to create a gameplay that allows the player to guess whether or not he or she is playing the game in the second advantageous state, which has the effect of increasing the interest of the game.

In any of gaming machines G0 to G15,
The special area is
A gaming machine G16 characterized in that it is disposed at a position visible to a player.

According to gaming machine G16, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machines G0 to G15, the following effects are achieved. That is, the special area is arranged at a position that is visible to the player. As a result, it is possible to create a gameplay that allows the player to visually recognize that the game ball has passed through the special area and to guess whether or not a second advantageous state will occur, thereby increasing the interest of the game. effective.

<Group H: Double attacker x individual probability variable area (no opening/closing plate)>
Conventionally, in game machines such as pachinko machines, game media such as game balls are fired toward a game area provided on a game board, and the game balls are launched into one of a plurality of ball entrances provided in the game area. A lottery is held based on the entry of balls, and if the player wins an advantageous state such as a hit in the lottery, the variable ball entry means, which is normally closed, is opened and the player receives a predetermined gaming value. is configured so that it is granted.

In such a gaming machine, a special area is provided through which the game ball that has flown into the variable ball entry means can pass, and the opening and closing of the special area is controlled by an opening/closing member, etc., so that when the game ball passes through the special area, There is a pachinko machine that generates a special gaming value based on a second advantageous state that is different from a predetermined gaming value based on the advantageous state.

In addition, in the above pachinko machine, for example, even if a second advantageous state occurs, the player is not notified whether or not the second advantageous state occurs, and the second advantageous state does not occur. There is one that executes the notification mode. In other words, by creating a gameplay that makes it appear as if the second advantageous state will not occur for the player and guessing whether or not the second advantageous state will be given to the player, the interest of the game is increased. (For example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2017-148264)).

However, in the gaming machine described above, the second advantageous state is generated without fail when the game ball passes through the special area, so when the player visually recognizes that the game ball has passed through the special area, the second advantageous state is generated. 2. The player is made aware of the occurrence of an advantageous situation. For this reason, if the normal notification mode is executed after the player recognizes the occurrence of the second advantageous state due to the passage of the game ball into the special area, the game may not be as interesting as expected for the player. In fact, there is a risk that the player may lose interest in the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The inventions of group H have been made in view of the circumstances exemplified above, and their purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of gaming.

A firing means for firing a game ball (for example, ball firing unit 112a),
Ball entry means (for example, special figure 1 prize opening 64b) into which the game ball launched by the launch means can enter;
Information acquisition means (for example, first holding ball storage area 203d) that acquires predetermined information due to the game ball entering the ball entrance means;
determination means (for example, jackpot random number table 202a) for determining the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means;
A gaming state changing means (for example, from "normal gaming state" to "latency probability variation state") by using the determination result of the determining means;
When the game state is changed by the game state changing means, a notification means (for example, a third symbol display device) that executes a state suggestion notification (for example, "probability change notification performance mode") that suggests the game state to the player; 81) and
A first variable ball entry means (for example, a variable prize winning device 65) and a second variable ball entry means that can change between a first state in which it is difficult or impossible for a game ball to enter and a second state in which a game ball can enter. means (for example, second variable winning device 76);
By using the determination result by the determination means, an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot state) in which one or both of the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means is changed from the first state to the second state is achieved. ) in a gaming machine equipped with an advantageous state means (for example, opening the grand prize opening 65a and the second grand prize opening 76a at the time of a jackpot),
a first special area (for example, right variable probability area 73) through which game balls flowing into the first variable ball entry means can pass;
a second special area (for example, the left probability variable area 74) through which the game ball flowing into the second variable ball entry means can pass;
A special area switching means (for example, turning on the right probability change valid flag 203g or the left probability change validity flag 203h) for switching validity or invalidity of the first special area or the second special area,
The game state changing means is
a second advantageous state means capable of generating a second advantageous state different from the advantageous state by the advantageous state means (for example, generation of a "probability fluctuating state"),
The second advantageous state means is
generating the second advantageous state when the game ball passes through the first special area that is effectively set by the special area switching means;
generating the second advantageous state when the game ball passes through the second special area effectively set by the special area switching means;
configured so that the second advantageous state does not occur when a game ball passes through the first special area that has not been effectively set by the special area switching means,
configured so that the second advantageous state does not occur when a game ball passes through the second special area that has not been effectively set by the special area switching means,
The notification means is
Suggestion notification non-execution means that does not execute the state suggestion notification corresponding to the second advantageous state at the timing when the game ball passes through the first special area or the second special area that is effectively set by the special area switching means. (For example, a "latent probability variation performance mode" based on the winning of "latent probability variation A").

According to the game machine H0, the game ball is fired by the firing means, and the game ball fired by the firing means is configured to be able to enter the ball entering means, and when the game ball enters the ball entering means, As a result, predetermined information is acquired by the information acquisition means. Then, the determining means determines the predetermined information acquired by the information acquiring means, and by using the determination result of the determining means, the gaming state changing means changes the gaming state, and the gaming state changing means changes the gaming state. When the game status is changed, the notification means executes status suggestion notification to notify the player of the gaming status. Further, a first variable ball entry means and a second variable ball entry means are provided which can change between a first state in which it is difficult or impossible for a game ball to enter and a second state in which a game ball can enter, and a determining means. By using the determination result, the advantageous state means brings one or both of the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means into an advantageous state from the first state to the second state. Here, the game ball that has flowed into the first variable ball entry means is configured to be able to pass through the first special area, and the game ball that has flowed into the second variable ball entry means is configured to be able to pass through the second special area, The first special area or the second special area is enabled or disabled by the area switching means. Further, the second advantageous state means provided in the game state changing means may generate a second advantageous state different from the advantageous state caused by the advantageous state means. Then, when the game ball passes through the first special area that has been effectively set by the special area switching means, a second advantageous state is generated by the second advantageous state means, and the second advantageous state is generated by the second advantageous state means, and the second advantageous state is generated by the second advantageous state means. When the game ball passes through the second special area, a second advantageous state is generated. On the other hand, when the game ball passes through a first special area that has not been effectively set by the special area switching means, the second advantageous state means is configured so that the second advantageous state is not generated, and the special area switching means When the game ball passes through a second special area that is not set effectively, the second advantageous state means is configured so that the second advantageous state is not generated. Then, the suggestion notification non-execution means provided in the notification means causes the game ball to be in a state corresponding to the second advantageous state at the timing when the game ball passes through the first special area or the second special area that has been effectively set by the special area switching means. Suggestion notification is not executed. That is, even if the game ball passes through the first special area or the second special area, it is possible to prevent the second advantageous state from occurring unless the first special area or the second special area is valid, and Even if the game ball passes through the first special area or the second special area that is set effectively, the player is not advised that the second advantageous state will occur at that timing. Thereby, even if the player recognizes that the game ball has passed into the first special area or the second special area, it is possible to create a situation in which the second advantageous state cannot occur. Therefore, when the suggestion notification non-execution means does not execute the state suggestion notification corresponding to the second advantageous state and prevents the player from recognizing that the second advantageous state exists, the first special area or It is not possible to recognize whether or not the second advantageous state will occur only by passing the game ball through the second special area. As a result, it is possible to create a gameplay that allows the player to guess whether or not he or she is playing the game in the second advantageous state, which has the effect of increasing the interest of the game.

In gaming machine H0,
The advantageous state means are:
In the advantageous state of No. 1, a unit game (for example, one round) of changing either the first variable ball entry means or the second variable ball entry means from the first state to the second state is performed a plurality of times. A unit game execution means (for example, jackpot processing (S103)) to be executed,
The special area switching means
In at least any one of the unit games, unit game activating means (for example, second round of "latent probability variation B") for activating the first special area or the second special area,
The second advantageous state means is
If the determining means determines that the first lottery result is one that can cause the second advantageous state (for example, the lottery result of "latent probability variation A"), the advantageous state based on the first lottery result is determined. , a valid opening means (for example, (the right probability change valid flag 203g is on, and the big prize opening solenoid 65c is on),
If the determining means determines that the second lottery result does not cause the second advantageous state (for example, the “time saving A” lottery result), the lottery result is valid during the advantageous state based on the second lottery result. Passage prevention/opening means (for example, a right variable effective A gaming machine H1 characterized in that the flag 203g is turned on and the big prize opening solenoid 65c is turned off.

According to the gaming machine H1, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine H0, the following effects are achieved. That is, a unit game in which either the first variable ball entry means or the second variable ball entry means is changed from the first state to the second state in one advantageous state by the unit game execution means provided in the advantageous state means. is executed multiple times. Further, the first special area or the second special area is made valid in at least one of the unit games by the unit game validating means provided in the special area switching means. Then, when the activation release means provided in the second advantageous state means determines that the first lottery result is such that the determination means can generate the second advantageous state, an advantageous state based on the first lottery result is determined. During the play, the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means are controlled to open and close so as to allow the game ball to pass through the effective first special area or second special area. Further, when the passage blocking means similarly provided in the second advantageous state means determines that the second lottery result does not generate a second advantageous state by the determination means, the second lottery result is in an advantageous state based on the second lottery result. Then, the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means are controlled to open and close so as not to allow the game ball to pass through the effective first special area or second special area. Thereby, by controlling the opening and closing of the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means and by controlling whether or not to enable the first special area or the second special area, a second advantageous state according to the lottery result is created. It is possible to generate this, but there is no need to provide a member for opening and closing the special area in each special area, which complicates the design of the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means. There is an effect that the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means can be designed with a simple structure and easily. Further, there is an effect that the number of parts of the game machine can be reduced and manufacturing costs can be reduced. Furthermore, since there is no need to consider the merging of the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means, the degree of freedom in designing the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means can be improved. There is an effect.

In the gaming machine H0 or H1,
The advantageous state means are:
In the predetermined advantageous state, each time the unit game is executed, the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means are alternately brought into the second state without interruption (for example, , a variable winning device 65 and a second variable winning device 76 are opened without an interval time).

According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine H0 or H1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the alternate ball entry means provided in the advantageous state means allows the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means to alternately and continuously operate the first variable ball entry means each time a unit game is executed in a predetermined advantageous state. There are two states.

Conventionally, when extinguishing an advantageous state by opening or closing one variable ball entry means, it is necessary to provide an interval time due to the closing of the variable ball entry means, and it takes time to eliminate the advantageous state. There is a risk that the game will be delayed and the players will lose interest, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine H2, the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means are alternately and continuously brought into the second state for each unit game in a predetermined advantageous state by the alternate ball entry means, It is possible to eliminate the interval time associated with closing the variable ball entry means. Therefore, the advantageous state can be quickly used up, and the game is not delayed, so that it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest. In addition, by giving a second advantageous state by a combination of the opening/closing of the variable ball entrance means (2) and the activation/invalidity of the special area (2), if the variations of each combination are not known in advance, the second advantageous state will not occur. cannot recognize that it occurs. As a result, in an advantageous state that occurs quickly, it is possible to reduce the thinking time of the player and make it difficult to recognize whether or not a second advantageous state will occur, allowing the player to play the game in the second advantageous state. This has the effect that it is possible to create a gameplay that allows the player to guess whether the game is true or not, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine H1 or H2,
The special area switching means
Valid suggestion non-execution means that does not suggest that the first special area or the second special area is valid by the unit game valid means (for example, non-notification of the valid setting of the probability variable areas 73 and 74). Gaming machine H3 is characterized by:

According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine H1 or H2, the following effects are achieved. That is, by the valid suggestion non-execution means provided in the special area switching means, it is not suggested that the special area is valid by the unit game valid means. As a result, the first special area or the second special area becomes valid in any of the unit games in an advantageous state, and the first special area or the second special area that is valid during the unit game is not suggested to be valid. By causing the game balls to flow into the second special area, a second advantageous state can be generated. Therefore, it is not possible to recognize whether or not the second advantageous state will occur only by passing the game ball through the first special area or the second special area. As a result, it is possible to create a gameplay that allows the player to guess whether or not he or she is playing the game in the second advantageous state, which has the effect of increasing the interest of the game.

In any of gaming machines H0 to H3,
The special area switching means
A gaming machine H4 characterized in that in a predetermined unit game, either the first special area or the second special area is enabled, and the other is not enabled.

According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machines H0 to H3, the following effects are achieved. That is, the special area switching means is configured such that either the first special area or the second special area is made valid and the other is not made valid in a predetermined unit game. As a result, by providing valid patterns for a plurality of special areas, it is possible to make the first special area or second special area that is set valid difficult to understand, and as a result, it is possible to play the game in the second advantageous state. This has the effect of increasing the interest of the game by creating a gameplay that allows the player to guess whether there is a player or not.

In any of gaming machines H0 to H4,
The second advantageous state means is
A valid pattern determining means (for example, a variable probability area valid table) that determines whether or not to validate the first special area or the second special area for each unit game by using the determination result by the determining unit. 202g) and
By using the determination result by the determination means, for each unit game, the first variable ball entry means or the second variable ball entry means are opened to the first special area or the second special area. Opening/closing pattern determining means (for example, big prize opening opening/closing table 202h) for determining whether or not to let game balls flow in;
The opening/closing pattern matching means (for example, opening/closing pattern matching means for making the opening/closing pattern of the first variable ball entry means or the second variable ball entry means by the opening/closing pattern determination means the same between the first lottery result and the second lottery result) pattern "lower and upper alternating") and
and effective pattern mismatching means (for example, effective patterns "A" and "B") for differentiating the effective pattern of the special area determined by the effective pattern determining means between the first lottery result and the second lottery result. The gaming machine H5 is characterized by:

According to the gaming machine H5, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machines H0 to H4, the following effects are achieved. That is, the valid pattern determining means provided in the second advantageous state means determines whether or not to make the first special area or the second special area valid for each unit game by using the determination result by the determining means. It is determined. Further, the opening/closing pattern determining means similarly provided in the second advantageous state means opens the first variable ball entry means or the second variable ball entry means for each unit game by using the judgment result by the judgment means. Then, it is determined whether or not to cause the game balls to flow into the first special area or the second special area. The opening/closing pattern matching means determines that the opening/closing patterns of the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means are the same between the first lottery result and the second lottery result, and the effective pattern mismatching means As a result, the effective pattern of the special area determined by the effective pattern determining means is made different between the first lottery result and the second lottery result. As a result, the opening and closing patterns of the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means are made the same for the first lottery result and the second lottery result, and while the opening and closing patterns cannot be used alone to identify the lottery results, By making the effective patterns of the first special area and the second special area different between the lottery result and the second lottery result, it is configured so that it is difficult to recognize whether or not the second advantageous state will occur, and the game can be played in the second advantageous state. This has the effect of increasing the interest of the game by creating a gameplay that allows the player to guess whether or not he or she is playing the game.

In any of gaming machines H1 to H5,
Display means (for example, special symbol display device 37) for displaying the first lottery result and the second lottery result;
The display result by the display means makes it difficult to identify the first lottery result or the second lottery result. A gaming machine H6 characterized in that there are 127 types of display patterns, each display pattern being a random pattern with no regularity formed by eight LEDs.

According to the gaming machine H6, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machines H1 to H5, the following effects are achieved. That is, the display means displays the first lottery result and the second lottery result, and the result identification difficulty means makes it difficult to identify the first lottery result or the second lottery result based on the display result by the display means. As a result, even if the first lottery result and the second lottery result are displayed, it is difficult to distinguish which lottery result it is, thereby preventing the player from recognizing that the second lottery result is in an advantageous state. In such a case, it is not possible to recognize whether or not the second advantageous state will occur only by passing the game ball in the special area, and whether or not the second advantageous condition will occur can be determined by the display result of the display means. Unrecognizable. As a result, it is possible to create a gameplay that allows the player to guess whether or not he or she is playing the game in the second advantageous state, which has the effect of increasing the interest of the game.

In any of gaming machines H0 to H6,
The first special area and the second special area are
A gaming machine H7 characterized in that it is disposed at a position visible to the player.

According to the gaming machine H7, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machines H0 to H6, the following effects are achieved. That is, the first special area and the second special area are arranged at positions visible to the player. This creates a gameplay that allows the player to visually recognize that the game ball has passed through the first special area or the second special area and makes them guess whether or not the second advantageous state will occur, thereby increasing the interest of the game. The effect is that it can be improved.

<Group I: Overlapping specific area 2 (specific area 1 and discharge passage is also possible) in the depth direction>
Conventionally, in game machines such as pachinko machines, game media such as game balls are fired toward a game area provided on a game board, and the game ball is launched into one of a plurality of ball entrances provided in the game area. A lottery is conducted based on the entry of balls, and if the player wins an advantageous state such as a hit in the lottery, the variable ball entry means, which is normally closed, is opened and the player receives a predetermined gaming value. is configured so that it is granted.

In such a gaming machine, a special area is provided through which the game ball that has flown into the variable ball entry means can pass, and the opening and closing of the special area is controlled by an opening/closing member, etc., so that when the game ball passes through the special area, There is a pachinko machine that generates a special gaming value based on a second advantageous state that is different from a predetermined gaming value based on the advantageous state.

In addition, in the above pachinko machine, for example, even if a second advantageous state occurs, the player is not notified whether or not the second advantageous state occurs, and the second advantageous state does not occur. There is one that executes the notification mode. In other words, by creating a gameplay that makes it appear as if the second advantageous state will not occur for the player and guessing whether or not the second advantageous state will be given to the player, the interest of the game is increased. (For example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2017-148264)).

However, in the gaming machine described above, the second advantageous state is generated without fail when the game ball passes through the special area, so when the player visually recognizes that the game ball has passed through the special area, the second advantageous state is generated. 2. The player is made aware of the occurrence of an advantageous situation. For this reason, if the normal notification mode is executed after the player recognizes the occurrence of the second advantageous state due to the passage of the game ball into the special area, the game may not be as interesting as expected for the player. In fact, there is a risk that the player may lose interest in the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The inventions of Group I have been made in view of the circumstances exemplified above, and their purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of gaming.

A firing means for firing a game ball (for example, ball firing unit 112a),
Ball entry means (for example, special figure 1 prize opening 64b) into which the game ball launched by the launch means can enter;
Information acquisition means (for example, first holding ball storage area 203d) that acquires predetermined information due to the game ball entering the ball entrance means;
determination means (for example, jackpot random number table 202a) for determining the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means;
Variable entry ball means (for example, variable prize winning device 65) that can change between a first state in which it is difficult or impossible for game balls to enter and a second state in which game balls can enter;
Advantageous state means (for example, jackpot processing (S103)) that changes the variable ball entry means from the first state to the second state (for example, a jackpot state) by using the judgment result by the judgment means. )and,
A gaming machine comprising a special area (for example, a front side probability variable area 73e and a back side probability variable area 74e) through which a game ball flowing into the variable ball entry means can pass,
a second passage means (for example, the innermost discharge passage 75a), which is formed at a position overlapping the special area in the front-rear direction when viewed from the front of the game machine, and through which game balls that have flowed into the variable ball entry means can pass;
a second advantageous state means (for example, probability change transition flag 203i) capable of generating a second advantageous state different from the advantageous state caused by the advantageous state means when the game ball passes through the special area;
The second passage means is
A gaming machine I0 characterized in that among game balls that have flowed into the variable ball entry means, game balls that do not pass through the special area pass through.

According to the game machine I0, the game ball is fired by the firing means, and the game ball fired by the firing means is configured to be able to enter the ball entering means, and when the game ball enters the ball entering means, As a result, predetermined information is acquired by the information acquisition means. Then, the determination means determines the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means. In addition, variable ball entry means is provided that can change between a first state in which it is difficult or impossible for the game ball to enter and a second state in which the game ball can enter, and by using the determination result by the determination means, The advantageous state means brings the variable ball entry means into an advantageous state from the first state to the second state. Further, a special area is provided through which game balls flowing into the variable ball entry means can pass. Here, the second passage means formed at a position overlapping the special area in the front-rear direction when viewed from the front of the game machine is configured to allow the game balls that have flowed into the variable ball entry means to pass through. Then, when the game ball passes through the special area, a second advantageous state different from the advantageous state caused by the advantageous state means can be generated by the second advantageous state means. Of the game balls that have flowed into the variable ball entry means, the game balls that do not pass through the special area are configured to pass through the second passing means. That is, the game ball that has flowed into the variable ball entry means passes through either the special area or the second passing means, which are arranged so as to overlap when viewed from the front of the game machine, and when it passes through the special area, Arrangements are made such that a second advantageous condition may occur. As a result, since it is generally difficult for human vision to recognize differences between depth images than differences between plane images, the special area and the second passing means overlap in the front-rear direction when viewed from the front of the gaming machine. Compared to the case where the special area and the second passage means are arranged horizontally from the player's perspective, the player who views the special area and the second passage means from the front side of the gaming machine can recognize which channel (special area) the flow has flowed into. It can be difficult. Therefore, by making it difficult to discern whether or not the game ball has passed through the special area, it is possible to make it difficult to ascertain whether or not the second advantageous state may occur. As a result, it is possible to create a gameplay that allows the player to guess whether the second advantageous state will be granted, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine I0,
The advantageous state means are:
Special area switching means for switching whether or not to enable the special area (for example, turning on the right probability variation valid flag 203g or the left probability variation validity flag 203h),
The second advantageous state means is
generating the second advantageous state when the game ball passes through the special area that has been effectively set by the special area switching means;
A gaming machine I1 characterized in that the second advantageous state is not generated when a game ball passes through the special area that has not been effectively set by the special area switching means.

According to the gaming machine I1, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine I0, the following effects are achieved. That is, the special area switching means provided in the advantageous state means switches whether or not to enable the special area. When the game ball passes through a special area that has been effectively set by the special area switching means, a second advantageous state is generated by the second advantageous state means, and a second advantageous state is generated by the second advantageous state means. The second advantageous state means is configured to prevent the second advantageous state from occurring when the game ball passes through a special area where the game ball does not exist. That is, even if the game ball passes through the special area, it is possible to prevent the second advantageous state from occurring unless the special area is valid. Thereby, even if the player recognizes that the game ball has passed into the special area, it is possible to create a situation in which the second advantageous state cannot occur. Therefore, since it is not possible to recognize whether or not the second advantageous state will occur only by passing the game ball in the special area, the game feature allows the player to guess whether or not he or she is playing the game in the second advantageous state. This has the effect of increasing the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine I0 or I1,
The special area and/or the second passage means,
A gaming machine I2 characterized in that it is made of a transparent or semi-transparent material.

According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine I0 or I1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the special area and/or the second passage means are formed of a transparent or translucent material. As a result, since the special area and/or the second passing means overlap when viewed from the front of the gaming machine, it is difficult for the player to determine which channel (special area) the game ball is passing through. can be done. As a result, it becomes difficult to recognize the inflow pattern to the special area or the second passage means in advance, and it is possible to create a gameplay that allows the player to guess whether or not he or she is playing the game in the second advantageous state. This has the effect of increasing the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine I1 or I2,
A gaming state changing means (for example, jackpot end processing (S415)) that changes the gaming state by using the determination result of the determining means;
When the game state is changed by the game state changing means, a notification means (for example, a third symbol display device) that executes a state suggestion notification (for example, "probability change notification performance mode") that suggests the game state to the player; 81) and,
The notification means is
Suggestion notification non-execution means (for example, "latent probability variation A A game machine I3 characterized in that it is equipped with a ``latent probability change performance mode'' based on the winning of ``.

According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine I1 or I2, the following effects are achieved. That is, by using the determination result of the determining means, the gaming state is changed by the gaming state changing means, and when the gaming state is changed by the gaming state changing means, the notifying means notifies the player of the gaming state. A status suggestion notification is executed. Then, by the suggestion notification non-execution means provided in the notification means, the state suggestion notification corresponding to the second advantageous state is not executed at the timing when the game ball passes through the special area effectively set by the special area switching means. That is, even if the game ball passes through a special area, it is possible to prevent the second advantageous state from occurring unless the special area is valid, and even if the game ball passes through a special area that is set to be valid, it is possible to prevent the second advantageous state from occurring. However, the player is not advised that the second advantageous state will occur at that timing. Thereby, even if the player recognizes that the game ball has passed into the special area, it is possible to create a situation in which the second advantageous state cannot occur. Then, the suggestion notification non-execution means does not execute the state suggestion notification corresponding to the second advantageous state at the timing when the game ball passes through the validly set special area, and informs the player that the second advantageous state is present. In the case where the recognition is not made, it is not possible to recognize whether or not the second advantageous state occurs only by passing the game ball in the special area. As a result, it is possible to create a gameplay that allows the player to guess whether or not he or she is playing the game in the second advantageous state, which has the effect of increasing the interest of the game.

In any of gaming machines I1 to I3,
The advantageous state means are:
Unit game execution means (for example, jackpot processing (S103)) that executes a unit game (for example, one round) for changing the variable ball entry means from the first state to the second state a plurality of times in the advantageous state of No. 1; ),
The special area switching means
In at least any one of the unit games, a unit game enabling means (for example, the second round of "latent probability variation B") that makes the special area effective;
A game characterized in that the unit game validating means includes valid suggestion non-execution means (for example, non-notification of valid setting of variable probability areas 73e and 74e) that does not suggest that the special area is valid. Machine I4.

According to the gaming machine I4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machines I1 to I3, the following effects are achieved. That is, the unit game executing means provided in the advantageous state means executes a unit game for changing the variable ball entry means from the first state to the second state a plurality of times in one advantageous state. Then, the unit game valid means provided in the special area switching means makes the special area valid in at least one of the unit games, and the valid suggestion non-execution means also provided in the special area switching means determines that the unit game is valid. Validity means does not imply that the special area is valid. As a result, the special area becomes valid in any of the unit games in an advantageous state, and by causing a game ball to flow into the special area during the unit game while it is not suggested that the special area is valid, the second advantageous condition can be achieved. can be generated. Therefore, it is not possible to recognize whether or not the second advantageous state will occur only by passing the game ball in the special area. As a result, it is possible to create a gameplay that allows the player to guess whether or not he or she is playing the game in the second advantageous state, which has the effect of increasing the interest of the game.

In gaming machine I4,
The special area is
the first special area (for example, the near side probability variable area 73e);
A second special area different from the first special area (for example, a back probability variable area 74e),
The special area switching means
A gaming machine I5 characterized in that, in a predetermined unit game, either the first special area or the second special area is enabled and the other is not enabled.

According to the gaming machine I5, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine I4, the following effects are achieved. That is, a first special area and a second special area different from the first special area are provided as special areas, and the special area switching means switches between the first special area and the second special area in a predetermined unit game. It is configured such that one of them is valid and the other is not. As a result, by providing valid patterns for a plurality of special areas, it is possible to make the first special area or second special area that is set valid difficult to understand, and as a result, it is possible to play the game in the second advantageous state. This has the effect of increasing the interest of the game by creating a gameplay that allows the player to guess whether there is a player or not.

In any of gaming machines I1 to I5,
The second advantageous state means is
The advantageous state based on the first lottery result when the determination means determines that the first lottery result can cause the second advantageous state (for example, the lottery result of "latent probability variation A") A valid passing means (for example, turning on the right (front) probability variable valid flag 203g and turning on the front probability variable area solenoid 73g) for passing the game ball to the special area that is valid;
If the determination means determines that the second lottery result does not cause the second advantageous state (for example, the "time saving A" lottery result), during the advantageous state based on the second lottery result, It is characterized by comprising passage prevention means (for example, turning on the right (front) probability variation valid flag 203g and turning off the front probability variation area solenoid 73g) that prevents the game ball from passing through the special area where it is valid. Game machine I6.

According to the gaming machine I6, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machines I1 to I5, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the determining means determines that the first lottery result is capable of generating the second advantageous state, the valid passage means provided in the second advantageous state means determines that the first lottery result is in an advantageous state based on the first lottery result. The game ball is then configured to pass through a special area where it is valid. On the other hand, when the determining means determines that the second lottery result does not cause the second advantageous state, the passage blocking means provided in the second advantageous state means causes the second lottery result to be set during the advantageous state based on the second lottery result. It is configured to prevent the game ball from passing through the special area where it is valid. That is, if the first lottery result can cause the second advantageous state to occur, by passing the game ball to the valid special area, the second advantageous state will occur, but the second advantageous state will not occur. If it is the second lottery result, the second advantageous state is not generated by preventing the game ball from passing through the valid special area. As a result, a second advantageous state is generated depending on whether or not the game ball passes through a special area that is valid, and even if the game ball passes through the special area, if the special area is not valid, the second advantageous state occurs. By configuring the game so that it does not occur, it is possible to create a gameplay that makes the player guess whether or not he or she is playing the game in the second advantageous state, and the effect is that it is possible to improve the interest of the game. There is.

In gaming machine I6,
An opening/closing means for opening and closing the special area (for example, a front definite variable area opening/closing plate 73f and a back definite variable area opening/closing plate 74f),
The valid passing means is
A gaming machine I7 characterized in that when the special area is determined to be valid by the special area switching means, the opening/closing means is opened to allow game balls to flow into the special area.

According to the gaming machine I7, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine I6, the following effects are achieved. That is, the special area is opened and closed by the opening and closing means. Then, when the special area is valid by the special area switching means, the opening/closing means is opened and the game ball flows into the special area by the valid passing means. Thereby, when generating the second advantageous condition, there is an effect that the second advantageous condition can be appropriately generated by passing the game ball to the valid special area.

In the gaming machine I7,
The opening/closing means is
A gaming machine I8 characterized in that it is made of a transparent or semi-transparent material.

According to the gaming machine I8, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine I7, the following effects are achieved. That is, the opening/closing means is formed of a transparent or translucent material. This makes it difficult for the player to determine the driving mode of the opening/closing means, so it is difficult for the player to determine whether the opening/closing means is open and the flow can flow into the special area, or the opening/closing means is closed and the flow can flow into the second channel. It can be made difficult to recognize. As a result, it becomes difficult to recognize the inflow pattern to the special area or the second channel in advance, and it is possible to create a gameplay that allows the player to guess whether or not he or she is playing the game in the second advantageous state. This has the effect of increasing the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine I7 or I8,
The passage blocking means is
A gaming machine I9 characterized in that when the special area is enabled by the special area switching means, the opening/closing means is closed to prevent game balls from flowing into the special area.

According to the gaming machine I9, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine I7 or I8, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the special area is enabled by the special game switching means, the passage blocking means closes the opening/closing means and prevents game balls from flowing into the special area. As a result, even if the player recognizes that the game ball has flowed into the variable ball entry means by not allowing the game ball to pass through the valid special area when the second advantageous state is not generated. , it is possible to create a situation in which the second advantageous state cannot occur. Therefore, it is possible to create a gameplay that allows the player to guess whether or not he or she is playing the game in the second advantageous state, which has the effect of increasing the interest of the game.

In any of gaming machines I7 to I9,
The opening/closing means is
a first opening/closing means (for example, front variable area opening/closing plate 73f) for opening/closing the first special area;
A second opening/closing means for opening and closing the second special area (for example, a deep variable area opening/closing plate 74f),
The passage blocking means is
If the first special area is valid according to the special area switching means, open the second opening/closing means to allow the game ball to flow into the second special area,
A gaming machine I10 characterized in that when the second special area is enabled by the special area switching means, the first opening/closing means is opened to allow game balls to flow into the first special area.

According to the gaming machine I10, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machines I7 to I9, the following effects are achieved. That is, the first opening/closing means provided on the opening/closing means opens and closes the first special area, and the second opening/closing means also provided on the opening/closing means opens/closes the second special area. Then, when the first special area is valid according to the special game switching means, the passage blocking means opens the second opening/closing means and allows the game ball to flow into the second special area. Similarly, when the second special area is enabled by the special area switching means, the passage blocking means opens the first opening/closing means and allows the game ball to flow into the first special area. As a result, by allowing the game ball to pass through the ineffective special area when the second advantageous state is not generated, even if the player recognizes that the game ball has passed through the special area, the second advantageous state will not occur. 2. It is possible to create a situation in which an advantageous situation cannot occur. Therefore, it is possible to create a gameplay that allows the player to guess whether or not he or she is playing the game in the second advantageous state, which has the effect of increasing the interest of the game.

In any of gaming machines I7 to I10,
The second advantageous state means is
Valid pattern determining means (for example, variable probability area valid table 202g) that determines whether or not to validate the special area for each unit game using the determination result by the determining unit;
Opening/closing pattern determining means (for example, probability variable area opening/closing table 202f) for determining whether or not to cause game balls to flow into the special area for each unit game using the determination result by the determining means;
Opening/closing pattern matching means (for example, opening/closing pattern "X1") for making the opening/closing pattern of the special area by the opening/closing pattern determining means the same between the first lottery result and the second lottery result;
and effective pattern mismatching means (for example, effective patterns "A" and "B") for differentiating the effective pattern of the special area determined by the effective pattern determining means between the first lottery result and the second lottery result. A gaming machine I11 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine I11, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machines I7 to I10, the following effects are achieved. That is, the valid pattern determining means provided in the second advantageous state means determines whether or not to make the special area valid for each unit game, using the determination result by the determining means. Further, the opening/closing pattern determining means similarly provided in the second advantageous state means determines whether or not to cause the game ball to flow into the special area for each unit game, using the determination result by the determining means. Then, the opening/closing pattern matching means determines that the opening/closing pattern of the special area is the same between the first lottery result and the second lottery result, and the effective pattern mismatching means determines that the opening/closing pattern of the special area is the same between the first lottery result and the second lottery result. Thus, the effective pattern of the special area by the effective pattern determining means is made different. As a result, the opening/closing pattern of the special area is made the same between the first lottery result and the second lottery result, making it impossible to identify the lottery result only by the opening/closing pattern, and the special area can be differentiated between the first lottery result and the second lottery result. By differentiating the effective patterns, it is difficult to recognize whether or not the second advantageous state will occur, creating a gameplay that allows the player to guess whether or not he or she is playing the game in the second advantageous state. This has the effect of increasing the interest of the game.

In any of gaming machines I7 to I11,
Display means (for example, special symbol display device 37) for displaying the first lottery result and the second lottery result;
The display result by the display means makes it difficult to identify the first lottery result or the second lottery result. A gaming machine I12 characterized in that there are 127 types of display patterns, each display pattern being a random pattern with no regularity formed by eight LEDs.

According to the gaming machine I12, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machines I7 to I11, the following effects are achieved. That is, the display means displays the first lottery result and the second lottery result, and the result identification difficulty means makes it difficult to identify the first lottery result or the second lottery result based on the display result by the display means. As a result, even if the first lottery result and the second lottery result are displayed, it is difficult to distinguish which lottery result it is, thereby preventing the player from recognizing that the second lottery result is in an advantageous state. In such a case, it is not possible to recognize whether or not the second advantageous state will occur only by passing the game ball in the special area, and whether or not the second advantageous condition will occur can be determined by the display result of the display means. Unrecognizable. As a result, it is possible to create a gameplay that allows the player to guess whether or not he or she is playing the game in the second advantageous state, which has the effect of increasing the interest of the game.

Note that for any of the configurations of the gaming machines A0 to A10, the gaming machines B0 to B12, C0 to C12, D0 to D11, E0 to E12, F0 to F14, G0 to G16, H0 to H7, I0 to A configuration limited to any one of I12 may be applied.

Furthermore, for any of the configurations of the gaming machines B0 to B12, the gaming machines A0 to A10, C0 to C12, D0 to D11, E0 to E12, F0 to F14, G0 to G16, H0 to H7, I0 to A configuration limited to any one of I12 may be applied.

Furthermore, for any of the configurations of the gaming machines C0 to C12, the gaming machines A0 to A10, B0 to B12, D0 to D11, E0 to E12, F0 to F14, G0 to G16, H0 to H7, I0 to A configuration limited to any one of I12 may be applied.

Furthermore, for any of the configurations of the gaming machines D0 to D11, the gaming machines A0 to A10, B0 to B12, C0 to C12, E0 to E12, F0 to F14, G0 to G16, H0 to H7, I0 to A configuration limited to any one of I12 may be applied.

Furthermore, for any of the configurations of the gaming machines E0 to E12, the gaming machines A0 to A10, B0 to B12, C0 to C12, D0 to D11, F0 to F14, G0 to G16, H0 to H7, I0 to A configuration limited to any one of I12 may be applied.

Furthermore, for any of the configurations of the gaming machines F0 to F14, the gaming machines A0 to A10, B0 to B12, C0 to C12, D0 to D11, E0 to E12, G0 to G16, H0 to H7, I0 to A configuration limited to any one of I12 may be applied.

Furthermore, for any of the configurations of the gaming machines G0 to G16, the gaming machines A0 to A10, B0 to B12, C0 to C12, D0 to D11, E0 to E12, F0 to F14, H0 to H7, I0 to A configuration limited to any one of I12 may be applied.

Furthermore, for any of the configurations of the gaming machines H0 to H7, the gaming machines A0 to A10, B0 to B12, C0 to C12, D0 to D11, E0 to E12, F0 to F14, G0 to G16, I0 to A configuration limited to any one of I12 may be applied.

Furthermore, for any of the configurations of the gaming machines I0 to I12, the gaming machines A0 to A10, B0 to B12, C0 to C12, D0 to D11, E0 to E12, F0 to F14, G0 to G16, H0 to The configuration limited in any one of H7 may be applied.

In these cases, further effects can be achieved by applying each configuration.

In any of the gaming machines A0 to A10, B0 to B12, C0 to C12, D0 to D11, E0 to E12, F0 to F14, G0 to G16, H0 to H7, and I0 to I12, the gaming machine is a slot machine. The gaming machine J1 is characterized by the following. Among these, the basic configuration of a slot machine is that it is equipped with a variable display means that dynamically displays an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information and then definitively displays the identification information, and a variable display means that permanently displays the identification information, The dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, and when the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped. and a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, with the necessary condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

In any of the gaming machines A0 to A10, B0 to B12, C0 to C12, D0 to D11, E0 to E12, F0 to F14, G0 to G16, H0 to H7, and I0 to I12, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Game machine J2 is characterized by certain things. Among these, the basic structure of a pachinko game machine is that it is equipped with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, a ball is launched into a predetermined gaming area, and the ball is fired into an operating port located at a predetermined position within the gaming area. One example is one in which the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is fixed and stopped after a predetermined period of time, with winning a prize (or passing through an operating port) as a necessary condition. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable prize winning device (big prize opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to make it possible to win balls, and a value corresponding to the number of prizes is awarded. Examples include those that are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written to magnetic cards, etc.).

In any of the gaming machines A0 to A10, B0 to B12, C0 to C12, D0 to D11, E0 to E12, F0 to F14, G0 to G16, H0 to H7, and I0 to I12, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Game machine J3 is characterized by being a combination of a slot machine and a slot machine. Among these, the basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine is as follows: ``Equipped with a variable display means that dynamically displays an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information and then definitively displays the identification information, and a starting operating means (for example, an operating lever). The dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. A special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player with the necessary condition that the confirmed identification information at the time of stopping is specific identification information, and a ball is used as a gaming medium and the identification information is A gaming machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required to start the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when a special gaming state occurs.

10 Pachinko machine (gaming machine)
37 Special symbol display device (part of display means)
37b 2nd LED group (part of means for making result identification difficult)
64b Special drawing 1 prize opening (part of the means of entering the ball)
65 Variable winning device (part of variable ball entering means, part of first variable ball entering means)
72 Guide flow path (part of the first flow path, part of the downstream path)
73 Right variable area (part of special area, part of first special area)
73a Right variable area opening/closing plate (part of the first opening/closing means, part of the opening/closing means)
73b Right definite variable area solenoid (part of the passing means when effective, part of the passage blocking means, part of the driving means, part of the main opening execution means)
73e Front side variable area (part of special area, part of first special area)
73f Front variable area opening/closing plate (part of opening/closing means, part of first opening/closing means)
73g Front variable area solenoid (part of the passage means when activated, part of the passage prevention means)
74 Left variable area (part of special area, part of first special area)
74a Left positive variable area opening/closing plate (part of the second opening/closing means, part of the opening/closing means)
74b Left definite variable area solenoid (part of the passing means when enabled, part of the passage blocking means, part of the driving means, part of the main opening execution means)
74e Back side variable area (part of special area, part of second special area)
74f Oku sure variable area opening/closing plate (part of the opening/closing means, part of the second opening/closing means)
74g Oku definite variable area solenoid (part of the passage means when activated, part of the passage prevention means)
75 Discharge passage (part of discharge means)
75a Innermost discharge passage (part of second passage means, part of discharge means)
76 Second variable prize winning device (part of second variable prize winning means)
77 Communication passage (part of second flow passage)
77a Merging section (part of merging means)
78a Motor for opening/closing variable area (part of drive means)
78c Variable variable area opening/closing plate (part of opening/closing means)
81 Third symbol display device (part of notification means, part of abnormality notification means)
110 Main control device (part of determination means)
112 Launch control device (part of specific interval launch means)
112a Ball launch unit (part of launch means)
201 MPU (Part of the game progress stopping means, part of the game restarting means)
202a Jackpot random number table (part of determination means)
202g Probable variable area effective table (part of effective pattern determination means, part of effective pattern mismatch means, part of multiple timing inflow means, part of predetermined timing effective means)
202f Probable variable area opening/closing table (part of opening/closing pattern determining means, part of opening/closing pattern same means, part of multiple timing inflow means, part of pseudo standby execution means, part of main opening execution means, temporary opening execution means) part of the provisional release determination means, part of the permanent release determination means)
203d First reserved ball storage area (part of information acquisition means)
203g Right probability change valid flag (part of special area switching means, part of unit game valid means)
203h Left probability change valid flag (part of special area switching means, part of unit game valid means)
203i Probable change transition flag (part of second advantageous state means)
S103 Jackpot processing (part of advantageous state means, part of unit game execution means)
S415 Jackpot end processing (part of game state changing means)
S436 (Part of first drive pattern means, part of second drive pattern means)
S452 (Part of effective delay means)
S461 (standby game execution means)
S491 (Part of effective means after the expiry of the period)
S511 (Part of alternate ball entry means)
S521 (Part of the first direction driving means, part of the second direction driving means)
S1204 (Part of suggestion notification non-execution means, part of effective suggestion non-execution means)

Claims (1)

a firing means for firing a game ball;
Ball entering means into which the game ball launched by the launching means can enter;
information acquisition means for acquiring predetermined information due to the game ball entering the ball entrance means;
determination means for determining the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means;
a gaming state changing means for changing the gaming state by using the determination result of the determining means;
Notifying means for executing state suggestion notification to suggest the gaming state to the player when the gaming state is changed by the gaming state changing means;
Variable ball entry means that can change between a first state in which it is difficult or impossible for game balls to enter and a second state in which game balls can enter;
an advantageous state means that changes the variable ball entry means from the first state to the second state by using a determination result by the determination means;
unit game execution means for executing a unit game for changing the variable ball entry means from the first state to the second state a plurality of times in the advantageous state of No. 1;
In the advantageous state of No. 1, after execution of the unit game, the variable ball entering means is changed from the second state to the first state, and then a standby game is executed until the variable ball entry means is changed to the second state again. and,
a special area through which game balls flowing into the variable ball entry means can pass;
Special area switching means for switching whether or not to enable the special area,
The game state changing means is
a second advantageous state means capable of generating a second advantageous state different from the advantageous state caused by the advantageous state means when a game ball passes through the special area effectively set by the special area switching means;
The unit game execution means is
a pseudo standby execution means for executing a pseudo standby game in which the variable ball entering means is in the first state for a period equivalent to or substantially the same as the standby game during the predetermined unit game;
The second advantageous state means is
generating the second advantageous state when the game ball passes through the special area that has been effectively set by the special area switching means;
configured so that the second advantageous state does not occur when the game ball passes through the special area that has not been effectively set by the special area switching means,
The notification means is
It is characterized by comprising a suggestion notification non-execution means that does not execute the state suggestion notification corresponding to the second advantageous state at the timing when the game ball passes through the special area that has been effectively set by the special area switching means. A gaming machine that does.

Images